Home

SERVICE MANUAL Includes: Standard

1. 101520 50 164 GY PJONC 1 is Q m Q g _ Q Bee ee Main Erase Lamp Y Q Q Q Q B RXO 7 PJ53 DC5V 9 2 TXD 8 Yo mm m m Main Erase Lamp M 2 6 B 8 ST PJ54 GY SCEND PJ MC 5 DC5V GY PUNCS m E Main Erase Lamp C 9 9 9 9 DC2Av L PJ55 GY PJ MC 7 ud PUNCS m m m m Main Erase Lamp Bk Me CN55 CN50 ijji 1 PJ49 E a z 2 P ec Waste Toner Full Sensor fi es peso Waste Toner Bottle Set Sensor S n 5 Temperature Humidity Sensor Q 1 IR SECTION x Y ay ay aY R SWS Left Door Switch PJ42 Gv 6S _ e 2 Original Size Sensor FD3 cee amp Option ERE m sa 5 Front Door Switch Bae Original Size Sensor FD2 PC204 7 PC204 ON 6 P PME Original Size Sensor FD1 SS 4 Optior Right Door Switch PJ12 i T PC202 ON E 0 Original Cover Angle Sensor e Enable GY 2 Counter Bk 2 5 __ 2 4 GY CNT1 CRNT1 M 2 5 GY Hold bu2ic 6 GY CN6UN201 2 267 U M10 Cooling Fan Motor 2 PWB C E Flat Cable Image Processing Board EN M
2. 4 1 1 Table Table Vb C Vb M Vb Y o o o o Vb Bk Vg C Vg M Vg Y o o o o Vg Bk F IT CN E amp B hidity 2 me ge a ae B 4036fs4016e0 4036fs4015e0 Shows the developing bias value of each color of toner when an image is produced Vb C Standard values Around 390 V Vb M Vb Y e A correction is made to make the image lighter when the numeric value is greater Vb Bk A correction is made to make the image darker when the numeric value is smaller Relevant Components Imaging Unit High Voltage Unit Developing Bias Va C Shows the grid voltage value of each color of toner when an image is produced 9 Standard values Around 500 V Vg M A Vo Y e A correction is made to make the image lighter when the numeric value is greater a A correction is made to make the image darker when the numeric value is smaller 9 Relevant Components Imaging Unit High Voltage Unit Developing Bias 4 52 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Image quality problem 4 1 2 Level History 1 ATDC C 9 90 0 00V ATDC M 10 00 AIDC2 0 00V ATDC Y
3. 0 4x3 Jeu ues weis oix IS pig A ejejduio m reuibuo pug ejejduio5 o4 dn ayey Uy 151 0 eBueuoxa pig eig dn exe ui iei eUIBUO pie iming chart T xipueddy 5 26 iming c 1 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 xipueddy 09199590 ejejduio2 0 ui SulZ6EL ott 3 ueig 01 HO PAE 562 0 yo 40179 yo 40 994 uo 1 JOAOUID yo 40 208 Josuag dn yold yo 41124 Josueg jaded you 208095 NOD Jo JQ EIN 10104x iaon JO podsues NO 0 JO 40 138 uo Ho QN39S uo uo plousjos Janoun yo 40 218 Plousjos uo yo ug 09 Ho 40 90d 205095 5 27 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 iming chart T
4. 1 6 Machine specifications eese nnnm 1 7 Operating environment seeeseeeeeeeeeneennennennene nennen nnns Maintenance 1 14 Disassembly Adjustment prohibited items 1 2 Disassembly Assembly list Other 1 3 Disassembly Assembly 1 3 1 1 3 2 1 3 3 1 3 4 1 3 5 1 3 6 1 3 7 1 3 8 1 3 9 1 3 10 1 3 11 1 3 12 1 3 13 1 3 14 1 3 15 1 3 16 Exit Tray Ee deed ede eee Front Covo EE Real COVER EAEE SEENE AE e aea Upper DOO e n eite nere tere en Finisher Tray Upper Cover Upper Covor RUE Side Guide Middle Transport Unit Staple reor peer rer ED ERE Stapler Phase Adjustment sse nenne Saddle S6ctiOn entem E A Saddle Gear Phase Adjustment sse Finisher Tray ione tert eo tte d genna vete eed er a gegen e ena ao Paddle Sectioti Paddle i eee a ede terree ies IV Troublshooting Adjustment Setting Il Maintenance V Appendix Il Maintenance Adjustment Setting
5. 18 17 Location No CN No Location 1 CN52 10P K L 25 15 CN105 13P D E 3 2 CN1 3P G 22 16 CN103 3P A 3 3 CN20 12P M N 27 17 CN108 3P E 3 4 CN2 22 18 106 2 C D 3 5 Blank 9P 19 CN42 11P K L 27 6 Blank 4 20 CN43 5P L 27 7 CN13 3P V 25 21 CN25 3P P Q 7 8 Blank 6P 22 21 5 2 3 9 56 15 W X 7 23 CN15 6P H 1 18 10 CN28 2P J 26 24 CN14 6P G 18 11 CN48 2P Y 7 25 CN17 3P K 17 12 49 2P J 26 26 3P V 25 x 13 CN101 4P V 3 27 CN53 6P W X 24 14 CN102 4P V 3 amp gt 5 21 Connector layout drawing bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 15 E 14 49 T P 6 QC naj Pd 11 DI 8 10 No CN No Location No CN No Location 1 CN22 3P U 25 9 CN24 14P R S 8 4 2 CN57 4P R 7 10 15P X Y 8 3 CN5 2P O 3 11 CN104 11P B C 3 4 CN12 2P D 13 12 CN107 2P D E 3 5 CN26 2P S T 2 3 13 CN27 9P P Q 3 4 6 CN71 12P 1 J 26 14 CN29 4P Q 3 7 CN3 2P K L 7 15 CN23 4P C 7 8 CN34 2P U 3 5 o 2 gt 5 22 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Timing chart 3 Timing chart 3 1 Main unit Print request received Main Motor
6. I Adjustment Setting 1 How to use the adjustment section 2 Adjustment item list eee te ate e e ded tae 3 Utility ree rea ep 3 1 Utility Mode function tree nennen nennen 3 1 1 Administrator Mode function tree 3 2 Utility Mode function setting procedure eem 3 7 3 201 Procedute i cene eere pee ied a 3 7 3 2 2 3 7 3 2 3 Changing the setting value in Utility Mode functions 3 7 33 Settings in the store nee nhe Uere ie E Pee De eb 3 8 3 3 1 ResetMode oc nme meme emer eter 3 8 3 3 2 Mode Store reinen men eee E n ES e er EHE ea 3 4 _ Counter List ies ien terere rider ete nre ni i inei 3 5 Controller Detail 3 6 Users Choices Tass anamen aai DER SOA o E 3 7 Users Gholce 2 entente ene c e e en e e na ere 3 72 OS TEE PY aene Rte entente noa E TE E IEEE 3 8 Copy program Recall 3 9 Printer Setling ii tonne nenne tete ene 3 9 1 Default setting ie meer cinerea 3 9 2 Report TYPOS rennen nee nep eie eredi 3 10 Unit Life 1 ne 3 11 Settings in the Admin Mode ssssseseneeeeeeneeenenenne 3 16 31151 Admiri Set re eee mE ene Ed s 3 16 bizhub C350
7. 3 3 IV Troubleshooting 1 Jam Display 1 1 Initial CHECK TOMS onere nen th tenete nth 4 1 1 2 Misfeed display entere tne terr nre rrr 4 1 1 2 1 Misfeed display resetting 4 1 1 9 Serisor layoUt onere i pen er nete 4 2 1 4 SOMUMION intct cnm e te ere erede c die e RH A TR ene 4 3 Il Maintenance D 2 IV Troublshooting V Appendix AD 501 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 141 Duplex Unit transport section 4 3 Il Maintenance B a El IV Troublshooting V Appendix AD 501 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Product specifications General 1 Product specifications 131 Type Name Duplex Unit Type Switchback and Circulating Duplex Unit Installation Mounted on the right side door of main unit Document Alignment Center 1 2 Paper type Paper Type Plain paper 60 to 90 g m 16 to 24 Ib Paper Size ABR to A3 Wide 5 1 2 x 8 1 2R to 12 1 4 x 18 1 3 Machine specifications DC 24 V x 10 supplied from the main unit Power Requirements DC 5 V 5 supplied from the main unit Max Power f 17 W or less Consumption 109 mm W x 440 mm D x 344 mm H 4 1 4 inch W x 17 1 4 inch D x 1
8. Step Section Check Item Result Action 1 Photo Density Original type and screen pattern are NO Change screen pattern selected properly 2 LPH Assy LED retracting lever is locked in YES Slide out the Imaging Unit and position reinstall Imaging Unit Dirty on the outside YES Clean LPH Assy The surface of the lens array is dirty YES Clean with cleaning jig 5 ATDC Sensor ATDC Sensor window is dirty YES Clean window State Confirm AIDC output value is around 4 3 V NO Clean AIDC Sensor Level History 1 Check Image Transfer Belt for 6 Tech Rep damage Mode Gradation Adjust Conv Value falls within the speci YES Go to step 11 Tech Rep fied range as checked through Gra 7 Mode dation Adjust 0 100 Highlight 0 60 Image Adjust The problem has been eliminated NO to next step through the adjust of 8 Density Tech Rep Mode Image Adjust The problem has been eliminated NO Go to next step gt PRT High through the adjust of PRT Highlight light Tech Rep Mode Image Adjust After the Reset Stabilizer NO Go to next step Stabilizer sequence has been completed run 10 Reset Stabi Gradation Adjust if the problem per lizer Tech Rep sists make adjustments of PRT Max Mode Density and PRT Highlight 4 74 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Image quality problem Step Se
9. PWB S1 7 2 PWB S1 Tech Rep Setting Switches Board 2 O o O i ir PWB S TROUBLE Ni SERVICE 525 526 all g DON T USE TP3 TP2 TP1 lt MEMORY Name 3 Description 7 ONO Initialize Point Resets a paper misfeed malfunction and erratic display Ni MEMORY NotUsed 0 000000000000 i A TROUBLE Trouble Reset Switch Resets the following malfunction displays Exposure Lamp system 4 Fusing system CO05XX Scanner system CO6XX ROM contents failure detected upon start 3 107 Board switch bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 7 2 1 Initialize Procedure 1 Turn OFF the Power Switch 2 With the circuit across pins of PJ2 closed turn ON the Power Switch 3 In about 5 sec open the PJ2 circuit 4 Check that the message Initialize Completed is displayed on the Touch Panel and then touch A 7 2 2 Memory Clear Procedure 1 Call the Tech Rep Mode to the screen ts 3 40 Press the following keys in this order Stop gt 9 Security Mode menu will appear Press the following keys in this order Stop gt 0 gt Stop gt 1 Touch the Memory Clear key Touch the Enable key and touch the OK key 7 2 3 If the machine exhibits an erratic display or operation 1 Turn OFF and ON the Power Switch 1 Unplug a
10. 3 31 5 31 7 5 Stabilizer sene a 3 31 3 17 6 PRT Area aaa 3 32 3 17 7 PRT Area Left Margin centre nnne nne 3 33 3 17 8 Area Dup Left Margin 3 34 E 3 17 9 Center Staple Position sese emen 3 35 5 3 17 10 Delete All Data in Index 3 36 5 3 18 Gradation Adjustment seen nnns 3 36 gt 3 19 Server Setting KRDS Server Setting 3 37 3 191 POPS Server cccseccccsssssessseecsseessessseecssessaessacecseessaessceeoseesseeseeesensesseteseens 3 19 2 wrecscivetierccecevieacoutessredcreesscesceutiteasacnthcnsepessissatvetesedstovieusecubeetcvedeusess BAGS SONG cease ee EEUU MUR AE 5 32194 3 20 Toner Coverage amp TECH REP MODE ta tette 4 4 1 Tech Rep Mode function setting procedure Il Maintenance te B a El IV Troublshooting V Appendix vi bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 2 Touch Panel 3 41 4 3 Tech Rep Mode function tree 3 42 4 4 Machine Adjust oerte tenere rend aee aee pc eee rag 3 44 4 4 1 FUser NIP
11. 3 99 b s Procedures m Fete erit 3 99 o 5 2 EXN 3 99 E 5 2 Security Mode Function Tree sssssssseseeeeeeeeennnneneen ene 3 99 5 5 3 Settings in the Security Fo ec po tds 3 100 53 1 iie mereri 3 100 5 3 2 Admin Choice cette nnne nnn i ere erri ien 3 101 o 5 3 8 Coverage Rate Reset eese nennen nnne 3 102 t 5 3 4 Remote Diagnosis System 3 102 E 5 3 5 Lock Job Authentication Mode 3 102 E 5 3 6 10 Life Stop Setting gt 5 89 7 Service Code Change 6 Mechanical adjustment sesssssssseeeseeeeeneenrenne nnnm 6 1 Adjustment of the Scanner Motor Timing 3 103 6 2 Focus Positioning of the Scanner and Mirrors 3 104 6 3 Scanner Position Adjustment 5 6 4 Adjustment of the Bypass Paper Size Unit T Boardi a eerie npe ede gt TA itecto te ea a e AA 7 2 PWB S1 Tech Rep Setting Switches 3 107 viij bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 7 2 1 lnitialize Proc dUte o te
12. WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical compo nents 1 Initial check items 2 PC19 FN I O sensor check PWB A FN PJ14A FN 6 B 9 3 PC1 FN I O sensor check PWB A FN PJ19A FN 6 G 9 4 PC1 HO sensor check PWB A FN PJ15A FN 4 D 9 5 PC4 FN I O sensor check PWB A FN PJ20A FN 9 H 7 6 PC2 FN I O sensor check PWB A FN PJ19A FN 8 H 9 7 PC3 FN sensor check PWB A FN PJ20A FN 3 H 7 8 M1 FN operation check B 4 9 M4 FN operation check B 4 10 2 operation check A 4 11 PWB A FN replacement 5 4 3 o I 2 5 5 e gt Jam Display FS 501 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 1 4 2 Tray1 Exit section misfeed A Detection timing Type Description Tray1 Exit section The 1st Tray Exit Sensor PC1 FN is not unblocked even after the lapse of a misfeed detection given period of time after it has been blocked B Action Relevant electrical parts 1st Tray Exit Sensor PC1 FN Control Board PWB A FN WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical compo nents 1 Initial check items PC1 FN I O sensor check PWB A FN PJ19A FN 6 G 9 PWB A FN replacement 5 1 4 3 Job Tray Exit section misfeed JS 601 A Detection timing Type Description Job Tray Exit sec The Job Tray Exit Se
13. a 1 3 2 3 Types of Paper enne nnne nnne nnne nennen 1 4 2 4 Malliteniali ee nnne rper Pe AE pec re e ges De NEU qune Tcu ee unes 1 4 2 5 Machine 1 4 2 6 1 4 2 7 Built in Controllers heeft e iine ern 1 5 9 S II Maintenance 5 1 Periodical Check noi nene eec ree epe eei 2 1 E 14 Service Schedule enter cett y tapa ti e a ie la cn Fa ttd 2 1 1 2 a 2 1 1 2 1 Parts to be replaced by users 2 1 m 1 22 Maintenance call per 60 000 2 2 1 2 8 Periodical parts replacement 1 per 150 000 print 2 2 1 2 4 Periodical parts replacement 2 200 000 2 2 1 2 5 Periodical parts replacement per 300 000 print 2 3 2 1 3 Maintenance parts 2 4 5 1 4 Concept of parts life eerte rene ri nte reete 2 5 1 5 Maintenance procedure Periodical check parts 2 7 1 5 1 Paper Take up Roller
14. 4 DEED 4 1 Disassembly Adjustment prohibited items 4 2 Disassembly Assembly list Other parts seen 4 3 Disassembly Assembly procedure sese 4 3 1 4 3 2 4 3 3 4 3 4 4 3 5 IR Right Cover Front Right Cover Bypass Right amp Left Cover 2 39 Exit Tray IR Left Cover Rear Left Cover Left Front Cover 2 40 Front Door Panel Cover Paper Setting Dial 2 41 Lower Rear Cover Tray 2 Rear Cover Rear Cover Rear Right Cover Tray 2 Rear Right Cover Wiring Cover 2 41 IR Upper Front Cover IR Upper Right Cover IR Upper Rear Cover 2 42 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 3 6 4 3 7 4 3 8 4 3 9 4 3 10 4 3 11 4 3 12 4 3 13 4 3 14 4 3 15 4 3 16 4 3 17 4 3 18 4 3 19 4 3 20 4 3 21 4 3 22 4 3 23 4 3 24 4 3 25 4 3 26 4 3 27 4 3 28 4 3 29 4 3 30 4 3 31 4 3 32 4 3 33 4 3 34 4 3 35 4 3 36 4 3 37 4 3 38 4 3 39 4 3 40 4 3 41 4 3 42 Original Glass IR Front Cover nnn 2 43 Control Panels tm eme aret ee enar 2 43 Tray EE E 2 44 eee nente EE 2 45 Scanner Motor Drive Board sse 2 45 CCD Uni rn eem oe iet ed 2 46 Image Processing Board eese neenon 2 47 Control Board
15. through the checks of steps up to 4 z c B Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action 1 Original Original is damaged or dirty YES Change original 2 Original Cover Original Pad is dirty YES Clean Original Glass Original Glass is dirty Wipe the surface clean with a 3 YES soft cloth Machine Adjust The adjustment value for Top Readjust Scanner Area falls within the specified 4 Top Image range NO Tech Rep Mode 5 The problem has been eliminated NO Change Scanner Assy Change CCD Unit 4 57 L a 5 gt E 5 3 HE z Image quality problem 4 3 3 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 IR System color spots A Typical Faulty Images 403614029 0 B Troubleshooting Procedure through the checks of steps up to 3 Step Section Check Item Result Action 1 Original Original is damaged or dirty YES Change original 2 Original Cover Original Pad is dirty YES Clean 3 Original Glass Original Glass is dirty YES Wipe the surface clean with a soft cloth 4 The problem has been eliminated NO Change Scanner Assy Change CCD Unit 4 58 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Image quality problem 4 3 4 IR System fog A Typical Faulty Images ABCD ABCD ABCD ABCD
16. MORM 40 23 08u35 dwg ENE 222225221 ke dal hee Sa ese yo M01 3Q EIN 10104 Jon HO mog 40 2 yodsuesy doo junowy 5 98 nd E uogensibeuuo 4 EE liest Lee o 91 100W 4 eT TEES ES SSS 39 3Q HN dn ayey 4 44 4 44 4 MO UL Ho 13SQ uo QN39S uo eBueuox3 4 PIS ues o 15 __4 f dn eyej pug 4 eBueuox3 puz eBueuox3 puz dn ayey pug iming c T xipueddy 5 30 iming c 1 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 xipueddy oesesssigcor eBueuox3 151 SWOEEL 299 5 96 f ejejduio2 eDueuox3 epis f epis 35 0
17. WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control Signal Electrical Component 1 Initial check items 2 I O check Sensor check PWB MC PJ14MC 7B ON K 7 3 28 I O check Sensor check PWB MC PJ12MC 6A ON R 2 4 I O check Sensor check PWB MC PJ12MC 12 ON 8 2 5 27 check Sensor check PWB MC PJ12MC 2 ON R 2 6 CL3 operation check PWB MC PJ12MC 13 ON 5 2 7 CL1 operation check PWB MC PJ14MC 10B ON L 7 8 Change PWB MC o I 2 5 5 Hr gt E 2 5 gt Jam Display bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 1 3 3 2nd Drawer take up Vertical Transport Manual Bypass take up A Detection Timing Type Description 2nd Drawer take up Vertical Trans port misfeed detec tion The leading edge of the paper does not block the Tray2 Vertical Transport Sensor PC108 even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Tray2 Paper Feed Motor has been energized The Synchronizing Roller Sensor PC28 is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the paper has blocked the Tray2 Vertical Transport Sen sor PC108 Misfeed detected at Bypass The leading edge of the paper does not block the Tray2 Vertical Transport Sensor PC108 even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Bypass Paper Feed Clutch has been energized Paper left at Tra
18. AD Gradation Adjust 403615303461 NOTES Be sure to change the service code from its default value For the procedure to change the service code see the Security Mode B Exiting Touch the Fin Time key C Changing the Setting Value in Tech Rep Mode Functions Use the ID key to change the sign to sign or vice versa Use the Up Down key to enter or change the setting value Use the 10 Key Pad to enter the setting value To change the setting value first press the Clear key before making an entry 3 40 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 TECH REP MODE 4 2 Touch Panel Adj Functions To adjust the position of the Touch Panel display Use Make this adjustment if the Touch Panel is slow to respond to a pressing action Use during the setup procedure Adjustment 1 Call the Tech Rep Mode to the screen Procedure 2 Press the keys Stop 0 gt Stop gt 3 3 Using the tip of a pen or similar object touch the four crosses on the screen in Sequence These crosses may be touched in any order but be sure to touch the center of each Cross Use care not to damag
19. WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control Signal Electrical Component 1 Initial check items 2 PC108 check Sensor check PWB Z PJ6Z 11 ON 2 Y 3 1 101 operation check PWB Z PJ7Z 14B ON 2 C 4 Change PWB Z o I 2 5 5 Hr gt 4 7 E 5 5 HE z Jam Display bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 1 3 4 LCT Take up and Vertical Transport Misfeed PC 401 A Detection Timing Type Description Misfeed detected at LCT take up or Vertical Trans port Section The leading edge of the paper does not block the LCT Transport Roller Motor PC2 LCT even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Paper Feed Motor has been energized The Tray2 Vertical Transport Sensor PC 108 is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the paper has blocked the LCT Transport Roller Motor PC2 LCT Paper left at LCT The LCT Vertical Transport Sensor PC2 LCT is blocked when the Power Switch is turned ON a door or cover is opened and closed or a misfeed or malfunction is reset The Paper Feed Sensor PC1 LCT is blocked when the Power Switch is turned ON a door or cover is opened and closed or a misfeed or malfunction is reset Misfeed detected as a result of delayed deacti vation of sensor The Tray2 Vertical Transport Sensor PC 108 is not unblocked even a
20. E 5 3 HE z Malfunction code 2 5 to reset bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Different malfunction resetting procedures apply depending on the type of the malfunc tion code List of Malfunction Resetting Procedures Resetting Procedure Applicable Malfunctions Applicable Malfunction Codes Press the Trouble Reset Switch on the Tech Rep Setting Exposure lamp C04XX Switches Board Fusing COSA Scanner Mechanical control C3332 3333 Turn OFF and ON the Power Scanner C0650 C0660 C3310 C3700 Switch Memory C12XX NIC C12D0 C1800 Imaging Unit C13D1 C13D2 C13D3 C13D4 LPH correction data C13D5 C13D6 C13D7 C13D8 Mechanical control C3331 C3FXX Punch Unit COB7X Open and close the Front Door All but above malfunction codes but those listed above 4 26 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Malfunction code 2 6 Solution 2 6 1 C0000 Main Motor s failure to turn Relevant Electrical Parts Main Motor M1 Control Board PWB MC DC Power Supply PU1 WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control Signal Electrical Component 1 Check the M1 connector for proper connection m and correct as necessary 2 Check 1 for proper drive coupling and cor rect as necessary 3 Check the PWB MC connector for p
21. 5 3 7 Exit Roller Rolls Spacing gt S1 FN ON 52 Separated 3 9 Test mode FS 501 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 5 3 8 Storage Roller Rolls Spacing gt S1 FN ON n Pressed S2 FN ON Separated 5 3 9 Elevator Tray Operation gt S1 FN ON Goes up until the Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor PQ 4 PWB D FN is blocked S2 FN ON 7 E Goes down until the Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor PQ PWB D FN is unblocked 5 3 10 Sensor Test LED Sensor State 1 2 3 4 Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor PWB D FN Unblocked O O O S Storage Sensor Blocked O O Lower Entrance Sensor PC2 FN Blocked O O O 5 Upper Entrance Sensor PC4 FN Blocked v ON O OFF 3 10 FS 501 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Jam Display IV Troubleshooting 1 Jam Display 1 1 Initial check items When a paper misfeed occurs first perform the following initial check items Check item Action Does paper meet product specifications Replace paper Replace paper Is the paper curled wavy or damp Instruct the user on the correct paper storage procedures Is a foreign object present along the paper path or is the Clean the paper path and replace if neces paper path deformed or worn sary Are the Paper Separator Fingers dir
22. detection B Action Relevant electrical parts Exit Motor M3 FN Control Board PWB A FN 2 Finisher Tray Paper Sensor PC5 FN 5 E WIRING DIAGRAM 5 zi 5 Step Action Location E Control signal Electrical compo gt nents z 1 Initial check items 2 PC5 FN I O sensor check PWB A FN PJ25A FN 2 1 2 3 operation check A 3 4 PWB A FN replacement 5 4 5 Jam Display FS 501 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 1 4 6 Stapler section misfeed A Detection timing Type Description Stapler section mis Stapler does not return to its home position within a given period of time after feed detection the forward drive of the Stapler has been started B Action Relevant electrical parts Staple Home Position Sensor PC14 FN Control Board PWB A FN Stapling Unit Moving Motor M6 FN WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical compo nents 1 Initial check items 2 PC14 FN sensor check PWB A FN PJ22A FN 3 1 7 3 M6 FN operation check A 4 4 Stapling Unit replacement 5 PWB A FN replacement 5 1 4 7 Horizontal Transport section misfeed A Detection timing Type Description The Paper Sensor PC1 HO of the Horizontal Transport Unit is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the leading edge of the paper has Horizontal Trans unblocked th
23. 5 40361s2602c0 5 3 Insert the Compact Flash into n the slot 22 Q a e 4036fs2603c0 4 Plug the power cord into the power outlet and turn ON the Power Switch 5 Six different types of F W appear on the Touch Panel 6 Select the particular type of F W to be updated 4036fs2604cO 7 Press the Start key At this time the Start key starts blinking red 8 Check that the Touch Panel shows the message indicating that the data has been rewritten correctly Downloading Completed Check also the Check Sum value Check Sum XXXX shown on the Touch Panel The Start key blinks green 9 Unplug the power cord from the power outlet NOTE Do not turn OFF the Power Switch 10 Remove the Compact Flash card from the slot 11 Turn OFF the Power Switch 12 Plug the power cord and turn ON the Power Switch 13 Call the Tech Rep mode to the screen 14 Select ROM Version 15 Make sure if the version of Firmware is updated 2 34 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Firmware upgrade 3 2 2 Action When Data Transfer Fails If NG appears on the Touch Panel indicating that rewriting has been unsuccessful in which case the Start key lights up red take the following steps 1 Perform the data rewriting procedure again 2 If the procedure is abnormally terminated change the memory card for a new one
24. Periodical check 403616259300 403616259400 1 5 4 Paper Take up Roller T um 21 403816202300 2 10 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 B Replacing Procedure 1 Remove the Separation Roller 2 installation plate Assy ts See the procedures 1 to 7 in 2 8 Cleaning of Separation Roller 2 Remove two C rings 1 and the Shaft 2 and remove the Separation Roller fixing plate Assy 3 NOTE Usecare not to miss the Spring 3 Remove the C ring 4 and Guide 5 and remove the Separation Roller Assy 2 6 A Cleaning Procedure Remove the Separation Roller 2 installation plate Assy ts See the procedures 1 to 7 in 2 8 Cleaning of Separation Roller 2 Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol wipe the Paper Take up Roller 1 B Replacing Procedure Remove the Separation Roller 2 installation plate Assy t See the procedures 1 to 7 in 2 8 Cleaning of Separation Roller 2 Remove the Screw 1 and Wiring cover 2 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 5 4 40361202401 6 7 8 11 10 40361202700 Periodical check 3 Remove two Screws 3 and Connec tor 4 and remove the Paper Take up Roller Assy 5 4 Remove two Screws 6 and the Installation flame 7 of the Separa tion Roller 2 insta
25. 458316254100 458316254200 1 3 9 458316250200 458316250300 FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Remove four screws 1 2 Hold up the Middle Front Cover 2 and the Middle Rear Cover 3 and remove them while shifting them back and forth 3 Unplug two connectors 4 4 Pinch the tie band 5 and remove it from the sheet metal 5 Remove two screws 6 6 Loosen two screws 7 7 Remove the Middle Transport Unit by sliding it upwards 1 Open the Front Door 1 2 Pulloutthe Stapler 3 while pressing the Stop Lever 2 NOTES Do not remove the Stapler from the shaft of the stapler frame or dis placement will be caused between the position to which the Staple Driver 4 the lower unit of the Sta pler feeds staples and the position from which the Staple Clincher 5 the upper unit of the Stapler receives them FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 1 3 10 Stapler Phase Adjustment 458310250400 458310250500 458316250600 Other Make phase adjustment of the Stapler following the procedures given below whenever the Gear or Timing Belt in front of the Stapler has been replaced or removed for some reason since such replacement or removal will cause mistiming between the staple driving by the Staple Driver the lower unit of the Stapler and the staple clinching by the S
26. 9 Touch Expert User gt PRT Area Top Margin Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern If width A falls outside the specified range change the setting using the Up Down key Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern If width A is outside the specified range change the setting again and make a check again If width A falls within the specified range touch Enter 10 Following the same procedure adjust for thickpaper OHP and envelopes 3 32 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Utility Mode 3 17 7 PRT Area Left Margin Functions To vary the print start position in the CD direction for each paper source Use The LPH Unit has been replaced A paper feed unit has been added The image on the copy deviates in the CD direction Adjustment Width A Width A on the test pattern produced should Specification 4 fall within the following range Specifications 3 0 0 5 mm Setting Range 3 0 mm to 3 0 mm in 0 2 mm increments 4036fs3010c0 Adjustment If width A is longer than the specifications make the setting value smaller than the cur Instructions rent one If width A is shorter than the specifications make the setting value greater than the cur rent one Adjustment 1 Touc
27. END Left Margin n ETE m INED EE NES F EU Es omn eos 434818351000 Display Tech Rep Mode ts For details of how to display the Tech Rep Mode screen see the Adjustment Setting of the main unit service manual 2 Touch Machine Adjust 3 Touch PRT Area 4 Touch Left Margin 5 Touch 3rd and then press the Start key 6 Atest print will be produced 3 3 z E 7 lt Mechanical adjustment PC 101 PC 201 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 7 Measure the width of printed refer ence line A Specification 3 0 mm x 1 0 mm 8 Ifthe measured width A falls outside the specified range enter the correc tion value 9 Produce another test print and check to see if width A falls within the spec C ified range If adjustment cannot be completed only by inputting numeric value perform adjustment according to the following procedure 10 Slide out the drawer 1 and unload paper from it 11 Loosen three screws 2 at the center root of the Paper Lifting Plate 43488360100 12 Watching the graduations 3 pro vided in the drawer move the Edge Guide 4 in the rear f width A is greater than the specified 7 value move the Edge Guide toward Sav the front f width A is smaller than the specified value move the Edge Guide toward
28. 4 49 3 2 Control panel indicators do not light 4 49 3 3 Fusing Heaters do not Operate 5 34 Power is not Supplied to Options cece 4 50 341 eedem nen e ep i ene en dene on re De tentang 4 50 3 4 2 Optional Paper Feed Cabinet sssssssssseen ene 4 50 3 4 3 EIC m 4 51 3 444 x n tie eee een ied IH eere 4 51 4 Image quality problem 1 tenent tnnt nnt 4 52 3 4 1 How to read Element date cece eeseeesescseessensseeesseeseassscceseesseesseeseeessesesees 4 52 ATA ae e aber Rb nr 4 52 Pistor oeste eon tec tto ig ete tu eee 4 53 44 3 LevelHistoty 2 erre rentrer ren dere renes 4 53 4 2 How to identify problematic 4 54 4 2 1 Initial CHECK Items rere nre eter dee 4 54 4 3 io iot erento rr ied tre reet ens 4 56 4 3 4 System white lines in FD white bands in FD colored lines in FD and colored bands in FD eeeeeeeeeeeeneeeene nennen 4 56 4 3 2 System white lines in CD white bands in CD colored lines in CD and colored bands in CD Adjustment Setting 4 3 3 IR System color spots sessseeseeeenennene nennen nennen 434 IR System 09 5 poetae aerae ne d ER HR ERR ne a 4 3 5 System blurred ima
29. IS MO 09S WLUQS uBiH 2es uuo006 WS uo piouejog yo 40 771S 1x3 Jo 40 179 yoinig yo 40 90d 205095 13 uo yo 40 524 209095 uo yo 90 299 sosuag dn yolq uo p 009 uo 205095 Jedeq MOIM Jaded Josueg dwg MI MOT i yo COEN MO UBIH pea 10 3O 2IN yodsues Moo J00 39 30 LA dn ayey 0 138 uo QN39S uo xipueddy 5 24 iming c 1 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 086299919807 eBueuox3 4 5 96 eui dn eyxe 5 50 wiwjg doo jo 598 uonensibeu uO dn exe pig fi 4 dn exe UOISSIUISUEJ 1358 eBueuox3 151 pug Sui 00 pug yo 30 118 u piouejog anoun yo 90 215 prousog yo ud 179 uonensi ag yo uo yo 90 89 Josuag Janoun uo yo uo 40 924 208095 1x3 30 294 10sueg dn yolq yo 40 19
30. seen 4 20 2 311 COB79 Punch Sensor malfunctions sse 4 21 2 3 12 COBAO Elevate Mechanism malfunctions esee 4 22 2 3 13 COBF1 Backup RAM malfunction esee 4 23 lii Il Maintenance D 2 IV Troublshooting V Appendix FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 IlI Bunooysiqnoly Al xipueddy A iv FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Product specifications General 1 Product specifications 11 Type Type Multi Staple Finisher with Saddle Booklet Installation Freestanding Document Alignment Center Supplies Staple Cartridge 1 2 Functions No of Holes optional Metric 4holes Inch 2holes 3holes Non Sort Sort Normal Sort Staple Modes Saddle Staple Non Sort Hole Punch Hole Punch optional Sort Hole Punch Sort Staple Hole Punch 1 3 Paper type 1 3 1 Non Sort 7 No of Sheets Paper Type Paper Size Weight Tray Capacity Exit Tray to be Stapled 60 to 90 g m A6R to A3 Wide 16 to 24 Ib 5 1 2 x 8 1 2R A4R 8 B4 Plain Paper 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 1 2x11R 8 1 2x14 to or smaller or larger No of 12 1 4 x 18 60 to 256 Sheets 1000 500 g m Height 150mm 75 mm Elevator Tray Max Min 16 to 68 Ib Controlled by whichever E
31. E o a 5 Utility Mode 3 Utility Mode 3 1 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Utility Mode function tree The function tree is shown to comply with the format displayed on the screen Utility Store Counter List option installation Controller Detail User s Choice 1 Displayed according to a given condition such as User s Choice 2 Copy program Recall Printer Setting Unit Life Indication Admin Mode 3 4 Toner Coverage Reset Mode Copy Mode Mode Store Scan Mode 1 2 Key Click Sound Power Save 2 2 Sleep Account Change Auto Reset Language Select 2in1 4in1 Booklet Copy Zoom 1 3 ACS Judgement Level Adjustment Intelligent Sorting Criss Cross Paper Type Select 2 3 Auto select paper for small originals 4in1 Copy Order Centering 3 3 Priority Output tray Priority Device Default Tray Paper Size Output Orientation Lines per page Font Typeface Symbol Set Configuration Font Size Test Page PCL FontList PS FontList bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004
32. bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 TECH REP MODE 4 9 Admin Password Initialize Functions To initialize the administrator code and PSL administrator code Use Use to delete the current settings Setting Select Yes and touch END to initialize the settings Procedure 4 10 Settings in Counter The Counter displays the counts of various counters to allow the Tech Rep to check or set as necessary 4 10 1 Procedure 1 Touch Counter to show the Counter menu 2 Select the specific counter to be displayed 3 Toclear the counts of two or more counters within a group or across different groups at once touch Counter Reset select the specific counters to be cleared and touch END Two or more counters can be selected 4 10 2 Life Functions To check the number of hours or times each of the different maintenance parts has been used To clear the count of each counter Use When each of the maintenance parts is replaced Setting To clear the count of a counter select the specific part and press the Clear key Procedure e Ifa counter is cleared mistakenly press the Interrupt key which will undo the clearing operation It is not possible to clear the count of the counters for the Fusing Unit Transfer Belt Unit and IU which are provided with a new unit detection function D 7 Fusing Unit Number of times a
33. changed Step Section Check Item Result Action Cable connecting Connector is connected properly NO 1 Scanner and with no pins bent printer Image Processing Connectors on the Image Pro NO Reconnect 2 PWB C cessing Board are connected properly 3 CCD Unit Connectors of the CCD Unit are NO Reconnect connected properly Test Print The problem is eliminated as NO I F connection cable 4 Tech Rep Mode checked with the image on a test pattern produced Image Processing The problem is eliminated after NO Image Processing 5 Board PWB C the I F connection cable has been Board 4 67 L a 5 gt E 5 3 HE z Image quality problem 4 3 13 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 IR System abnormal image A Typical Faulty Images EABXCIDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE AA 403615404000 403616404100 Data on previous page Data on current page 403618404200 B Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action Cable connecting Connector is connected properly NO Reconnect 1 Scanner and with no pins bent printer 2 Image Processing Connectors on the Image Reconnect Board PWB C ing Board are connected properly MFP Control Data on prev
34. seen 4 72 Printer Monocolor gradation reproduction failure 4 74 Printer Monocolor foggy background esee 4 76 Printer Monocolor void areas white spots 4 78 Printer Monocolor colored spots 4 79 Printer Monocolor blurred image eene 4 80 Printer Monocolor blank copy black copy 4 81 Printer Monocolor 0 5 mm pitch uneven image 4 82 Printer Monocolor 2 mm pitch uneven image 4 83 Printer Monocolor 94 mm pitch uneven image 4 84 Printer 4 Color white lines in FD white bands in FD colored lines in FD and colored bands in 4 85 Printer 4 Color white lines in CD white bands in CD colored lines in CD and colored bands in 4 86 Printer 4 Color uneven density in FD seen 4 87 Printer 4 Color uneven density in CD 4 88 Printer 4 Color low image density sese 4 89 Printer 4 Color poor color reproduction sese 4 91 Printer 4 Color incorrect color image 4 93 Printer 4 Color void area
35. D D o o 7 5 Mechanical adjustment FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 3 Mechanical adjustment 31 Adjustment of the stapling position The stapling position is adjusted by aligning the stapling position to the folding position This adjustment is made in the Tech Rep Mode of the main unit Since the adjustment is made in increments of 1 mm this adjustment is useful for eliminating a displacement of 1mm or more Forthe effective adjustment of a minimal displacement smaller than 1 mm refer to Board switch Adjustable range 7 to 7 mm Increment 1 mm 3 1 1 DF 601 equipped machine 1 Set or 11 x 17 to the Feed Tray 2 Select functions as follows Orig Copy4in1 Booklet2Booklet5Bind 3 Setfive sheets of A3 or 11 x 17 original blank paper acceptable in the Original Tray These five sheets are used for adjustment to minimize variation 4 Pressthe Start Key 5 Setthe mode to the Tech Rep Mode 6 Touch Machine Adjust 7 Touch Center Binding Position Tech Rep Mode We rhe man Tr 375 i a 1 Tat Counter Color Shift ist Output Correction 7 aat a T Gradation Adjust ABB3 sa523e1 8 Touch Center Staple Posit
36. eic eti terrere ere 4 3 141 Tray3 Paper Take Up section misfeed 101 201 4 3 1 4 2 Tray4 Paper Take Up section misfeed PC 201 4 4 2 Malfunction code ennt nen enter ene rn ihr rae d 2 1 Malfunction code display 2 2 Trouble code liSt karina e n en nee nae He et Eee es 2 9 Howto ccn andi ERU RED 2 54 SOlUtiOni uiis coerente e t rte ye dta ett edes ede E eret 2 4 1 C0900 Tray3 Lift Up Motor Failure C0950 Tray4 Lift Up Motor Failure cece 4 6 Il Maintenance B a El IV Troublshooting V Appendix 101 201 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Product specifications General 1 Product specifications 11 Type Name 2 way Paper Take Up Cabinet Type Front loading type 2 way paper take up device Installation Desk type Document Alignment Center 1 2 Paper type Plain paper 56 to 110 g m 15 to 29 1 4 Ib Paper Type Recycled paper 60 to 90 g m 16 to 24 Ib Paper Size to A3 5 1 2 x 8 1 2R to 11 x 17 3rd Drawer 500 sheets Capacity 4th Drawer 500 sheets 1 3 Machine specifications DC 24 V x 10 6 supplied from the main unit Power Requirements DC5V 5 Max Power 15 W or less Consumption Dimensions 570 mm W x 263 mm H x 548 mm D 22 1 2 inch W x 10 1 4
37. T 3 44 4 4 2 Fuser Temp cron eene eei ete ets 3 44 4 4 3 Fuser Speed 9 45 4 4 4 Detect Sensor 3 45 44 5 PRPA a etcetera 3 46 44 6 onset ettet ence etl dr ne aea 3 50 44 7 Loop 8 cre ett nene 3 53 4 4 8 Color Shift Correction eene nennen nnne nnne nennen 3 54 4 4 9 1 ape imei 3 56 4 410 LPH Chip AGjUSt rtr ette eee echt ere tae e iei 3 57 4 4 11 Center Binding Position FS 601 only eene 3 58 4 4 12 Memory HardDisk Adjust essen 3 59 4 4 13 Bypass Guide Adjust eeeeeeeeeeneeeeenennnennennnnnnnnnns 3 61 45 ROM 3 61 46 mnageAdjust Ret rte eine etes aee 3 61 4 6 1 PRT Max Densily eerte nter ettet rece ente 3 61 ieget ee Eum ERE EUR 3 62 4 6 3 Background Voltage Margin eseseeeeeenennenen 3 62 4 6 4 Level Setting nnne nennen 3 63 4 6 5 LAE leat eee e eee 3 63 4 6 6 2nd Transfer Adjust terree e mtv rn 3 64 4 6 7 StabiliZer zi eot 3 64 4 6 8 Toner Supply sessssssseseeeeneeneeneen enne rennen nnne 3 65 4 6 9 Feeding do
38. seseeeen 1 3 ll Maintenance 1 Periodical check n eiie rti aly atbestevecadsbiessissiccinees 2 1 1 4 Maintenance procedure Periodical check parts 2 1 At Transport Belt ote ieeen 2 1 1 1 2 Pick up Roller Paper Take up 2 2 1 1 3 Separation Roller iiir eterne temen ntn 2 3 1 1 4 Pick up Roller Paper Take up Roll Separation Roller 2 4 1 1 5 Registration Roller netten tnn 2 4 1 156 Exit Roller Roll nere treten eren rete rr eee 2 5 1 1 7 Turnover Rollet 45 iorrn errato retenir nns 2 5 1 1 8 Sensor Eb en pte inerenti ee ned inr na 2 5 2 No nte E a eei ndr toin teet 2 7 2 1 Disassembly Adjustment prohibited items 2 7 2 2 Disassembly Assembly list Other parts see 2 8 2 3 Disassembly Assembly 2 8 2 3 1 Front Cover Rear Cover sss nennen rennen enne nneen 2 8 I Adjustment Setting 1 How to use the adjustment section ssssssssssseeeeeeneenenenne 3 1 2 Tech Rep Test Mode 2 1 Tech Rep Mode setting procedure 3 2 2 2 of the Tech Rep neenon 3 2
39. 8 E Service tool bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 2 2 Copy materials 2 2 1 Imaging Unit Single Parts IU Parts name Replacing period IU Black 80 000 copies IU Yellow 50 000 copies IU Magenta 50 000 copies IU Cyan 50 000 copies t For the predetermined conditions see 2 6 2 2 2 Toner Cartridge Single Parts T C Also replace the Deodorant filter packed in the T C Black at the same time Parts name Replacing period 1 T C Black 11 500 copies T C Yellow 11 500 copies T C Magenta 11 500 copies T C Cyan 11 500 copies 1 Life value that can be achieved with a probability of 90 even with product to product variations and fluctuating operating environmental conditions taken into consideration when the T C is used under the conditions of B W ratio 5 for each color o 5 c 2 2 2 3 Waste Toner Bottle Parts name Replacing period Waste Toner Bottle 30 000 copies t For the predetermined conditions see 2 6 2 2 4 Maintenance Kit There is no setting for the Maintenance Kit 2 30 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Firmware upgrade 3 Firmware upgrade 31 Preparations for Firmware rewriting 3 1 1 Service environment OS Windows2000 Drive which enables writing reading of Compact flash Compact flash with 64MB or more 3 1 2 Application to be used Cygwin Free software 3 1 3 Installing the Cygwin
40. sssssesseeeseeeeeeenrenreenneenne trennen nnne rennen innen 2 48 MEP Control Boatd cert ttn rendent erri 2 49 Figh Voltage r rrr rr Re Eri Peer nnde 2 51 High Voltage Unit 2 eri tonta re aere o RE 2 52 Tray 1 Paper 5 2 2 53 DC Power Supply LED Drive Board Paper Type Board Tech Rep Setting Switches Board 2 b6 Way 2 Board ete terea ER RR YER EIN seks 2 57 Tray 2 Paper SiZ rENe riepa draha aae SE 2 57 Inverter Board pacato o rere 2 58 Multi Bypass Unit eee centre nennen 2 58 Toner Hopper Unit eerte tec terne nh pene inan 2 59 2 61 Scanner 2 63 Scanner ASSY oo cece eee eeeeeeeeeceeeeaeeceeeseaeeeaeeeeeeseaeseaeseaeeseeseaeeeaeeseeseneeed 2 65 Scanner Drive Cables eeeeeeeeee eene entente 2 66 Winding of the Scanner Drive 2 68 irure sanity a ater nee 2 73 Main Motor 2 74 Fusing Drive Motor 2 74 Toner Supply Motor 2 75 Toner Supply Motor YM
41. 2 64 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 3 29 Scanner Assy 4036 s2092c2 403616252600 6 Other Remove the Original Glass tw 2 43 Move the Scanner Assy 1 to the location shown and remove one mounting screw each at the front and rear end NOTE Do not remove the Scanner Posi tioning Screws 2 3 Take out the Scanner Assy 3 by turning it in the direction of the arrow shown 4 Remove the screw 4 and the holder 5 5 Remove the flat cable 6 6 Remove the Scanner Assy 7 2 65 2 o c Other 4 3 30 Scanner Drive Cables A Removal Procedure 403616209501 2 66 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 D N 11 Remove the Rear Cover 2 41 Remove the Control Panel 2 43 Remove four Presser Bars 1 of Flat Cable Remove the IR Front Cover 2 43 Remove four screws 2 and the con trol panel base 3 Remove the Original Glass 2 43 Remove the Scanner Assy 2 65 the springs 3 of the Scan ner Drive Cables on the hook side one each at the front and in the rear Remove the Scanner Motor Assy 2 63 Remove the screw 4 and then slide the front pulley 5 toward the front R
42. 3 92 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 TECH REP MODE 4 13 5 Solid pattern Functions To produce each of the C M Y and Bk solid patterns Use Used for checking reproducibility of image density Pattern Bk p SINGLE HYPER LV LL Gradation Density 255 M mem Setting e of Print 1 to 999 Procedure Select SINGLE single copy or MULTI multi copy Select FEET or HYPER Select Gradation or Resolution if HYPER has been selected Type the density level 0 to 255 4 13 6 Color sample Functions To produce a color sample Use Used for checking reproducibility of each of the different colors Pattern hum a 5 2 i HYPER 5 Gradation a E mu Setting e of Print 1 to 999 Procedure Select SINGLE single copy or MULTI multi copy Select FEET or HYPER Select Gradation or Resolution if HYPER has been selected Produce 12 gradation level patches of C M Y K R G and B and a patch of each of the 12 reference colors in the hue circle with lightness and saturation corrected 3 93 TECH REP MODE bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 13 7 8 Color Solid Pattern Functions To produce an 8 color solid pattern Use Used for checking color reproducibility and uneven density of each color Pattern a 3 SINGLE 3 HYPER a a Gradation
43. D o E E 0 5 Utility Mode bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 C 4in1 Copy Order Functions To select the layout of copy images in the 4in1 mode Use To change the layout of copy images in the 4in1 mode Setting Procedure The default setting is as follows 12 13 34 2 4 default setting gt D Centering Functions To select whether to center the image with respect to the paper Use To select not to allow the image to center in the paper when the paper is larger than the original Use when the size of the original is smaller than that of the paper selected for use Setting Procedure default setting is Yes Yes No 3 7 3 3 3 A Priority Output tray Functions Setthe priority output tray for each of the copier print PC print and the Internet Fax print When the FS 501 is mounted Use To change the output tray according to the application Setting Procedure The default settings are as follows as set with the corresponding number shown on the display Copy 2 Elevator Tray Print PC print 2 Elevator Tray Internet 2 Elevator Tray When the JS 601 is mounted Internet default settings is 3 B Priority Device Functions To set the print timing for the PC print jobs received Use To have one page e
44. Step Action 5 Location Control signal Electrical compo nents Disconnect and then connect the power 1 cord to turn OFF and ON the main Switch 2 Check the connectors for proper connec tion on the PWB A FN 3 PWB A FN replacement 6 4 23 o I 2 5 5 Hr gt Trouble code FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Blank page o gt 5 5 2 HE gt 4 24 C350 Overall Wiring Diagram PJ22 Va P81 i 34 15 2nd mage Transfer mE Cay 3 gt 85 11D Bk FX Pressure Retraction Motor N Bypass Paper Empty Sensor Windows Bias YMC 2nd Image Transfer cesa 08 25 CN24 9 Bypass FD Paper Size Sensor 1 Pressure Retraction Sensor 1812 ka B Developing Bias Y Color 1st Image Transfer ev 22 12 9 Bypass FD Paper Size Sensor 2 Retraction
45. mail domain name controller Q xxx xxx com 8 Touch Mail check and type the time interval min for mail check No mails can be received if No is selected NOTE Since load placed by Mail Check on the network can be minimal set the minimum time interval permitted by the network administrator 9 Touch Connection timeout and check the set time sec The default setting does not basically cause any problem 2 2 2 E mail transmission settings These settings may be the same as or different from the mail transmission settings for Scan to E mail and Internet Fax 1 Touch Send 2 Touch SMTP server and type the IP address of the transmission mail server 3 Touch SMTP port number and type the port number to be specified when connecting with the SMTP server Ordinarily type 25 4 Touch Timeout of SMTP Server and check the set time sec The default setting does not basically cause any problem 2 2 3 Checking the E mail Transmission Reception Settings 2 When the e mail transmission reception settings have been made check the settings by 3 following the procedure given below o 1 Touch Receive Mail check and set the mail check time interval to the minimum 1 E 2 Touch TX RX Test and press the Start key Before starting the test it is necessary that the first drawer of the machine must be loaded with A4R paper If the drawer is loaded wit
46. sesseeeeeeenenreneneee nennen 2 75 Color PG Drum Motor ertet merenti regne 2 76 Color Developing Motor ssessseseeeeeeneeneeeeene nennen 2 78 Bk PC Molor neci eer corr ete eon eee dene 2 79 1st Image Transfer Pressure Retraction 2 80 2nd Image Transfer Pressure Retraction 2 80 Intermediate Transport Motor sseseseseeennennenee nennen 2 81 lii Il Maintenance D IV Troublshooting V Appendix Il Maintenance te B a El IV Troublshooting V Appendix bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 3 43 Fusing Pressure Roller Pressure Retraction 2 83 4 3 44 Cleaning Brush Motor sseseeseeeeeeeeeneeneen enne 2 86 4 3 45 AlDC Registration 1 2 2 87 4 3 46 LPH neuem leet 2 88 4 3 47 Sensor Y M C 5 ot et Rede dns 2 92 4 4 Mount the optional original size detecting 2 93 4 5 Option COUDGr eet tenere He en ederent rou e ide revive 4 5 1 Installation of The Mechanical Counter 4 5 2 Installation method for the Key
47. 3 71 o E o 0 2 5 2 Mail check bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Functions To set whether or not to use Mail Check and the time interval for the POP3 server used for the Remote Diagnosis System for the standard controller Use To select not to use Mail Check To change the time interval for Mail Check Setting Procedure The default setting is 15 min 15 min 1 to 120 min No 3 Connection timeout Functions To set the timeout period for connection during reception Use To change the timeout period for connection during reception Setting Procedure The default setting is 60 sec 60 sec 30 to 300 sec C Send These are the settings for the Send used in the Remote Diagnosis System for the stan dard controller 1 SMTP server Functions Tosetthe SMTP server address for transmission used for the Remote Diagnosis System for the standard controller Use To set the address of the SMTP Server Setting Procedure P Address Version 4 format 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 2 SMTP port number Functions To set the SMTP port number for transmission used for the Remote Diagnosis System for the standard controller Use To set the Port Number of the SMTP Server Setting Procedure The default setting is 25 25 1 to 65
48. 4 8 2 3 5 C0998 Shift 4 9 2 3 6 99 LCT Shift Motor Failure esssseseeeseeeeeenennneenneens 4 10 2 83 7 C099D LCT communication 4 10 PC 401 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Product specifications General 1 Product specifications 131 Type Name Large Capacity Tray Type Front loading type LCT Installation Desk type Document Alignment Center 1 2 Paper type Plain paper 56 to 110 g m 15 to 29 1 4 1 Paper Type Recycled paper 60 to 90 g m 16 to 24 Ib Paper Size A4 8 1 2 x 11 Capacity 2500 sheets 80 g m 21 1 4 Ib 1 3 Machine specifications Power Requirements DC 24 V 10 supplied from the main unit DC5V 5 Max Power 45 W or less Consumption Dimensions 570 mm W x 263 mm x 548 mm D 22 1 2 inch W x 10 1 4 inch H x 21 1 2 inch D Weight 25 9 kg 57 Ib 1 4 Operating environment Conforms to the operating environment of the main unit 1 1 Product specifications PC 401 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Blank page PC 401 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Periodical check Maintenance 1 Periodical check 1 4 Maintenance procedure Periodical check parts NOTE The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure of Maintenance represents the isopropyl alcohol 1 1 1 Separation Roller Assy
49. 5 3 4 gt S1 FN ON Y S2 FN ON 3 8 Elevator Tray Exit Motors Energized Entrance Motor M1 FN Lower Entrance Motor M2 FN Exit Motor M3 FN Motors Deenergized Entrance Motor M1 FN Upper Entrance Motor M4 FN Lower Entrance Motor M2 FN Exit Motor M3 FN Finisher Tray Exit Motors and solenoids Energized Entrance Motor M1 FN Upper Entrance Motor M4 FN Lower Entrance Motor M2 FN Exit Motor M3 FN Upper Lower Entrance Switching Solenoid SL1 FN Motors and solenoids Deenergized Entrance Motor M1 FN Upper Entrance Motor M4 FN Lower Entrance Motor M2 FN Exit Motor M3 FN Upper Lower Entrance Switching Solenoid SL1 FN Shifting Operation The Elevator Tray shifts to the front The Elevator Tray shifts to the rear FS 501 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Test mode 5 3 5 Aligning Plate Operation gt S1 FN ON At the home position S1 FN ON At a position to align A4 paper v S1 FN ON At a position to align Letter paper S1 FN ON At a position to align A4R paper v S1 FN ON At a position to align Letter paper 5 3 6 Stapling Unit CD Movement gt S1 FN ON At home position T S1 FN ON At a position for A4 corner stapling E S1 FN ON At home position v E v S1 FN ON At a position for A4R corner stapling
50. 7 o S z E o E a 5 Utility Mode bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 A 3 17 10 Delete All Data in Index Functions Counts and clears data left after the one touch key data is all cleared using Page Scope Web Connection when the IC 401 is being used Use When no data can be stored in the one touch keys after Delete All One Touch Keys is executed in the Administrator Mode of Page Scope Web Connection Adjustment 1 Touch Delete All Data in Index Procedure 2 Check the display of the count of the data left and touch Delete 3 18 Gradation Adjustment Functions To make an automatic adjustment for an optimum gradation value based on the test pattern produced and the reading taken by the Scanner Use Color reproduction performance becomes poor The IU has been replaced The Image Transfer Belt Unit has been replaced The Adj Values of Max and Highlight shown on the Gradation Adjustment screen represent how much corrections are made to produce an ideal image output Conv Value shows the difference from the ideal image density k The closer the Conv Value to 0 the more ideal the image Adjustment Max 0 100 Specification Highlight 0 60 Adjustment Touch Gradation Adjustment Procedure Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern Place the test pattern produced on the Origina
51. Other NOTE When RAM IC 1 418 is mounted precisely fit the directions of each 1 Remove the PWB Box te 2 73 Remove four Screws 1 and eight Connectors 2 and remove two Har ness Holder 3 3 Remove all the Connectors on the High Voltage Unit 1 4 4 Remove 9 Screws 5 and remove the High Voltage Unit 1 6 2 51 2 Other bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 3 16 High Voltage Unit 2 Remove the PWB Box u 2 73 Remove all the Connectors on the High Voltage Unit 2 1 403616206801 3 Remove two Screws 2 and remove the High Voltage Unit 2 Assy 3 o c 4036 s2069c1 4 Remove six Screws 4 and remove 4 the High Voltage Unit 2 5 4 2 52 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 317 Tray 1 Paper Size Board 40361207101 403616207201 4 3 18 DC Power Supply SS K 1 1 Other Slide out the Tray 1 Remove the PWB Box 2 73 Remove the Connector 1 on the High Voltage Unit 2 Remove two Screws 2 and Connec tor 3 and remove the Tray1 Paper Size Board Assy 4 Remove the Lever 5 Remove the Tray 1 Paper Size Board 6 2 Remove the Exit Tray 2 40
52. eee 2 20 Cleaning of the Comb Electrode 2 20 Gleaning LPH ASSY E 2 21 Replacement of the Deodorant Filter 2 21 Replacing the 2nd Image Transfer Roller 2 22 Image Transfer Belt Unit eese 2 23 Replacing the Imaging Unit C M Y Bk 2 25 Replacing the Fusing Unit essen 2 teen tte Mere e 2 2 COPY materials ire oret meg ye ne n p tees ep eg xn 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 4 Imaging Unit Single Parts 10 2 Toner Cartridge Single Parts T C sese Waste Toner Bottle eene nennen nennen Maintenance Kit 1 aa i eak reit ad 3 Firmware upgraden Ai aite ca sdeanoepiets ei e eiad 3 1 Preparations for Firmware rewriting 3 1 1 3 1 2 3 1 3 3 1 4 Service environment eeeeeeeeeeeeee nennen enne nnne nnne nnne nnennnen Application to be used nennen Installing the Cygwin eere Writing into the Compact flash 0 0 eee cece eee 3 2 Firmware rewriting essent enne rennen 3 2 1 3 2 2 Updating method rro c e Code cere Pn eR Action When Data Transfer Fails
53. nre tnnt en tete tends 2 7 1 5 2 ce tiec te ec eem ette 2 7 E 1 5 3 Separation Roller 2 aeree het tne ee nera 2 8 5 1 5 4 Paper Take up Roler isnan hiia anaa 2 10 5 1 5 5 Pick up Roller nne eer en er rer e nets 2 13 gt 1 5 6 Transport Roller 2 14 1 5 7 Cleaning of Synchronizing Roller 2 15 1 5 8 Paper Dust Remover nirratais iiit nennen nene 2 15 1 5 9 Cleaning of Transport Roller sss 2 16 5 1 5 10 Cleaning of 2nd Image Transfer Entrance Upper Guide 2 16 5 1 5 11 Cleaning of Scanner Rail sese 2 16 lt 1 5 12 Cleaning of the Mirrors 1st 2nd 3rd sese 2 17 1 5 13 Cleaning of the Lens eese nennen nennen 2 17 o 2 Adjustment Setting IV Troublshooting 5 o 2 2 lt gt 1 5 14 1 5 15 1 5 16 1 5 17 1 5 18 1 5 19 1 5 20 1 5 21 1 5 22 1 5 23 1 5 24 1 5 25 2 Service tool bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Cleaning of the Original Glass esseeeenen 2 18 Cleaning of the Sensor esee 2 18 Replacing the Waste Toner Bottle 2 19 Cleaning of the Area around the Waste Toner Collecting Port 2 20 Replacing Ozone Filter
54. yo 13SQ uo 40 QN30S uo xipueddy 5 32 iming c 1 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 xipueddy A 0926995960 o1 1X3 pig E apis EE WEE gt SWOEEL e ow epis 5 99 ues epis pig yo 40 118 uo plouajog JeAoUuni yo 40 279 plousjos 1x3 o4 Voi uonensibeu uo yo uo 40 524 Josuag y 40 994 208095 1X3 20 09 105195 1194 uo Josuag aded nou WIM Josue dwg go dQ EW 00W Wa MO Moo HO JQ cW uodsueij MO JOJOJN HO qnae MO 13SQ uo Ho aN39S uo 5 33 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Timing chart 0989959205 a A e ou reuibuo 99 o 40 19 uo prousjog enoun gt 9018 poulos wa SUJ6E6 uonensiBe uo 110 uo 40 998 205095 1x3 40 524 105 5 40 20d uo Jos
55. epis pug 7 Ho 30 115 plouajog JeAouuni yo 40 218 plouejos 1X3 uo Ho ud 4 P uonensifeu uo uo 40 90 Josuag senoun uo yo 40 224 10sueg uo 30 998 208095 X3 yo 30 199 uo yosuag O03 UM Josuag dwg AG EW 190W 100W podsues N99 JO ON HO MO 0 1aS0 uo He QN39S uo 5 31 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 iming chart T 0999959205 epis pig ues oxa jl eBueuox3 pug EE ejejduio2 1x3 f ejejduio TS 99 1 teu 30 79 o piouejog Janoun p Jo 5 02 m 90 2715 plousjos 1x3 ioni uorensi e ug 0 110 uonensiDeg A 208095 us 40 924 513 o 340 504 108095 yo 80209 losues dnd o 41 199 a Josueg nou M 40 799 adeg yim 5 HO mo 09H 20101 1 Mo NO pea mo 30 8 yodsueit MO Moo 100W HO mog GOIN MO
56. 5 C Parallel Interface 5 Functions To set the two way communication system for the parallel interface Use To change the communications method of the parallel interface Setting Procedure The default setting is ECP Compatible Nibble ECP D Screen Pattern Setting Functions To set the screen pattern for PC print Use To change the screen pattern to be output in PC print Setting Procedure The default setting is Gradation Gradation Resolution 3 21 Utility Mode bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 3 14 2 PCL Setting Overwrite A4 Letter Functions To permit output of A4 instead of Letter or vice versa Use To produce an output of the same size from a document containing pages of both A4 and Letter e The default setting is No Yes No 3 15 Settings in Scan setting 3 15 1 Device Name Functions Toregister the device name to be added to the transmission file name Use To add the device name to the transmission file name Setting Procedure e The default setting is No e Up to 36 characters alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used 3 15 2 Color Grayscale Compression Functions To set the compression level image quality for scanning of the image in JPEG file format Use To change the compression level Setting Procedure The default sett
57. PRT Area Dup Left Margin Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern If width A falls outside the specified range change the setting using the Up Down key Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern on the backside of the copy If width A is outside the specified range change the setting again and make a check again 9 If width A falls within the specified range touch END 10 Following the same procedure adjust for all other paper sources Use A4 or 8 1 2 x 11 plain paper for the Manual Bypass Tray o z E o E a 5 3 48 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 TECH REP MODE D Zoom for FD Functions To synchronize the paper transport speed with the image writing speed Use The CD Mag adjustment becomes necessary The image on the copy distorts stretched shrunk When the image on the copy is stretched in the FD direction Adjustment Specification Width A and width B on the test pattern pro duced should fall within the following ranges Width A equivalent to one grid Width B equivalent to 48 grids B Specifications A 7 9 to 8 3 B 389 1 to 392 1 Setting Range A 403615301700 B 10 to 10 Adjustment If width A or B is longer than the specification
58. c 2 4 4 2621 0 Open the Right Door 1 Remove the Right Door 1 Remove two screws 2 and remove the Rear Right Cover 3 Remove two screws 4 and remove the Lower Right Cover 5 Remove two screws 6 and remove the Front Right Cover 7 ALN 2 3 2 Rear Cover 434818262200 1 Remove four screws 1 and remove the Rear Cover 2 2 8 101 201 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 How to use the adjustment section Adjustment Setting 1 How to use the adjustment section Adjustment Setting contains detailed information on the adjustment items and proce dures for this machine e Throughout this Adjustment Setting the default settings are indicated by boldface A Advance Checks Before attempting to solve the customer problem the following advance checks must be made Check to see if 1 The power supply voltage meets the specifications 2 The power supply is properly grounded The machine shares the power supply with any other machine that draws large current intermittently e g elevator and air conditioner that generate electric noise The installation site is environmentally appropriate high temperature high humidity direct sunlight ventilation etc levelness of the installation site The original has a problem that may cause a defective image The density is properly selected The Original Glass slit glass or related pa
59. m KONICA MINOLTA SERVICE MANUAL FIELD SERVICE FS 501 2004 09 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC Ver 2 0 After publication of this service manual the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance Therefore the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required Revision mark To indicate clearly a section revised show to the left of the revised section A number within represents the number of times the revision has been made To indicate clearly a section revised show in the lower outside section of the correspond ing page A number within 4 represents the number of times the revision has been made NOTE Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted When a page revised in Ver 2 0 has been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 3 0 only are shown with those for Ver 2 0 deleted When page revised in Ver 2 0 has not been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 2 0 are left as they are 2004 09 20 N Adding the descriptions and correcting errors in writing 2004 03 1 0 Issue of the first edition Date Service manual Ver Revision mark Descriptions of revision
60. o c 403616263000 3 Remove two screws 4 the Guide 5 4 Remove two Screws 6 and Connec tor 7 and remove the guide Assy 8 WSS arose 2 90 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 LPH C Bk gt LI 403616263400 40361526320 Other 5 Align the markings 9 on the flat cable with the positions shown in the photo 6 Install the Guide NOTE Make sure that no part of the flat cable is wedged in mechanisms or bent 7 Secure the LPH 10 using three screws 11 2 8 Push the slack portion in the flat cable 12 into the inside of the machine 9 Install the two screws 13 to secure the guide Assy 14 10 Connect the connector 15 NOTE Make sure that no part of the flat cable is wedged in mechanisms or bent Make sure that the flat cable is aligned with the groove in the Guide Assy 2 91 Other bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 11 Press the LPH Assy 16 down into the locked position NOTES Select Tech Rep Mode Machine Adjust LPH Rank and change the value of LPH Rank to 1 When the LPH Unit has been rein stalled be sure to run Stabilizer available from Image Adjust of the Tech Rep mode 403616263300 4 3 47 Sensor Y M C
61. 2 Remove four Screws 2 403616216100 3 Remove the Flat Cable 3 4 Remove the Control Panel 4 o c 2 4 3 8 1 1 Slide out the Tray 1 1 2 Slide out the Tray 1 3 while press ing the Slide Locks 2 at both ends 2 44 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 3 9 Tray 2 4036161650 1 40361616601 4 3 10 Scanner Motor Drive Board Other Slide out the Tray 2 1 Remove one Screw 2 and remove the Stopper 3 Slide out the Tray 2 while pressing the Slide Locks 4 2 Remove the IR Upper Rear Cover 2 42 Remove three Connectors 1 and four Board Supports 2 Remove the Scanner Motor Drive Board 3 2 45 Other bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 3 11 CCD Unit Removal Procedure Remove the Original Glass 2 43 Remove seven Screws 1 and remove the CCD Unit Cover 2 lt 403616261300 3 Remove four Screws 3 and Flat Cable 4 and remove the CCD Unit 5 Il Maintenance B Reinstallation Procedure 1 Align the CCD Unit with the center of the graduations as illustrated on the left and then tighten the four screws 403616205201 Reinstall the Original Glass Turn ON the Power Switch Carry out the adjustment procedure for CD Mag If th
62. Operation characteris Symbol Panel display Part Signal name tics Panel display 1 0 PC13 FN Home Exit Roller Home Position Sensor Blocked Unblocked Exit roller Home Stapler Home Sensor 1 Unblocked Blocked Stapler 1 Empty St 1 Needle Staple Empty Detecting Sensor 1 Unblocked Blocked Self Self Priming Sensor 1 Unblocked Blocked Priming S1 S2 FN Elevate Tray Raised Elevator Tray Upper Limit Switch ON OFF S3 FN Lowered Elevator Tray Lower Limit Switch PC10 FN Home Shift Shift Home Position Sensor Blocked Unblocked PC11 FN Shift Speed Shift Motor Pulse Sensor Unblocked Blocked 7 lt 3 3 Mechanical adjustment FS 501 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 3 Mechanical adjustment 3 1 Adjustment of the solenoids 3 1 1 Adjustment of the Upper Lower Entrance Switching Solenoid SL1 FN 1 Loosen the screw 1 that secures 3 the solenoid in position 2 Move the solenoid 2 up and down m 16 A and lower the lever 3 downward At D this time find a position at which the __ 2 clearance at portion A becomes 0 5 mm or less Then tighten the screw 1 468416250300 3 1 2 Adjustment of the 1st Tray Entrance Selecting Solenoid SL2 FN 1 Loosen the screw 1 that secures 5 Qt m the solenoid in position pl EC 2 Move the solenoid 2 to the right or left and when dimension B mea B sures 3 6 mm tighten
63. seesesssesseeeeeeeneneennen ene 3 75 4 10 Settings in Counter 4 10 1 Procedures nite cere nine m etr reme 4 10 2 Lio capa i enc eet i dre c odi EET Trouble repere rt o cere eer aperte E 4 10 5 WANING eere Me n 4 10 6 Maintenance aen e Pra eager eo AA ti EEUU DOE emen a er 4 11 1 Image tenter ente nn tete ege eines 3 77 41122 SCOUNNS etr HER RUE OPPETO Ud 3 77 4 12 Settings in State Confirm cece 3 78 4 12 44 VO Check aco edat eie Eee E ere 3 78 4 12 2 Table Hc tees ees receta ote 3 88 4 12 3 Level History nennen nennen nennen nennen 3 88 4 12 4 Level HIStOty2 octo ete i ree eene naeh 3 88 4 12 5 Temp amp et tete kaTa 3 89 4 12 6 COD Ch6Ck gurgite ce er ge OR D NOEL EATER Raves a 3 89 4 12 7 Paper Passage essent nnne nnne nennen nnne 3 89 4 12 8 Option Check dee e terere e DRE CO DESEE Ta area cha 3 89 412 9 T e IO EE PRORA OI 3 90 AA2AO IW We o PS 3 90 4 12 11 LPH Status ooo eee ce cece e cence eeneeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaaeeeeeaeeeseaeeeseaeeeseaeeesteeeesneeeeeaaes 3 90 4 13 Settings in Test ertet tene thee naria 3 91 4 13 1 Procedure 4 13 2 Gradation Pattern enn inea 3 91 4 13 3 Half
64. 4582153532 0 5 Place the chart furnished with the Document Feeder in the document feeding tray 1 with the side having an arrow facing up 6 Press the Start key 45821350800 3 9 Mechanical adjustment DF 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 7 Make sure that Result is OK Then touch SET Position FD 1 Sided Result rz 8 Touch END itt 9 Touch Fin Time on the Tech Rep PESTER on Mode screen 0 0 Em If the Result is m Check and correct the skew of the document Manually correct the value of Position Correction 4 4 2 Auto adjust FD 2 Sided stop position A Adjustment procedure 1 Setthe mode to the Tech Rep Mode 2 Touch ADF Check 3 Touch Auto Adjust Stop Position 4 Touch FD 2 Sided ADF Check Auto Adjust Document Stop Position Position FD 2 Sided FD 2 Sided 458216353460 o E E 7 5 5 Place the chart furnished with the Document Feeder 1 in the docu ment feeding tray NOTE Make sure that the blank surface of the chart faces up 6 Press the Start key 458216350800 7 Check that Result is OK and then Position FD 2 Sided touch SET Result 8 Touch 9 Touch Fin Time on the Tech Rep If the Re
65. The software for writing the Firmware into Compact flash is installed into the PC N 1 Execute the setup exe of the CD ROM in which Cygwin has been stored to start the installation sequence NOTES Except for the selection of Install from Local Directory carry out installing according to the instruction from Installer during installing N Check that the destination for Cygwin installation is c cygwin Check that the source data for installation is the cygwin folder in CD drive 2 2 After installing open the Property of My Computer and click the Environmental Vari able of Advanced tab 3 Click the New in System Variable Setting Environment Variables 2x User variables for Administrator Variable New Edit Delete System variables Variable Value ComSpec C WINNT system32 cmd exe NUMBER OF PR 1 05 Windows NT Os2LibPath C AWINNTisystem32 os2 dl Path C AWINNT system32 C WINNT C WIN 4036 52620 0 2 31 Firmware upgrade bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 Setthe following two values as the Windows Environmental Variable Variable name Variable value CYGWIN ntsec HOME home username New System ariable 21 xj Variable Name CYGWIN Variable Value ntsec New System Variable 71 Variable Name HOME Variable Value Ihome
66. essen 4 44 2 6 72 C12C1 Hard Disk Error 1 2 6 73 C12C2 Hard Disk Error 2 2 6 74 C12C3 Hard Disk Error 2 6 75 C12C4 Hard Disk Error 4 2 6 76 C12C5 Hard Disk Error 5 2 6 77 C12C6 Hard Disk Error 6 2 6 78 12 7 Hard Disk Error 7 g 2 6 79 12 8 Hard Disk Error 8 8 2 6 80 C12C9 Hard Disk Error 9 2 6 81 12 Hard Disk Error A 4 44 2 6 82 C12CB Hard disk data transfer 4 44 2 6 83 C12CC Hard disk 4 44 2 2 6 84 C12CF Hard disk specifications 4 45 2 6 85 C13C8 New Transfer Cleaner Unit resetting failure 4 45 S 2 6 86 C13CA New Fusing Unit resetting failure 4 45 2 6 87 C13D1 Cyan Imaging Unit EEPROM access 4 45 E 2 6 88 C13D2 Magenta Imaging Unit EEPROM access 4 45 E 2 6 89 C13D3 Yellow Imaging Unit EEPROM access 4 45 2 6 90 C13D4 Black Imaging Unit EEPROM access 4 45 2 6 91 C13D5 Cyan LPH correction data download failure 4 46 2 6 92 C13D6 Magenta LPH correction data download failure 4 46 2 6
67. O Regist sa 0 1 0 Check END 1 Sensors 5 IR 8585 1 Home Sensor 0 0 Org Detect rg Detect 0 Sensor Sensor 3 Org Cover D 0 15 Degree 59 Detect o Sensor Sensor 5 rg Detect o Sensor 6 rg Detect o Sensor 7 Org Detect o Sensor 8 403615302680 4036fs3027e0 40361530280 403615302990 403615303060 3 79 z E 7 lt TECH REP MODE bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 C Check List 1 Sensors 1 Main body PC 101 C 201 Symbol Panel Display Part Signal Name Operation Characteristics Panel Display 1 0 PC14 1st Set Tray1 Set Sensor In position Out of Drawer position PC2 Paper Empty Tray1 Paper Empty Sensor Paper not Paper present present PC13 Paper Near Tray1 Paper Near Empty Sensor Blocked Unblocked Empty PC1 Double Feed Tray1 Double Feed Sensor Paper Paper not present present PC103 2nd Set Tray2 Set Sensor In position Out of Drawer position PC106 Paper Empty Tray2 Paper Empty Sensor Paper not Paper present present PC104 Paper Near Tray2 Paper Near Empty Sensor Blocked Unblocked Empty PC108 Vertical Trans Tray2 Vertical Transport Sensor Paper Paper not port S present present PC107 Take Up Tray2 Paper Take Up Sensor Paper Paper not present present PC1
68. d 434816261800 434816261900 ARO Periodical check Replacing procedure Remove the Rear Right Cover Remove the Right Lower Cover for 4th row 2 8 Remove the Tray3 Remove the Tray4 from 4th row Remove the Jam Access Cover 2 1 Remove four screws 2 and remove the Paper Take up Unit 3 Remove two screws 4 and remove the Paper Separation Roller Mount ing Bracket Assy 5 together with frame 2 Remove two screws 6 and remove the Paper Take up Cover 7 Remove two C rings 8 two bush ings 9 and remove the Pick up Roller Assy 10 Remove the C ring 11 and remove the Pick up Roller 12 Repeat steps 1 to 8 similarly for the 4th Drawer 2 5 o 5 c 2 Periodical check 1 1 4 Vertical Transport Roller PC 101 PC 201 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 481 282000 2 6 Cleaning procedure Open the Right Door Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol wipe the Vertical Transport Roller 1 clean of dirt PC 101 PC 201 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Other 2 Other 2 1 Disassembly Adjustment prohibited items A Paint locked Screws NOTE Paint locked screws show that the assembly or unit secured can only be adjusted or set at the factory and should not be adjusted set or removed in the field B Red Painted Screws NOTES When the screws
69. lt Board switch FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 Board switch 41 PWB AFN Finisher Control Board S SEC HD ECT E E CNS CN6 CN22 CN18 CN10 CN3 2 I INO VINO ZLNO 3 2 LED2 LEE E Ol PSW2 PSW1 sw CN2 CN 1 CN11 o Bpod 119 9139 ap TS 6LNO SNO i Bde EC E382 9LNO a Symbol Description 5 1 swi Used to adjust the folding position and adjust the center 2 point stapling position 7 2 Psw1 Used to adjust the folding position and adjust the center 2 point stapling 4 position E 3 Pswe2 Used to adjust the folding position and adjust the center 2 point stapling position 3 10 FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Board switch 4 1 1 Adjustment of the folding positions When a folding position is adjusted adjust the folding position to the stapling position Make this adjustment after replacing the Finisher Control Board or when the folding posi tion must be changed for some reason NOTE Depending on the type of paper both the folding position and the stapling position may be inaccurate In this case make adjustment independently from the Finisher In this independent adjustment from the Finisher set the adjustment value of Center Stapling Position and Folding Position in the service mode to 0 mm on the main unit
70. 1 Remove the Exit Tray of the main unit t For details of how to remove the Exit Tray of the main unit see the Mainte nance of the main unit service man ual 2 Move the green lever 1 in the direc tion of the arrow to change the mounting position NOTE When the Duplex Unit is mounted the Right Door of the main unit can jerk open by its own weight as it is opened damaging the main unit Be sure to move the green lever to change the tension strength of the cable 453515350100 3 2 Adjusting the paper reference position Tech Rep Hode Machine Adjust Display the Tech Rep Mode screen t For details of how to display the Tech Rep Mode screen see the Adjustment Setting of the main unit service manual 2 Touch Machine Adjust ADF Check Gradation Adjust 4 z 7 lt 45351 3507 1 3 Touch PRT Area Machine Ad3ust Fuser Nin 1 Fuser Temp Fuser Speed Qra petect PRT Area 1 IB Area 1 Loop Adjust LPH Chip Adjust Wenory Hardbisk 4535 3508 0 4 Touch Left Margin Hachine Addust PRT Area F Te F Left in Zoom FD 453518350960 3 3 z E o E a 5 Mechanical adjustment Dup Left Margin
71. 1 Set SW1 on the Finisher Control Board as shown on the Left figure 458318351000 2 Press PSW1 or PSW2 on the Fin direction fm direction isher Control Board for the required times to adjust the folding position H h One pressing of the switch moves the folding position by approx 0 16 mm Press to move the folding posi tion in the direction Press PSW2 to move the folding posi tion in the direction Press PSW1 and PSW2 simulta neously to clear the present set adjust ment value D 7 E lt 3 After setting the adjustment value of the folding position set all bits of SW1 on the Fin isher Control Board to OFF 4 Perform the Booklet Creation on the main unit and confirm that the folding position has been correctly adjusted If not redo the adjustment Board switch FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 1 2 Adjustment of the center stapling position When a stapling position is adjusted adjust the stapling position to the folding position Make this adjustment after replacing the Finisher Control Board or when the stapling position must be changed for some reason NOTE Depending on the type of paper both the folding position and the stapling position may be inaccurate In this case make adjustment independently from the Finisher In this independent adjustment fro
72. 1 5 22 Replacing the 2nd Image Transfer Roller Unit NOTES e If a Finishing Option is installed remove if from the main unit before trying to replace the Waste Toner Bottle When removing the Finishing Option support the horizontal transport unit with your hand to prevent if from dropping A Removal Procedure 1 Turn OFF the main switch 2 Open the Right Door 3 Unlock the blue lock levers 1 at two places 4 Holding onto the blue lock levers 1 at two places remove the 2nd Image Transfer Roller Unit 2 403616251600 o 5 c 2 Reinstallation Procedure 1 Holding onto the blue lock levers 1 at two places mount the 2nd Image Transfer Roller Unit 2 2 Lockthe blue lock levers 1 at two places 3 Close the Right Door NOTE Make sure that the door is locked in position both at front and rear 4 Turn ON the Power Switch 5 Select Tech Rep Mode Counter Life and clear the count of Transfer Roller Unit 2 22 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 1 5 23 Image Transfer Belt Unit B Replacing Procedure NOTES 2 Periodical check Cleaning Procedure Remove the Image Transfer Belt Unit 2 23 Using a dried soft cloth wipe the Transfer belt NOTES If it is difficult to clean with dried soft cloth dampen a soft cloth with a solvent Do not
73. 3 Main Erase Lamp Bk 4 10 Waste Toner Bottle Set Sensor PC32 4 Main Erase Lamp C LA3 11 Weste Toner Full Sensor PC31 5 Sensor C PWB N3 12 LPH Assy Y LPH Y 6 Main Erase Lamp M LA2 13 LPH Assy M LPH M 7 Sensor M PWB N2 14 LPH Assy C LPH C 26 5 2 lt gt v o 2 lt gt Parts layout drawing bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4036155504 0 Your BW Fusing Cooling Fan Motor 2 M15 Fusing Drive Motor M2 Fusing Cooling Fan Motor 3 M16 Synchronizing Roller Clutch CL3 Intermediate Transport Motor M14 Bypass Paper Feed Clutch CL101 Suction Fan Motor M12 2nd Image Transfer Pressure Retraction Motor M13 Toner Set Sensor Bk PC20 Toner Near Empty Sensor LED Bk PC24 Toner Supply Motor C Bk M3 Toner Near Empty Sensor PQ Bk PC18 Toner Set Sensor C PC19 Toner Near Empty Sensor LED C PC23 Toner Set Sensor M PC26 Toner Near Empty Sensor PQ C PC17 Toner Near Empty Sensor LED M PC22 Toner Near Empty Sensor PQ M PC 16 Toner Set Sensor Y PC25 Toner Near Empty Sensor LED Y PC21 Toner Near Empty Sensor PQ Y PC15 Toner Supply Motor Y M M4 Developing Clutch Bk CL2 Color PC Drum Motor M5 Color Developing Motor M6 Cleaning Brush Motor M22 1st Image Transfer Pressure Retraction Motor M11 Bk PC Motor M7 Main Motor M1 Fusing
74. A Detection timing Malfunction code Description C0991 The Tray Upper Limit Sensor PC4 LCT is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the paper lift up operation began The Tray Upper Limit Sensor PC4 LCT is not blocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor PC10 LCT after the paper lift up operation began The Tray Lower Position Sensor PC13 LCT is not unblocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor PC10 LCT after the paper lift up operation began The Tray Upper Limit Sensor PC4 LCT is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the paper lift up operating The Tray Lower Position Sensor 13 is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the paper lift down operation began The Tray Lower Position Sensor PC13 LCT is not blocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor PC10 LCT after the paper lift down operation began The Tray Upper Limit Sensor is not unblocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor PC10 LCT after the paper lift down operation began The Lower Limit Sensor PC7 LCT is blocked while the paper lift down operating B Action Relevant electrical parts Tray Upper Limit Sensor PC4 LCT Main Control Board PWB C1 LCT Tray Lower
75. ADF Chock ADF Check me Original Stop Position Original Stop Position NUN TT Cot ime gt 3 03 0 3 03 0 458216353800 am 4 Select 1 Sided Set or 2 Sided Set 616 c 5 Enterthe value from the ten key pad EN Press the ID key to change the E code To shift the position in the direction of F set the code to To shift the position in the direction of E set the code to 6 Touch END o E o E o 5 3 12 DF 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Mechanical adjustment 4 4 5 Manual adjust CD Image scan position adjustment Adjusted range 3 mm to 3 mm A Adjustment procedure 1 Setthe mode to the Tech Rep Mode 2 Touch ADF Check 3 Touch Original Stop Position ADF Check misia Set z Sided Set 7 7 Feed Set common 3 0 3 0 45821353960 4 Select Feed Set ru 5 Enterthe value from the ten key pad E Press the ID key to change the mE DN code 4 To scan the image in the direction of C C set the code to To shift the image in the direction of D set the code to 6 Touch END D 7 lt 458215351800 3 13 Mechanical adjustment DF
76. Are rolls rollers dirty deformed or worn Clean or replace the defective roll roller Are the Edge Guide and Trailing Edge Stop at the cor rect position to accommodate the paper Set as necessary Are the actuators operating correctly Correct or replace the defective actuator 1 2 Misfeed display When misfeed occurs message misfeed location Blinking and paper location Light ing are displayed on the Touch Panel of the main unit Misfeed location Misfeed access location Action LCT Paper Take Up section Right Door wu 4 3 1 2 1 Misfeed display resetting procedure Open the corresponding door clear the sheet of paper misfeed and close the door 4 1 o I 2 5 5 Hr gt Jam Display PC 401 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 1 3 Sensor layout 4 4 4502 0 1 LCT Vertical Transport Sensor PC2 LCT 2 Paper Feed Sensor PC1 LCT Q 5 e gt 4 2 PC 401 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Jam Display 1 4 Solution 1 4 1 LCT Paper Take Up section misfeed A Detection timing Type Description The leading edge of the paper does not block the Paper Feed Sensor PC1 LCT or the LCT Vertical Transport Sensor PC2 LCT even after the set
77. Change CCD Unit 4 63 I v 5 5 gt Image quality problem bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 3 9 IR System distorted image A Typical Faulty Images B Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action 1 Installation Machine is installed a level sur NO Reinstall face 2 The Rack is tilted with a lot of play YES Adjust machine leg height 2nd 8rd Mirrors Scanner Assy is not properly YES Perform Focus Positioning of the 3 Carriage aligned with 2nd 3rd Mirrors Car Scanner and 2nd 3rd Mirrors riage Carriage and Scanner Position Adjustment 4 Scanner Motor Scanner Motor turns smoothly NO Change belt Change Scanner Motor 5 The problem has been eliminated NO Change Scanner Assy through the checks of steps up to 5 Change CCD Unit E 5 3 HE z 4 64 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 3 10 A Typical Faulty Images IR System low image density rough image Image quality problem 4036fs4036c0 B Troubleshooting Procedure through the checks of steps up to 7 Step Section Check Item Result Action 1 Original Original sticks to Original Glass YES Reposition original 2 Original Glass Original Glass is dirty YES Wipe the surface clean with a soft cloth
78. IR Area 3 Position the Color Chart correctly so that the original reference point is aligned with the scale 4 Press the Start key to make a copy 5 Check point C on the image of the copy 6 If the image falls outside the specified range touch CD Mag 7 Change the setting using the Up Down key 8 Press the Start key to make another copy 9 Check the image on the copy to see if the specifications are met 10 Make adjustments until the specifications are met o E o E a 5 3 52 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 TECH REP MODE D FD Mag Functions To adjust the zoom ratio in the FD direction for the Scanner Section Use The Scanner Assy has been replaced The Scanner Motor has been replaced The Scanner Drive Cables have been replaced Adjustment Adjust so that width D on the sample copy Specification made falls within the specified range P1 300 P1 An adjustment must have been completed correctly of Zoom for FD of PRT Area D Specifications D 300 1 5 mm FD Mag Setting Range 0 990 to 1 010 in 0 001 increments Adjustment If the specified width on the copy is less than 298 5 mm increase the setting Instructions If the specified width on the copy exceeds 301 5 mm decrease the setting Adjustment 1 Call the Tech Rep Mode to the screen Procedure 2 Touch these keys in this order Machine Adjust
79. IR Area 3 Position the Color Chart correctly so that the original reference point is aligned with the scale Press the Start key to make a copy Check point D on the image of the copy If the image falls outside the specified range touch FD Mag Change the setting using the Up Down key Press the Start key to make another copy Check the image on the copy to see if the specifications are met 0 Make adjustments until the specifications are met amp 4 4 7 Loop Adjust Functions To set the correction value of the paper loop length for each system speed of Tray1 to Tray4 Bypass and Duplex To adjust the length of the loop formed in paper before the Synchronizing Rollers Use Paper Passage for paper passage check o 7 lt Use When a paper skew occurs When a paper misfeed occurs Different setting ranges are set for different transport speeds Adjustment 165 mm s 6 to 6 Range 100 mm s 10 to 10 60 mm s 15 to 15 Adjustment 1 Call the Tech Rep Mode to the screen Procedure 2 Touch these keys in this order Machine Adjust Loop Adjust 3 Select the transport speed 4 Enter the new setting from the 10 Key Pad 3 53 o z E o E a 5 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 4 8 Color Shift Correction
80. Image Transfer Belt is dirty or YES Clean dirty belt with a soft cloth 2 scratched Change Image Transfer Belt Unit if belt is damaged Cleaning Blade is not effective in YES Clean Cleaning Blade 3 removing toner completely change Image Transfer Belt Unit 4 Image Transfer Image Transfer Roller is dirty or YES Change Image Transfer Roller Roller Unit scratched Unit 5 Paper path There is foreign matter on paper YES Remove foreign matter path 6 Image Transfer Paper Separator YES Clean or change Fingers are damaged or dirty 7 Paper Dust Paper dust accumulates on Paper YES Clean or change Remover Dust Remover 8 Fusing Unit Fusing Entrance Guide Plate is YES Clean dirty or damaged Change Fusing Unit 9 Fusing Paper Separator Fingers YES Clean are dirty The problem has been eliminated NO Change Image Transfer Roller through the checks of steps up to 9 Unit 10 Change Image Transfer Belt Unit Change MFP Control Board 4 86 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Image quality problem 4 3 29 Printer 4 Color uneven density in FD A Typical Faulty Images 4036f54043c0 4036 4044 0 B Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action Image Transfer oil or other foreign YES Clean with specified solvent 1 Belt Unit matter is evident on the Image See Maintenance Transfer Belt Image Transfer Belt is dirty or YE
81. Lx GJ amp GJ 2 amp J 0 2 5 0 x o s Gs 3 C 5 9 LX 8 2 2 2 2 2 2 20 Ja 5 s 5 5 8 oe 39 7 lt 40361530250 4036f83024c0 9 Find the number on the panel to which the location of white lines or black lines in FD checked in step 5 corresponds 10 Select the color C M Y or Bk in which white lines or black lines in FD occur k If the lines occur only in green on the test pattern select Y 11 Touch the corresponding number on the panel It is then highlighted and the setting value is displayed besides the highlighted number 12 Change the setting value using the 10 Key Pad When a new LPH Unit has been installed corrections can be made for up to eight locations Corrections for up to five locations can be made through factory adjustments If white lines or black lines in FD occur therefore corrections can therefore be made in the field for three to eight locations 13 Select HYPER and color 14 Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern and check for lines 3 57 o z E o E a 5 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 4 11 Center Binding Position FS 601 only Functions To adjust the positions of center staple and folding for th
82. NN 2608 amp E3 Bees onm 463515351060 48358350600 3 4 AD 501 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 5 Touch 1st and then press the Start key A test print will then be produced 6 Measure the width of printed refer ence line A Specifications 3 0 mm x 1 0 mm 7 Ifthe measured width A falls outside the specified range enter the correc tion value 8 Produce another test print and check for width A AD 501 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 IV Troubleshooting 1 Jam Display 1 1 Initial check items Jam Display When a paper misfeed occurs first perform the following initial check items Check item Action Does paper meet product specifications Replace paper Is the paper curled wavy or damp Replace paper Instruct the user on the correct paper storage procedures Is a foreign object present along the paper path or is the paper path deformed or worn Clean the paper path and replace if neces sary Are the Paper Separator Fingers dirty deformed or worn Clean or replace the defective Paper Separa tor Finger Are rolls rollers dirty deformed or worn Clean or replace the defective roll roller Are the Edge Guide and Trailing Edge Stop at the cor rect position to accommodate the paper Set as necessary Are the actuators operating correctl
83. The Tray Lower Position Sensor PC13 LCT is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the paper lift down operation began The Tray Lower Position Sensor PC13 LCT is not blocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Ele vator Motor Pulse Sensor PC10 LCT after the paper lift down operation began The Tray Upper Limit Sensor PC4 LCT is not unblocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor PC10 LCT after the paper lift down operation began The Lower Limit Sensor PC7 LCT is blocked while the paper lift down operating C0991 _ Lift Failure 5 gt 4 4 PC 401 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Trouble code Code Item Description C0996 LCT Lock Release Failure The drawer cannot be determined to be out of position even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Tray Lock Solenoid SL1 LCT is energized after the lowering operation is finished C0997 LCT Shift Gate Operation Failure The Shift Gate Home Position Sensor PC14 LCT can not be set to L even after the set period of time has elapsed after the operation of the Shift Gate Motor M3 LCT began with the Shift Gate Home Position Sensor PC14 LCT set to L C0998 LCT Shift Failure The Shifter Return Position Sensor PC11 LCT is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the
84. e 2 43 2 2 Using a soft cloth dampened with PS alcohol wipe the Mirror 1 1 and G Mirror 2 3 2 5 c g LA osstsesoreo 1 5 13 Cleaning of the Lens 1 Remove the Original Glass 2 43 2 Remove two Screws 1 and Lens cover 2 4036126130 3 Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol wipe the Lens 3 clean of dirt 2 17 Periodical check bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 1 5 14 Cleaning of the Original Glass 1 Using soft cloth dampened with alcohol wipe the Original Glass 1 clean of dirt 1 5 15 Cleaning of the CCD Sensor 1 Remove the Original Glass tw 2 43 2 Remove seven Screws 1 and CCD Unit protective cover 2 1 o c 3 Remove two hooks 3 and the lens cover 4 403616204301 4 Usinga soft lint free cloth dampened with alcohol wipe the CCD Sensor T3 5 b clean of dirt 403616204401 2 18 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Periodical check 1 5 16 Replacing the Waste Toner Bottle NOTES If a Finishing Option is installed remove if from the Main Unit before trying to replace the Waste Toner Bottle When removing the Finishing Option support the Horizontal Transport Unit with your hand to prevent if from dropping 1 Turn OFF the main switch 2 Open the Left Door 3 Grasp the handle and remove the waste t
85. 3 Shading sheet Shading sheet is dirty YES Wipe the surface clean with a soft cloth 4 Mirror lens Mirror is dirty YES Clean 5 Lamp Lens is dirty YES Clean and reflectors 6 Exposure Lamp is dirty YES Clean 7 Reflectors are dirty YES Clean The problem has been eliminated NO Clean Exposure Lamp Change Scanner Assy Change CCD Unit 4 65 I v 5 5 gt Image quality problem bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 3 11 IR System defective ACS A Typical Faulty Images AA Colored Area of Original ABCDE gt Black and White Area of Original B Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action ACS Judgement The problem persists even after YES Change the original loading direc Level Adjustment the ACS Determination Level tion Make manual settings User s Choice 2 Adjust function has been according to the type of original 1 1 3 changed If the original contains a colored area in one of its corners the copier may fail to properly detect the colored area E 5 3 HE z 4 66 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 3 12 IR System blank copy black copy A Typical Faulty Images Image quality problem Blank copy 4036fs4038cC Black copy 40361540390 B Troubleshooting Procedure
86. 458316259000 1 3 22 Finisher Control Board 1 Remove the Rear Cover 2 zm 2 3 2 Unplug all connectors on the Board and remove the screw 1 3 Release the PCB support 2 and remove the Finisher Control Board 3 458316259200 1 3 23 Punch Control Board 1 Remove two screws 1 2 Unplug seven connectors 2 and remove the Punch Control Board 3 458316259100 2 20 FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 1 3 24 Transport Motor Unit 458316257400 1 3 25 Middle Transport Motor 1 3 26 Punch Motor 458316258400 1 3 27 Side Registration Motor 458315258500 omy R Other Remove the Rear Cover 2 3 Unplug the connector 1 Remove screw 2 and remove the Harness Guide 3 Remove three screws 4 and remove the Transport Motor Unit 5 Remove the Middle Rear Cover 2 6 Remove the harness from the Wire Saddle 1 Unplug the connector 2 Remove two screws 3 2 Remove the Upper Cover 2 5 Remove two screws 1 Unplug the connector 2 and remove the punch motor 3 Unplug the connector J1001 1 Remove the harness from the Har ness Guide 2 Remove two screws 3 and remove the Side Registration Motor 4 2 21 Other FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 o 2 Blank pag
87. A Cleaning procedure 1 Remove the Right Door i 2 7 2 Remove two screws 1 and remove the Paper Separation Roller Mount ing Bracket Assy 2 434815250900 2 3 Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol wipe the Separation Roller 3 clean of dirt 434816251000 B Replacing procedure t d 1 Remove the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy Ry E d 2 Remove two C rings 4 and the shaft 5 and remove the Paper Sep amp aration Roller fixing Bracket Assy 6 p Becareful not to lose spring at this time 3 Remove the C ring 7 the Guide 8 9 and remove the Separation Roller Cita Assy 9 434816251200 o G c 2 Periodical check PC 401 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 NOTES Install the Separation Roller Assy while pressing the holder down so that it aligns to the metal bracket of the copier Make sure that the Separation Roller Assy is not tilted to the right or left when installed 434818262300 1 1 2 Paper Take up Roller A Cleaning procedure 1 Remove the Tray3 2 Remove the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy te 2 1 3 Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol wipe the Paper Take Up Roller 1 clean of dirt 434816250100 B Replacing procedure 1 Remove the Rear Right Cover ts 2 7 2 Remove t
88. C0016 Bk PC Motor s failure to turn The Motor Lock signal remains HIGH for a predeter mined continuous period of time while the Motor is turning C0017 Bk PC Motor s turning at abnormal The Motor Lock signal remains LOW for a predeter timing mined continuous period of time while the Motor remains stationary C0018 Color PC Drum Motor s failure to The Motor Lock signal remains HIGH for a predeter turn mined continuous period of time while the Motor is turning C0019 Color PC Drum Motor s turning at The Motor Lock signal remains LOW for predeter abnormal timing mined continuous period of time while the Motor remains stationary C001A Color Developing Motor s failure to The Motor Lock signal remains HIGH for a predeter turn mined continuous period of time while the Motor is turning C001B Developing Motor s turning at e The Motor Lock signal remains LOW for a predeter abnormal timing mined continuous period of time while the Motor remains stationary bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Malfunction code Code Item Description C0040 Suction Fan Motor s failure to turn e The Fan Lock signal remains HIGH for a prede C0046 Fusing Cooling Fan Motor 1 failure termined continuous period of time while the to turn Motor remains stationary C0048 Fusing Cooling Fan Motor 1 or Fus ing Cooling Fan Motor 2 failure to turn 004 Ozone Ventilation Fan Motor s fail ure t
89. Check the copy image for any image problem If the setting value has been changed be sure to run an image stabilization sequence to make valid the new value 4 6 3 Background Voltage Margin Functions To adjust the highlight portion fog level to the target reproduction level by making an auxiliary manual fine adjustment of y of each color after Gradation Adjust Use Use when a foggy background occurs due to a printer problem Adjustment 0 5 to 5 Range Adjustment To make the background level foggier increase the setting value Instructions To make the background level less foggy decrease the setting value Adjustment 1 Call the Tech Rep Mode to the screen Procedure Touch these keys in this order Image Adjust Background Voltage Margin Select the color to be adjusted Enter the new setting from the 10 Key Pad Touch END to return to the Image Adjust menu screen Touch Stabilizer Touch Stabilizer Mode Press the Start key to validate the adjustment value Check the copy image for any image problem If the setting value has been changed be sure to run an image stabilization sequence to make valid the new value 3 62 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 TECH REP MODE 4 6 4 ATDC Level Setting Functions To adjust the T C co
90. Close Section properly 4582154503 0 Panel display and detection timing for each Panel dis play Description of error Detection start Detection timing 1 Paper Exit section Cover Set error When the Power Switch turn ON Paper Exit section Open Close Sensor when light blocked 2 Transport Tray section Cover set error When the Power Switch turn ON Transport Tray Open Close Sensor when light blocked 3 Paper Take Up section Cover set error When the Power Switch turn ON Paper Take Up Section Open Close Sensor when light blocked ADF set error When the document is set in the ADF Size Reset Switch on the main unit when turned ON 4 6 KONICA MINOLTA SERVICE MANUAL FIELD SERVICE es PC 101 PC 201 2004 09 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC Ver 2 0 After publication of this service manual the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance Therefore the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required Revision mark To indicate clearly a section revised show to the left of the revised section A number within represents the number of times the revision has been made To in
91. Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 PI1 DU Control Board PWB MC Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 PC1 DU Switchback Motor M1 DU Duplex Unit Transport Mortor M2 DU WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control Signal Electrical Component 1 Initial check items 2 28 I O check Sensor check PWB MC PJ12MC 6A ON 2 R 3 PI1 DU I O check Sensor check AD 501 8 4 PC1 DU check Sensor check m AD 501 8 D 5 M1 DU operation check PWB A DU PJ3A 1 4 AD 501 8 D 2 6 M2 DU operation check PWB A DU PJ2A 1 4 AD 501 8 D 5 7 Change PWB A DU 15 8 Change PWB MC 3 E gt Jam Display bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 1 3 8 Fusing Exit Misfeed A Detection Timing Type Description PC10 is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the paper has blocked the Exit Sensor PC30 The Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 PI1 DU is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Exit Sensor PC30 has been unblocked by the paper during a switchback sequence Misfeed detected at Fusing Exit Section Paper left at Duplex Exit Sensor PC30 is blocked when the Power Switch is turned ON a door or Transport Section cover is opened and closed or a misfeed or malfunction is reset B Action Relevant Electrical Parts Exit Sensor PC30 Control Board PWB MC Duplex Unit Transport
92. IKONICA MINOLTA SERVICE MANUAL bizhub c350 Includes Standard Controller DF 601 PC 101 PC 201 PC 401 AD 501 FS 501 FS 601 2004 03 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC Ver 1 0 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Read carefully the Safety and Important Warning Items described below to understand them before doing service work IMPORTANT NOTICE Because of possible hazards to an inexperienced person servicing this product as well as the risk of damage to the product KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC hereafter called the KMBT strongly recommends that all servicing be performed only by KMBT trained service technicians Changes may have been made to this product to improve its performance after this Service Manual was printed Accordingly KMBT does not warrant either explicitly or implicitly that the information contained in this Service Manual is complete and accurate The user of this Service Manual must assume all risks of personal injury and or damage to the product while servicing the product for which this Service Manual is intended Therefore this Service Manual must be carefully read before doing service work both in the course of technical training and even after that for performing maintenance and control of the product properly Keep this Service Manual also for future service DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER WARNING AND CAUTION In thi
93. Il Maintenance te B a El IV Troublshooting V Appendix bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 2 3 10 26 1st image transfer ATVC Black failure 4 17 2 3 11 P 27 2nd image transfer ATVC failure 4 17 2 3 12 P 29 1st image transfer ATVC Color failure 4 17 2 3 13 P 30 Color PC Drum Sensor 4 17 2 3 14 P 31 Black PC Drum Sensor malfunction 4 17 2 4 Trouble code onte ene eire eene 4 18 2 41 Trouble code list 4 18 2 5 mein err erben Enn 4 26 2 6 Solution 2 6 1 C0000 Main Motor s failure to 1 4 27 2 6 2 C0001 Main Motor Turning at abnormal timing 4 27 2 6 3 C0016 Bk PC Motor failure to turn eseeeeeeeeen 4 28 2 6 4 C0017 Bk PC Motor turning at abnormal 4 28 2 6 5 C0018 Color PC Motor failure to turn 4 28 2 6 6 C0019 Color PC Motor turning at abnormal timing 4 29 2 6 7 1 Color Developing Motor failure to 4 29 2 6 8 C001B Color Developing Motor turning
94. Image Output Time JBIGO tint en te ene t o e des BIG Ai rr cr rre reet rk ee aene ter pe eese eame JBIG2 Error JBIGS Error eene Compressor 0 command buffer stop failure Compressor 1 command buffer stop failure Compressor 2 command buffer stop failure Compressor command buffer stop failure Compression hardware 1 Extraction hardware PCI SDRAM DMA operation failure Compression extraction timeout detection Xi Il Maintenance D 2 IV Troublshooting V Appendix bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 2 6 67 C12B1 Image processing ASIC failure 1 4 43 2 6 68 C12B2 Image processing ASIC failure 2 4 43 2 6 69 C12B3 Image processing ASIC failure 4 43 2 6 70 C12B4 Image processing ASIC failure 4 4 43 2 6 71 12 0 Hard disk recognition error
95. Machine Adjust IR Area 3 Position the Color Chart correctly so that the original reference point is aligned with the scale 4 Press the Start key to make a copy 5 Check point A on the image of the copy 6 If the image falls outside the specified range touch Left Image 7 Change the setting using the Up Down key 8 Press the Start key to make a copy 9 Check point A of the image on the copy to see if the specifications are met 10 Make adjustments until the specifications are met 3 50 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 TECH REP MODE B Top Image Functions To adjust variations in mounting accuracy and sensitivity of the Scanner Home Sen sor and in mounting accuracy of the Original Width Scale by varying the scan start position in the CD direction Use When the Original Glass is replaced When the Original Width Scale is replaced Adjustment Adjust so that width B on the sample copy Specification Hi made falls within the specified range An adjustment must have been completed B correctly of Top Margin of PRT Area Specifications Vali B 7 0 5 mm 4036130200 10 0 5 mm if a scale is used Setting Range 5 0 to 45 0 in 0 1 mm increments Adjustment If width B on the copy is less than 6 5 mm decrease the setting value Instructions If width B on the copy is more than 7 5 mm decrease the setting value Adjustment 1 Call the Tech Rep Mode to
96. Test Print PWB LED s 4036140190 Evaluation Procedure Ima ge Action Result Cause Next Step Problem From Tech Rep Mode select Test Print YES Printer Initial Check Items 3 Lines SINGLE HYPER me 4 56 bands Gradation C gt M gt Y gt BkK gt Density 64 and produce a test print Is image prob NO Scanner lem evident 4 54 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 C Initial Check Items 3 e f the printer is responsible for the image problem let the copier produce a test print and determine whether the image problem occurs in a specific single color or four colors 4 Color Mono Color pte pae ist Evaluation Procedure on Image quality problem 9 403615410000 imago Action Result Cause Next Step Lines bands From Tech Rep Mode select Test Print YES Printer we 4 85 Halftone Pattern SINGLE HYPER 4 colors Gradation 2 gt gt Density NO Printer 4 69 64 and produce a test print Is image prob single color lem evident in each of all four colors 4 55 L a 5 gt Image quality problem bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 3 4 3 1 Solution IR System white lines in FD white bands i
97. The Storage Roller Home Position Sensor PC12 FN does not go HIGH even after COB4A the lapse of a given period of time after M12 FN has been energized to start spac ing pressure sequence B Action Relevant electrical parts Storage Roller Home Position Sensor PC12 FN Control Board PWB A Storage Roller Rolls Spacing Motor M12 FN WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical compo nents Check the motor and sensor connectors 1 for proper connection and correct as necessary Check the connector of motor for proper 2 drive coupling and correct as neces sary 3 PC12 FN I O sensor check PWB A FN PJ20A FN 6 H 7 M12 FN operation check when the Power Switch is turned OFF and ON EINE SR 5 PWB A FN replacement 5 2 3 5 C0B50 Stapling Motor drive malfunction A Detection timing Malfunction code Description 50 A fault is found in the Staple Motor B Action 2 WIRING DIAGRAM 5 Step Action Location gt Control signal Electrical compo nents Check the Stapling motor connectors for 1 proper connection and correct as nec essary Check the connector of Stapling motor 2 for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary FS 501 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Trouble code 2 3 6 COB80 Shift Motor M8 FN drive malfuncti
98. bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Utility Mode 3 2 Utility Mode function setting procedure 3 2 1 Procedure 1 Press the Utility key 2 The Utility mode screen will appear Utility press es M Counter List cm PUser s 1 program Choice 2 ad Recall 4 Sett in Indicator 4 Admin Mode Delete Couerage 4036153033 0 3 2 2 Exiting Touch the Fin Time key 3 2 3 Changing the setting value in Utility Mode functions Use the Up Down key to enter or change the setting value Use the 10 Key Pad to enter the setting value To change the setting value first press the Clear key before making an entry z E 7 lt Utility Mode bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 3 3 Settings in the store 3 3 1 Reset Mode Functions To register the copy mode functions or scanner mode functions The copier is initialized at the following timings The Power Switch is turned ON Panel is reset An Interrupt mode is canceled Auto panel reset The access entry screen for Volume Track is changed Application is changed Use To match the copying functions set up upon resetting to user s need Setting Procedure Current Mode The copy mode or scanner mode functions set arbitrarily on the panel are regis tered Factory Default The factory set copy mode or scanner mode functions are regi
99. mand prompt 5 Use the Command prompt to move into the uncompressed directory 6 Specify the Drive of Compact flash which was recognized through the procedure 3 and execute the mkcf bat Input the C TSS2 card_work gt mkcf F Drive number in the below figure and push the Enter ommand Prompt Microsoft Windows 2666 Version 5 00 2195 1 lt C Copyright 1985 1999 Microsoft Corp gt 18552 15852 gt card_work C TSS2 card_work gt mkcf 403616262460 7 the mkcf bat is executed data writing into the Compact flash is started 8 Upon completion of writing CHECKSUM is executed If CHECKSUM value is precisely matched VERIFY OK appears SUM 8823 Uerifu Check CHECK SUM UERIFV OK 4036 52625 0 9 Remove the Compact flash from PC NOTE When removing the Compact flash be sure to check if data is written as normal and then remove it according to the precise removing method 2 33 2 Firmware upgrade bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 3 2 Firmware rewriting The F W is updated using the Compact flash 3 2 1 Updating method NOTE NEVER remove or insert the Compact Flash card with the machine power turned ON 1 With the Power Switch in the OFF position unplug the power cord from the power outlet n 2 Remove one screw 1 and the metal N 43 Blanking Plate 2 SN
100. sscsecsseccessesseeseseseeseaesssceeseessesesneseneeeseeeseens 5 2 Test mode operations s sisia riia i ki a a ennt nter enne 5 3 Operation in each test mode operation 5 3 1 tst Iray cinereae ere et 5 3 2 Elevator Tray EXil iine nee ere de cens 3 8 5 3 9 Finisher Wray Exits irren rhet tenete temen 3 8 5 3 4 Shifting Operation ierant tenen ere rotae 3 8 5 3 5 Aligning Plate Operation 3 9 5 3 6 Stapling Unit CD Movement 3 9 5 3 7 Exit Roller Rolls 3 9 5 3 8 Storage Roller Rolls Spacing 3 10 5 3 9 Elevator Tray Operation 3 10 5 3 10 Sensor Test arreter xin eee e E s 3 10 IV Troubleshooting 1 Jam Display 1 1 Initial CROCK items tonne en t nene n tn rennes 4 1 1 2 Misfeed display oce nein eterne rre dene 4 1 1 2 1 Misfeed display resetting 4 1 t3 SensorlayoUl ee nnne ee menie heri t enne 1 4 Solution cre tree rr eee nene ne n d E n ina 1 4 1 Transport section misfeed 1 4 2 Exit section misfeed eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenenenenneennnnnnn nnne 1 4 8 Job Tray Exit section misfeed 5 601 4 4 1 4 4 Elevator Tray Exit section misfeed sessseen 4 5 1 4 5 Paper Sta
101. 2 3 ADF Paper Passage rene eere i dnd ner nae 3 3 3 exeo O M 3 1 Check procedure Il Maintenance D E IV Troublshooting V Appendix Il Maintenance te B a El IV Troublshooting V Appendix DF 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 3 2 VO CHECK ett retenir Deed rive eee On erat 3 4 3 2 1 O check sereen yoray aun a a e nip e ain ated 3 4 4 Mechanical adjustment remet tn enr cene 3 6 4 1 Adjustment of the tray volume sssssseeenenn nnns 3 6 4 2 Adjustment of the document edge guide reference position 3 7 4 3 Adjustment of the document skew sseseenne en 3 8 4 4 Adjustment of the document stop position 3 9 4 4 1 Auto adjust FD 1 Sided Stop 3 9 4 4 2 Auto adjust FD 2 Sided stop 5 3 10 4 4 3 Auto adjust CD image scan start position 3 11 4 4 4 Manual adjust FD 1 Sided 2 Sided document stop position adjustment 3 12 4 4 5 Manual adjust CD Image scan position adjustment 3 18 4 5 Adjustment of the loop value eesseseeeeeennneneeeennee
102. 2 6 15 C004F Cooling Fan Motor 2 s failure to turn Relevant Electrical Parts Cooling Fan Motor 2 M10 Control Board PWB MC WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control Signal Electrical Component 1 Check the connector of motor for proper connec tion and correct as necessary 2 Check the fan for possible overload and correct pn u as necessary 3 M10 operation check PWB MC PJ5MC 7 LOCK 26 U PWB MC 5 6 REM 4 Change PWB MC 4 32 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 2 6 16 Malfunction code C0060 Fusing Drive Motor s failure to turn Relevant Electrical Parts Fusing Drive Motor M2 Control Board PWB MC WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control Signal Electrical Component 1 Check the M2 connector for proper connection e Nu and correct as necessary 2 Check the Fusing Unit drive for possible over u load and correct as necessary 3 Check the PWB MC connector for proper con PWB MC PJ6MC 7 DC24 V 15 R nection and correct as necessary 4 M2 operation check PWB MC PJ11MC 13A LOCK 2 N PWB MC PJ11MC 10A REM 5 Change PWB MC Es 2 6 17 C0061 Fusing Drive Motor turning at abnormal timing Relevant Electrical Parts Fusing Drive Motor M2 Control Board PWB MC WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control Signal Electrical Component 1 M2 operation check PWB MC
103. 2004 This table shows the adjustment items that are required when a part of the machine has been replaced Priority order if applicable during the adjustment procedures is indicated by the corresponding number in the circle 5PumesAueunsn py eyepdn M 4 eino2ex3 uondo einoex3 Je9 2 ein2ex3 8 5 2 3 4 6 7 01 G SIG 3 2 2 1 5 uoneusiDeu odilv 55210 2 1 Buisseoojg eoejdou dJIN 1 eoejdeu 2 2 Josueg 1euueog Assy 1euueog 1 JOJO JeuueoS pulM 4 2 2 5 3 3 2 3 1 10 Assy 3 3 4 4 2 2 1 A JOSUaS ezis eoejdeu 3 2 1 Je oUJeH 15 Jedeg eoejdeu 2 9 10 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 3 3
104. 4 Imaging Unit Dirty on the outside YES Clean The problem has been eliminated NO Change Imaging Unit 3 through the checks of steps up to 4 Change Ey 9 10 4 Change LPH Unit 4 80 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 3 23 A Typical Faulty Images Printer Monocolor blank copy black copy Image quality problem Blank copy 4036fs4038cC Black copy 40361540390 B Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action Image Check A blank copy occurs YES LPH Unit connector for 1 Check the LED Drive Board con nectors for proper connection Imaging Unit Coupling of IU drive mechanism NO Check and correct drive transmit 2 is installed properly ting coupling Change IU The PC Drum Charge Corona NO Check clean or correct the con voltage contact or PC Drum tact 3 ground contact of the Imaging Unit is connected properly High Voltage Unit Connector is connected properly NO Reconnect 4 1 Image Transfer Neutralizing The problem has been eliminated NO Change High Voltage Unit 1 through the check of step4 Image Transfer Neutralizing 5 Change Control Board Change LED Drive Board Change LPH Unit 4 81 L a 5 gt Image quality problem bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 3 24 Printer
105. 5 gt FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Trouble code 2 3 9 C0B76 Punch Side Registration Motor malfunctions A Detection timing Malfunction code Description The Side Registration Home Sensor 2 is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Punch Side Registration Unit has started moving from its home position COB76 The Side Registration Home Sensor 2 is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Punch Side Registration Unit has started moving from a position not the home position B Action Relevant electrical parts Side Registration Home Sensor PI2P PK Punch Control Board PWB B PK WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical compo nents 1 Check the sensor connectors for proper connection and correct as necessary 2 PI2P PK I O sensor check PWB B PK J1006 PK 3 2 3 PWB B PK replacement 1 o I 2 5 5 Hr gt Trouble code FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 2 3 10 77 Punch Motor malfunctions A Detection timing Malfunction code Description The home position is not detected within a given period of time after the Punch Motor has been rotated a half turn An encoder clock input is not detected even after the lapse of a given period of time during operation of t
106. 7 0 mm to 7 0 mm in 1 mm increments Adjustment Instructions If deviated to the left increase the setting value If deviated to the right decrease the setting value Adjustment Procedure 1 Use the Booklet function to make one sample booklet 2 Touch Expert User Mode Center Staple Position 3 Check the sample copy and make the necessary adjustment as detailed in the fol lowing Adjusting the center staple position 4 If the staple positions deviate use these steps to make the adjustment If the staple positions deviate to the left side increase the setting value If the staple positions deviate to the right side decrease the setting value Deviated to left Deviated to right i UC gt gt u u 40361301100 4036 83012 0 Adjusting the folding position 5 If the folding position deviates use these steps to make the adjustment If the folding position deviates to the left side increase the setting value If the folding position deviates to the right side decrease the setting value Deviated to left Deviated to right gt 4 4 J 4036fs3014c0 4036 s3013c0 6 Quit the Utility mode 7 Using the Booklet function make another sample booklet for confirmation 8 Check the sample copy and repeat the adjustment procedures until there are no deviations in the staple or folding position 3 35
107. 8 1 Remove the LPH Unit s 2 61 2 2 Remove two screws 1 unplug the T connector 2 and remove the Sensor E NOTE When the LPH Unit has been rein stalled be sure to run Stabilizer available from Image Adjust of the Tech Rep mode 2 92 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Other 4 4 Mount the optional original size detecting sensors NOTE When an Original Size Detecting Sensor has been added select SET in Org Detect Option Sensor of System Input available from the Tech Rep Mode and run Org Detect Sensor of Machine Adjust Remove the PWB Cover See the procedures 1 to 4 of 2 47 Image Processing Board Connect the connector of the Original Size Detecting Sensor to be added to the Image Processing Board Replacing the PWB Cover Mount the Original Size Detecting Sensor option RO 8 CD2 Optional for the Europe U S A Taiwan 2 403616261960 How the Harness should be Placed gt FD2 FD3 FD1 0000 0000 H 0000 0000 0000 0000 q 0000 0000 403616217201 2 93 Other
108. 9 99 Temp Belt ot ATDC Bk 0 01 Temp Press ob Shows the ratio in 0 01 96 increments ATDC M ATDC Y Standard value 7 3 ATDC Bk Relevant Components LPH Unit ATDC Sensor Bk AIDC1 Shows the AIDC bare surface output reading taken last in 0 01 V increments AIDC2 t should normally be around 4 3 V The output range is 0 V to 5 V Reading taken last means Latest toner density When the Start key is pressed the output value is displayed while a test print is being produced Relevant Components AIDC Sensor Transfer Belt Unit Temp Belt Shows the temperature of the Heating Roller Temp Belt and the Fusing Pressure Temp Press Roller Temp Press in 5 increments Relevant Components Fusing Unit 4 1 3 Level History 2 END Level History 2 85965 508 0 arvc c 0 Aaus 08 0 ATVC M 0 ATVC Y 8 E ATVC Bk 0 2 5 ATVC 2nd o Q gt 4096101860 AIDC Sensor Adjust Shows the AIDC intensity adjustment value Value 1 2 e t should normally be around 40 and can range from 0 to 255 The value becomes greater as the Transfer Belt Unit has been used more Relevant Components AIDC Sensor Transfer Belt Unit ATVC C Shows the latest ATVC level which varies according to the paper type ATVC M 300 V to 3000 V ATVC C M Y Bk ATVC Y 300 V to 5000 V ATVC 2nd ATVC Bk Relevant Components Transf
109. A Detection timing Type Description The Folding Position Sensor PI10 FN does not detect paper even after the set period of time after the paper has been fed from the Transport Booklet Tray to the Folding position stapling position during stapling operation section misfeed detection Paper is not removed from the Folding Position Sensor PI10 FN even after the lapse of approx 10 5 sec after the Staple Folding Motor M7 FN has been driven during stapling operation B Action Relevant electrical parts Folding Position Sensor PI10 FN Finisher Control Board PWB A FN WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal Electrical compo nents Step Action 1 Initial check items PI10 FN I O sensor check PWB A FN CN16 FN 2 F 3 PWB A FN replacement 6 1 4 4 Stapler section misfeed A Detection timing Type Description The Staple Drive Home Position Sensor PI19 FN is not turned OFF or does not Stapler section mi return to its home position even after the set period of time after the stapler has feed detection been driven B Action D Relevant electrical parts E Staple Drive Home Position Sensor PI19 FN Finisher Control Board PWB A FN 0 3 WIRING DIAGRAM 5 Step Action Location Ex Control signal Electrical compo nents 1 Initial check items PI19 FN I O sensor check PWB A FN repla
110. ABCD 403615403000 B Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action 1 Original Original is damaged or dirty YES Change original 2 Original Cover Original Pad is dirty YES Clean 3 Original Cover does not lie flat YES Change Original Cover if it is deformed or hinges are broken 4 Original Glass Original Glass is dirty YES Wipe the surface clean with a soft cloth 5 Shading sheet Shading sheet is dirty YES the surface clean with a soft cloth 6 Mirror lens Mirror is dirty YES Clean 7 Lamp ens is dirty YES Clean and reflectors 8 Exposure Lamp is dirty YES Clean 9 Reflectors are dirty YES Clean Photo Density The problem is eliminated when the NO Try another exposure level in 10 image is produced in the Manual Manual exposure setting The problem has been eliminated NO Change Scanner Assy ix through the checks of steps up to 10 Change CCD Unit I v 5 5 gt 4 59 Image quality problem bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 3 5 IR System blurred image blotchy image A Typical Faulty Images ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE B Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action 1 Original Original does not lie flat YES Change original 2 Original Cover Origina
111. Density 255 Setting e of Print 1 to 999 Procedure Select SINGLE single copy or MULTI multi copy Select FEET or HYPER Select Gradation or Resolution if HYPER has been selected Type the density level 0 to 255 4 13 8 LPH Pattern Functions To produce an LPH pattern o Use Used for LPH chip to chip correction z Pattern SINGLE 5 HYPER Gradation 5 4036153048 0 Setting e of Print 1 to 999 Procedure Select SINGLE single copy or MULTI multi copy Select FEET or HYPER Select Gradation or Resolution if HYPER has been selected Select to turn ON or OFF the Border Line 3 94 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 TECH REP MODE 4 14 ADF Check ts details see DF 601 Service Manual 4 14 1 Original Stop Position Functions To make a manual adjustment of the document stop position and scanning position in each of the ADF modes Use When Auto Adjust Stop Position is NG 4 14 2 Registration Loop Functions To adjust the length of the loop to be formed in paper before the Registration Rollers Use When a document misfeed or skew occurs 4 14 3 Auto Adjust Stop Position A FD 1 Sided Functions Adjust the document stop position for the first side Check for skew Use Upon setup of the ADF B F
112. IV Troublshooting 5 o 2 2 lt gt FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 1 3 17 Exit Roller Lower and Paper Exit 2 14 1 3 18 Stapler Folding Drive Unit sesessseeeeeeeeeenenennne 2 16 1 3 19 Transport Roller rennen te etn teer 2 17 1 3 20 Middle Transport Roller s eseesseseseeeenneeneeenneneenennnennennnnn 2 18 1 3 21 PUNCH rnc trie enne a rer e ces 2 19 1 3 22 Finisher Control Board issii 2 20 1 3 23 Punch Control Board ette eee e terea 2 20 1 3 24 Transport Motor 2 21 1 3 25 Middle Transport Motor seseesseeeeeeeneneeenee nennen 2 21 19 267 PunchiMOIQGE n i rr erret ese De eer iine ER 2 21 1 3 27 Side Registration 2 21 I Adjustment Setting 1 How to use the adjustment section 2 CRI EE 2 1 X Check procedure eene nennen nennen nennen nter 2 2 JO check list oot necp re een rene uera e Re ERES ates 2 24 rO echeck Sereen sire hn rette 2 2 2 VO CHOCK list rrr t ee eee aon nre Rea 3 Mechanical adjustment 3 1 Adjustment of the stapling 3 4 3 1 1 DF 601 equipped machine ssseseseeeenenneeenenen 3 4 3 1 2 DF 601 unequipped machi
113. If color shift is not corrected even 11 Correction with a correction of 1 dot go to Tech Rep next step MOde The problem has been eliminated NO Change Image Transfer Roller through the checks of steps up to 11 Unit 12 Change Image Transfer Belt Unit Change MFP Control Board 4 93 I v 5 gt Image quality problem bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 3 34 Printer 4 Color void areas white spots A Typical Faulty Images Void areas White spots A036fs4051c0 4036fs4050cO B Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action Image Check There are void areas at the front YES 4 91 1 side or high density section There are void areas in the trailing YES Perform 2nd Transfer Adjust of 2 edge Image Adjust under Tech Rep mode Transfer Belt Unit Fingerprints oil or other foreign YES Clean with specified solvent 3 matter is evident on the Transfer See Maintenance Belt Transfer Belt is dirty or scratched YES Clean dirty belt with a soft cloth 4 Change Transfer Belt Unit if belt is damaged 5 Transfer Roller Transfer Roller is dirty or scratched YES Change Transfer Roller Unit Unit Charge Neutralizing Cloth is not NO Correct or change 6 separated and ground terminal is connected properly 7 Paper path There is foreign matter on paper YES Remove foreign
114. Light ing are displayed on the Touch Panel of the main unit Misfeed location Misfeed access location Action Paper Exit Turnover section Paper Exit section Cover Wy 4 4 Transport section Paper Take Up section wy 4 3 Cover Paper Take Up section Paper Take Up section gi 4 2 Cover Transport Tray section Paper Exit section Cover Wy 4 5 1 2 1 Misfeed display resetting procedure Open the corresponding door clear the sheet of paper misfeed and close the door 4 1 o 2 5 5 Hr gt E 5 3 HE gt Jam Display 1 3 Sensor layout DF 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 458218450200 1 Exit Sensor 2 Turnover Sensor 1 4 Solution PC6 DF 3 Pick up Sensor 2 PC5 DF 4 Registration Sensor PC1 DF 1 4 1 Paper Take Up section misfeed A Detection timing Type Description Misfeed due to Sensor paper not reached _ Misfeed is detected if the Registration Sensor PC1 DF is not turned ON within the Registration preset time after the Take up Motor M1 DF started normal rotation Misfeed due to paper not reached the Pick Up Sensor Misfeed is detected if the Pick up Sensor PC2 DF is not turned ON within a pre set time after the Take up Motor M1 DF started reverse rotation B Action Relevant electrical parts Re
115. Malfunction in Duplex 1 26 J Duplex 2 Is DC24 V being output from PJ6PU1 1 on 22 F NO Check wiring from PU1 PU1 to Duplex Is the fuse F203 on PU1 conducting YES Change PU1 3 NO Change F203 Malfunction in Duplex o I 2 5 5 Hr gt 4 51 5 gt Image quality problem 4 Image quality problem 4 1 How to read Element date bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 As part of troubleshooting procedures the numeric values set for State Confirm avail able from Tech Rep Mode can be used to isolate the cause of the image problem Tech Rep Mode Machine Adjust ROM Version m ere TT eem Md em TL E LLL Sana State Confirm I D Check ncm TA System Input _ amp dmin Password ze Initiali p green LL Cae a ES peer TU Test Print Gradation Adjust
116. O Imaging Unit Y Imaging Unit M Toner Supply Motor C Bk Toner Supply Motor Y M o Y 53 22 8 Y Toto Power Supply Cooling POWER SUPPLY SECTION ul gl Desv XER 25828 o Os o prr Ee FER 5 5 8 f icker RE 1 8 2 DC5v 5 3 GND 4 GND 5 5 pc3sv GND PJ10PU1 eur DESV DC5V GND DESV 5 Desv DESV DC15V GND GND GND GND Ta PJ11PU1 PJ7PU1 ee 1 Dc24v 2 pc24v 3 GND LLL PJ5PU1 prse GND DC24V DC24V DC24V 5 nc24v DC24V GND GND GND SND GND GND 3 DC24V PJ6PU1 1 DC24V 21 Dc24v 3 GND 4 GND SSS PJ15PU1 PJ16PU1 PJ12PU1 E Dc24v M21 LOCK DC Power Supply PJ17PU1 o M9 LOCK In 5 GND GND DC24V Fan Motor PJ4PU1 3 TS2 OUT TS1 OUT REM 2 2 REM 1_REM PJ2PU1 gt PJ1PU1 PJ1LED Bw ABD PWB LED LED Drive Board PJ7M m f Flat Cable LPH LPH Assy M Assy C PJ11Bk T LPH Assy Bk PJeM 8 lu Flat Cable PJ10Bk
117. PI2 DU 67 Transport Sensor i 6 Duplex Control Board PWB A DU in PWB A PI1 DU 5 o 2 gt 5 18 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Connector layout drawing 2 Connector layout drawing Description Number of Pin D Possible to confirm by removing external cover Not possible to confirm by removing external cover 16 15 4036fs5507c0 No CN No Location No CN No Location 1 CN31 3P 1 3 9 CN47 4P K 7 2 CN32 3P J 3 10 CN4 6P O 7 3 CN54 2P Y 21 11 CN39 4P J K 18 4 CN5 2P 0 3 12 CN40 3P F G 23 5 CN37 2P L 3 13 CN7 2P P S 25 6 CN35 12P K L 3 14 CN41 6P M N 20 x rj CN61 2P S 25 15 Blank 7P 8 CN9 6P J 18 16 CN60 8P M N 25 a 5 5 19 Connector layout drawing bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4036155509 0 CN No Location No CN No Location 1 CN44 3P G H 3 5 CN58 2P T U 25 2 45 H I 3 6 CN8 4P 1 18 3 CN18 14P B C 18 7 CN10 14P Q R 25 4 CN19 14P D E 18 5 o 2 gt 5 20 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Connector layout drawing 1
118. Rep mode Use Use to change the service code Setting Enter the new service code from the 10 Key Pad 8 digits 0 to 9 Procedure Current Service Code Enter the service code currently used New Service Code Enter the service code to be newly used Retype New Code Enter the new service code a second time NOTES The new service code is validated when you quit the Tech Rep mode after the service code change procedure NEVER forget the service code When forgetting the service code call respon sible person of Konicaminolta 3 102 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Mechanical adjustment 6 Mechanical adjustment 6 1 Adjustment of the Scanner Motor Timing Belt This adjustment must be made in the following case The Scanner Motor Assy has been removed The Scanner Drive Cables have been rewound 1 Remove the IR Rear Cover 2 Remove 16 screws and the reinforcement frame u 3 Loosen the three screws that secure the Scanner Motor mounting bracket 1 EA 403616303600 4 With the Scanner drive gear set CH screw 2 located on the right hand Tg B Side as shown on the left slide the e Scanner Motor Assy 3 to the left Oxo M and check that it is returned to the original position by the tension of the spring 4 Perform this step three times TNE 5 Tighten the three screws 2 to fix the Scanner Motor Assy into position 4036130370
119. Scanner Home Sensor malfunction 4 36 Scanner overrun failure oo ee 4 36 2nd Drawer Lift Up Motor Failure eene 4 37 Manual Bypass Paper Lifting 4 37 Abnormally low toner density detected Cyan Sensor 4 38 Abnormally low toner density detected Magenta Sensor 4 38 Abnormally low toner density detected Yellow ATDC Sensor 4 38 Abnormally high toner density detected Cyan Sensor 4 39 Abnormally high toner density detected Magenta ATDC Sensor 4 39 Abnormally high toner density detected Yellow ATDC Sensor Abnormally low toner density detected Black Sensor Abnormally high toner density detected Black Sensor Cyan Sensor adjustment failure Magenta Sensor adjustment failure Yellow Sensor adjustment failure Black Sensor adjustment failure Standard Controller configuration Memory mounting failure Memory mounting failure 0 0 eee cece cere eee Image Input Time Out oo cece cence
120. Sheets of 110g m 29 1 4 Ib or in 2 Sided Take up failure Mode Sheets folded torn or wrinkled Take up failure damaged sheet Sheets severely curled e misfed due to being dog eared or fed in OHP Film Transparency Film Take up failure Label Paper Take up failure Offset Master Paper Take up failure Sheets clipped or notched Damaged sheet Sheets patched Patched part folded or torn sheet 2 3 Paper feed not guaranteed originals f fed paper feed will be possible to some extent but trouble occurrence will be possible Type of Original Possible Trouble Sheets lightly curled Curled amount 10 15 mm Dog eared exit failure Heat Sensitive Paper Edge folded exit failure transport failure Ink Jet Paper Take up failure transport failure Sheets with smooth surface Coated Paper Take up failure transport failure Intermediate paper Take up failure transport failure Paper immediately after paper exit from the main unit Take up failure transport failure Paper with many punched holes e g loose leaf limited to vertical feeding Multi page feed due to flashes from holes Sheets with 2 to 4 holes Transport failure Sheets two folded or Z folded A3 or 11 x 17 Transport failure image deformation Sheets with rough surface e g letterhead Take up failure Sheets penciled Contamination Sheets folded Mica deformation multi page feed
121. System Choice _Admin Choice Counter Setting Machine Adjust Version _ Coverage Hate _ Reset E e UE ag SeA Admin Password Initialize Plo Lite Stop Settin tication Lock Job Authen de UE ID UT E Change State Confirm _ Test Print _ pr Gradation pr T ong 40365303560 5 1 2 Exiting Touch the Fin Time key 5 2 Security Mode Function Tree Security Mode z E 7 lt Total Counter Counter Setting Size Counter Color Mode Key Counter Message Admin Choice Admin Unit Interface Vendor Message Coverage Rate Reset KRDS Remote Diagnosis System Choice RD Mode Lock Job Authentication Mode IU Life Stop Setting __ Service Code Change 3 99 Security bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 5 3 Settings in the Security Mode 5 3 1 Counter Settin
122. The density is properly selected The Original Glass slit glass or related part is dirty Correct paper is being used for printing The units parts and supplies used for printing developer PC Drum etc are properly replenished and replaced when they reach the end of their useful service life 10 Toner is not running out B Precautions for Service Jobs 1 Be sure to unplug the power cord of the machine before starting the service job proce dures 2 If it is unavoidably necessary to service the machine with its power turned ON use utmost care not to be caught in the Scanner Cables or gears of the Exposure Unit 3 Special care should be used when handling the Fusing Unit which can be extremely hot 4 The Developing Unit has a strong magnetic field Keep watches and measuring instru ments away from it 5 Take care not to damage the PC Drum with a tool or similar device 6 Do not touch IC pins with bare hands D 7 lt 3 1 o E a 5 AD 501 Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 2 O check 21 Check procedure To allow sensors to be checked for operation easily and safely data applied to the IC on the board can be checked on the panel with the main unit in the standby state including a misfeed malfunction and closure failure condition Procedure 1 Setthe mode to the Tech Rep Mode 2
123. Use for deleting details of the current settings Setting Procedure Select Yes and Touch END to start the initialization sequence 4 8 9 Unit Change Functions To select who is to replace a unit When the unit life arrives the warning display is intended for the specific person who is going to replace the unit When User is selected Copying is inhibited When Service is selected Life warning Use Upon setup Setting Procedure The following are the default settings US Others4 Japan Europe Others1 2 3 Toner Cartridge User Service User Service Imaging Unit User Service User Service Waste Toner Bottle User Service User Service Punch Scraps Box User Service User Service 4 8 10 Reprint Functions To select whether to display the option of Reprint for Admin Mode of Utility Use Use to hide the option of Reprint for Admin Mode of Utility Setting Procedure The default setting is Enable Enable Disable 3 73 D D E o 0 2 5 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 8 11 Hard Disk Functions To configure the copier as necessary when a hard disk is mounted Use Use when the hard disk is mounted Setting Procedure The default setting is Unset Set Unset When the setting has been changed turn OFF and ON the Power Swit
124. Wait until the machine becomes capable of paper feed 10 Feed one sheet of paper through the machine Fold the copy fed out of the machine in half and check that the punch holes are aligned with each other Specifications 0 2 mm f the specified range is not met use the following procedure to adjust the Punch center position 11 Press PSW1 or PSW2 of the Fin isher Control Board once according to the direction of deviation Pressing PSW1 moves the punch position to the front Pressing PSW2 moves the punch position to the rear Each press of PSW1 or PSW2 moves the position 1 mm The adjustment range should be within 5 mm 12 Feed another sheet of paper If the punch hole position is not properly adjusted make the adjustment once again When the adjustment procedure has been completed use the following pro cedure to finish the adjustment mode 13 OFF key 1 of SW1 of the Fin isher Control Board 14 Turn OFF keys 5 6 and 7 of SW1 of the Finisher Control Board 15 Turn OFF the Power Switch of the main unit FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Board switch 16 ON key 7 of SW1 of the Fin isher Control Board NOTES Flipping ON key 7 of SW1 validates i J H L i the setting made to the fixed sys 1234567 8 tem based on the paper size as changed from the lateral registra tion motion automatic through end face detection To return the setting back to th
125. installation sequence NOTES Except for the selection of Install from Local Directory carry out installing according to the instruction from Installer during installing N Check that the destination for Cygwin installation is c cygwin Check that the source data for installation is the cygwin folder in CD drive 2 After installing open the Property of My Computer and click the Environment Vari ables of Advanced tab Firmware rewriting Standard Controller Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 3 Click the New in System Variable Setting Environment Variables 2 x r User variables For Administrator New Edit Delete System variables Variable Vale ComSpec E AWINNTIsystem32lcmd exe NUMBER OF PR 1 05 Windows NT Os2LibPath C WINNTisystem32 os2 dll Path C WINNT system32 C WINNT C WIN CR g em 5 40361 2 20 0 4 Setthe following two values as the Windows Environmental Variable Variable Name Variable Value CYGWIN ntsec HOME home username New System ariable 21x Variable Name CYGWIN Variable Value ntsec New System ariable 1 Variable Name HOME Variable Value Ihomejusername cma 4036fs2621e0 2 2 Standard Controller Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 2 1 4 Writing into the Compact flash 1 Putthe data of Firmware in the optional direct
126. 1 1 and then fit the hole B 3 with the PC Gear 2 4 hole while visually checking Mount the Color PC Drum Motor 5 while two hole positions are well set Reinstall the Upper Frame Assy 2 77 o c 4 3 38 Developing Motor bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Remove the PWB Box 2 73 Remove eight Connectors 1 on the High Voltage Unit 1 Remove two Screws 2 and remove the Harness Holder 3 Remove four Screws 4 and Con nector 5 and remove the Color Developing Motor 6 Cautions when mounting the Color Developing Motor Before mounting the Color Developing Motor be sure to check the assembled position of PC Gear If its position is improper make positioning adjustment A Checking method 4036 2638 0 1 Slowly turn the PC 1 1 and fit the hole A 3 and B 4 with the Gear holes as shown on the above figure 2 Visually check if the hole A 3 and B 4 are fit with each Gear hole at the same time 2 78 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4036 s2639c0 4 3 39 Bk PC Motor 1 403618210900 Other Adjusting method Remove seven Screws and the Upper Frame Assy Turn the PC Gear 3 1 and fit the hole C 2 with the PC Gear 3 1 hole while visually checking Fix the PC Gear 3 1 and then fit the hole B
127. 17 Exit Roller Lower and Paper Exit Belt 1 Remove the Tray Section x 2 12 2 Slide the Aligning Plate Front 2 and the Aligning Plate Rear 3 out side to remove them from the Tray 1 458316255900 2 14 FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 458310258100 458310258200 13 458316258400 Other Remove two Holders 4 and remove the Finisher Tray Stopper 5 Remove the screw 6 and remove the Paper Guide Front 8 while dis engaging two claws 7 Remove the screw 9 and remove the Paper Guide Rear 11 while disengaging the claw 10 2 Remove two C clips 12 and move two bushings 13 inside respec tively Remove four screws 14 and remove the Exit Roller Lower sec tion 15 by lifting it 2 15 Other FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 8 Remove the Exit Roller Lower 16 and two Paper Exit Belts 17 458316256500 NOTE When installing align the edge of claws of the Paper Exit Belt 18 458316256600 1 3 18 Stapler Folding Drive Unit o c 2 1 Remove the Rear Cover 2 3 2 Open the Front Door 1 and slightly pull out the stapler section 2 458316256700 3 Remove screw 3 and remove the interface cable presser 4 4 Remove the Harness from seven Harness Saddles
128. 2 PWB MFP 2 6 97 C3332 Scanner Section undefined malfunction Relevant Electrical Parts Scanner Assy CCD Sensor Board PWB A Image Processing Board PWB C WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control Signal Electrical Component 1 Correct the connector connection between PWB RT A and PWB C if faulty 2 Change PWB C 3 Change PWB A 2 6 98 C3333 Engine Section undefined malfunction Relevant Electrical Parts Control Board PWB MC WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location 5 Control Signal Electrical 2 Component 1 Check the PWB MC connector for proper con 5 nection and correct as necessary 2 Change PWB MC 4 47 Malfunction code bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 2 6 99 C3E00 NVRAM initialization failure 2 6 100 C3E01 initialization failure 2 6 101 C3E02 NVRAM initialization failure A WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control Signal Electrical Component 1 Call responsible person of Konicaminolta 2 6 102 X C3F00 Vendor connection failure Relevant Electrical Parts Control Board PWB MC Coin Vendor Japan Coin Vendor Kit North America Europe WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control Signal Electrical Component 1 Check the Vendor connector for proper u u tion and correct as necessary 2 Check the PWB MC
129. 2 Connector layout Crawing ee eee cece cece cess eseeseeseeeseeeeaeesseeenaeseeeesaeenaeenaees 5 19 3 BELICE 5 23 Main hito enter mete ene ee np pen Herne 5 23 3 2 DF 501 3 21 1ssided mode eerte eene tees D epe ere 5 24 3 2 2 Mixed original detection mode 5 28 XV Il Maintenance D 2 5 IV Troublshooting V Appendix bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 IlI Bunooysiqnoly Al xipueddy A xvi bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 System configuration General 1 System configuration 1 2 System Front View 13 UL 4036fs1001j0 1 Machine 8 Job Separator JS 601 2 Automatic Duplex Unit AD 501 9 Finisher FS 601 3 Paper Feed Cabinet PC 201 10 Punch Kit PK 501 for FS 601 4 Paper Feed Cabinet PC 101 11 Reverse Automatic Document Feeder DF 601 5 Desk DK 501 12 Original Cover OC 501 6 Paper Feed Cabinet PC 401 13 Working Table WT 501 7 Finisher FS 501 1 1 System configuration bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 2 2 System Rear View 6 PC 101 PC 201 PC 401 403618100290 1 Machine 7 Local Interface Kit EK 501 2 Vender Kit VK 501 8 Mechanical Counter South Central America North America Europe Only 3 Data Terminal DT 105
130. 3 Touch these keys in this order Machine Adjust Org Detect Sensor 4 Press the Start key 3 45 7 2 o S z E o E a 5 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 4 5 PRT Area A Top Margin Functions To vary the print start position in the FD direction for each of different paper types in Tray1 Specification Use The LPH Unit has been replaced The paper type has been changed The image on the copy deviates in the FD direction Afaint image occurs on the leading edge of the image Adjustment Width A on the test pattern produced should 4 fall within the following range Width Specifications 5 0 0 5 mm Setting Range 3 0 mm to 43 0 mm in 0 2 mm increments 4036fs3009c0 Adjustment Instructions If width A is longer than the specifications make the setting value smaller than the cur rent one If width A is shorter than the specifications make the setting value greater than the cur rent one Adjustment Procedure Select according to the paper used on the Paper Type Setting Dial Touch Machine Adjust gt PRT Area gt Top Margin Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern If width A falls outside the specified range change the setting using
131. 3 with the PC Gear 2 4 hole while visually checking Mount the Color Developing Motor 5 while two hole positions are well set Reinstall the Upper Frame Assy 2 Remove the PWB Box 2 73 Remove four Screws 1 and Con nector 2 and remove the Bk PC Motor 3 2 79 Other bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 3 40 1st Image Transfer Pressure Retraction Motor Remove the PWB Box 2 73 Remove the High Voltage Unit 1 2 51 Remove two Screws 1 and Connec tor 2 and remove the Dust Suction Fan Assy 3 4 Remove two Screws 4 and remove the High Voltage Unit 1 Fixing plate B 5 Remove two Screws 6 and Connec tor 7 and remove the 1st Image Transfer Pressure Retraction Motor 8 Il Maintenance 4 3 41 2nd Image Transfer Pressure Retraction Motor 1 Open the Right Door 2 Unlock the tab and remove the Transport Unit Assy 1 403616252800 2 80 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 403616253100 403615253200 4 3 42 Intermediate Transport Motor 403616211301 Other 3 Remove four screws 2 unplug the connector 3 and remove the gear Assy 4 and motor Assy 5 4 Remove two screws 6 and the 2nd Image Transfer Pressure Retraction Motor 7 1 Open the Right Door 2 Remove the Lock claw to make free conditions o
132. 3 1 Adjusting the paper reference 3 4 3 2 Shifter movement timing belt adjustment snenee 3 6 IV Troubleshooting 1 Jam Display s rre eno e eternamente pi ree n 4 1 Il Maintenance D E IV Troublshooting V Appendix Il Maintenance te B a El IV Troublshooting V Appendix PC 401 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 1 4 Initial check items cnc eei eee cot entente erai 4 1 1 2 Misfeed display eher al eroe ee 4 1 1 2 1 Misfeed display resetting procedure seen 4 1 E3 Sensor layout neri mente nente rcr Iren 4 2 VAY Solution entree cei cet dece eda cede td d etre 4 3 141 LCT Paper Take Up section misfeed sene 4 3 2 Trouble Code man t tee ero t Bret cte Bee cede td ea eed 4 4 2 1 Trouble code display mee ee 4 4 2 22 gt Trouble od list ede tou es ident ee uy Cc eee 4 4 2 21 HOWTO 4 5 2 9 ERU c e Rd 2 3 1 C0990 LCT Elevator Motor Failure 2 3 2 C0991 LCT Lift Failure erret treten 2 3 3 C0996 LCT Lock Release Failure 4 8 2 3 4 C0997 LCT Shift Gate Operation Failure
133. 34 DC Power Supply 2 53 35 LED Drive Board 2 55 36 Paper Type Board 2 56 37 Tech Rep Setting Switches Board 2 56 38 Tray2 Board 2 57 39 Tray2 Paper Size Board 2 57 40 Inverter Board 2 58 2 37 g E Other bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Section Part name Ref Page 2 58 2 59 2 61 2 63 2 65 2 66 2 73 2 74 2 74 2 75 2 75 2 76 2 78 2 79 2 80 2 80 2 81 2 83 2 86 2 87 2 88 2 92 5 Multi Bypass Unit g Unit Hopper Unit LPH Unit Scanner Motor 8 8 Scanner Assy Scanner Wire PWB Box Main Motor Fusing Drive Motor Toner Supply Motor C Bk Toner Supply Motor Y M Color PC Drum Motor Color Developing Motor Bk PC Motor 1st Image Transfer Pressure Retraction Motor 88 5 Others 2nd Image Transfer Pressure Retraction Motor o 2 Intermediate Transport Motor Fusing Pressure Roller Pressure Retraction Motor Cleaning Brush Motor AIDC Registration Sensor 1 2 LPH Assy ATDC Sensor Y M C 88 2 38 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Other 43 Disassembly Assembly procedure 4 3 1 IR Right Cover Front Right Cover Bypass Right amp Left Cover g 4036fs2050c1 Remove four Screws 1 and remove the IR Right Cover 2 Remove t
134. 4 Remove four Screws 6 and remove the Multi Bypass Unit 7 2 7 4 3 26 Toner Hopper Unit 1 Open the Front Door 2 Remove the Toner Cartridge C M Y Bk 3 Remove the IU C M Y Bk NOTE After the Imaging Unit has been removed from the main unit wrap it in the light shielding cloth and store it in a dark place DO NOT leave the Imaging Unit exposed to light for a extended period of time as it will become damaged 4 Remove the Left Front Cover and Panel Cover 2 40 Remove two Screws 1 and remove the Front Right Cover 2 a 2 59 o G c Other 403616208300 403616208400 403616208501 2 60 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 6 Remove two screws 3 and the Front Door Switch cover 4 7 Remove two Terminals 5 NOTE For installation of Hopper Unit con nect the Terminals in the sequence of blue and then white from upper 8 Disconnect five connectors 6 9 Remove five screws 7 and the Toner Hopper Unit 8 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Other 4 3 27 LPH Unit 1 Open the Front Door 2 Slide out the IU C M Y Bk NOTE After the IU has been pulled out place the IU lock lever back into the locked posi tion When installing the Imaging Unit into the main unit make sure that the Toner s
135. 4036fs5513c0 1 Transport Roller Motor M2 LCT 13 Paper Descent Key UN1 LCT Shifter Return Position Sensor 2 Right Lower Door Sensor PC5 LCT 14 PC11 LCT LCT Vertical Transport Sensor m 3 PC2 LCT 15 Tray Lower Position Sensor PC13 LCT E F Shift Tray Paper Empty Sensor 4 Tray Upper Limit Sensor PC4 LCT 16 PC9 LCT Shifter Home Position Sensor 5 Paper Feed Sensor PC1 LCT 17 PC12 LCT 6 Upper Paper Empty Sensor PC3 LCT 18 Shift Gate Motor M3 LCT Shift Gate Home Position Sensor 7 Paper Empty Board PWB E LCT 19 PC14 LCT 8 Elevator Motor M5 LCT 20 Interface Board PWB H LCT Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor 9 PC10 LCT 21 Main Control Board PWB C1 LCT 10 Lower Limit Sensor PC7 LCT 22 Tray Lock Solenoid SL1 LCT 11 Shift Motor Pulse Sensor PC8 LCT 23 Tray Set Sensor PC6 LCT 12 Shift Motor M4 LCT 24 Paper Feed Motor M1 LCT 26 5 o 2 gt 5 11 Parts layout drawing bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 1 5 FS 501 Option 22 2 7 3 pi gt 4 S 6 1 2 p 9 12 403616551400 CD Aligning Home Position Sensor 1 Upper Cover Sensor PC18 FN 12 PC9 FN 2 1st Tray Full Sensor PC6 FN 13 Shift Home Position Sensor PC10 FN 3 1st Tray Exit Sensor PC1 FN 14 Shift Motor Pulse Sensor PC11 FN 4 Lower Entrance Sensor PC2 FN 15 Shift
136. 55 Y SND BI Ense z SY 9 PC29 ON Sin 14 Y T RE Ne ger na p O n2 oer 2 9 Suction Fan Motor Y END 5 CN27 ZZ a y GY PJ61 PJ18NC 1 SY 5 15 1 PJ1 M1 GY PJ61 1 GY Intermediate Transport Motor Main Motor r mam a CO LEED OHP Sensor B Plug In Counter Option er GY GY PJ474 GY Synchronizing Roller Sensor EE E GY i 5 ar Tech Rep Setting RISANE 5 5 EE Switches Board 25 x Exit Sensor In 8888 8 5 x E Dre lc 7 Total Counter B Z Synchronizing Roller Clutch 2ND DRAWER SECTION Tray2 Paper Near Empty Sensor ray2 CD Paper Size Sensor S Tray2 Lift Up Motor NS ray2 CD Paper Size Sensor L Bow BIUS dE EK 501 HD 501 To Tray2 Paper Feed Motor ES PJO7MFP Option Option OED A pt ray2 Set Sensor Ne CN102 1 Tray2 Vertical Transport Motor E 213741516178 _ _ n fold mim M ae gaz PWB 2 52 Tray2 Paper Size Board DIMMS1 g EM 301 Tray2 D Se
137. 8 1 2 x 11 g m P Booklet Tray 40 a p 1602410 No of Sheets to be pages Stapled 2 to 5 sheets 1 3 5 Hole punch optional No of Sheets Paper Type Paper Size Weight Tray Capacity Exit Tray to be Stapled 4 holes A4 eurn 6010 na Plain Paper 2 poles E12 x t g m Elevator Tra Thick Paper het 161055 1 2 d 8 1 2 x 11 Ib holes 17 FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 1 4 Stapling Product specifications Staple Filling Mode Dedicated Staple Cartridge Mode 5000 staples Staple Detection Available Nearly Empty 40 remaining staples Stapling Position Rear Parallel 1 point Front Parallel 1 point Center Parallel 2 points Stapled Paper Size B5R B5 to 8 1 2 118 8 1 2 x 11 to 11 x 17 Manual Staple None Folding Mode Roller Pressure Folding Folding Position Center of Paper 1 5 No of sheets to be stapled sort staple 4 8 1 2 x 118 or smaller No of Sheets to of Sets be Stapled Rear Parallel Center Parallel Front Parallel 2 100 40 40 3105 80 40 40 61010 60 40 40 11 to 20 30 30 30 21 to 30 30 30 30 31 to 50 30 sets or 1000 sheets B B4 8 1 2 x 14 or larger No of Sheets to No of Sets be Stapled Rear Parallel Center Parallel Front Parallel 2 100 50 50 3105 80 40 40 61010
138. 9 Key Counter Kit KIT 1 South Central America North America Only 4 Dehumidifier Heater 1C 10 Hard Disk HD 501 5 Video Interface Kit VI 501 11 Expanded Memory Unit EM 301 6 Image Controller IC 401 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Product specifications 2 Product specifications 21 Type Desktop type printer integrated with scanner Copying System Electrostatic dry powdered image transfer to plain paper Printing Process Tandem type indirect electrostatic recording system PC Drum Type OPC organic photo conductor Scanning Density Equivalent to 600 dpi Print Density Equivalent to 600 dpi in main scanning direction x 1800 dpi in sub scanning direction Platen Stationary mirror scan Original Scanning Scanning in main scanning direction with a CCD one shot reading system Registration Rear left edge Paper Feeding System Standard Three way system Multiple Bypass 150 sheets Tray1 250 sheets Tray2 500 sheets Exposure System Four LED exposure Developing System HMT developing system Charging System DC comb electrode Scorotron system with electrode cleaning function manual Image Transfer System Intermediate transfer belt system Paper Separating System Selecting either application of nonwoven fabric bias or resistor grounding low pressure paper separator claws Fusing Syst
139. ATVC failure 2 3 12 P 29 1st image transfer ATVC Color failure Relevant Electrical Parts High Voltage Unit 2 HV2 Image Transfer Belt Unit Control Board PWB MC Step Action Check the contact of the Transfer Belt Unit and that of HV2 for connection and clean or correct the contact as necessary 1 Change the Image Transfer Belt Unit Change HV2 Change PWB MC 2 3 13 P 30 Color PC Drum Sensor malfunction Relevant Electrical Parts Color PC Drum Main Sensor PC10 Control Board PWB MC Color PC Drum Sub Sensor PC35 Step Action 1 Reinstall or reconnect PC10 or PC35 if it is installed or connected improperly Clean PC10 or PC35 if it is dirty Open and close the Left Door to reset the fault If P 30 occurs again change PC10 or PC35 Change PWB MC 2 3 14 P 31 Black PC Drum Sensor malfunction Relevant Electrical Parts Bk PC Drum Main Sensor PC11 Control Board PWB MC Bk PC Drum Sub Sensor PC36 Step Action 1 the faulty sensor check procedure 1 Check the sensor for which a faulty condition has been checked for installed position and proper connector connection 2 o I 2 5 5 gt Wipe the sensor for which a faulty condition has been checked clean of dirt if any If P 31 persists change the sensor which was found faulty Chan
140. Adjust D 7 a 4 8 3 Serial Input Functions register the serial numbers of the machine and options The numbers will be printed on the list output Use Upon setup Setting Procedure Type the serial numbers 9 digits 0 to 9 Printer IR ADF LCT Sorter FN Duplex Vender 20 digits use key to enter Enter the 10 Key Pad 4 8 4 Tel Input Functions To enter the telephone number of the service contact that will appear on the Touch Panel when a malfunction occurs in the machine Use Upon setup Setting Procedure Enter the telephone number 19 digits from the 10 Pad e Use Interrupt key to enter 3 69 o D E E 0 5 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 8 5 FLS Paper Functions To set the size for FLS paper Use Upon setup Setting Procedure Select the size from among the following four F 330 2 mm 330 330 2 mm 330 203 2 210 215 9 mm 220 4 8 6 Book Erase Center Functions To change the center erase width in Book copying Use As required by the user Setting Procedure The default setting is 15 mm 15 mm 2 to 30 mm 4 8 7 Peripheral Setting Functio
141. Alert list bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 e f an image stabilization or Scanner fault occurs the corresponding warning code appears Code Item Description 5 1 CCD clamp gain adjustment failure e Itis detected that the CCD clamp gain adjustment value is faulty P 5 AIDC Sensor Front failure P 28 AIDC Sensor Back failure The output from the photoreceiver of the AIDC Sensor that takes a reading of a point of a bare surface on the Transfer Belt is 4 3 V or more during an adjustment of the AIDC Sensor The output from the photoreceiver of the AIDC Sensor that takes a reading of a point in a toner pattern on the Transfer Belt is 1 0 V or less after the adjustment has been completed P 6 Cyan Imaging Unit failure P 7 Magenta Imaging Unit failure P 8 Yellow Imaging Unit failure P 9 Black Imaging Unit failure density readings taken from the density pattern pro duced on the Transfer Belt are 0 5 g m AIDC Sensor photoreceiver output or less during max density adjustment Vg Vb adjustment P 21 Color Shift Test Pattern failure The number of points detected in the CD direction is more or less than the specified value during CD regis tration correction The number of points detected in the FD direction is more or less than the specified value during FD regis tration correction P 22 Color Shift Test Pattern failure The c
142. Board PWB MFP WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control Signal Electrical Component Select Tech Rep Mode Machine Adjust gt 1 Memory Hard Disk Adjust Memory Bus Check 2 Memory PRT 2 Check the connectors on PWB MFP for proper z ES connection and correct as necessary 3 PWB MFP 4 42 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Malfunction code 2 6 55 2 6 56 2 6 57 2 6 58 2 6 59 2 6 60 2 6 61 2 6 62 2 6 63 2 6 64 2 6 65 2 6 66 2 6 67 2 6 68 2 6 69 2 6 70 C1240 C1241 C1242 C1243 C1250 C1251 C1252 C1253 C1261 C1265 C1279 C1290 C12B1 C12B2 C12B3 C12B4 JBIGO Error JBIG1 Error JBIG2 Error JBIG3 Error Compressor 0 command buffer stop failure Compressor 1 command buffer stop failure Compressor 2 command buffer stop failure Compressor 3 command buffer stop failure Compression hardware timeout Extraction hardware timeout PCI SDRAM DMA operation failure Compression extraction timeout detection Image processing ASIC failure 1 Image processing ASIC failure 2 Image processing ASIC failure 3 Image processing ASIC failure 4 Relevant Electrical Parts MFP Control Board PWB MFP Step WIRING DIAGRAM Action Location Control Signal Electrical Component Change PWB MFP 4 43 o I 2 5 5 Hr gt Malfunction code bizhu
143. FS 501 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 CONTENTS General 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 Paper typa ueteri tere tee Y dee e x 1 1 18 17 ie ee mee eren 1 1 1 3 2 center ei d re tendere rendent 1 1 1 3 3 Sort staple Group staple sesseseeeenenneneennneenennn 1 2 14 El ES 1 2 1 5 Sort and staple capacity 1 2 1 5 1 Stacking with no stapling with the same size paper 809 2 1 2 1 5 2 Stackirigwithistapling eter rrr eR repere 1 3 1 6 Machine specifications cesssssseeseseseeeeeee nennen 1 3 1 7 Operating SMvirOniMent sie 2 en rtt eren ne hn rere E burasa ins 1 3 2 JS 601 product specifications esssssseeeeneneneennenen 1 4 2 1 2 2 2 3 Papar ty PO oen eene eene nier 1 4 2 4 Machine specifications eeeeeeeeeeeeeeenee nennen nennen nnne nennen 1 4 2 5 Operating environment esent nennen nnne 1 4 Il Maintenance 1 1 14 Disassembly Adjustment prohibited 2 1 1 2 Disassembly Assembly list Other 2 2 1 3 Disassembly Assembly 2 2 1 9 1 Upper Cover Upper Front Cover Lower Front Cover Rear Cover 2 2 13 2 S
144. Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 3 12 Settings in Volume Track E 3 20 3 12 1 Volume Track Mode E C sese 3 20 3 12 2 Volume Track Setting E C 3 20 3 12 3 Volume Track Data E C essesssssssssesserrussrnrnerusrrusrenrusrusresernrrusrnsreeeenrenee 3 20 3 13 Call erret tte tt tenete 3 21 3 14 Settings in Printer Setting 3 21 3141 Common Setting 3 14 2 POL Setting nennen eterne nre erre 3 15 Settings in Scan setting nennen 3 22 3 15 rn ren dien 3 22 3 15 2 Color Grayscale Compression eese 3 22 3 15 3 Pri Comp Method for Monochrome essere 3 22 3 16 Settings in Network Setting 3 23 16 1 3 23 5 3 16 2 tede e e etes 3 24 916 3 PIP Server eniin TO REO P nna 3 26 3 16 4 Twain 3 16 5 LDAP 3 17 Settings in Expert User Mode seseseeneeeeenennenennenenns 3 28 3 17 1 Thick Paper and OHP Film Image 3 28 8 3 17 2 Color Shift Correction Bk sss 3 29 5 3 17 3 Color Shift Correction C M Y 3 30 E 3 17 4 Black Image Density
145. Fusing Unit 300 K 2 28 tion Imaging Unit C M Y 50K EP Imaging Unit Bk 80K section Ozone Filter 150K Toner Cartridge YMCK 11 5 K Deodorant filter 1 Image Image Transfer Belt Unit 300 K transfer section Waste Toner Bottle 30 K 1 Also replace the Deodorant filter packed in the black toner cartridge at the same time when 11 5 K is reached B Option Actual Classification Parts name Quantity durable Descriptions cycle Pick up Roller 200K Replace those Paper Take up Roller 200K three parts at the 200K time 1 See each Option Ser Pick up Roller 300 K vice Man Ref Page in this manual Separation Roller Paper Take up Roller 300K Replace those two ual parts at the same time Separation Roller Assy 300 K 1 Replace with reference to the ADF Feed on the Counter Life 2 4 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 14 Concept of parts life Description Life value Specification value Periodical check Max number of printed pages Waste Toner Bottle A waste toner full condition is detected when about 8 000 printed pages have been produced after a waste toner near full condition has been detected 30 000 Fusing unit The number of copies made is counted The counter counts up 2 for paper whose FD exceeds 216 mm When printing prohibited is encountered the machine pro
146. High Voltage Unit 1 mounting plate ts See the procedures 1 to 4 of 2 80 1st Image Transfer Pressure Retraction Motor 2 Remove the Connector 1 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 345 AIlDC Registration Sensor 1 2 403616208200 B Hl 403616213700 40361621380 5 Other Remove two Screws 2 and remove the Harness Holder 3 Remove four Screws 4 and remove the Cleaning Brush Motor 5 2 Open the Front Door Remove the Panel Cover 2 41 Remove two Screws 1 and remove the Front Right Cover 2 Remove the screw 3 and the Tech Rep Setting Switches Board Assy 4 Remove the Connector 5 2 87 Other bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 6 Open the Right Door 7 Remove four screws 6 and the Syn chronizing Roller entrance guide 7 8 Remove three Screws 8 and Con nector 9 and remove the AIDC Registration Sensor 1 10 9 Remove two Screws 11 and Con nector 12 and remove the AIDC Registration Sensor 2 13 Il Maintenance NOTE Whenever the AIDC Registration Sensor 1 2 have been replaced be sure to replace the Image Transfer Belt Unit 4 3 46 LPH A Removal Procedure 1 Remove the LPH Unit 2 61 2 Holding the LPH Assy 1 with hands unlock 2 it NOTES Do nottouch the LED by
147. ID occurs due to a lowered T C after large numbers of copies have been made of origi nals having a high image density Use When there is a drop in T C Adjustment Call the Tech Rep Mode to the screen Procedure Touch these keys in this order Image Adjust ATDC Toner Supply 1 2 3 Select the color for which supply of toner is to be replenished 4 Pressing the Start key will let the machine detect the current toner density and if the density is lower than a reference value a toner replenishing sequence and then a developer agitation sequence are run 5 These sequences are repeated up to a maximum of four times until the toner density reaches the reference value If the toner density is found to be higher than the refer ence value only a developer agitation sequence is carried out 4 6 9 Feeding double sided THIN PAPER Functions e Turn this function ON when thin paper 64 g m is used in an ambience of high tem perature and high humidity in the 2 sided mode t decreases the transfer output value so as to prevent a paper misfeed from occur ring Use Use when a paper misfeed occurs when thin paper is used Setting The default setting is OFF Procedure ON OFF 4 6 10 Thick Paper Image Density Functions To fine adjust density of printed images of each color for thick paper and OHP trans parencies Use To change the density of the printed image for
148. Lower Position Sensor At lower limit Not at lower Sensor limit PC12 LCT Shift Tray Home Shifter Home Position Sensor Athome Out of home Sensor PC11 LCT Shift Tray Stop S Shifter Return Position Sensor At stop posi Not at stop tion position PC1 LCT Take Up Paper Feed Sensor Paper Paper not presen present PC2 LCT Vertical Trans LCT Vertical Transport Sensor Paper Paper not port S presen present PWB Paper Empty Paper Empty Board Paper Paper not ELCT presen present PC3 LCT Main Tray Empty Upper Paper Empty Sensor Paper Paper not presen present PC9 LCT Shift Tray Empty Shift Tray Paper Empty Sensor Paper Paper not presen present PC7 LCT Lower Over Lower Limit Sensor Malfunction Operational UN1 LCT Manual Button Paper Descent Key ON OFF Down PC14 LCT Division Board Shift Gate Home Position Sensor Athome Out of home Position S PC6 LCT Cassette Open Tray Set Sensor In position Out of posi tion PC8 LCT Shift Motor Pulse Shift Motor Pulse Sensor Blocked Unblocked S PC10 LCT Elevator Motor Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor Blocked Unblocked Pulse Sensor Pl2 DU Duplex Set Duplex Unit Door Set Sensor Close Open PI1 DU Paper passage Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 Paper Paper not present present PC1 DU Paper passage2 Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 Paper Paper not present present PC1 HO Hori Horizontal Paper Sensor Paper not Paper zontal Transport present present PC6 HO Trans Paper Detect Turnover Empty Sensor P
149. Motor malfunc e The Staple Drive Home Position Sensor PI19 FN is tions not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the clinch operation has started An encoder clock input is not detected within a given period of time during a clinch operation The Folding Home Position Sensor PI11 FN is no blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Folding Unit has started moving from a posi tion out of the home position during an initial operation e The Folding Home Position Sensor PI11 FN is no unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after a folding operation has been started during an ordinary operation The Folding Home Position Sensor PI11 FN is no blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after a folding operation has been started and the sen Sor has been unblocked during an ordinary operation An encoder clock input is not detected within a given period of time during a folding operation COB75 Punch Control Board malfunc Noresponse is received to a request made by the Fin tions isher within a given period of time during initial commu nications Noresponse is received to a request made by the Fin isher within a given period of time during ordinary com munications There is no match in the checksum values of the backup data as checked twice The 24 V power source of the Punch Unit is OFF when an operation request is made from the
150. PI12 FN is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Folding Roller has started moving from a position not the home position B Action Relevant electrical parts Folding Roller Home Position Sensor PI12 FN Finisher Control Board PWB A FN Transport Motor M1 FN WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical compo nents 1 Check the motor connectors for proper _ connection and correct as necessary Check the connector of motor for proper 2 drive coupling and correct as neces sary 3 PI12 FN I O sensor check PWB A FN CN16 FN 9 G 3 4 M1 FN operation check when the Power 9 Switch is turned OFF and ON 5 PWB A FN replacement 6 o I 2 5 5 Hr gt Trouble code FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 2 3 2 COBO5 Paddle Motor malfunctions A Detection timing Malfunction code Description The Paddle Home Position Sensor PI2 FN is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Paddle has started moving from its home posi tion The Paddle Home Position Sensor PI2 FN is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Paddle has started moving from a position not the home position COB05 The Swing Guide Home Position Sensor PI3 FN is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Booklet R
151. PWB A DF replacement 5 o I e 5 5 Hr gt Jam Display DF 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 1 4 3 Paper Exit Turnover section misfeed A Detection timing Type Description Misfeed due to paper remaining at Misfeed is detected if the Turnover Sensor PC5 DF is not turned OFF within a the Turnover Sen preset time after the Turnover Sensor PC5 DF was tuned ON sor Misfeed due to paper not reached Misfeed is detected if the Exit Sensor PC6 DF is not turned ON within a preset the Exit Sensor time after the Turnover Sensor PC5 DF was turned ON in the 2 Sided mode the 2 Sided Mode Misfeed due to paper remaining at the Exit Sensor Misfeed is detected if the Exit Sensor PC6 DF is not turned OFF within a preset time after the Exit Sensor PC6 DF was tuned ON B Action Relevant electrical parts Turnover Sensor PC5 DF Control Board PWB A DF Exit Sensor PC6 DF Exit Motor M3 DF WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical compo nents 1 Initial check items 2 PC5 DF I O sensor check PWB A DF CN9A DF 3 G 2 3 PC6 DF I O sensor check PWB A DF CN9A DF 6 H 2 4 M3 DF operation check B 7 5 PWB A DF replacement 5 E 5 5 gt DF 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Jam Display 1 4 4 Transport Tray section misfeed A Dete
152. Position Sensor PC13 LCT Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor PC10 LCT Lower Limit Sensor PC7 LCT WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical compo nents 1 Check the sensor connectors for proper _ connection and correct as necessary 2 PC4 LCT I O sensor check PWB C1 LCT PJ5C1 LCT 12 B 6 3 PC13 LCT I O sensor check PWB C1 LCT PJ3C1 LCT 9 D 2 4 PC10 LCT I O sensor check PWB C1 LCT PJ3C1 LCT 5 F 2 5 PC7 LCT I O sensor check PWB C1 LCT PJ3C1 LCT 2 H 2 6 PWB C1 LCT replacement 8 4 7 o I 2 5 5 Hr gt Trouble code PC 401 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 2 3 3 C0996 LCT Lock Release Failure A Detection timing Malfunction code Description The drawer cannot be determined to be out of position even after the set period of C0996 time has elapsed after the Tray Lock Solenoid SL1 LCT is energized after the lowering operation is finished B Action Relevant electrical parts Tray Lock Solenoid SL1 LCT Main Control Board PWB C1 LCT WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal Electrical compo nents Step Action 1 Check the SL1 LCT connector for proper E connection and correct as necessary SL1 LCT operation check PWB C1 LCT PJ7C1 LCT 4 E 6 PWB C1 LCT replacement E 8 2 3 4 C0997 LCT Shift Gate Operation Failure A Detection timing Malfunction code D
153. Position Sensor Puce CN23 T Ne 8513 16 7 Bypass FD Paper Size Sensor 3 1st Image Transfer e Clear C Pressure Retraction Motor N 4 HV2 High Voltage Unit 2 Bypass Paper Feed Clutch Color D Bypass FD Paper Size Sensor 4 Developing Bias C TE 2 4 2 25 26 E AIDC Resistration Sensor 1 Bypass Paper Pick Up Solenoid t 3 a v3 Developing Bias Bk El ay Ed Y AIDC Resistration Sensor 2 ce E Bypass Paper Size Unit 2 y 18 CN1HV1 IC Y P Bypass Lift Up Sensor RE 22119 POcDrm ch REMC REMM Grid Voltage Y Sum OR E P CDrum Ch G Control Bk 2 6 P C Drum Ch G Control C 2 F FUSING SECTION CITED PCDrum Ch SCD 2 0 2nd IT Control 4 ind 4 Grid Voltage 2nd LT MON 4 4 5 14 gt A _ GJS P C Drum Ch Corona M 2 Upper Right Door Switch BE CONA PJ20MC D 108 G Grid Voltage C High Voltage Unit 1 Option 1215155185 _ gt gt PC Drum Ch Corona C 2 202202284 1 CN2HV1 xL 8 g PSTEN 6 8 3 Grid Voltage Bk A PJ15MC 3 5 st LT REM 4 PJ33MC 7 PC Drum Ch Corona Bk 2 LESS Fusing Unit eee PJSAMC H 1st LT BK MON 4 DC24V 10 GND DC24v RY_REM Cleaning Brush Bias SEL pgs N oisi 2nd Image Transfer Fim Newtralization CH re 25 M E M e i 4 Gy
154. Pressure Roller Pressure Retraction Motor M19 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Parts layout drawing 11 4036fs5505c0 amp Right Door Switch SW2 Fusing Paper Loop Control Solenoid SL1 Control Panel UN201 Fusing Paper Loop Sensor PC4 Upper Right Door Switch SW5 Power Switch SW1 Total Counter CNT1 Bypass Paper Size Unit VR1 Tech Rep Setting Switches Board PWB S1 Bypass Paper Pick Up Solenoid SL101 Front Door Switch SW4 High Voltage Unit 2 HV2 High Voltage Unit 1 HV1 26 5 2 lt gt 5 5 Parts layout drawing bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 403618550600 1 Fusing Retraction Position Sensor PC34 9 Bypass FD Paper Size Sensor 2 PC112 2 Synchronizing Roller Sensor PC28 10 Bypass Paper Empty Sensor PC110 3 T Pressure Retraction 4 Bk PC Drum Main Sensor PC11 4 Sensor PC27 12 1st Image Transfer Retraction PC12 5 Exit Sensor PC30 13 Color PC Drum Main Sensor PC10 6 Bypass FD Paper Size Sensor 4 114 14 Color PC Drum Sub Sensor PC35 7 Bypass FD Paper Size Sensor 3 113 15 Bk PC Drum Sub Sensor PC36 8 Bypass FD Paper Size Sensor 1 PC111 5 o 2 gt bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Parts layout drawing 1 1 3 Tray 1 4 1 1 Paper Feed Clutch CL1
155. Remove the Registration Roller d 5 SMi 4 Clean the Paper Empty Sensor 3 with a brush or the like 5 Open the Paper Exit Section Cover 6 Clean the Paper Exit Sensor 4 with a brush or the like DEN 4 SN D 458216252000 o 5 c 2 DF 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Other 2 Other 2 1 Disassembly Adjustment prohibited items A Paint locked Screws NOTE Paint locked screws show that the assembly or unit secured can only be adjusted or set at the factory and should not be adjusted set or removed in the field B Red Painted Screws NOTES When the screws are removed the red paint is coated on the points where read justment is required Once the red painted screw is removed or loosened you should make adjustment Accordingly check the adjustment items in operation manual and make necessary adjustment Note that when two or more screws are used on the part in questions only one representative screw may be marked with red paint C Variable Resistors on Board g Do 1 the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions are given in Adjustment Setting D Removal of PWBs NOTES When removing a circuit board or other electrical component refer to Handling of PWBs and follow the corresponding removal procedures The removal procedures given in the following omit the r
156. SMTP Server Functions To set the timeout period for transmission Use To change the timeout period for connection during transmission Setting Procedure The default setting is 60 sec 60 sec 30 to 300 sec 3 19 4 Status Functions To carry out a transmission reception test using the Remote Diagnosis System for the standard controller Use e To out a transmission reception test using the Remote Diagnosis System for the standard controller Setting Procedure Press the Start key to start transmission The progress and results of the test are displayed on the screen 3 38 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Utility Mode 3 20 Toner Coverage Functions Displays the cumulative average value of use rate of each color of toner per A4 k The toner coverage values assume that the amount of toner used to produce A4 solid image is 100 and that used to produce an solid image is 200 Use To identify use status of each color of toner Setting Procedure Touch the Toner Coverage key to check the use rate 7 lt 3 39 TECH REP MODE bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 TECH REP MODE 4 14 Tech Rep Mode function setting procedure NOTE Ensure appropriate security for Tech Rep mode function setting procedures They should NEVER be shown to any unauthorized
157. Scanner Assy Image Processing Board PWB C Flat Cable WIRING DIAGRAM 22 Step Action Location Control Signal Electrical Component 2 1 Check the flat cable for proper connection and u u 5 correct or change as necessary E 2 Change Scanner Assy gt 3 Change PWB C 4 35 Malfunction code bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 2 6 28 C0500 Heating Roller warm up failure 2 6 29 C0501 Fusing Pressure Roller warm up failure 2 6 30 C0510 Heating Roller abnormally low temperature 2 6 31 C0511 Fusing Pressure Roller abnormally low temperature 2 6 32 C0520 Heating Roller abnormally high temperature 2 6 33 C0521 Fusing Pressure Roller abnormally high temperature Relevant Electrical Parts Fusing Unit DC Power Supply PU1 Control Board PWB MC WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control Signal Electrical Component 1 Check the Fusing Unit for correct installation whether it is secured in position Check the Fusing Unit PWB MC and PU1 for 2 proper connection and correct or change as nec essary Change Fusing Unit Change PWB MC Change PU1 HE 2 6 34 C0650 Scanner Home Sensor malfunction 2 6 35 C0660 Scanner overrun failure Relevant Electrical Parts Scanner Home Sensor PC201 Scanner Motor Drive Board PWB IC Scanner Motor M201 Image Processing Boa
158. Sensor 1 PI1 DU WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control Signal Electrical Component 1 Initial check items 2 PC30I O check Sensor check PWB MC PJ12MC 12A ON 8 2 3 PI1 I O check Sensor check AD 501 8 D 4 Change PWB MC E 5 5 gt 4 12 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Malfunction code 2 Malfunction code 2 1 Restarting This machine automatically performs a restarting sequence if a minor fault that would not damage the machine occurs during operation No screen information is given for the restarting sequence On completing the restarting sequence the machine restores its operation to its ordinary condition 2 2 Alert code The copier s CPU performs a self diagnostics function that on detecting a malfunction gives the corresponding malfunction code and maintenance call mark on the Touch Panel Touching the maintenance call mark will display the corresponding warning code on the State Confirm screen 959 Application Color Output Paper Size Reprint Pied DEP Original peppa Delete 4036fs4013e0 Maintenance call mark a 2 n 5 e gt wl Exit user Job Name Status Delete 4036140140 4 13 s 5 5 gt Malfunction code 2 2 1
159. Sep 2004 CONTENTS General 1 1 1 1 229 Papertype io eei ete eror reir et Eee rie OR rre 1 1 1 3 Machine specifications 1 1 1 4 Operating environment sese 1 1 Il Maintenance 1 Periodical Cheek oie ea mere e a 2 1 11 Maintenance procedure Periodical check parts 2 1 1 1 1 Transport Roller Roll 1 nter tnnt 2 1 1 1 2 Transport Roller Roll 2 8 2 1 1 1 3 Ventilation Section cere e o tenere rr epe recreare 2 2 2 TUM Lese Lt D d 2 3 2 1 Disassembly Adjustment prohibited items sese 2 3 2 2 Disassembly Assembly list Other parts 2 4 2 3 Disassembly Assembly 2 4 2 9 1 Duplex Unite RR aR A a Teen 2 4 Ill Adjustment Setting T How to use the adjustment section sess 3 1 2 UO CISC MM 3 2 21 CHECK procedure rere ener ree teen nere Ene nn rne 3 2 2 2 VO checklist eror perenne eere evi ete ies 3 2 2 2 1 VO check screen rente teen atre ete e ene dee opens 3 2 2 22 MO chieck listir oen eere nen 3 2 3 Mechanical adjustment eeeeseeeeeeeee eene nennen nnne nnne nnne 3 3 31 Changing the cable tension strength moving of the 3 3 3 2 Adjusting the paper reference
160. Start key 1st 6 Atest print will be produced 2nd LJ D 4 481 3508 0 3 4 PC 401 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 43488350900 434818351000 434818351100 434818351200 434818351300 Mechanical adjustment 7 Measure the width of printed refer ence line A Specification 3 0 mm 1 0 mm 8 Ifthe measured width A falls outside the specified range enter the correc tion value 9 Produce another test print and check to see if width A falls within the spec ified range f adjustment cannot be completed only by inputting numeric value perform adjustment according to the following procedure 10 Press the Drawer Release button 1 and then slide out the drawer 2 from the Paper Feed Cabinet 11 Open the Right Door 12 Loosen the adjustment screw 3 and turn screw D 4 to make the adjust ment NOTE Donot damage the passage surface of the Right Door f width A is greater than the specified value Turn screw D counterclockwise f width A is smaller than the specified value Turn screw D clockwise 13 Perform another test print and check the reference deviation 3 5 o 7 lt Mechanical adjustment PC 401 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 14 Repeat the adjustment until the reference line falls
161. Step Action 1 Correct the harness connection between PWB A and PWB C if faulty 2 Check for possible extraneous light and correct as necessary 3 Clean the lens mirrors CCD surface and shading sheet if dirty 4 Correct reflective mirror of the Scanner if faulty or change Scanner 5 PWB A 6 Change PWB C 2 3 2 P 5 AIDC Sensor Front failure 2 3 3 P 28 AIDC Sensor Back failure Relevant Electrical Parts AIDC Registration Sensor 1 PC8 Control Board PWB MC AIDC Registration Sensor 2 PC9 Image Transfer Belt Unit Step Action 1 Wipe clean the surface of the Transfer Belt with a soft cloth if it is dirty 2 Change the Image Transfer Belt Unit if the Transfer Belt is damaged 3 Reinstall or reconnect PC8 or 9 if it is installed or connected improperly 4 Clean PC8 or 9 if it is dirty Open and close the Left Door run an image stabilization sequence and select State Confirm 5 Level History 1 to check the AIDC value AIDC1 PC8 AIDC2 PC9 If the value is 1 0 V or less change PC8 or 9 6 Change PWB MC 4 15 o I e 5 5 Hr gt a 5 5 gt Malfunction code bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 2 3 4 P 6 Cyan Imaging Unit failure 2 3 5 P 7 Magenta Imaging Unit failure 2 3 6 P 8 Yellow Imaging Unit failure 2 3 7 P 9 Black Imaging Unit failure Relevant Electrical Parts Imaging Unit C Image Transfer
162. Step Action Location Control Signal Electrical Component 1 Check the M103 connector for proper connection m gt and correct as necessary 2 Check the connector of M103 for proper drive 25 coupling and correct as necessary 3 115 I O check PWB Z PJ7Z 11A ON 2 E o 4 CL101 operation check M103 operation check PWB Z PJ5Z 5 8 Pulse 2 5 2 Output a 6 Change PWB Z 8 gt 4 37 Malfunction code bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 2 6 38 COF30 Abnormally low toner density detected Cyan Sensor 2 6 39 2 Abnormally low toner density detected Magenta ATDC Sensor 2 6 40 COF34 Abnormally low toner density detected Yellow ATDC Sensor Relevant Electrical Parts ATDC Sensor C PWB N3 Control Board PWB MC ATDC Sensor M PWB N2 MFP Control Board PWB MFP ATDC Sensor Y PWB N1 Imaging Unit C Toner Supply Motor C Bk M3 Imaging Unit M Toner Supply Motor Y M M4 Imaging Unit Y WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control Signal Electrical Component 1 Perform image troubleshooting procedure if T zx image density is low 2 Clean the ATDC Sensor window on the underside of the Imaging Unit if dirty 3 Correct the ATDC Sensor spring moving part ts if faulty Clean the ATDC Sensor LED if dirty Change Sensor C M Y 4 operation check M3 PWB MC PJ16MC 4A 7A M3 19 I 6 Pulse Output M4 PWB MC
163. Surface Elev 0 Home Shift 0 4038302800 2 2 2 check list A Sensor monitor 3 Operation characteris Symbol Panel display Part Signal name tics Panel display Li 1 0 3 PC1 FN Exit 1st Tray Exit Sensor Paper Paper not Non sort1 present present PC19 FN Job Tray Exit Sensor Paper Paper not E Non sort3 present present Exit Storage Sensor Paper Paper not Pd Finisher present present PC4 FN Transport Upper Upper Entrance Sensor Paper Paper not present present PC2 FN Transport Lower Lower Entrance Sensor Paper Paper not present present PC6 FN Full 1st Tray Full Sensor Blocked Unblocked Non sort1 PC20 FN Full job Tray Full Sensor Paper Paper not Non sort3 present present PC7 FN Full Elev Tray Elevator Tray Full Sensor Blocked Unblocked PC5 FN Empty Finisher Tray Paper Sensor Paper Paper not Finisher present present PWB D Surface Elev Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor PQ Paper Paper not FN present present PC8 FN Empty Elev Elevator Tray Paper Sensor Blocked Unblocked PC9 FN Home CD Aligning Home Position Sensor Blocked Unblocked CD Align PC14 FN Stap Unit Staple Home Position Sensor Blocked Unblocked PC12 FN Home store roller Storage Roller Home Position Sensor Blocked Unblocked 3 2 FS 501 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 check
164. The hardware involved with image transfer in the memory of the MFP Control Board PWB MFP does not respond C1290 Compression extraction timeout The hardware involved with the BTC compression detection function offered by the MFP Control Board PWB does not respond C12B1 processing ASIC failure 1 Image processing ASIC 523005 on the Control Board PWB MFP does not respond C12B2 processing ASIC failure 2 Image processing ASIC PIC1200S on the Con trol Board PWB MFP does not respond C12B3 Image processing ASIC failure 3 Image processing ASIC PIC3400LITE on the Control Board PWB MFP does not respond C12B4 Image processing ASIC failure 4 Image processing ASIC BTCIF on the MFP Control Board PWB MFP does not respond C12CO Hard disk recognition error Unable to communicate between the hard disk and MFP Control Board PWB MFP C12C1 Hard Disk Error 1 Hard disk is faulty C12C2 Hard Disk Error 2 C12C3 Hard Disk Error 3 C12C4 Hard Disk Error 4 C12C5 Hard Disk Error 5 C12C6 Hard Disk Error 6 C12C7 Hard Disk Error 7 C12C8 Hard Disk Error 8 C12C9 Hard Disk Error 9 C12CA Hard Disk Error A C12CB Hard disk data transfer error Data transfer from the hard disk is faulty C12CC Hard disk unformat Unformatted hard disk is connected C12CF Hard disk specifications error A hard disk that falls outside the specifications
165. Touch the State Confirm Check key 3 Touch the I O Check key 2 2 l Ocheck list 2 2 1 check screen This is only typical screen which may be different from what are shown on each individ ual main unit I 0 Check 1 Sensors 2 panner Button Paper Detect E umo 12759 oet ensor SeParation 0 Lover 0 Cassette EgBp ener 0 Transfer Belt Shift Tray 0 Shift Motor 0 Magenta Toner ol Transfer Unit 0 0 0 puise Sensor O BUS 0 Toner Collect Take Up 0 Duplex Toner 0 Waste Toner 0 La s 0 Set Toner 0 Toner Box Set 0 Paper Empty 0 Paperpassage 1 0 Magenta Toner 0 Fusing Unit 05 Baspa ro 0 Paperpassage 2 0 5i1o v Toner ol Set o Shift Tray Horizontal Bisck Toner Fuser Roller Empty 0 Trans Unit 0 Separation 0 Lower Over Run 01 5220 2 2 2 check list A Sensor monitor 2 Operation characteris Symbol Panel display Part Signal name tics Panel display 1 0 Pl2 DU Set Duplex Unit Door Set Sensor OPEN CLOSE PI1 DU Paperpassage 1 Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 Paper Paper not present present PC1 DU Paperpassage 2 Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 Paper Paper not present present 3 2 AD 501 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Mechanical adjustment 3 Mechanical adjustment 3 4 Changing the cable tension strength moving of the lever
166. Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 12 9 Color Shift Functions To check each of C M Y and Bk for color shift amount The data is updated after a color shift correction has been made or color shift adjust ment has been completed Use Use for check when color shift is evident Setting For each of C M Y and Bk the color shift amount in X and Y directions at two loca Procedure tions one at the front and the other in the rear and the difference in color shift amount between the front and rear X and Y directions are displayed Display unit dots The shift amount is displayed with reference to Bk for C M and Y and that for Bk is displayed with reference to an ideal position 4 12 10 IU Lot No Functions To display the 10 digit lot number for each of C M Y and Bk IUs The lot number data is stored in EEPROM of each IU Use Use for checking the IU Lot No Setting e The IU lot number is displayed even with the Front Door opened however the display Procedure is blank since the machine is unable to read the lot number when the Power Switch is turned ON with the Front Door open Nonetheless the lot number will be displayed when the Front Door is closed The engine obtains the IU lot number information when the Front Door is closed 4 12 11 LPH Status Functions To check various information on each of the C M Y and Bk LPHs Use Use for checking the LPH Status Setting LPH Lot No LP
167. Vertical Transport Roller sseeseeeneeenennnenen 2 6 2 2 7 2 1 Disassembly Adjustment prohibited items esee 2 7 2 2 Disassembly Assembly list Other parts 2 8 2 3 Disassembly Assembly procedure essen 2 8 2 31 Right Door Rear Right Cover Lower Right Cover Front Right Cover 2 8 2 3 2 REAM COVO inii hh HE nV Eee rene reir 2 8 I Adjustment Setting 1 How to use the adjustment section 3 1 2 P 3 1 2 1 X Check procedure 3 1 2 2 l Q check list o erret t eterne tanen heater ri 3 2 2 2 1 VO check screen oc denen entender e reel 3 2 2 22 J O check Stic oir rne ee emere 3 2 3 Mechanical adjustment 3 3 3 1 Adjusting the paper reference 3 3 IV Troubleshooting 1 Jam Display 1 1 Initial CHECK items hene eterni ies 4 1 1 2 Misfeed display rn cerne nee eee e 4 1 1 2 1 Misfeed display resetting 4 1 Il Maintenance D E IV Troublshooting V Appendix 101 201 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 1 39 Sensor layout eret tinere e ren eere dde 4 2 0
168. When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required Revision mark To indicate clearly a section revised show to the left of the revised section A number within represents the number of times the revision has been made To indicate clearly a section revised show in the lower outside section of the correspond ing page A number within 4 represents the number of times the revision has been made NOTE Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted When a page revised in Ver 2 0 has been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 3 0 only are shown with those for Ver 2 0 deleted When page revised in Ver 2 0 has not been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 2 0 are left as they are 2004 09 20 N Adding the descriptions and correcting errors in writing 2004 03 1 0 Issue of the first edition Date Service manual Ver Revision mark Descriptions of revision FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 CONTENTS 1 1 General 1 1 1 2 1 3 Paper typo uie retener nk cie eene nde e ae e nee re 1 3 1 1 3 2 1 3 3 1 3 4 1 3 5 1 4 Stapling NON SOSt Sort To MR aina CET ciere Hole punch optional essen nennen 1 5 of sheets to be stapled sort
169. Windows NT 4 0 Windows Server 2003 Connection Ethernet 10Base T 100Base TX With a network connec method Interface tion Protocols TCP IP NetBEUI IPX SPX NetWare 4 x 5 x 6 x With a parallel connection IEEE1284 Compatible Nibble ECP 1 The following browser is required to use Page Scope Web Connection Browser Netscape Communicator version 4 5 or later Java compliant Internet Explorer version 5 5 or later Java compliant 1 The optional Local Interface Kit EK 501 is required Standard Controller Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Checking the controller firmware version I Maintenance 1 Checking the controller firmware version The version of the controller firmware can be checked on the control panel of the machine 1 Call the Tech Rep Mode to the screen 2 Touch ROM Version 3 Touch 2 4 Checkthe versions of the following Controller NM DSS MIO DPS MIOM Demo Page Font 2 Firmware rewriting 2 1 Preparations for updating the firmware 2 1 1 Service environment OS Windows2000 Drive which enables writing reading of Compact flash Compact flash with 64MB or more 2 2 1 2 Application to be used Cygwin Free software 2 1 3 Installing the Cygwin The software for writing the Firmware into Compact flash is installed into the PC N 1 Execute the setup exe of the CD ROM in which Cygwin has been stored to start the
170. administrator and enter he correct directory Failed to log on to the FTP server because of the wrong user account Check with the network administrator and enter he correct user name and password A timeout condition occurs Set a longer value for FTP Connection Time out The timeout value depends on the net work s traffic conditions and load on the FTP server See Settings and Operations for Scan Functions in Opera tor s Manual The message Server Connect error appears The network is discon nected during file trans fer Send Ping from PC to the controller and FTP server to check to see if both parties are connected to the network or not The FTP server hard disk becomes full dur ing file transfer Check with the network administrator The FTP server stops during file transfer Check with the network administrator o I 2 5 5 Hr gt E 5 5 gt Troubleshooting procedures Standard Controller Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 3 3 Unable to transmit data through Scan to E Mail Internet FAX Check Possible Cause Action Remark The SMTP server is not in Check with the network service administrator IP address of the SMTP Check with tne network server EWN administrator and enter the 9 correct IP address Check with the network See Settin
171. be caught in the Scanner Cables or gears of the Exposure Unit 3 Special care should be used when handling the Fusing Unit which can be extremely hot 4 The Developing Unit has a strong magnetic field Keep watches and measuring instru ments away from it 5 Take care not to damage the PC Drum with a tool or similar device 6 Do not touch IC pins with bare hands D 7 lt 2 check 21 Check procedure To allow sensors to be checked for operation easily and safely data applied to the IC on the board can be checked on the panel with the main unit in the standby state including a misfeed malfunction and closure failure condition Procedure 1 Setthe mode to the Tech Rep Mode 2 Touch the State Confirm Check key 3 Touch the I O Check key 3 1 check FS 501 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 2 2 check list 2 2 1 check screen This is only typical screen which may be different from what are shown on each individ ual main unit 1 0 Check END Sensors 4 Single Staple Finisher Exit Non sort1 0 Empty Elev 0 Shift Speed 0 2 Exit Non sort3 0 Home CD Align Exit Finisher 0 Home Stap Unit 0 3 Transport UpperO Store roiier 0 Transport Lower 089 ro1ier gt Full Non sorti 0 Home Stapler 1 0 A j Funl Non sort3 5865 55 1 Full Elev Tray 0 Self Priming 510 5 Empty Finisher 0 ouePed 0
172. connector for proper con u u nection and correct as necessary 3 Change PWB MC E 2 6 103 C3FFC ROM contents error upon startup LPH 2 6 104 C3FFD ROM contents error upon startup Scanner 2 6 105 C3FFE ROM contents error upon startup PRT 2 6 106 CGFFF ROM contents error upon startup MSC WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control Signal Electrical Component 1 Check the ROM version 2 Rewrite firmware using the Compact Flash card E 5 3 HE gt 4 48 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Power supply trouble 3 Power supply trouble 3 1 Machine is not Energized at PU1 Operation Check Relevant Electrical Parts Power Switch SW1 DC Power Supply PU1 Control Board PWB MC WIRING Step Check Item DIAGRAM Result Action Location Is a power voltage supplied across PJ1PU1 1 NO WIRING 1 2 on PU1 26 between the wall outlet and PJ1PU1 2 Are the fuses F1 and F2 PU1 conducting NO PU1 3 es V being output from PJ5PU1 1 on 23 E NO Change PUI 4 15 DC5 V being input to PJ10PU1 1 on PU1 23 C NO Change PU1 Is DC5 V being input to PJ1MC 7 on the Con E NO PU1 5 trol Board LED on PWB MC does not blink 14 YES Change PWB MC 3 2 Control panel indicators do not light Relevant Electric
173. connectors 1 for proper connection and correct as necessary Check the connector of motor for proper 2 drive coupling and correct as neces sary 3 PC14 FN sensor check PWB A FN PJ22A FN 3 1 7 Turn OFF the Power Switch move the Stapling Unit out of its home position 4 and turn ON the Power Switch Opera A 4 tion check of the Stapling Unit Moving Motor M6 FN at this time 5 PWB A FN replacement 5 o I 2 5 5 gt 4 9 E 5 5 gt Trouble code 2 3 2 FS 501 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 C0B30 CD Aligning Motor M5 FN drive malfunction A Detection timing Malfunction code Description COB30 ing Plate to its home position The CD Aligning Home Position Sensor PC9 FN does not go LOW even after the lapse of a given period of time after M5 FN has been energized to return the Align B Action Relevant electrical parts CD Aligning Home Position Sensor PC9 FN CD Aligning Motor M5 FN Control Board PWB A FN Step WIRING DIAGRAM Action Location Control signal Electrical compo nents Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper connection and correct as necessary Check the connector of motor for proper drive coupling and correct as neces sary PC9 FN I O sensor check PWB A FN PJ25A FN 6 1 2 Turn OFF the Power Swi
174. count of each counter Use To check the number of paper misfeeds that have occurred Setting To clear the count of a counter select the specific part and press the Clear key Procedure e If a counter is cleared mistakenly press the Interrupt key which will undo the clearing operation 4 10 4 Trouble Functions To check the number of malfunctions that have occurred at different locations in the machine To clear the count of each counter Use To check the number of malfunctions that have occurred Setting To clear the count of a counter select the specific part and press the Clear key Procedure e If a counter is cleared mistakenly press the Interrupt key which will undo the clearing operation 4 10 5 Warning Functions To check the number of warning conditions detected according to the warming type To clear the count of each counter Use To check the number of warning conditions that have been detected Setting To clear the count of a counter select the specific part and press the Clear key Procedure e counter is cleared mistakenly press the Interrupt key which will undo the clearing operation When a warning condition occurs an oil mark appears at the lower left corner of the Basic screen Touching the oil mark will display the warning code screen o E o 0 2 5 4 10 6 Maintenance Functions To
175. decompression are carried out properly Use e If the copy image is faulty Adjustment 1 Call the Tech Rep Mode to the screen Procedure 2 Touch these keys in this order Machine Adjust gt Memory HardDisk Adjust gt Compress Extension Check 3 Pressing the Start key will automatically start to complete a compression decom pression check sequence 4 The check result will be displayed Press the Stop key to interrupt the check sequence D a C Memory Bus Check Functions To check to see if image data is correctly transferred from IR to memory and from memory to printer Use fthe copy image is faulty Adjustment 1 Call the Tech Rep Mode to the screen Procedure 2 Touch these keys in this order Machine Adjust gt Memory HardDisk Adjust gt Memory Bus Check 3 Select either IR Memory Memory PRT or both 4 Pressing the Start key will start the memory bus check and be terminated automati cally 5 The check result will be displayed OK NG 3 59 TECH REP MODE bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 D Work Memory In Out Check Functions To check to see if input and output of image data of work memory are correctly per formed Use e f the print image is faulty Adjustment 1 Call the Tech Rep Mode to the screen Procedure 2 Touch these keys in t
176. each color with thick paper and OHP transparencies Adjustment The fine adjustment can be made over a range of a total of five steps two darker lev Range els and two lighter levels around the standard central level Adjustment Light color Touch the Darker key Instructions Dark color Touch the Lighter key Adjustment 1 Call the Tech Rep Mode to the screen Procedure 2 Touch these keys in this order Image Adjust Thick Paper Image Density 3 Touch the Lighter or Darker key for the desired color to correct the image density 3 65 D o E E a 5 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 6 11 Monochrome Image Density Functions To fine adjust the density of the printed image for a black copy Use To vary the density of the printed image of a black copy Adjustment Range Lighter 2 steps Std Darker 2 steps Adjustment If the black is light touch the Darker key Instructions If the black is dark touch the Lighter key Adjustment 1 Call the Tech Rep Mode to the screen Procedure 2 Touch these keys in this order Image Adjust Monochrome Image density 3 Touch the Lighter or Darker key as necessary to correct the image density 4 6 12 Bias Voltage Choice Functions To change the setting of the developing bias voltage When this f
177. even after Gradation Adjustment has been exe cuted When PRT Max Density PRT Highlight and Background Voltage Margin of Tech Rep mode are changed Adjustment Call the Tech Rep Mode to the screen Procedure Touch these keys in this order Image Adjust Stabilizer Touch Stabilizer Mode Press the Start key to start Stabilizer The Start key turns orange and stays lit up orange during the Stabilizer sequence Stabilizer is completed when the Start key turns green a B Reset and Stabilizer Mode Functions To carry out an image stabilization sequence after the historical data of image stabili zation control has been initialized Use Use if an image problem persists even after Gradation Adjustment has been exe cuted Use if tone reproduction and maximum density are faulty even after Stabilizer Mode has been executed Adjustment Call the Tech Rep Mode to the screen Procedure Touch these keys in this order Image Adjust Stabilizer 1 2 Touch Reset and Stabilizer Mode 4 Press the Start key to start Stabilizer The Start key turns orange and stays lit up orange during the Stabilizer sequence 5 Stabilizer is completed when the Start key turns green 3 64 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 TECH REP MODE 4 6 8 ATDC Toner Supply Functions To adjust the set T C level by replenishing an auxiliary supply of toner when a low
178. home position during an ordinary operation B Action Relevant electrical parts Exit Belt Home Position Sensor PI7 FN Finisher Control Board PWB A FN Exit Motor M3 FN WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical compo nents Check the motor and sensor connectors 1 for proper connection and correct as necessary Check the connector of motor for proper 2 drive coupling and correct as neces sary 3 PI7 FN I O sensor check PWB A FN CN5 FN 6 F 8 4 operation check when the Power 7 B 7 Switch is turned OFF and ON 5 PWB A FN replacement 6 E 5 5 gt FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Trouble code 2 3 7 COB55 Stapler Folding Motor malfunctions A Detection timing Malfunction code Description The Staple Drive Home Position Sensor PI19 FN is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the clinch operation has started An encoder clock input is not detected within a given period of time during a clinch operation The Folding Home Position Sensor PI11 FN is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Folding Unit has started moving from a position out of the home position during an initial operation COB55 The Folding Home Position Sensor PI11 FN is not unblock
179. inch H x 21 1 2 inch D PC 101 22 0 kg 48 1 2 Ib Yun PC 201 25 9 kg 57 Ib 1 4 Operating environment Conforms to the operating environment of the main unit 1 1 Product specifications PC 101 PC 201 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Blank page PC 101 PC 201 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Periodical check Maintenance 1 Periodical check 1 4 Maintenance procedure Periodical check parts NOTE The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure of Maintenance represents the isopropyl alcohol 1 1 1 Separation Roller Assy Cleaning procedure Remove the Right Door 2 8 Remove two screws 1 and remove ce the Jam Access Cover 2 gt 50 5 1 1 2 3 Remove two screws 3 and remove the Paper Separation Roller Mount ing Bracket Assy 4 434816261200 4 Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol wipe the Separation Roller 5 clean of dirt 5 Repeat steps 1 to 4 similarly for the 4th Drawer 43481526130 B Replacing procedure t 8 1 Remove the Paper Separation Roller lt Mounting Bracket Assy 6 ts 2 1 d 7 2 Remove two C rings 6 and the d 6 shaft 7 and remove the Paper Sep me aration Roller Fixing Bracket Assy f 8 NOTE Be careful not to lose spring at this time o c 2 Periodical check o
180. ion mode I detect igina Mixed or 3 2 2 0922995900 suzs6 surge ow dn exe ueutuijogd gt ol gt 992 d pBpd 4 d d4 q swos quur doo jo junouy wwo doo jo 5 98 d bd q uopensibeuy uo 4 4 H uo uoissiusue1 jeuBig 13Sad ejejduio2 epis esie eu yes 0 eBueuox3 Bunoejeg jeurbuo PASIN A dn exej puz Ed dn ayey 151 ues dn oyey eui ejejduio2 jeu yo 40 119 uo Jenouunj uo 30 2715 ud 4410 5 yo uo yo 41 604 Josuag Jenowny uo 30 998 108095 1x3 4 22 105095 dn yolq uo 40109 uo Josueg aded nou 0429 Jaded WM Josuag dwg 9 UIH MO BOEN owwa Moo pues Jojo HO 3Q 2IN yodsues MO wo HO HA 0 13SQ uo uo QN39S uo xipueddy 5 28 iming
181. is 305 x 457 mm or 12 x 18 Metric areas 311 x 457 mm 305 x 457 mm Inch areas 12 1 4 18 12x 18 4 Locked Jobs Auto Delete Time Functions To set the period of time at the end of which locked jobs are automatically deleted Locked job Job to be printed only when a valid password is entered Use To change the period of time at the end of which locked jobs are automatically deleted Setting Procedure Use the 10 Key Pad to enter the time The default setting is No No 1 to 99 hour 5 Skip Volume Track E K C Error Functions This function is used to specify whether or not other jobs can skip a job that was stopped because the maximum number of copies has been reached for the account Use Used to specify whether or not other jobs can skip a job that was stopped Setting Procedure The default setting is No Yes No bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 B 2 4 Utility Mode 1 Unauthorized Access Lock Functions To select whether to enable or disable the unauthorized access lock function If a wrong authentication number Administrator Code or access is entered three times cumulatively three consecutive times for the access for Volume Track and print lock unlocking with this function enabled the machine deter mines that it is an illegal access nullifying the entry Perform the following steps to cancel the nullified state of en
182. is only typical screen which may be different from what are shown on each individ ual main unit 1 0 Check EN Sensors 1 Mp 1st Drawer ypper Limit 0 Near 0 Paper Passage 1 1 Set 0 3rd Drawer YPSEISBl 5 0 Timing Roller 0 2 Paper Empty 0 Set 0 Take Up 0 Exit Papey O Paper Empty 0 SERSor 0 Senser cct 0 Double Feed O Papey ear 0 Manual Fueer Loo 0 2nd Drawer Transsers 5 0 Multi FD Size 10 Drive Detect Set Take Up _ 0 Multi FD Size 20 amp 3lR sensor 0 3 Paper Empty 3935 O Multi FD Size 30 SUb Sensor 19 0 ertical Set lack BC Drive Transport S Sub Sensor 0 0 5j Empey oor 0 4th Drawer Multi FD Size 40 Hain Serioor uc 0 0 Take Up 0 Paper Empty oo Om 3 Paper Empty ol 403616302680 2 2 2 check list A Sensor monitor 1 PC 101 PC 201 Operation characteris Symbol Panel display Part Signal name tics Panel display 1 0 7 PC112 PF Set Tray3 Set Sensor Set Out of position PC115 PF Paper Empty Tray3 Paper Empty Sensor Paper not Paper 5 present present 5 PC113 PF Paper Near Empty Tray3 Paper Near Empty Sensor Blocked Unblocked PC117 PF Vertical Transport S Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor Paper Paper not present present PC116 PF Take Up Tray3 Paper Take Up Sensor Paper Paper not present present PC114 PF Upper Limit Sensor Tray3 Lift Up Upper Limit Sensor Ra
183. lt iE J 1 O E zm ol o Set up the sensor test mode Turn VR1 on PWB A FN fully counterclockwise Using a sheet of paper block the Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor LED PWB C FN Check that LED4 on PWB A FN turns OFF If it stays ON slowly turn VR1 clockwise and stop turning it as soon as the LED turns OFF 3 5 Board switch FS 501 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 Board switch LED1LED2 LED3 46848450300 2E Symbol Description 1 51 Used to run the Test Mode operation 2 52 Used to run the Test Mode operation 3 53 DIP switch used to set the Test Mode operation E 4l LED1 to 4 Turn ON or OFF or blink to indicate a specific condition during Test Mode operations lt 3 6 FS 501 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Test mode 5 Test mode 51 Test mode setting procedure Setting Procedure 1 Turn OFF the Power Switch of the main unit 2 Flip keys of the DIP switch into the ON or OFF position as necessary See Table below 3 Turn ON the Power Switch of the main unit 4 This sets the Finisher into the corresponding Test Mode operation Resetting Procedure Flip all Keys of the DIP switch to their respective initial positions and turn OFF then ON the Power Switch of the main unit 5 2 Test mode operations DIP Switch S3 LED Test mode
184. matter path fe 8 Pre Image Transfer Guide Plate is YES Clean or change damaged dirty 9 Paper Dust Paper dust accumulates on Paper YES Clean or change E Remover Dust Remover The problem has been eliminated NO Image Transfer Roller 10 through the checks of steps up to 9 Unit Change Image Transfer Belt Unit 4 94 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 3 35 Printer 4 Color colored spots A Typical Faulty Images Image quality problem 40361540520 B Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action 1 Imaging Unit The surface of the PC Drum is scratched YES Change Imaging Unit Image Transfer Fingerprints oil or other foreign YES Clean with specified solvent 2 Belt Unit matter is evident on the Image See Maintenance Transfer Belt Image Transfer Belt is dirty or YES Clean dirty belt with a soft cloth 3 scratched Change Image Transfer Belt Unit if belt is damaged 4 Image Transfer Image Transfer Roller is dirty or YES Change Image Transfer Roller Roller Unit scratched Unit 5 Paper path There is foreign matter on paper YES Remove foreign matter path 6 Paper Dust Paper dust accumulates on Paper YES Clean or change Remover Dust Remover 7 Fusing Unit Fusing Belt is dirty or scratched YES Change Fusing Unit The problem has been eli
185. measuring instru ments away from it 5 Take care not to damage the PC Drum with a tool or similar device 6 Do not touch IC pins with bare hands D 7 lt 2 check 21 Check procedure To allow sensors to be checked for operation easily and safely data applied to the IC on the board can be checked on the panel with the main unit in the standby state including a misfeed malfunction and closure failure condition Procedure 1 Setthe mode to the Tech Rep Mode 2 Touch the State Confirm Check key 3 Touch the I O Check key 3 1 check PC 401 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 2 2 check list 2 2 1 check screen This is only typical screen which may be different from what are shown on each individ ual main unit I 0 Chi Sensors 2 LCT Button Reberse Sensor 0 2nd Transfer EN Sensor UPPer 0 G BASIPTon B 0 Dev separation 0 Lover 0 Cassette Open OJ Cyan Foner 0 Transfer Belt 3 Rone sensar 0 0 Toner 0 i O Tray 0 Bagveter Motor 0 ES LO Toner Ol Toner Collect Take Up 0 Duplex Bapes_roner 0 Waste Toner 0 YPGhiBore s 0 Set Toner 0 Toner Box Set 0 Paper Empty 0 Paperpassage 1 0 M8genta Toner 0 Fusing Unit 05 BER rra 0 Paperpassage 2 0 64109 Toner Set 0 Shift Tray 0 Hor szontat Toner
186. mm when a paper with no originals placed as 2 multi copy cycle is run using an the IU fails to keep up with a high original with high image density demand for toner 50 or more 3 LPH Assy LED retracting lever is locked in NO Slide out the IU and reinstall position 4 Imaging Unit The surface of the PC Drum is YES Change Imaging Unit scratched 5 Dirty on the outside YES Clean 6 LPH Assy LED surface is dirty YES Clean using the LED Cleaning Jig Image check Monocolor uneven image uneven YES Select Tech Rep Mode gt 7 high density occurs Machine Adjust LPH Rank and run LPH Rank Image Transfer Cam gear operates properly NO Change Image Transfer Belt 9 Beit Unit Unit The problem has been eliminated NO Change IU through the checks of steps up to 8 Change Image Transfer Belt Unit Change LPH Assy 9 Change PIC Board Change LED Drive Board Change LPH Unit Change High Voltage Unit Image Transfer Neutralizing 4 70 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Image quality problem 4 3 16 Printer Monocolor uneven density in CD A Typical Faulty Images 4036f84046c0 4036154047 0 B Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action 1 Imaging Unit The surface of the PC Drum is YES Change Imaging Unit scratched 2 Dirty on the outside YES Clean 3 LPH Assy The surface of the lens array is YES Cle
187. motor for proper 2 drive coupling and correct as neces sary 3 PI14 FN I O sensor check PWB A FN CN9 FN 5 1 5 M7 FN operation check when the Power Switch is turned OFF and ON BE RNa 5 PWB A FN replacement 6 o I 2 5 5 Hr gt Trouble code FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 2 3 8 C0B75 Punch Control Board malfunctions A Detection timing Malfunction code Description No response is received to a request made by the Finisher within a given period of time during initial communications No response is received to a request made by the Finisher within a given period of 0875 time during ordinary communications There is no match in the checksum values of the backup data as checked twice The 24 V power source of the Punch Unit is OFF when an operation request is made from the Finisher B Action Relevant electrical parts Finisher Control Board PWB A FN Punch Control Board PWB B PK WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical compo nents 1 Turn OFF and ON the main switch 2 Check the connection condition between p the Punch Unit and PWB A FN Measure the voltage between CN14 5 3 and CN14 3 of the PWB A FN Is the voltage 24VDC Initialize Punch Unit EEP ROM PWB B PK replacement 1 PWB A FN replacement 6 E 5
188. o E a 5 3 8 DF 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Mechanical adjustment 4 4 Adjustment of the document stop position Adjustment of the document stop position is made automatically and manually by enter ing numbers The following adjustment is made in the Tech Rep Mode Tech Rep Mode ADF Check Image Adjust RD Mode __ Stee Position Paper Passage dL 1 0 Check I RN rcp Ince Counter List Output Core Ecce AD Gradation Adjust Misc Adjust 458215352761 4 4 1 Auto adjust FD 1 Sided Stop Position Adjustment procedure Set the mode to the Tech Rep Mode Touch ADF Check Touch Auto Adjust Stop Position Touch FD 1 Sided gt ADF Check Auto Adjust Document Stop Position Position FD 1 Sided FD 1 Sided o D E 7 7 FD 2 Sided
189. operation 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1st Tray exit ON e O O O Elevator Tray exit ON O e O O Finisher Tray exit ON ON O O Shifting operation ON ON O O Aligning Plate operation ON ON O O Stapling Unit CD movement ON ON e e e O Exit Roller Rolls spacing Storage Roller Rolls spacing ON ON e O O 5 Elevator Tray operation ON ON O E Sensor test ON ON ON Indicates sensor state 8 Blinking O OFF x NOTE Whenever the Control Board PWB A FN is to be replaced take note of the initial positions of all keys of the DIP switch After the replacement procedure has been completed be sure to flip all keys of the DIP switch on the new Control Board PWB A FN to their respective initial positions 3 7 o E o 0 5 Test mode FS 501 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 5 3 Operation in each test mode operation 5 3 1 1st Tray Exit S1 FN ON Motors and solenoids Energized Entrance Motor M1 FN Upper Entrance Motor M4 FN Upper Lower Entrance Switching Solenoid SL1 FN 1st Tray Entrance Switching Solenoid SL2 FN S2 FN ON fx Motors and solenoids Deenergized Entrance Motor M1 FN Upper Entrance Motor M4 FN Upper Lower Entrance Switching Solenoid SL1 FN 1st Tray Entrance Switching Solenoid SL2 FN 5 3 2 S1 FN ON S2 FN OFF s 5 3 3 S1 FN ON S2 FN OFF
190. period of time has elapsed after the Paper Feed Motor M1 LCT is energized The Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor PC108 is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the LCT Vertical Transport Sensor PC2 LCT has been blocked by a paper LCT Paper Take Up section misfeed detection The Paper Feed Sensor PC1 LCT is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after PC1 LCT has been blocked by a paper The LCT Vertical Transport Sensor PC2 LCT is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after PC2 LCT has been blocked by a paper The LCT Vertical Transport Sensor PC2 LCT is blocked when the Power Switch is set to ON a door or cover is opened and closed or a misfeed or malfunction is reset The Paper Feed Sensor PC1 LCT is blocked when the Power Switch is set to ON a door or cover is opened and closed or a misfeed or malfunction is reset LCT detection of paper remaining B Action Relevant electrical parts Main Control Board PWB C1 LCT Paper Feed Sensor PC1 LCT LCT Vertical Transport Sensor PC2 LCT Tray2 Vertical Transport Sensor PC108 Paper Feed Motor M1 LCT WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical compo nents 1 Initial check items 2 PC1 LCT I O sensor check PWB C1 LCT PJ5C1 LCT 2 C 6 Li 3 PC2 LCT I O sensor check PWB C1 LCT PJ5C1 LCT 5 C
191. replaced rewriting the Firmware to the latest one bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Cautions in replacing the Control Board Other When Control Board PWB MC is replaced relocate the EEPROM IC45 Mount the EEPROM IC45 of old Control Board onto the new Control Board 4036fs2591c0 403616259000 4 3 14 Control Board 40361208101 o c o g NOTE When the EEPROM IC45 is mounted precisely fit the direc tions of each A 1 Remove the Rear Right Cover Rear Cover and Upper Rear Cover ws 2 41 2 Remove 12 Screws 1 and remove the Protective Shield 2 2 49 Other bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 3 Remove two Connectors 3 and 13 Screws 4 4 Remove five Screws 5 5 Remove two Screws 6 and two Bolts 7 and remove the Interface Cover 8 6 Remove the MFP Control Board Assy 9 NOTE When the MFP Control Board is to be replaced rewriting the Firmware to the latest one Il Maintenance Cautions in replacing the MFP Control Board When MFP Control Board PWB MFP is replaced relocate the RAM IC IC418 Mount the RAM IC 1C418 of old Control Board onto the new Control Board 4036fs2600c0 2 50 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 A A 40361025990 4 3 15 High Voltage Unit 1 40361206702
192. sensors to be checked for operation easily and safely data applied to the IC on the board can be checked on the panel with the main unit in the standby state including a misfeed malfunction and closure failure condition Procedure 1 Setthe mode to the Tech Rep Mode 2 Touch the ADF Check key 3 Touch the I O Check key 4 Operate the sensor to check by using paper or the like and check the screen display Paper detected 1 No paper detected 0 3 2 check list 3 2 1 check screen This is only typical screen which may be different from what are shown on each individ ual main unit ADF Check p joue Suum 1 0 Check Menem d Li Empty 0 Registration 0 Feeds 0 Exit Section 0 ConveyS 0 Duplex 0 FinisherS 0 Timing 0 E Middle TrayS 0 VidthS 0 5 458215352960 Note with care that the Take up Feed Section Open Close Sensor the Transport Con vey Section Open Close Sensor the Exit Section Open Close Sensor and the Middle Tray Open Close Sensor are displayed as Faulty Set Detected when they are opened The Convey S on the IR The ADF up to 15 degree open when sensor PC202 detected Output display of Width S The operation of the sensor can be checked whether it is normal or faulty by changing the guide width of the Document Take up Tray to change the output value 3 4 DF 601 Field Service
193. set a count value for maintenance of any given part Use When any given part is replaced Setting Maint Set Procedure Enter the maintenance counter value from the 10 Key Pad Maint Count Counts up when a sheet of paper is fed through the machine Pressing the Clear key will clear the count e f the count is cleared mistakenly press the Interrupt key which will undo the clearing operation 3 76 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 TECH REP MODE 4 11 List Output 4 11 1 Image Processing Functions To produce an output of a list of setting values adjustment values Total Counter val ues and others Use Atthe end of setup or when a malfunction occurs Setting Load the A4R plain paper to a paper sorce Procedure Press the Start key which will let the machine produce the list Data printed is in English alphanumeric characters The time of day and date will also be printed 4 11 2 Counter Functions To produce an output of a list of counts of various counters Use Atthe end of setup or when a malfunction occurs Setting Load the A4R plain paper to a paper sorce Procedure Press the Start key which will let the machine produce the list Data printed is in English alphanumeric characters The time of day and date will also be printed 3 77 7 lt TECH REP MODE bizhub C35
194. settings are indicated by boldface A Advance Checks Before attempting to solve the customer problem the following advance checks must be made Check to see if 1 The power supply voltage meets the specifications 2 The power supply is properly grounded The machine shares the power supply with any other machine that draws large current intermittently e g elevator and air conditioner that generate electric noise The installation site is environmentally appropriate high temperature high humidity direct sunlight ventilation etc levelness of the installation site The original has a problem that may cause a defective image The density is properly selected The Original Glass slit glass or related part is dirty Correct paper is being used for printing The units parts and supplies used for printing developer PC Drum etc are properly replenished and replaced when they reach the end of their useful service life 10 Toner is not running out B Precautions for Service Jobs 1 Be sure to unplug the power cord of the machine before starting the service job proce dures 2 If it is unavoidably necessary to service the machine with its power turned ON use utmost care not to be caught in the Scanner Cables or gears of the Exposure Unit 3 Special care should be used when handling the Fusing Unit which can be extremely hot 4 The Developing Unit has a strong magnetic field Keep watches and
195. sheet of paper is fed through Transfer Roller Unit Number of times a sheet of paper is fed through Transfer Belt Unit Number of times a sheet of paper is fed through Paper Powder Filter Ozone Filter Number of times a sheet of paper is fed through 1st Number of sheets of paper fed from Tray1 2nd Number of sheets of paper fed from Tray2 3rd Number of sheets of paper fed from 4th Number of sheets of paper fed from Tray4 Manual Bypass Number of sheets of paper fed from the Bypass Cyan IU Period of time over which the Cyan Developing Unit has been used Magenta IU Period of time over which the Magenta Developing Unit has been used Yellow IU Period of time over which the Yellow Developing Unit has been used Black IU Period of time over which the Black Developing Unit has been used LCT Parts Number of sheets of paper fed from the LCT ADF Feed Number of sheets of paper fed through the take up section of the ADF ADF Rev Number of sheets of paper fed through the turnover unit of the ADF Sorter Finisher Number of sheets of paper fed out of the Sorter Finisher Staple Number of stapling sequences performed Punch Number of hole punch sequences performed Paper Fold Number of folding sequences performed 3 75 TECH REP MODE bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 10 3 Jam Functions To check the number of misfeeds that have occurred at different locations in the machine To clear the
196. shift operation began shift to the right The Shifter Return Position Sensor PC11 LCT is not blocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Shift Motor Pulse Sensor PC8 LCT after the shift operation began shift to the right The Shifter Home Position Sensor PC12 LCT is not unblocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Shift Motor Pulse Sensor PC8 LCT after the shift operation began shift to the right The Shifter Home Position Sensor PC12 LCT is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the return operation began shift to the left The Shifter Home Position Sensor PC12 LCT is not blocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Shift Motor Pulse Sensor PC8 LCT after the return opera tion began shift to the left The Shifter Return Position Sensor PC11 LCT is not unblocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Shift Motor Pulse Sensor PC8 LCT after the return operation began shift to the left C099C LCT Shift Motor Failure The Shift Motor Pulse Sensor PC8 LCT cannot detect both edges of H L even after the set period of time has elapsed while the Shift Motor M4 LCT is turning back ward forward raise lower C099D LCT communication error Due to a software malfunction etc the time on the watchdog timer has run out and a reset is performed 2 2 1 How to reset Press the Trouble Reset Switch on the Tech Rep Setting Switc
197. successful reception 7 To Controller test com Data 23 Apr 02 15 06 55 0900 Subject TestMail Received Received THU 23 Apr 2002 15 06 58 0900 Same time and date Status Tx Succeede From Controller test com 6 Controller test com Data 23 Apr 02 15 06 55 0900 Sub ject TestMail Received Log showing successful test transmission 2 4 Connection with PageScope Remote Care Device Manage ment Server D 7 lt e When the above settings have been made call the Center software administrator and ask him or her to make the initial connection to the set mail address 3 3 Setting for PageScope Remote Care Standard Controller Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Blank page o E E a 5 3 4 Standard Controller Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 IV Troubleshooting 1 Checking the system configuration Checking the system configuration When a malfunction occurs let the printer print a Configuration Page to check for system configuration 1 Press the Utility key 2 Touch Print Set 3 Touch the Report Types key 4 Touch Configuration and press the Start button 2 Status codes Code Description Action C 12DO Faulty controller hardware Change the controller board MFP Control Board Change the controller board MFP Control Board if the C 1800 Controller start failure problem occurs again when the P
198. supplied from Finisher 341 mm W x 149 mm H x 527 mm D 13 1 2 inch W x 5 3 4 inch x 20 3 4 inch D Weight 1 75 kg 3 3 4 Ib Dimensions 2 5 Operating environment Conforms to the operating environment of the main unit 1 4 FS 501 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Other I Maintenance 1 Other 1 4 Disassembly Adjustment prohibited items A Paint locked Screws NOTE Paint locked screws show that the assembly or unit secured can only be adjusted or set at the factory and should not be adjusted set or removed in the field B Red Painted Screws NOTES When the screws are removed the red paint is coated on the points where read justment is required Once the red painted screw is removed or loosened you should make adjustment Accordingly check the adjustment items in operation manual and make necessary adjustment Note that when two or more screws are used on the part in questions only one representative screw may be marked with red paint g C Variable Resistors on Board NOTE Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions are given in Adjustment Setting D Removal of PWBs NOTES When removing a circuit board or other electrical component refer to Handling of PWBs and follow the corresponding removal procedures Theremoval procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and Scr
199. take up Sheets other than detectable size sheets Image deficit Mixed original feed DF 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Blank page 1 4 DF 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Maintenance 1 Periodical check Periodical check 1 4 Maintenance procedure Periodical check parts NOTE The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure of Maintenance represents the isopropyl alcohol 1 1 1 Transport Belt 45825250100 1 45821625030 458215250400 A Replacing procedure 1 Remove two C clips 1 2 2 Remove the Transport Belt Roller Assy 2 from the belt 3 connected 3 Pull out and remove the Transport Belt Roller Assy 4 NOTE In reassembling ensure that the Transport Belt Roller Assy is set exactly to the connection belt 4 Remove two screws 5 and pull up the Roller Section 6 Periodical check 458216250500 DF 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 5 Remove the Transport Belt 7 1 1 2 Pick up Roller Paper Take up Roller Il Maintenance 458216250600 1 Replacing procedure Open the Paper Take up Section 458216250700 458216250800 2 2 Cover 1 press inward and unlock the locking claws 2 at both ends of the Paper Take up Section Guide the Inner Cover and remove the Paper Take up Section Guide 3 2 Remove the screw
200. the Tech Rep Mode 8 Using the Booklet function make another sample booklet for confirmation 9 Check the sample copy and repeat the adjustment procedures until there are no deviations in the staple or folding position 3 58 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 TECH REP MODE 4 4 12 Memory HardDisk Adjust A Memory Check Functions To check correspondence of data written to and that read from memory through write read check Rough Check Acheck is made to see if the image data reading and writing are correctly made in a very limited area Detail Check Acheck is made to see if the image data reading and writing are correctly made at the addresses and buses in all areas The progress of the check sequence is displayed in percentage Use e If the copy image is faulty Adjustment 1 Call the Tech Rep Mode to the screen Procedure 2 Touch these keys in this order Machine Adjust Memory HardDisk Adjust gt Memory Check 3 Select the desired type of check either Rough Check or Detail Check 4 Press the Start key to start the check procedure 5 When the check procedure is completed the results are shown on the screen If the check results are NG check the memory for connection or replace the memory with a new one Press the Stop key to interrupt the check sequence Only Rough Check B Compress Extension Check Functions To check whether compression and
201. the gear 2 2 75 Other bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 3 Remove the Connector 3 403616210500 4 Remove two screws 4 Then turn the Toner Replenishing Motor Y M 5 counterclockwise and take it off the machine 403616253001 4 3 37 Color PC Drum Motor o 5 c 1 Remove the PWB Box 2 73 2 Remove four Connectors 1 on the High Voltage Unit 1 3 Remove two Screws 2 and remove the Harness Holder 3 4 Remove four Screws Red painted 4 and Connector 5 and remove the Color PC Drum Motor 6 403618210602 2 76 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Other Cautions when mounting the Color PC Drum Motor Before mounting the Color PC Drum Motor be sure to check the assembled posi tion of PC Gear If its position is improper make positioning adjustment A Checking method 403618217001 1 Slowly turn the PC Gear 1 1 and fit the hole A 3 and B 4 with the Gear holes as shown on the above figure 2 Visually check if the hole A 3 and B 4 are fit with each Gear hole at the same time 1 403616217301 40361217101 c o g Adjusting method Remove seven Screws and Upper Frame Assy Turn the PC Gear 1 1 and fit the hole A 2 with the PC Gear 1 1 hole while visually checking Fix the PC Gear
202. the number of punch holes 4 Setall bits of DIP SW 1001 to OFF e gt 458318351700 4 2 4 Punch center position adjustment e This adjustment is made when the Punch lateral movement is changed from the lateral registration motion automatic through end face detection to fixed system based on the paper size 1 Turn OFF the Power Switch of the main unit 2 Remove the Rear Cover 2 3 3 Check that all keys of SW1 of the Finisher Control Board are OFF 4 Turn ON the Power Switch of the main unit and wait until the Finisher completes its initial operation 45831352300 7 lt e Use the following procedure to clear the adjustment of the Punch lateral movement 5 Turn ON keys 4 5 6 and 7 of SW1 J L P i of the Finisher Control Board 123456 78 458 3524 0 6 Turn ON key 1 of SW1 of the Fin isher Control Board 7 Press PSW1 and PSW2 of the Finisher Control Board at the same 123456 7 8 45833525 0 3 15 o E E E 7 5 switch 458 3526 0 REAR SIDE um FRONT SIDE 458 53528 0 458316352700 458316352300 3 16 FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 8 Turn OFF key 4 of SW1 of the Fin isher Control Board 9
203. the rear 43488360200 o S E o E a 5 13 Perform another test print and check the reference deviation 14 Repeat the adjustment until the reference line falls within the specified range 15 Tighten the adjustment screw 16 Repeat steps 1 to 15 similarly for the tray4 3 4 101 201 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 IV Troubleshooting 1 Jam Display 1 1 Initial check items Jam Display When a paper misfeed occurs first perform the following initial check items Check item Action Does paper meet product specifications Replace paper Is the paper curled wavy or damp Replace paper Instruct the user on the correct paper storage procedures Is a foreign object present along the paper path or is the paper path deformed or worn Clean the paper path and replace if neces sary Are the Paper Separator Fingers dirty deformed or worn Clean or replace the defective Paper Separa tor Finger Are rolls rollers dirty deformed or worn Clean or replace the defective roll roller Are the Edge Guide and Trailing Edge Stop at the cor rect position to accommodate the paper Set as necessary Are the actuators operating correctly Correct or replace the defective actuator 1 2 Misfeed display When misfeed occurs message misfeed location Blinking and paper location Light ing are displayed on the To
204. the screen Procedure 2 Touch these keys in this order Machine Adjust gt IR Area 3 Position the Color Chart correctly so that the original reference point is aligned with the scale 4 Press the Start key to make a copy 5 Check point B on the image of the copy 6 If width B on the copy falls outside the specified range touch Top Image 7 Change the setting using the Up Down key 8 Press the Start key to make another copy 9 Check the image on the copy to see if the specifications are met 10 Make adjustments until the specifications are met 7 E lt 3 51 TECH REP MODE bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 C CD Mag Functions To adjust the zoom ratio in the CD direction for the Scanner Section Use The CCD Unit has been replaced Adjustment u Adjust so that width C on the sample copy Specification S made falls within the specified range An adjustment must have been completed correctly of Zoom for FD of PRT Area S C Specifications C 200 1 0 mm N CD Mag Setting Range 0 990 to 1 010 in 0 001 increments Adjustment If the specified width on the copy is less than 199 mm increase the setting Instructions If the specified width on the copy exceeds 201 mm decrease the setting Adjustment 1 Call the Tech Rep Mode to the screen Procedure 2 Touch these keys in this order Machine Adjust
205. those fonts installed 2 Symbol Set Functions To set the default symbol set of the font used in the printer Use To change the default value of the symbol set of the font used in the printer Setting Procedure Default setting depend on the marketing area setting Some symbol sets cannot be selected depending on the font face selected for use 3 Font Size Functions To set the default font size used in the printer Use To change the default value of the font size used in the printer Setting Procedure Default setting depend on the marketing area setting Scalable Font 12 point 4 00 to 999 75 point Bitmap Font 0 44 to 99 00 pitch 10 pitch bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Utility Mode 3 9 2 Report Types Functions To set the output of the various types of reports as they relate to the printer Use To select the types of reports to be output as they relate to the printer Setting Procedure These are the types of reports that can be output Configuration Report covering the configuration of the system including options Demo Page Format report for demonstration PCL FontList List of fonts of PCL emulation to be output only when they are installed PS FontList List of fonts of PostScript emulation to be output only when they are installed 3 10 Unit Life Indication Functions To che
206. time it takes the machine to enter the Sleep mode Setting Procedure Use the 10 Key Pad to enter the time 15 to 240 min The default setting is 15 min 30 min 10 to 240 D o E a 5 Utility Mode bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Transferring to Power Save when job is in Held Locked Jobs queue Functions To select whether to transfer to Sleep when a job is set in Held Locked Job queue Use Use to cancel Sleep for a held or locked job Setting Procedure The default setting is Permit Permit Prohibit C Account Change Auto Reset Functions To select whether to reset the copying mode functions to the default ones when the Key Counter is unplugged a magnetic card is pulled out or the access t is entered for Volume Track Use To select not to reset to the default settings even when the accounts are changed through the use of a data management device Setting Procedure The default setting is Yes Yes No 3 7 User s Choice 2 3 7 1 1 3 A Language Select Functions To select the language of the LCD display messages The counter outputs will be produced in the language selected Use To change the language displayed on the control panel to the desired one Setting Procedure The language options depend on the marketing area selected in Marketing Area a
207. to 129 characters alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used 3 37 o 7 o D E E 0 2 5 Utility Mode bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 B Mail Check Functions To set whether or not to use Mail Check and the time interval for the POP3 server used for the Remote Diagnosis System for the standard controller Use To select not to use Mail Check To change the time interval for Mail Check Setting Procedure The default setting is 15 min 15 min 1 to 120 min No C Connection Timeout Functions To set the timeout period for connection during reception Use To change the timeout period for connection during reception Setting Procedure The default setting is 60 sec 60 sec 30 to 300 sec 3 19 3 Send A SMTP server Functions Tosetthe SMTP server address for transmission used for the Remote Diagnosis System for the standard controller Use To set the address of the SMTP Server Setting Procedure IP Address Version 4 format 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 B SMTP Port N umber Functions To set the SMTP port number for transmission used for the Remote Diagnosis System for the standard controller Use To set the Port Number of the SMTP Server Setting Procedure The default setting is 25 25 1 to 65535 C Timeout of
208. wipe out with water When solvent is used to dampen a cloth do not use the ones other than shown below isopropyl alco hol ethyl alcohol PPC Cleaner Sol mix AP 7 After cleaned with the solvent make copies more than 28 piece of A3 white paper to eliminate the image noise 2 If a Finishing Option is installed remove if from the main unit before trying to replace the Transfer Belt Assembly When removing the Finishing Option support the horizontal transport unit with your hand to prevent if from dropping 1 Turn OFF the main switch 2 Slide out the IU C M Y Bk NOTE After the Imaging Unit has been removed from the main unit be sure to place it in the plastic bag black or wrap it in a light shielding cloth and store it in a dark place Do not leave the Imaging Unit exposed to light for a extended period of time as it may become damaged 403616215500 Open the Right Door Remove two Screws 1 and release the Lock of the Image Transfer Belt Unit 2 2 23 o c Periodical check 40361261620 40366215601 403616215301 403616281700 2 24 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 5 Open the Left Door 6 Grasp the handle and remove the waste toner bottle 3 NOTES Raise the waste toner bottle gently before removing it If scatte
209. within the specified range 15 Tighten the adjustment screw 3 2 Shifter movement timing belt adjustment 1 Slide out the Drawer and remove it 2 Liftthe Main Drawer 1 and remove two screws 2 fixing the Shift Tray NOTE When reinstalling use caution because the wire of the Main Drawer comes off easily 434818350100 3 Remove two screws 3 and remove the Shifter 4 4 Push tab 6 of the Shift Tray 5 as shown on the left and release the lock 5 Remove the Shift Tray 5 Ill Adjustment Setting 434818350300 6 Loosen the screw 7 fixing the Ten sion Pulley Assy as shown to the left and move it in the direction of the arrow 7 After moving the Shifter tighten the fixing screw 7 43488350400 PC 401 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 IV Troubleshooting 1 Jam Display 1 1 Initial check items Jam Display When a paper misfeed occurs first perform the following initial check items Check item Action Does paper meet product specifications Replace paper Is the paper curled wavy or damp Replace paper Instruct the user on the correct paper storage procedures Is a foreign object present along the paper path or is the paper path deformed or worn Clean the paper path and replace if neces sary Are the Paper Separator Fingers dirty deformed or worn Clean or replace the defective Paper Separa tor Finger
210. 0 D 7 lt 3 103 Mechanical adjustment bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 6 2 Focus Positioning of the Scanner and Mirrors Unit This adjustment must be made in the following case The Scanner Drive Cables have been rewound 1 Slide the Mirrors Unit 1 to the cen ter until it is pressed up against the cutouts in the rails 2 2 Mirrors Unit is not pressed up 3 against the cutouts loosen the adjusting screw to which red paint is applied 3 of the Mirrors Unit and press the carriage up against the cutouts Then tighten the adjusting Screw 1 403615304900 6 3 Scanner Position Adjustment This adjustment must be made in the following case The Scanner Drive Cables have been rewound Focus Positioning of the Scanner and Mirrors Unit must be completed o S o E 7 a 5 1 Slide the Mirrors Unit 1 to the posi tion shown on the left sem 403616304100 3 104 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Mechanical adjustment 2 Secure the Scanner 2 in the posi tion shown on the left using the two Scanner positioning screws 3 3 Make the FD Mag adjustment ws 2 53 40361
211. 0 Adjustment Instructions If width A is longer than the specifications make the setting value smaller than the current one If width A is shorter than the specifications make the setting value greater than the current one Adjustment Procedure NOD Touch Expert User Mode PRT Area Dup Left Margin Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern If width A falls outside the specified range change the setting using the Up Down key Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern on the backside of the copy If width A is outside the specified range change the setting again and make a check again If width A falls within the specified range touch Enter Following the same procedure adjust for all other paper sources Use A4 or 8 1 2 x 11 plain paper for the Bypass 3 34 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Utility Mode 3 17 9 Center Staple Position Specification Functions To adjust the positions of center staple and folding for the Finisher Use Use when the center staple and folding positions deviate from the correct ones in the copies made using the Booklet function Adjustment Center staple position The adjustment range is 7 0 mm to 47 0 mm in 1 mm increments Fold position The adjustment range is
212. 0 Waste Toner 0 YPonapert s 0 Set Eae Toner 0 Toner Box Set 0 Paper Empty 0 Paperpassage 1 0 Magenta Toner 0 Fusing Unit 5 map Tras 0 Paperpassage 2 0 561100 Toner 0 Set Shiff Tray o Horizontal Black Toner p Euser Roller g Empty rans Unit Set Separation Lower Over Run 01 ol 1 0 Check Sensors 3 Exit Non sort1 0 Exit Non sort3 0 Exit Finisher 0 Transport Upper Transport Lower Full Non sort1 0 Enpty Elev Home CD Align 0 Hone Stap Unit 0 9808 roller 0 lt Exit roller 0 Hone Stapler 120 7 Single Staple Finisher 0 Shift Speed 0 Full Non sort3 0 R Bdie r Full Elev Tray 0 Self Priming 410 5 Empty Finisher 0 Raf d ouerea 0 Surface Elev 0 Home Shift 0 1 0 Check d Sensors 4 Center Staple Finisher i Entrance 0 Crease Clock 0 852828 su 0 Punch Wastes 0 2 Paddle Home D Paper D Self Prine D Punch Timing 0 0 Paper Surface 0 Front Door 0 HOP crock 0 3 Align one 0 Baistdon 0 Upper Door 0 Punch Home 0 laud 0 Front Door SV 0 BeSiSc Home 0 EN Alignment Tray 0 Clock 0 Rev Remain o 220681 sO Exit Belt Home 0 Middle 0 Joint SV 0 Crease 0 Slide Hone 0 si 0 5 Crease Tray 0 Stapler Home 0 52 o Crease Home 0 Needle 0 sa 0 Crease Stapler Punch Roller Home 0
213. 0 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 17 CH 2 16 403615258400 19 20 21 403610256500 26 _ 28 RI D 40361256700 DESC Other NOTE Mount the Screw 16 in the direc tion that is opposite against the direction for which Scanner Drive Gear 17 and Screw 18 are screwed together as shown in the left figure 12 Mount the Scanner Motor Assy 2 63 Front 13 Wind the bead end of the cable 19 around pulley C 20 and pulley B 21 then hook the bead 22 onto the Adjustable Anchor 23 14 Wind the hook end of the cable 24 around pulley A 25 and pulley B 26 15 Fit the hook end of the cable 27 to the spring 28 and then hook the spring to the catch A in the frame 16 Measure the Spring length and check if its length is within the range of 63 0 mm x 1 mm When out of the given range n case of 64 1 mm or more Retry to put the spring on the catch B n case of 61 9 mm or less Retry to put the spring on the catch C 2 71 2 Other bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Rear 17 Wind the bead end of the cable 29 around pulley F 30 and pulley E 31 then hook the bead 32 onto the Adjustable Anchor 33 403616256800 18 Wi
214. 0 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 412 Settings in State Confirm 4 12 1 Check Functions To display the states of the input ports of sensors and switches when the machine remains stationary Use Used for troubleshooting when a malfunction or a misfeed occurs Setting The operation of each of the switches and sensors can be checked on a real time Procedure basis e t can be checked as long as the 5 V power line remains intact even when a cover is open A Electrical Components Check Procedure Through Input Data Check Example When a paper misfeed occurs in the paper take up section of the machine the Tray2 Paper Take Up Sensor is considered to be responsible for it 1 Remove the sheet of paper misfed 2 From the I O Check List that follows check the panel display of the Tray2 Paper Take Up Sensor For the Tray2 Paper Take Up Sensor you check the data of Take Up of 2nd Drawer 3 Call the Tech Rep mode to the screen 4 Select State Confirm 5 I O Check and then select the screen that contains Take Up under 2nd Drawer For Take Up under 2nd Drawer select 1 on the left hand side of the screen 5 Check that the data for Take Up under 2nd Drawer is 0 sensor blocked 6 Move the actuator to unblock the 2nd Drawer Paper Take Up Sensor 7 Check that the data for Take Up under 2nd Drawer changes from 0 to 1 on the Screen 8 If t
215. 0 puser o Loser ver Run 0 horizontal ol 403615902760 2 2 2 check list A Sensor monitor 2 Operation characteris Symbol Panel display Part Signal name tics Panel display 1 0 o PC4 LCT Lift er Sensor Tra er Limit Senso Raised C4 LC ift Up Upper Sen ray Upper Limit S r is Not raised Position PC13 Lift Up Lower Sensor Tray Lower Position Sensor Lowered Not low E m E LCT Position ered 12 Shift Tray Home Sensor Shifter Home Position Sensor Not at 4 LCT home PC11 Shift Tray Stop S Shifter Return Position Sensor Not at Return LCT return posi position tion PC1 LCT Take Up Paper Feed Sensor Paper Paper not present present PC2 LCT Vertical Transport S LCT Vertical Transport Sensor Paper Paper not present present PWB E Paper Empty Paper Empty Board Paper Paper not LCT present present Main Tray Empty Upper Paper Empty Sensor Paper Paper not present present PC9 LCT Shift Tray Empty Shift Tray Paper Empty Sensor Paper Paper not present present PC7 LCT Over Run Lower Limit Sensor malfunc operational tion UN1 LCT Manual Button Down Paper Descent Key ON OFF PC14 Division Board Position Shift Gate Home Position Sensor Not at At home LCT S home 3 2 PC 401 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 check Operation characteris Symbol Panel display Part Signal name tics Panel display
216. 05 Upper Limit Tray2 Lift Up Sensor At raised Notat raised Sensor position position PC112 PF 3rd Set Tray3 Set Sensor In position Out of Drawer position 5 PC115 PF Paper Empty Tray3 Paper Empty Sensor Paper not Paper 5 present present PC113 PF Paper Near Tray3 Paper Near Empty Sensor Blocked Unblocked Empty PC117 PF Vertical Trans Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor Paper Paper not port S present present PC116 PF Take Up Tray3 Paper Take Up Sensor Paper Paper not present present PC114 PF Upper Limit Tray3 Lift Up Upper Limit Sensor At raised Notatraised Sensor position position PC121 PF 4th Set Tray4 Set Sensor In position Out of Drawer position PC124 PF Paper Empty Tray4 Paper Empty Sensor Paper not Paper present present PC122 PF Paper Near Tray4 Paper Near Empty Sensor Blocked Unblocked Empty PC126 PF Vertical Trans Tray4 Vertical Transport Sensor Paper Paper not port S present present PC125 PF Take Up Tray4 Paper Take Up Sensor Paper Paper not present present PC123 PF Upper Limit Tray4 Lift Up Sensor Atraised Notatraised Sensor position position 3 80 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 TECH REP MODE Symbol Panel Display Part Signal Name Operation Characteristics Panel Display 1 0 PC111 Manual Multi FD Size1 Bypass FD Paper Size Sensor 1 ON OFF PC112 Multi FD Size2 Bypass F
217. 06 Black PC Drum Charge Corona malfunction 4 35 2 6 25 C0208 PC Drum Charge Corona malfunction esses 4 35 2 6 26 C0400 Exposure Lamp s failure to turn 4 35 2 6 27 C0410 Exposure Lamp turning ON at abnormal timing 4 35 2 6 28 C0500 Heating Roller warm up failure 2 6 29 C0501 Fusing Pressure Roller warm up failure bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 2 6 30 2 6 31 2 6 32 2 6 33 2 6 34 2 6 35 2 6 36 2 6 37 2 6 38 2 6 39 2 6 40 2 6 41 2 6 42 2 6 43 2 6 44 2 6 45 2 6 46 2 6 47 2 6 48 2 6 49 2 6 50 2 6 51 2 6 52 2 6 53 2 6 54 2 6 55 2 6 56 2 6 57 2 6 58 2 6 59 2 6 60 2 6 61 2 6 62 2 6 63 2 6 64 2 6 65 2 6 66 C0510 C0511 C0520 C0521 C0650 C0660 C0900 C0960 COF32 COF34 COF31 COF33 COF35 COF36 7 COF3D C1200 C1203 C1204 C1220 C1229 C1240 C1241 C1242 C1243 C1250 C1251 C1252 C1253 C1261 C1265 C1279 C1290 Heating Roller abnormally low 4 36 Fusing Pressure Roller abnormally low temperature 4 36 Heating Roller abnormally high temperature 4 36 Fusing Pressure Roller abnormally high 4 36
218. 1 0 PC6 LCT Cassette Open Tray Set Sensor Set Out of position PC8 LCT Shift Motor Pulse S Shift Motor Pulse Sensor Blocked Unblocked PC10 Elevator Motor Pulse Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor Blocked Unblocked LCT Sensor 3 3 7 lt Mechanical adjustment PC 401 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 3 Mechanical adjustment 31 Adjusting the paper reference position NOTE Make this adjustment after any of the following procedures has been performed When the PH Unit has been replaced When the image on the print is offset in the FD direction When a faint image occurs on the leading edge of the image 1 Display Tech Rep Mode t For details of how to display the Machine Adjust i Tech Rep Mode screen see the ETCEUTM Adjustment Setting of the main unit service manual State Confir Test Print 2 Touch Machine Adjust Gradation Adjust 434815350561 3 Touch PRT Area Hachine Addust Fuser Nip __ Fuser Temp Fuser Speed Map petrece PAT Area IR Area 3 toon adjust LPH Rank LPH Chip Adjust Rgngcy MaraDis Bypass 4348fs350600 4 Touch Left Margin Hachine Adjust PRT Area o o E a 5 4 4 1 3507 0 5 Touch 3rd and then press the Left Margin 4
219. 12 G 00020020 8 Fusing Cooling Fan Motor 2 EXE TET EP o 688 578 6 68 IN ZZ gg RE 6 gt usn 1ST DRAWER SECTION z E Fusing Cooling Fan Motor 3 gt PUSOMC PJ27MC PJ13MC 2 ETT J EE a s gt Pus 5 CER Fusing Pressure Roller H Eines Scr CY a ab 58446 Pressure Retraction Motor N K Fusing Cooling Fan Motor 1 Tray1 Double Feed Sensor CNS HH PJ29MC 28 PJ11MC 5 5 Fusing Unit ge Tray1 Paper Feed Clutch 88 L A 19110 12 2 Tray1 Paper Size Board EM B PWB MC M J24 CW CCW Clock Wise Counter Clock Wise GOED uy gt G 1 Board Fusing Retraction Position Sensor E a Tray1 Paper Near Empty Sensor scu E EX I P G Photo Conductor ontro oar 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 27 TH gt Motor Pw p L 4 PWB N1 ATDC Sensor Y B N1 LED REM PJ1N2 TH2 OUT PWB N2 PC Drum Motor Evo Sensor M M 1 Ta oyp PWB N3 ing Brush Motor Desv ATDC Sensor C PWB N3 LED REM Developing Motor loping Clutch Bk PWB N3 LED REM PJ19MC Bow ABD GND PCS ON Set GND Phue h Counter DCSV D
220. 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 2 POP3 login name Functions To set the logon name for the POPS server used for the Remote Diagnosis Sys tem for the standard controller Use e To set the logon name for the POP3 server Setting Procedure The default setting is No Up to 64 characters alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used 3 password Functions To set the logon password for the server used for the Remote Diagnosis System for the standard controller Use To set the logon password for the server Setting Procedure The default setting is No Up to 16 characters alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used 4 port number D D a Functions To set the POPS port number used for the Remote Diagnosis System for the standard controller Use To set the port number for the POP3 server Setting Procedure The default setting is 110 110 0 to 65535 B Receive These are the settings for the Receive used in the Remote Diagnosis System for the standard controller 1 E Mail Address Functions Tosetthe email address used for the Remote Diagnosis System for the standard controller Use To set the email address Setting Procedure The default setting is No e Up to 129 characters alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used
221. 3 File Memory mounting error The File Memory mounted on the MFP Control Board PWB MFP is faulty C1204 Memory capacity discrepancy The capacity of the File Memory mounted on the MFP Control Board PWB MFP is short C1220 Image Input Time Out Image data is not input from the Image Processing Board PWB C to the MFP Control Board PWB MFP C1229 Image Output Time Out No image data is output from the MFP Control Board PWB MFP C1240 JBIGO Error Memory of the MFP Control Board PWB MFP is C1241 JBIG1 Error faulty C1242 2 Error C1243 JBIG3 Error C1250 Compressor 0 command buffer The MFP Control Board PWB MFP is faulty stop failure C1251 Compressor 1 command buffer stop failure C1252 Compressor 2 command buffer stop failure C1253 Compressor command buffer stop failure C1261 Compression hardware timeout The hardware involved with the compression function offered by the MFP Control Board PWB MFP does not respond 4 23 o I 2 5 5 e gt E 5 5 HE z Malfunction code bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Code Item Description C1265 Extraction hardware timeout The hardware involved with the extraction function offered by the MFP Control Board PWB MFP does not respond C1279 PCI SDRAM DMA operation failure
222. 3 1 2 inch H Weight 2 9 kg 6 1 2 Ib Dimensions 1 4 Operating environment Conforms to the operating environment of the main unit 1 1 Product specifications AD 501 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Blank page AD 501 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 18 1 1 NOTE Maintenance Periodical check Periodical check Maintenance procedure Periodical check parts The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure of Maintenance represents the isopropyl alcohol 1 1 1 Transport Roller Roll 1 453510250100 1 1 2 Transport Roller Roll 2 3 453510250200 Cleaning procedure Remove the Duplex Unit 2 4 Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol wipe the Transport Roller Roll 1 1 clean of dirt Cleaning procedure Open the Duplex Unit Door 1 Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol wipe the Transport Roller Roll 2 2 3 3 clean of dirt 2 Periodical check AD 501 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 1 1 3 Ventilation Section A Cleaning procedure 1 Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol wipe the outside of the Ventilation Section 1 clean of dirt 453516250300 2 Open the Duplex Unit Door 2 3 Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol wipe the inside of the Venti lation Section 3 clean of dirt Il Maintenance 45352504 cO 2 2 AD 501 Field S
223. 3 17 1 Thick Paper and OHP Film Image Density Functions To adjust the density of the printed image for each color with thick paper and OHP transparencies Use To change the density of the printed image for each color with thick paper and OHP transparencies Adjustment Range The fine adjustment can be made over a range of a total of five steps two darker levels and two lighter levels around the standard central level Adjustment Instructions Light color Touch the Darker key Dark color Touch the Lighter key Adjustment Procedure 1 Touch Expert User Mode Thick Paper Film Image Density 2 Touch the Lighter or Darker key for the desired color to correct the image den sity 3 28 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Utility Mode 3 17 2 Color Shift Correction Bk Functions To correct black color shift if it occurs Make Color Shift Corrections cyan magenta and yellow after this adjustment has been made Use To correct black color shift if it occurs Adjustment Range 0 10 to 10 dot Adjustment If the black reference line deviates in the direction of C decrease the setting value Instructions If the black reference line deviates in the direction of D increase the setting value Adjustment 1 Touch Expert User Mode Color Shift Correction Bk Procedure Load Tray1 with A3 or A4R plain paper Press the Start key Fold the pr
224. 350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Utility Mode 3 16 5 LDAP A Network setting 1 LDAP Server Address Functions To set the IP Address or DNS name of the LDAP Server Use e To set the IP Address or DNS name of the LDAP Server Setting Procedure IP Address P Address Version 4 format 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 DNS name e Up to 255 characters alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used 2 SSL TLS Functions To select whether or not to use SSL TLS in communications with the LDAP server SSL TLS Protocol that ensures proper data exchange with the server encryp tion etc Use To use SSL TLS Setting Procedure The default setting is No Yes No 3 Port Number Functions To set the port number to be used in communications with the LDAP server Use To set the port number Setting Procedure The default setting is 389 389 0 to 65535 D 7 2 lt The default value for using SSL TLS is 636 4 Search Base Functions enter the search start position for LDAP search Use To change the search start position for LDAP search Setting Procedure Up to 255 characters alphanumeric characters and symbols can be set for the search B Authentication 1 Authentication System Functions To set the authentication system for LDAP server Use To
225. 4 on the rear side of the Pick up Paper Take up Roller Assy shaft positioning plate and two C clips 5 at both ends of the Pick up Paper Take up Roller Assy shaft and remove the Pick up Paper Take up Roller Assy 6 3 Remove four C clips 7 of the Pick up Roller and the gear fixing C clip 8 black of the Pick up Paper Take up Roller connected Timing Belt and remove the Pick up Paper Take up Roller connecting section 9 from the shaft 10 4 Remove the Pick up Roller 11 DF 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 12 45821525090 1 1 3 Separation Roller 458216252400 Periodical check 5 Remove C clip black of the Paper Take up Roller and remove the Paper Take up Roller 12 NOTE Becareful not to lose the Pick Up Take Up Roller fixing pin A Replacing procedure 1 Unlock the Separation Roller Cover locking claws and remove the Sepa ration Roller Cover 1 2 Remove the Separation Roller Assy 2 NOTE The Separation Roller Assy is of a set in type Pinch the roller shaft at both ends and pull out the Separa tion Roller Assy upward 3 Remove the Holder 3 and the shaft 4 and remove the Separation Roller 5 2 3 2 Periodical check DF 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 1 1 4 Pick up Roller Paper Take up Roller Separation Roller m A Cleaning procedure 2 1 Open th
226. 40 40 40 111020 30 sets or 1000 sheets 21 to 25 1 6 Machine specifications Power Requirements DC 24 V supplied from the main unit DC 5 V generated by Finisher Mx Power 65 W or less Consumption Dimensions 601 mm W x 933 mm H x 608 mm D 23 3 4 inch W x 36 3 4 inch H x 23 3 4 inch D Weight 41 6 kg 91 3 4 Ib 1 3 Product specifications FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 1 7 Operating environment Conforms to the operating environment of the main unit 1 4 FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Other Maintenance 1 Other 1 4 Disassembly Adjustment prohibited items A Paint locked Screws NOTE Paint locked screws show that the assembly or unit secured can only be adjusted or set at the factory and should not be adjusted set or removed in the field B Red Painted Screws NOTES When the screws are removed the red paint is coated on the points where read justment is required Once the red painted screw is removed or loosened you should make adjustment Accordingly check the adjustment items in operation manual and make necessary adjustment Note that when two or more screws are used on the part in questions only one representative screw may be marked with red paint g C Variable Resistors on Board NOTE Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions are given in Adjustme
227. 5 gt E 5 3 HE z Image quality problem bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 3 7 IR System moire A Typical Faulty Images 403615403300 Action i Moire distortions recur even after iChange the original mode ithe orientation of original has been i select one other than that i changed i i resulted in moire Moire distortions recur even after YES iSelect Gradation mode opti ithe original mode has been i mized for gradation Resolu ition that optimized for i resolution Change the zoom ratio 4 62 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 3 8 IR System skewed image A Typical Faulty Images Image quality problem 44 403615403400 B Troubleshooting Procedure through the checks of steps up to 3 Step Section Check Item Result Action 1 Original Original is skew YES Reposition original Original Glass Original Glass is in positive contact NO Reinstall the glass 2 with the flat spring without being tilt Check the original loading posi tion 2nd 8rd Mirrors Assy is not properly YES Perform Focus Positioning of the 3 Carriage aligned with 2nd 3rd Mirrors Car Scanner and 2nd 8rd Mirrors Car riage riage and Scanner Position Adjustment 4 The problem has been eliminated NO Change Scanner Assy
228. 5 1 CD Paper size Sensor 2 Tray1 Double Feed Sensor PC1 6 1 Paper Size Board 11 3 Tray1 Paper Empty Sensor PC2 7 Tray1 Paper Near Empty Sensor PC13 4 Paper Type Board PWB S 8 Tray1 Set Sensor PC14 26 5 o 2 gt 5 o 2 gt Parts layout drawing 1 1 4 Tray 2 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 403618551900 5 8 oN Tray2 Vertical Transport Sensor PC108 Tray2 Paper Take Up Sensor PC107 Tray2 Paper Empty Sensor PC106 Tray2 Lift Up Sensor PC105 Tray2 Paper Size Board PWB I2 Tray2 Board PWB Z Tray2 CD Paper Size Sensor L PC102 Tray2 Set Sensor PC103 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Tray2 CD Paper Size Sensor S PC101 Tray2 Lift Up Motor M101 Tray2 Paper Near Empty Sensor PC104 Tray2 Paper Feed Motor M102 Tray2 Vertical Transport Motor M103 Bypass Lift Up Sensor PC115 Tray2 Door Set sensor PC109 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 1 2 DF 601 Option Parts layout drawing 40361555110 CH Ro Exit Motor M3 DF Exit Cover Sensor PC7 DF Exit Sensor PC6 DF Turnover Sensor PC5 DF Exit Solenoid SL2 DF Turnover Solenoid SL1 DF Document Size Volume R1 DF Tray Open Close Sensor PC8 DF Registration Clutch CL1 DF Empty Sensor PC4 DF Pick up Sensor PC2 DF Registr
229. 5 5 Remove the Harness from the Wire Saddle and unplug two connectors 6 4 3 5 6 Remove the Harness from the ness Saddle and unplug the con nector 7 7 Remove the Harness from the Wire Saddle and unplug two connectors 8 458316256900 2 16 FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Other 8 Remove the screw 9 and remove the claw of Harness Guide 11 from the square hole 10 in the base plate 45831257000 9 Unplug two connectors 12 and remove the Harness from the Wire Saddle 458310257100 10 Remove three screws 13 2 458310257200 11 Remove the screw 14 and remove the Stapler Folding Drive Unit 15 458316257300 1 3 19 Transport Roller Remove the Upper Door 2 4 Remove the Upper Cover 2 5 Remove two screws 1 and remove the Upper Cover Unit 2 Em 458316257600 2 17 Other 458316257500 458316257700 Il Maintenance 458316257800 458316257900 1 3 20 Middle Transport Roller 458316258100 2 18 FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Remove the Transport Motor Unit 2 21 Remove the screw 3 Remove the C clip 4 and remove the bushing 5 7 Remove two screws 6 8 Remove the gear 1 7 and remove the gear 2 8 w
230. 514c0 Symbol Description 1 SW1001 Used to register the number of punched holes and adjust the sensor output 2 SW1002 Used to register the number of punched holes and adjust the sensor output 3 SW1003 Used to register the number of punched holes and adjust the sensor output 7 lt Board switch FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 2 1 Adjustment of the sensor output Be sure to make this adjustment after replacing the Punch Control Board the Side Reg istration Sensor Photosensor Board or LED Board or the Punch Dust Full Sensor Punch Dust Full Sensor Board or Punch Dust Full LED Board 1 Setthe bits 1 through 4 of DIPSW1001 on the Punch Control Board as shown on the Left figure 2 Press SW1002 or SW1003 on the Punch Control Board The sensor output will be automatically adjusted When all LED1001 LED1002 and LED1003 light up the adjustment has been completed 3 Setall bits of DIPSW1001 to OFF 1 Ja e E UI 458316351500 4 2 2 Registration of the number of punch holes n order for the Finisher to recognize the number of punch holes that can be achieved by the installed Punch Unit such number of punch holes is registered in the IC on the Punch Control Board Make this registration whenever the Punch Control Board has been replaced However this registration is not necessary if the EEP ROM used on an old board has b
231. 535 3 Timeout of SMTP Server Functions To set the timeout period for transmission Use To change the timeout period for connection during transmission Setting Procedure The default setting is 60 sec 60 sec 30 to 300 sec 3 72 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 TECH REP MODE D Communication Log Print This is the settin g made for the communication log used for the Remote Diagnosis Sys tem for the standard controller Functions To print a log of past ten communications activities Use Use for checking the communication log Setting Procedure Press the Start key to let the machine start printing the log E TX RX Test This is the settin Diagnosis Syste g made for the transmission and reception tests used for the Remote m for the standard controller Functions To send test email to your local machine for determining correct transmission and reception Use Use for the verification test during setup Setting Procedure Press the Start key to let the machine start the transmission and reception test The test results are displayed on the screen F Data Initialize This is the setting made for initialize data used for the Remote Diagnosis System for the standard controller Functions To initialize the settings Use
232. 6 8 4 PC108 I O sensor check PWB Z PJ6Z 11 W 2 5 5 1 operation check D 6 5 6 PWB C1 LCT replacement 8 gt 4 3 Trouble code PC 401 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 2 Trouble code 21 Trouble code display The main unit s CPU performs a self diagnostics function that on detecting a malfunc tion gives the corresponding malfunction code on the Touch Panel Job Job io Control E Malfunction detected Please call your Technical Representative and provide code C 0200 TEL 125 403615401280 22 Trouble code list Code Item Description C0990 1 Elevator Motor Failure The Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor PC10 LCT cannot detect both edges of H L even after the set period of time has elapsed while the Elevator Motor M5 LCT is turning backward forward raise lower The Tray Upper Limit Sensor PC4 LCT is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the paper lift up operation began The Tray Upper Limit Sensor PC4 LCT is not blocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor PC10 LCT after the paper lift up operation began The Tray Lower Position Sensor PC13 LCT is not unblocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor PC10 LCT after the paper lift up operation began The Tray Upper Limit Sensor PC4 LCT is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the paper lift up operating
233. 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 5 Adjustment of the loop value Adjusted range 5 mm to 5 mm Default value 0 Loop value 5 mm The loop value is increased by the entered value and decreased by the entered value Too much loop value may result in dog eared document and too little loop value may result in askew document Adjustment Procedure Set the mode to the Tech Rep Mode Touch ADF Check Touch Registration Loop ADF Check Registration Loop Loop v L Me xa Min 5 m E 4 Enter the value from the ten key pad o Press the ID key to change the 5 EN 6 Fel code E E 5 Touch END 5 3 14 DF 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Mechanical adjustment 4 6 Automatic adjustment of the sensor The detection level of the document through path sensor is automatically adjusted e The adjustment has two modes Reset and ADF Sensor Auto Adj and ADF Sensor Auto Adj Make this adjustment as appropriate after the replacement of the ADF board or in case of the document detection error Adjustment procedure Set the mode to the Tech Rep Mode Touch ADF Check Touch Sensor Auto Adjust gt 4 Select Reset and ADF Sensor Auto Adj or ADF Sensor Auto Adj 5 Press the Start key 6 If the result is OK touch
234. 6304000 64 Adjustment of the Bypass Paper Size Unit This adjustment must be made in the following case The Bypass Paper Size Unit has been removed 1 Install the gear so that the protrusion of the gear 1 and the mark 3 on the Bypass Guide Rack Gear 2 are aligned in a straight line D 7 lt 403618305000 3 105 Mechanical adjustment bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 87 3 When the Bypass Paper Size Unit base is mounted align the lever position of the Bypass Paper Size Unit with the tab at the center in a straight line Ee i mo 2 Install the Bypass Unit Cover so that part A edge 2 of the Rack Gear 1 for the Bypass Paper Size Unit and part B 3 of the Bypass Unit Cover are aligned in a straight line 40361530520 o o 7 5 4 After the Bypass Paper Size Unit base has been mounted check that lever of the Bypass Paper Size Unit moves smoothly in a manner operatively connected to the Bypass Guide 5 Call the Tech Rep Mode to the screen and select Machine Adjust Bypass Guide Adjust Then carry out Bypass Guide Adjust 2 61 3 106 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Board switch 7 Board switch 7 1 PWB Location
235. 8 1 Perform image troubleshooting procedure if m 5 image density is low operation check PWB MC PJ16MC 4A 7A 2 19 1 Pulse Output 3 Change Imaging Unit 4 Change PWB MC 5 Change PWB MFP 4 39 E 5 5 gt Malfunction code 2 6 45 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 COF37 Abnormally high toner density detected Black Sensor Relevant Electrical Parts Imaging Unit Bk ATDC Sensor Y PWB N1 Control Board PWB MC MFP Control Board PWB MFP WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control Signal Electrical Component 1 Correct the ATDC connection on the underside of u B the Imaging Unit if faulty 2 Clean or correct each contact of the Imaging Unit E if faulty Change Imaging Unit Change PWB MC Change PWB MFP 2 6 46 Cyan ATDC Sensor adjustment failure 2 6 47 Magenta ATDC Sensor adjustment failure 2 6 48 Yellow ATDC Sensor adjustment failure Relevant Electrical Parts ATDC Sensor C PWB N3 Control Board PWB MC ATDC Sensor M PWB N2 MFP Control Board PWB MFP ATDC Sensor Y PWB N1 Imaging Unit C Toner Supply Motor C Bk M3 Imaging Unit M Toner Supply Motor Y M M4 Imaging Unit Y WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control Signal E
236. 8 PC 201 8 D 3 126 I O check Sensor check PWB C2 PF PJ11C2 PF 2 PC 201 8 E 4 PC117 PF I O check Sensor check PWB C2 PF PJ6C2 PF 11 PC 201 3 F 5 M123 PF operation check PWB C2 PF PJ9C2 1 4 201 8 F 6 Change PWB C2 PF bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Jam Display 1 3 7 Duplex Transport Misfeed AD 501 A Detection Timing Type Description The Synchronizing Roller Sensor PC28 is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after a Duplex paper take up sequence has been started The Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 PC1 DU is not blocked even after the lapse Misfeed detected at of a given period of time after the paper has blocked the Duplex Unit Transport Duplex Transport Sensor 1 PI1 DU Section The Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 PI1 DU is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after it has been blocked by the paper The Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 PC1 DU is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after it has been blocked by the paper Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 PI1 DU or Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 PC1 DU is blocked when the Power Switch is turned ON a door or cover is opened and closed or a misfeed or malfunction is reset Paper left at Duplex Transport Section B Action Relevant Electrical Parts Synchronizing Roller Sensor PC28 Duplex Control Board PWB A DU
237. 82135090 6 Loosen screw 2 two on the front side and three on the backside on the document feeding tray If the crease deviates on the side of A move the tray to the front If the crease deviates on the side of B move the tray to the rear 7 Make recheck 7 E lt 458215351000 3 7 Mechanical adjustment DF 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 3 Adjustment of the document skew Adjustment standard Skew should be 1 0 or less with respect to the document length within 3 0 mm for document of A4 size 1 Place the chart furnished with the Document Feeder in the document feeding tray 1 with the side having an arrow facing up 2 Set up the following functions Auto Paper 1 sided original 1 side copy 458216350800 3 Press the Start key 4 Check in which direction 2 or 3 the image tilts on the copy fed out of the machine Specifications Tilt 3 0 mm max e f the image tilts more than the specifi cations perform the following steps to make the adjustment 2 gt 458218351160 5 Loosen two front screws 4 on the right hinge 6 If the image tilts in direction of 2 move the Document Feeder toward the front If the image tilts in direction of 3 move the Document Feeder toward 4 NY the rear 7 Tighten two screws 4 8 Make recheck o S E
238. 9 uo Josuag edeg ym 205095 dug NO Jo 40 W 13 NO 0 HO JQ CN MO 100W 4C LN NO uo 198 uo i ON39S uo x pu ddy 5 25 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 0909959205 5 6 1 5 6 1 swye r suze J e eBueuoxa yo 80479 piouejos anoun yo 40215 y ug d 110 uonensiou UA yo oT yo o p Ld Pb 1b o L1 HB 40 98 Josuag 1enouuni uo yo o p OD Bp uo 1 PMIM A Wnt i 30109 uo 205095 5 ee Jaded YM 20095 dwg 40 90d Josuag 3Q EW 9 100W JO 40 2W sugg wung doo jo junowy 14 M EF Qq4 L 4 HmM bBb rLrFd p uo 4 N29 E Q L 4 HZH wclrp t4dz dud EFL d r 100W ee SS e ag at SSS e 90M SS Se Se e te a ee sWIg gt uoissiusugj eubis 1358 uoissiuisue4 1384 yo 135
239. 93 C13D7 Yellow LPH correction data download failure 4 46 IV Troublshooting 2 6 94 C13D8 Black LPH correction data download failure 4 46 2 6 95 C3310 clamp gain adjustment failure 4 46 2 6 96 C3331 MSC undefined malfunction 4 47 2 6 97 C3332 Scanner Section undefined malfunction 4 47 2 6 98 C3333 Engine Section undefined malfunction 4 47 2 6 99 C3E00 NVRAM initialization failure seen 4 48 2 6 100 C3E01 NVRAM initialization failure eese 4 48 amp 2 6 101 C3E02 NVRAM initialization failure esee 4 48 gt 2 6 102 C3F00 Vendor connection failure essen 4 48 2 6 103 C3FFC ROM contents error upon startup 4 48 Xii bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 2 6 104 C3FFD ROM contents error upon startup 4 48 2 6 105 C3FFE ROM contents error upon startup PRT 4 48 2 6 106 C3FFF ROM contents error upon startup MSC 4 48 3 Power supply trouble nenne eene nene nennen nnn 4 49 3 1 Machine is not Energized at All PU1 Operation Check
240. 99 LCT Shift Motor Failure A Detection timing Malfunction code Description The Shift Motor Pulse Sensor PC8 LCT cannot detect both edges of H L even C099C after the set period of time has elapsed while the Shift Motor M4 LCT is turning backward forward raise lower B Action Relevant electrical parts Shift Motor M4 LCT Main Control Board PWB C1 LCT Shift Motor Pulse Sensor PC8 LCT WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical compo nents Check the motor and sensor connectors 1 for proper connection and correct as necessary Check the connector of motor for proper 2 drive coupling and correct as neces sary 3 PC8 LCT I O sensor check PWB C1 LCT PJ3C1 LCT 3 G 2 5 PWB C1 LCT 4 M4 LCT operation check PJ4C1 LCT 5 4 H 2 5 PWB C1 LCT replacement 8 2 3 7 C099D LCT communication error A Detection timing Malfunction code Description 0990 Due to a software malfunction etc the time on the watchdog timer has run out reset is performed B Action gt 3 Relevant electrical parts in Main Control Board PWB C1 LCT WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical compo nents 1 Turn the main unit off then on again 2 PWB C1 LCT replacement 8 4 10 p S m m KONICA
241. A Black Functions To correct black color shift if it occurs Make Color Shift Corrections cyan magenta and yellow after this adjustment has been made Use To correct black color shift if it occurs The LPH Assy Bk has been replaced Adjustment 0 10 to 10 dot Range Adjustment If the black reference line deviates in the direction of C decrease the setting value Instructions If the black reference line deviates in the direction of D increase the setting value Adjustment 1 Machine Adjust Color Shift Correction Procedure Load Tray1 with A3 or A4R plain paper 2 3 Press the Start key 4 Fold the printed test pattern in half lengthwise to check for deviation the image on the inside Check deviation between black lines A and B Select black Change the setting value using the Up Down key as necessary Produce another test pattern and check for deviation NO Check Procedure Check point A B If the black reference line deviates in the direction of C decrease the setting value If the black reference line deviates in the direction of D increase the setting value 403618300100 Direction of C Direction of D 403618300300 403615300200 3 54 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 TECH REP MODE B Cyan Magenta Yellow Functions To adjust color shift if the
242. Action Location Control signal Electrical compo nents Check the motor and sensor connectors 1 for proper connection and correct as necessary Check the connector of motor for proper 2 drive coupling and correct as neces sary 3 PI5 FN I O sensor check PWB A FN CN5 FN 15 E 8 4 M5 FN operation check when the Power B 7 Switch is turned OFF and ON 5 PWB A FN replacement 6 o I 2 5 5 Hr gt Trouble code FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 2 3 6 COB4C Booklet Exit Motor malfunctions A Detection timing Malfunction code Description The Exit Belt Home Position Sensor PI7 FN is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Booklet Exit Belt has started moving from its home position during an initial operation The Exit Belt Home Position Sensor PI7 FN is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Booklet Exit Belt has started moving from its home position during an ordinary operation COB4C i Lisa The Exit Belt Home Position Sensor PI7 FN is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Booklet Exit Belt has started moving from a position not the home position during an initial operation The Exit Belt Home Position Sensor PI7 FN is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Booklet Exit Belt has started moving from a position not the
243. B Reinstallation Procedure 1 Remove the Imaging Unit from its plastic bag 2 Tilt the Imaging Unit 1 to the left and shake it a small stroke in the tilt direction twice Then tilt it to the right and shake it a small stroke in the tilt direction twice NOTES Since the Imaging Unit is highly susceptible to light keep it shielded from light up to the time it is installed Carefully unseal the plastic bag black If the Imaging Unit is packed in the plastic bag black again seal the package using tape or another means When installing the Imaging Unit ensure that the color of the mounting guide of the Imaging Unit is the same as the color of the label at the mounting position on the main unit 403616258100 2 26 3 Keeping the Imaging Unit 2 in a level position insert the Imaging Unit 2 into the mounting position all the way until it is stopped NOTES Do not allow the Imaging Unit to become tilted while installing them into the Main Unit as damage to the PC Drum or the LED assembly can result Insert the Imaging Unit until a click is heard bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Periodical check 4 Pull out the PC Drum protective sheet 3 while pressing the IU NOTE Pull out the PC Drum protective sheet half way and pull it down slantwise 5 Close the Imaging Unit Locking Lever 4 while pressing the IU NOTE Place the IU Lock Lever into the locked po
244. Belt Unit Imaging Unit M Imaging Unit Y Imaging Unit Bk Step Action 1 Select Image Adjust PRT Max Density and if the setting value is negative readjust Check the drive transmission portion of the Imaging Unit and correct as necessary Clean the AIDC Sensor window if dirty Clean the contact of the Imaging Unit connector if dirty Change Imaging Unit oj aj A j N Change the Image Transfer Belt Unit 2 3 8 P 21 Color Shift Test Pattern failure Relevant Electrical Parts Image Transfer Belt Unit Step Action 1 Wipe clean the surface of the Transfer Belt with a soft cloth if it is dirty 2 Change the Image Transfer Belt Unit if the Transfer Belt is damaged 2 3 9 P 22 Color Shift Adjust failure Relevant Electrical Parts AIDC Registration Sensor 1 PC8 AIDC Registration Sensor 2 PC9 Step Action 1 Check the LED retraction lever for locked position and if there is any faulty condition evident slide out the Imaging Unit and reinstall it in position Reinstall or reconnect PC8 or 9 if it is installed or connected improperly Check the Vertical Transport Guide for installed position and correct as necessary bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Malfunction code 2 3 10 P 26 1st image transfer ATVC Black failure 2 3 11 P 27 2nd image transfer
245. Check Test Tray Width Adjust Adjust Sensor Auto Adjust Adjust 3 2 DF 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Tech Rep Test Mode 2 3 ADF Paper Passage The Paper Passage motion of the Automatic Document Feeder is checked Procedure 1 Setthe mode to the Tech Rep Mode 2 Touch the ADF Check key 3 Touch the Paper Passage key 4 Select the Paper Passage Mode to be tested from 1 Sided No Detect 1 Sided Mixed Orig and 2 Sided Set the Original in the Take up Tray The Start key color changes from orange to green 6 Press the Start key The operation starts NOTES After starting the operation by pressing the Start key if the Start key is pressed during the operation the operation will be suspended Then if the Start key is pressed again during the suspension the operation will be resumed f the Stop key is pressed during the test operation the test will be forced to end If there is no Original set in the Take up Tray the Start key will not work All Originals set in the Take up Tray are passed through Upon the completion of all Originals passed through the Paper Through Test ends a 1 Sided 2 Sided Mixed Orig e ag 1 Sided No Detect D 7 lt 458216352800 3 3 check DF 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 3 check 3 4 Check procedure To allow
246. Check the connector of motor for proper connec m tion and correct as necessary 2 Check the fan for possible overload and correct EN as necessary D M18 operation check PWB MC PJ5MC 13 LOCK 26 V 5 PWB MC PJ5MC 11 REM 2 7 4 Change PWB MC 2 gt 4 31 a 2 5 E gt Malfunction code 2 6 13 C004D Toner Suction Fan Motor s failure to turn bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Relevant Electrical Parts Toner Suction Fan Motor M20 Control Board PWB MC WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control Signal Electrical Component 1 Check the connector of motor for proper connec E NE tion and correct as necessary 2 Check the fan for possible overload and correct u u as necessary 3 M20 operation check PWB MC LOCK 26 V PWB MC REM 4 PWB MC 2 6 14 C004E Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor s failure to turn Relevant Electrical Parts Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor M21 DC Power Supply PU1 WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action l Location Control Signal Electrical Component 1 Check the connector of motor for proper connec EY 3 tion and correct as necessary 2 Check the fan for possible overload and correct E x as necessary M21 operation check PU1 PJ12PU1 3 LOCK 22 G Change PU 1
247. Check the motor and sensor connectors 1 for proper connection and correct as necessary Check the connector of motor for proper 2 drive coupling and correct as neces sary 3 PI14 FN I O sensor check PWB A FN CN9 FN 5 1 5 M7 FN operation check when the Power Switch is turned OFF and ON EWEA EN GNE che mt 5 PWB A FN replacement 6 3 Home Position Sensor Relevant electrical parts Folding Home Position Sensor Finisher Control Board PWB A FN Staple Folding Motor M7 FN WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical compo nents Check the motor and sensor connectors 1 for proper connection and correct as necessary 5 Check the connector of motor for proper 2 drive coupling and correct as neces 3 sary 1 3 PI11 FN I O sensor check PWB A FN CN16 FN 6 F 3 3 3 M7 FN operation check when the Power 5 E T Switch is turned OFF and ns 5 PWB A FN replacement 6 FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 Stapler Crease Clock Sensor Saddle Section Trouble code Relevant electrical parts Staple Folding Motor Clock Sensor PI14 FN Finisher Control Board PWB A FN Staple Folding Motor M7 FN WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical compo nents Check the motor and sensor connectors 1 for proper connection and correct as necessary Check the connector of
248. Counter Life and clear the count of Paper Powder Filter Ozone Filter 2 15 o 5 c 2 Periodical check 1 5 9 Cleaning of Transport Roller 403616251900 1 5 10 Cleaning of 2nd Image Transfer 1 403616251800 1 5 11 Cleaning of Scanner Rail 4 3 AN 2 16 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 1 Open the Right Door 2 Using soft cloth dampened with alcohol wipe the Transport Roller 1 clean of dirt Entrance Upper Guide Open the Right Door Open the Left Door Remove the Waste Toner Bottle 2 30 Remove two screws and slide the Transfer Belt Unit out halfway te 2 23 5 Wipe the 2nd Image Transfer Entrance Upper Guide 1 clean of dirt using a soft cloth NOTE When cleaning use care not to be hurt by the leading edge of the guide that is sharp 1 Remove three screws 1 and the IR Upper Right Cover 2 2 Remove two screws 3 and two Original Glass fixing brackets 4 at the front and rear 3 Remove the Original Glass 5 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Periodical check 4 Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol wipe the Scanner Rails 6 clean of dirt NOTE Apply lubricant after cleaning 1 5 12 Cleaning of the Mirrors 1st 2nd 3rd 1 Remove the Original Glass 2 lt S
249. D 2 Sided 7 m Functions Adjust the document stop position for the second side Use Upon setup of the ADF E 5 Functions Adjust the start position for image scanning 3 Use Upon setup of the ADF E 4 14 4 Paper Passage Functions To check for paper passage through the ADF in each of the ADF modes Use Used for checking the document path for any abnormal condition when a document misfeed occurs 4 14 5 Check Functions To check sensors on the paper path Use When a document misfeed occurs 4 14 6 Tray Width Adjust Functions To set the maximum and the minimum width for the width sensor Use When a document misfeed occurs When an original size is erroneously detected 3 95 o E E 0 5 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4147 Sensor Auto Adjust Functions To make an automatic adjustment of the sensor Use When a document misfeed occurs When the sensor is replaced 4 15 Gradation Adjust Functions To make an automatic adjustment of gradation based on the test pattern produced and the readings taken by the Scanner Use Color reproduction performance becomes poor The IU has been replaced The Image Transfer Belt Unit has been replaced x The Adj Values of Max a
250. D Paper Size Sensor 2 ON OFF PC113 Multi FD Size3 Bypass FD Paper Size Sensor 3 ON OFF PC114 Multi FD Size4 Bypass FD Paper Size Sensor 4 ON OFF PC115 Lift Up Position Bypass Lift Up Sensor At raised Notatraised Sensor position position PC110 Paper Empty Bypass Paper Empty Sensor Paper not Paper present present PC28 Paper Timing Roller Synchronizing Roller Sensor Paper Paper not Pas present present PC30 Sage Exit Exit Sensor Paper Paper not present present PC27 OHP Detect OHP Sensor OHP Not OHP Sensor PC4 Fuser Loop Fusing Paper Loop Sensor Loop present Loop not present PC10 Color PC Drive Color PC Drum Main Sensor Blocked Unblocked Drive Main Sensor PC35 Detect Color PC Drive Color PC Drum Sub Sensor Blocked Unblocked Sub Sensor D PC11 Black PC Drive Bk PC Drum Main Sensor Blocked Unblocked Main Sensor PC36 Black PC Drive Bk PC Drum Sub Sensor Blocked Unblocked 5 Sub Sensor a 3 81 o E 6 0 5 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 D Sensors 2 Main body PC 401 AD 501 Symbol Panel Display Part Signal Name Operation Characteristics Panel Display 1 0 PC4 LCT LCT Lift Up Upper Tray Upper Limit Sensor At raised Notatraised Sensor position position PC13 LCT Lift Up Lower Tray
251. Door FS 601 10 Finisher FS 501 Finisher Door x FS 501 11 Document Feeder DF 601 Document Feeder Door t DF 601 1 1 1 Misfeed Display Resetting Procedure Open the corresponding door clear the sheet of paper misfeed and close the door 4 1 Jam Display bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 1 2 Sensor layout 1 2 1 System Mounted with AD 501 and PC 401 4036fs4001c0 2 1 Exit Sensor PC30 5 Tray2 Vertical Transport Sensor PC108 2 Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 PH DU 6 Tray1 Double Feed Sensor PC1 1 S1 Synchronizing Roller Sensor PC28 7 LCT Vertical Transport Sensor PC2 LCT 3 1 Sensor 27 8 LCT Paper Feed Sensor PC1 LCT 4 Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 PC1 DU 1 Two different types of sensors are located in the area near 3 4 2 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Jam Display 1 2 2 System Mounted with AD 501 and PC 201 10 4036fs4003c0 1 Exit Sensor 2 Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 311 Synchronizing Roller Sensor 3 1 Sensor 4 Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 5 Tray2 Vertical Transport Sensor PI1 DU PC28 PC27 PC1 DU PC108 6 7 8 9 Tray1 Double Feed Sensor PC1 Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor PC117 PF Tray3 Paper Take Up Sensor PC116 PF Tray4 Vertical Transport Sensor PC126 PF 10 Tray4 Paper Take Up Sensor PC125 PF 1 Two dif
252. EI DESV mper Ozone Ventilation Fan Motor m rc DCSV 2 2 1 E GND 2 Close CN3UN201 2 A A R5 8 ____ E ART 1d 81 12 9 2 CN1UN201 g 90 i ar 4 Toner Suction Fan Motor 1 155 UN201 CCD Sensor Flat Cabe HAD Control Panel 92 193 a Ae B ns Flat Cable 1 El Bc DESCRIPTION 5 4 E VME 1 ooi DESTINATION LOCATION CLOSED END CONNECTORS Exposure Unit m O FL201 N END CONNECTORS Exposure Lamp EO Original Size Sensor CD2 5 Pwa MTM D CONNECTORS S i canner Motor Option Drive Board POSITIVE LOCK RECEPTACLE EEEIEE EEEE 455600055 rive Boar H 250 WITH HOUSING AES A KA E E e K rae TREES Supp Pu2ic POSITIVE LOCK RECEPTACLE m 187 WITH HOUSING OW COW 3 Pai OUTPUT OF ACTIVE LOW Hold CNBA 5 CRNT1 M um CAEN F OUTPUT OF ACTIVE HIGH 2 57201 Size Reset Switch x Flat Cable GND of INPUT OF ACTIVE LOW PU204 828 INPUT OF ACTIVE HIGH 3 21 Inverter Board Scanner Home Sensor LI OUTPUT OF ACTIVE aga HIGH OR LOW INPUT OF J Cable T Scanner Motor HIGH OR LOW Original Size Sensor CD1 DC5V 15 16 19 20 21 22 23 25 26 27 4036 B001 1A Mar 2004 IKONICA MINOLTA 2004 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC Use of this manual should be str
253. FN is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Rear Aligning Plate has started moving from its home position to a position out of the home position The Rear Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor PI5 FN is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Rear Aligning Plate has started moving from a position out of the home position to the home position COB4C Booklet Exit Motor malfunctions The Exit Belt Home Position Sensor PI7 FN is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Booklet Exit Belt has started moving from its home position during an initial operation The Exit Belt Home Position Sensor PI7 FN is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Booklet Exit Belt has started moving from its home position during an ordinary operation The Exit Belt Home Position Sensor PI7 FN is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Booklet Exit Belt has started moving from a position not the home position during an initial opera tion The Exit Belt Home Position Sensor PI7 FN is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Booklet Exit Belt has started moving from a position not the home position during an ordinary oper ation gt FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Trouble code Code Item Description COB55 Stapler Folding
254. Finisher COB76 Punch Side Registration Motor The Side Registration Home Sensor PI2P PK is not malfunctions unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Punch Side Registration Unit has started mov ing from its home position The Side Registration Home Sensor PI2P PK is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Punch Side Registration Unit has started mov ing from a position not the home position COB77 Motor malfunctions The home position is not detected within a given period of time after the Punch Motor has been rotated a half turn An encoder clock input is not detected even after the lapse of a given period of time during operation of the Punch Motor The setting value calculated during the initial operation falls outside the threshold value range o I 2 5 5 Hr gt COB79 Sensor malfunctions The light receiving voltage is 2 5 V or less when the illu minating voltage is set to 4 4 V The light receiving voltage is 2 5 V or more when the illuminating voltage is set to O V The illuminating voltage setting is 4 4 V or more after the adjustment has been made Trouble code FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Code Item Description COBAO Mechanism malfunctions The Exit Tray Home Position Sensor PI9 FN is not blocked even after the lapse of a given per
255. Fusing Pressure Retraction Sen Not Retracted Separation sor Retracted 3 83 D 7 2 o E o a 2 5 E Sensors 3 FS 501 JS 601 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Operation Characteris Symbol Panel Display Part Signal Name tics Panel Display 1 0 PC1 FN Single Exit Non sort1 1st Tray Exit Sensor Paper Paper no Staple present presen PC19 FN Finisher Exit Non sort3 Job Tray Exit Sensor Paper Paper no present presen Exit Finisher Storage Sensor Paper Paper no present presen PC4 FN Transport Upper Upper Entrance Sensor Paper Paper no present presen PC2 FN Transport Lower Lower Entrance Sensor Paper Paper no present presen PC6 FN Full Non sort1 1st Tray Full Sensor Blocked Unblocked PC20 FN Full Non sort3 Job Tray Full Sensor Paper Paper no present presen PC7 FN Full Elev Tray Elevator Tray Full Sensor Blocked Unblocked PC5 FN Empty Finisher Finisher Tray Paper Sensor Paper Paper no present presen PWB D Surface Elev Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor Paper Paper no FN present presen PC8 FN Empty Elev Elevator Tray Paper Sensor Blocked Unblocked PC9 FN Home CD Align CD Aligning Home Position Sensor Blocked Unb
256. G24V Density PC9 Resist P 5 GND sx CNT2 Desv 5 GND Density PCB Resist x3 ON Ya YT ON Ye w B gt T Pca1 2 PC31_REM 4 GND 5 gt 6 nce T CLK DATA NY 9 DATA OUTIC DATA OUT 10 DATA INC csv 1 Nc Desv bM PJ10MC PJ31MC on CLKIBk GND DATA OUT Bk DATA INEK GND GND UN10 ON DC24V UN10 LM Ter TOIACEURMI a S ee RE EF KKK 1 2 El 5 6 S 1 1 1 1 1 45 14 GY 6 1 149 GY __ 16 2 GY __ 16 3 GY PJ16MC 4B GY __ 16 58 GY PJ16MC 6B GY PJ16MC TB GY PJ16MC 8B GY PJiGMC oB GY PJ16MC 108 GY PJ16MC 11B GY PJIGeMC 12B Toner Near Empty Sensor PQ C Toner Near Empty Sensor PQ M Toner Near Empty Sensor PQ Y Toner Near Empty Sensor PQ Bk Toner Set Sensor C Toner Set Sensor M Toner Near Empty Sensor LED C Toner Near Empty Sensor LED M Toner Near Empty Sensor LED Y Toner Near Empty Sensor LED Bk Toner Set Sensor Y Toner Set Sensor Bk Color PC Drum Main Sensor Color PC Drum Sub Sensor Bk PC Drum Main Sensor Bk PC Drum Sub Sensor Imaging Unit
257. H lot number 8 digits Procedure Average Exposure Average light intensity X Print width accuracy Y Linearity accuracy Z Focus accuracy FFT Rank Print width rank LPH Rank 0 to 5 f any one change is made from the default value as a result of LPH chip to chip cor rections an asterisk 1 is displayed beside the color identification C M Y and Bk on the screen 3 90 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 TECH REP MODE 4 13 Settings in Test Print To check for image on the printer side by letting the machine produce various types of test pattern The machine searches through the paper sources in the order of Tray2 Tray3 Tray4 and Tray1 for paper of the maximum size for printing 4 13 1 Procedure 1 Touch Test Print to display the Test Print menu 2 Touch the desired test pattern key 3 Setup the desired functions and press the Start key 4 13 2 Gradation Pattern Functions To produce a gradation pattern Use Used for checking gradation reproducibility Pattern SINGLE HYPER Gradation Cyan 403618304200 Setting Procedure of Print 1 to 999 Select SINGLE single copy or MULTI multi copy Select FEET or HYPER Select Gradation or Resolution if HYPER has been selected Select the color mode Cyan Magenta Yellow Black 4PC CMYBk 8Color 4Color Black 1PC 7 lt Black 4PC Uses four color
258. M1 Cleaning Brush Motor M22 Color PC Drum Motor M5 Bk PC Motor M7 Color Developing Motor M6 2nd Image Transfer Pressure Retraction Motor M13 Fusing Drive Motor M2 Developing Bias DC Y M C Bk Drum Charge Corona Bias Y M C Drum Charge Corona Bias Bk With reference to print request Main Erase Lamp Y LA1 Main Erase Lamp M LA2 Main Erase Lamp C LA3 Main Erase Lamp Bk LA4 1st 2nd Original Original TOD Signal Tray1 Paper Feed Clutch CL1 Intermediate Transport Motor M14 Synchronizing Roller Sensor PC28 Synchronizing Roller Clutch CL3 Exit Sensor PC30 With reference to TOD 40361555450 S 5 2 gt 5 23 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 iming chart DF 501 3 2 1 sided mode 3 2 1 Oegzsssioe0 ja ee ooo uel 4 pug Jl uoissiusueJ 358 dn ayey e Meul ejejduio2 151 ue f 191 uwo jo junowy uo jeuBis Bunoejeq uuo EE _ oo L 5502 L 5 90 EIL dn ayey
259. M123 PF operation check 8 6 2 5 E 5 5 gt PC 101 PC 201 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Trouble code 2 Trouble code 21 Trouble code display The main unit s CPU performs a self diagnostics function that on detecting a malfunc tion gives the corresponding malfunction code on the Touch Panel Job Job Lo Control E Malfunction detected Please call your Technical Representative and provide code C 0200 TEL 125 4036fs4012e0 2 2 Trouble code list Code Item Description C0900 3rd Drawer Lift Up Motor Failure The Lift Up Sensor is not blocked even after the set C0950 Drawer Lift Up Motor Failure period of time has elapsed after the paper lift up opera tion for the drawer began 2 3 to reset Press the Trouble Reset Switch on the Tech Rep Setting Switches Board to reset the following malfunctions scanner related malfunctions fusing related malfunctions expo sure lamp related malfunctions and C3FFF e For any other malfunctions open and close the Front Door or turn OFF and ON the Power Switch 4 5 O L a 5 gt a 5 5 gt Trouble code 2 4 Solution 2 4 1 C0900 Tray3 Lift Up Motor Fai C0950 Tray4 Lift Up Motor Fai A Detection timing PC 101 PC 201 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 lure lur
260. MFP Control Board PWB MFP LPH Assy Y Control Board PWB MC LPH Assy Bk WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control Signal Electrical Component 1 Correct the harness connection between LPH and PWB LED if faulty 2 Correct the harness connection between PWB m LED and PWB MFP if faulty 3 Change LPH Assy 4 Change PWB LED 5 Change PWB MFP 6 Change PWB MC 2 6 95 C3310 CCD clamp gain adjustment failure Relevant Electrical Parts Scanner Assy CCD Sensor Board PWB A Image Processing Board PWB C WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control Signal Electrical Component E 1 Correct the harness connection between PWB A E a 2 and PWB C if faulty 3 2 Check for possible extraneous light and correct z as necessary E 3 Clean the lens mirrors CCD surface and shad EY EN ing sheet if dirty 4 Correct reflective mirror of the Scanner if faulty or change Scanner Change PWB A Change PWB C 4 46 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Malfunction code 2 6 96 C3331 MSC undefined malfunction occurring Relevant Electrical Parts MFP Control Board PWB MFP WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control Signal Electrical Component 1 Check the connectors on PWB MFP for proper m connection and correct as necessary
261. MINOLTA SERVICE MANUAL FIELD SERVICE AD 501 2004 09 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC Ver 2 0 After publication of this service manual the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance Therefore the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required Revision mark To indicate clearly a section revised show to the left of the revised section A number within represents the number of times the revision has been made To indicate clearly a section revised show in the lower outside section of the correspond ing page A number within 4 represents the number of times the revision has been made NOTE Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted When a page revised in Ver 2 0 has been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 3 0 only are shown with those for Ver 2 0 deleted When page revised in Ver 2 0 has not been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 2 0 are left as they are 2004 09 20 N Adding the descriptions and correcting errors in writing 2004 03 1 0 Issue of the first edition Date Service manual Ver Revision mark Descriptions of revision AD 501 Field Service Ver2 0
262. MODE bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 4 6 IR Area Use the following Color Chart for the adjustment of the Scanner Section e f the Color Chart is not available a scale may be used instead A Left Image B Top Image C CD Mag D FD Mag Original Reference 4036fs3018cO A Left Image Functions To adjust part to part variations in accuracy of IR parts and their mounting accuracy by varying the scan start position in the CD direction Use When the CCD Unit is replaced When the Original Glass is replaced The Scanner Home Sensor has been replaced Adjustment Adjust so that width A on the sample copy Specification made falls within the specified range A An adjustment must have been completed correctly of Left Margin of PRT Area Specifications A 10 1 0 mm 4036fs3019c0 Setting Range 10 0 to 10 0 0 1 mm increments o z E o E 7 5 Adjustment If the 0 mm position on the sample copy is on the right side of the correct 0 position Instructions perpendicularly to the feeding direction less than 1 mm decrease the setting If the position on the sample copy is on the left side of the correct 0 mm position perpendicularly to the feeding direction exceeding 1 mm increase the setting Adjustment 1 Call the Tech Rep Mode to the screen Procedure 2 Touch these keys in this order
263. MS2 FN Joint SW Joint Open Sensor Open A Punch Punch Regist 51 Unit Punch Regist 52 Punch Regist 53 Punch Regist 54 Punch Wastes Punch trash full Punch Timing PI3P PK Punch Motor Punch Motor Clock Sensor Blocked Clock PHP PK Punch Home Punch Home Position Sensor HP PI2P PK Punch Regist Side Registration Home Sensor HP Home PC6 HO Horizontal Trans Horizontal Unit Door Sensor Blocked Unblocked port Door S o E o E a 5 3 86 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 G Sensors 5 Main body TECH REP MODE Symbol Operation Characteris Panel Display Part Signal Name tics Panel Display 1 0 PC201 IR Home Sensor Scanner Home Sensor At home Out of home SW201 Org Org Cover Size Reset Switch Lowered Raised PC202 Detect 15 Degree Original Cover Angle Sensor Less than 15 Sensor sensor 15 PC203 Org Detect Original Size Detecting Sensor FD1 Original Originalno Sensor 1 loaded not oaded mounted PC204 Org Detect Original Size Detecting Sensor FD2 Original Originalno Sensor 2 loaded not oaded mounted PC204 Org Detect Original Size Detecting Sensor FD2 Original Originalno Sensor 3 loaded not oaded mounted PC205 Org Detect Original Size Detecting Sensor FD3 Original Originalno Sen
264. Mode setting procedure Press the Utility key Touch the Counter List Check key Press the keys STOP gt 0 gt 0 gt STOP gt 0 gt 1 in this order Enter the service code 8 digits Select ADF Check NOTE Do not teach this procedure to others unless it is absolutely necessary Tech Rep Mode ADF Check Image Adjust RD Mode 5558 Adsust Paper Passage Eeey coco leo NTUETUUS e State Confirm Test AD Gradation Adjust Misc Adjust fe 4582183527 1 g S 2 2 Type of the Tech Rep Mode t The ADF Check in the Tech Rep Mode has 7 items as follows 5 Original Stop Position Adjust Registration Loop Adjust Auto Adjust Stop Position Adjust Paper Passage Test O
265. Monocolor 0 5 mm pitch uneven image A Typical Faulty Images 0 5 mm B Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action 4 LPH Assy LED retracting lever is locked in NO Slide out the IU and reinstall position YES Change Imaging Unit E 5 3 HE z 4 82 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Image quality problem 4 3 25 Printer Monocolor 2 mm pitch uneven image A Typical Faulty Images mm 403618405400 B Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action Imaging Unit The drive mechanisms for spent YES Clean 1 toner conveying and IU are dirty NO Change Imaging Unit I v 5 5 gt 4 83 E 5 3 HE z Image quality problem bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 3 26 Printer Monocolor 94 mm pitch uneven image A Typical Faulty Images mm E mm 4036154057 0 40361405500 403615405600 B Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action Imaging Unit The surface of the PC Drum is YES Change Imaging Unit 1 scratched Coupling of IU drive mechanism is NO Check and correct drive transmit 2 installed properly ting coupling Change Imaging Unit 3 There is play i
266. Motor M8 FN 5 Storage Sensor PC3 FN 16 Stapling Unit Moving Motor M6 FN 6 Entrance Switching Solenoid SL2 47 Staple Home Position Sensor 14 7 Front Door Sensor PC17 FN 18 Elevator Tray Paper Sensor PC8 FN 8 Finisher Tray Paper Sensor PC5 FN 19 CD Aligning Motor M5 FN 9 Elevator Tray Upper Limit Switch 20 Lower Paddle Motor M9 FN x S2 FN 10 Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor LED 21 Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor 2 PWB C FN PWB D FN 2 11 Elevator Motor M7 FN 22 Upper Entrance Sensor PC4 FN gt 5 12 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Parts layout drawing 7 1 Upper Entrance Motor 4 9 Exit Motor 2 Entrance Motor M1 FN 10 Home Position Sensor Exit Roller Rolls Spacing Motor 3 M13 FN 11 Upper Paddle Motor M15 FN 4 Upper Lower Entrance Switching Solenoid 12 Upper Paddle Solenoid SL3 FN SL1 FN 5 ET Roller Rolls Spacing Motor M12 144 Elevator Tray Full Sensor PC7 FN 6 Set Switch S1 FN 14 Roller Home Position Sensor PC13 7 ROM IC3 FN 15 Lower Limit Switch 8 Control Board PWB A FN 16 Lower Entrance Motor M2 FN 26 5 2 lt gt 5 13 Parts layout drawing bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 1 6 JS 601 Option 403616552800 1 Job Tray Cover Sensor PC21 FN 3 Job Tray Full Se
267. OPS server address used for the Remote Diagnosis System for the standard controller Use To set the address of the Server Setting Procedure P Address Version 4 format 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 B POP3 Login Name Functions To set the logon name for the server used for the Remote Diagnosis Sys tem for the standard controller Use e To set the logon name for the POPS server Setting Procedure The default setting is No Up to 64 characters alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used C Passw ord Functions To set the logon password for the server used for the Remote Diagnosis System for the standard controller Use To set the logon password for the server Setting Procedure The default setting is No Up to 16 characters alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used D POP3 Port N umber Functions e To set the POPS port number used for the Remote Diagnosis System for the standard controller Use To set the port number for the POP3 server Setting Procedure The default setting is 110 110 0 to 65535 3 19 2 Receive A E Mail Address Functions e To set email address used for the Remote Diagnosis System for the standard controller Use To set the email address Setting Procedure The default setting is No Up
268. PI8 FN 36 18 Slide Home Position Sensor PI18 FN 37 19 Exit Tray Home Position Sensor PI9 FN 1 7 2 Horizontal Transport Unit Parts layout drawing bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Shift Upper Limit Sensor PI15 FN Paddle Motor M2 FN Staple Folding Motor Clock Sensor PI14 FN Swing Guide Home Position Sensor PI3 FN Staple Folding Motor M7 FN Sw 2 3 403618552700 1 Entrance Switching Solenoid SL1 HO 3 2 Turnover Empty Sensor PC6 HO 4 5 16 Paper Sensor 1 Horizontal Unit Door Sensor 4 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Parts layout drawing 1 8 501 Option T D vd 9 B FAM L 8 4036155525 0 1 Punch Motor M1P PK 6 Side Registration Motor M2P PK 2 Side Registration Home Sensor 2 7 Punch Trash Full LED Board PWB F PK Punch Trash Full Photo Sensor Board 3 Punch Motor Clock Board PI3P PK 8 PWB E PK 4 Photo Sensor Board PWB C PK 9 Punch Control Board PWB B 5 LED Board PWD D PK 10 Punch Home Position Sensor 1 26 5 2 lt gt 5 17 Parts layout drawing bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 1 9 AD 501 Option 403616551700 1 Switchback Motor M1 DU 4 Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 PC1 DU pp Duplex Unit Door Set Sensor in PWE A fS Duplex Unit Transport Motor M2 DU
269. PJ11MC 13A LOCK 2 N PWB MC PJ11MC 10A REM 2 Change PWB MC 2 6 18 C0094 2nd Image Transfer Roller pressure retraction failure Relevant Electrical Parts 2nd Image Transfer Pressure Retraction Sensor PC29 Control Board PWB MC 2nd Image Transfer Pressure Retraction Motor M13 WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control Signal Electrical Component 1 Check the M13 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary 2 29 I O check PWB MC PJ12MC 9A ON 6 B 3 M13 operation check PWB MC PJ18MC 1 REM 6 A 4 Change PWB MC E 4 33 o I 2 5 5 gt E 5 5 gt Malfunction code 2 6 19 C0096 Image Transfer Belt pressure retraction failure bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Relevant Electrical Parts 1st Image Transfer Retraction Position Sensor PC12 1st Image Transfer Pressure Retraction Motor M11 Control Board PWB MC WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control Signal Electrical Component 1 Check the M11 connector for proper connection u u and correct as necessary 2 12 I O check PWB MC PJ3MC 6B ON 6 B 3 M11 operation check PWB MC PJ5MC 1 4 6 C Pulse Output 4 Change PWB MC 2 6 20 C0098 Fusing Pressure Roller pressure retraction failure Relevant Electrical Parts Fusing Pressure Retraction Sensor PC33 C
270. PJ16MC M4 19 J 10A 13A Pulse Output Change Imaging Unit Change PWB MC Change PWB MFP E 5 5 gt 4 38 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Malfunction code 2 6 41 COF31 Abnormally high toner density detected Cyan ATDC Sensor 2 6 42 COF33 Abnormally high toner density detected Magenta Sensor 2 6 43 COF35 Abnormally high toner density detected Yellow Sensor Relevant Electrical Parts ATDC Sensor C PWB N3 Control Board PWB MC ATDC Sensor M PWB N2 MFP Control Board PWB MFP ATDC Sensor Y PWB N1 Imaging Unit C Imaging Unit M Imaging Unit Y WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control Signal Electrical Component Step Action 1 Clean the ATDC Sensor window on the underside _ of the Imaging Unit if dirty 2 Clean Sensor LED if dirty Correct the contact and or WIRING of the ATDC 3 Sensor if faulty 4 Change Sensor C M Y 5 Change Imaging Unit 6 Change PWB MC 7 PWB MFP 2 6 44 COF36 Abnormally low toner density detected Black ATDC Sensor Relevant Electrical Parts ATDC Sensor Bk UN10 Control Board PWB MC Toner Supply Motor C Bk M3 MFP Control Board PWB MFP WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control Signal Electrical Component
271. Remove six Screws 1 and remove the Board Cover 2 2 53 Il Maintenance 403616207601 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 3 Unplug all connectors from the DC Power Supply 4 Remove seven Screws 3 and remove the DC Power Supply Assy 4 5 Remove four Screws 5 and remove the Protective Cover 6 2 54 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4036520771 4 3 19 LED Drive Board 40361025450 403616254601 403616214301 6 Other Remove 12 Screws 7 and remove the DC power Supply 8 Remove the LPH Unit 2 61 Remove two screws 1 unplug the connector 2 each and remove each guide Assy 2 Remove the flat cables 4 eight Remove eight screws 5 unplug two connectors 6 and remove the LED Drive Board 7 2 55 o c 4 3 20 4 3 21 Tech Rep Setting Switches Board 2 56 Other bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Remove the Paper Setting Dial Cover 2 41 Remove the Dial 1 Remove the Screw 2 Connector 3 and Holder 4 and remove the Paper Type Board 5 Remove the Panel Cover 2 41 Remove two Screws 1 and remove the Front Righ
272. S Clean dirty belt with a soft cloth 2 scratched Change Image Transfer Belt Unit if belt is damaged 3 Terminal is dirty YES Clean 4 Image Transfer Image Transfer Roller is installed NO Reinstall Roller Unit properly 5 Image Transfer Roller is dirty or YES Change Image Transfer Roller scratched Unit The problem has been eliminated NO Change Image Transfer Roller 6 through the checks of steps up to 5 Unit Change Image Transfer Belt Unit L a 5 gt 4 87 Image quality problem bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 3 30 Printer 4 Color uneven density in CD A Typical Faulty Images 40361540460 40361540470 B Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action Image Transfer Fingerprints oil or other foreign YES Clean with specified solvent 1 Unit matter is evident on the Image See Maintenance Transfer Belt Image Transfer Belt is dirty or YES Clean dirty belt with a soft cloth 2 scratched Change Image Transfer Belt Unit if belt is damaged 3 Terminal is dirty YES Clean 4 Image Transfer Transfer Roller is installed NO Reinstall Roller Unit properly 5 Image Transfer Roller is dirty or YES Image Transfer Roller scratched Unit The problem has been eliminated NO Change Image Transfer Roller through the checks of steps up to 5 Unit Change Image
273. Signal Electrical Component 1 Check the hard disk specifications 2 Change the hard disk 2 6 85 C13C8 New Transfer Cleaner Unit resetting failure 2 6 86 C13CA New Fusing Unit resetting failure Relevant Electrical Parts Control Board PWB MC WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control Signal Electrical Component 1 Reinstall Unit 2 PWB MC m 2 6 87 C13D1 Cyan Imaging Unit EEPROM access error 2 6 88 C13D2 Magenta Imaging Unit EEPROM access error 2 6 89 C13D3 Yellow Imaging Unit EEPROM access error 2 6 90 C13D4 Black Imaging Unit EEPROM access error Relevant Electrical Parts Imaging Unit C Control Board PWB MC Imaging Unit M Imaging Unit Y 5 Imaging Unit Bk 5 WIRING DIAGRAM E Step Action Location Control Signal Electrical Component 1 Clean the connection between the Imaging Unit s and copier if dirty 2 Reinstall Imaging Unit C M Y Bk 3 Change Imaging Unit 4 PWB MC 4 45 Malfunction code bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 2 6 91 C13D5 Cyan LPH correction data download failure 2 6 92 C13D6 Magenta LPH correction data download failure 2 6 93 C13D7 Yellow LPH correction data download failure 2 6 94 C13D8 Black LPH correction data download failure Relevant Electrical Parts LPH Assy C LED Drive Board PWB LED LPH Assy M
274. Software Accessories 1 Drive CD PCL5c Printer Driver TWAIN Driver Front Manager BOX Utility OS Windows98 98SE Me NT4 0 2000 XP Server2003 Software Accessories 2 Page Scope Web Connection has been built into the controller firmware Compatible Paper Size Max standard paper size A3 Wide Resolution 600 x 600 dpi Power Requirements Shared with main unit 1 1 Controller specifications Standard Controller Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Operating Environ 10 30 mental Requirements 15 85 6 Internal fonts Outline font 45Agfa Intellifont 35 Fonts TrueType font 10 Bitmapped font 1 Screen Font 110 TrueType Font Manager Options Not available 3 1 When printing one side of the same A4 original 2 The optional Local Interface Kit EK 501 is required 8 If the controller option is not specified the optional Hard Disk HD 501 must be installed on the main unit in order for the Store to settings printer driver settings Set Numbering function printing with distribution numbers the Scan to HDD operation and the box function to be used In order to use the Set Numbering function the 256 MB Expanded Memory Unit EM 301 must also be installed 1 4 Supporting client specifications PC IBM PC and its compatible RAM 64 MB or more 128MB or more for XP Windows 98 98SE Windows Me Windows 2000 os Windows
275. T OPTION PC 101 PC 201 PC 401 DC24V GND Dup Door GND Desv Tum MECWCCW S Dup_Turn 9 Transport M CLIE 1 Transport M FEM Dup JAM Sensor Lead Ede Sensor up Transpor M up Nub FG AD 501 CN20 Desv TXD 48 DC5V RXD 7 GND GND 43 io J2 D B Developing Bias Fusing Drive Motor M2 uc 104 GY 35313 0 4 Tray1 Set Sensor LT Image Transfer 5 CC CV4 2 Current Voltage Switching 6 TT CNS Tray1 Paper Empty Sensor FAS Raper Fusing Paper Loop ES ia e mE m CJD y p pty R Control Solenoid RXD Reception Data 5 PJ2MC ___ Tray1 CD Paper Size Sensor e TXD Transmission Data E Fusing Paper Loop Sensor RE SECRET amp g p a PJ14A 1A GY ABD Bav 5 ls 17 4 8 i o 1 Desv Multi Width FS 54 52157 577 8 Y 2 27 ON Multi Width VR E 3 PC27_LED GND 3 57122 ay x Y a 0057 Eu 5 GND eno tr 5 2 5 PC28 ON 3 TRANSPORT SECTION 5
276. TE The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure of Maintenance represents the isopropyl alcohol 1 5 1 Paper Take up Roller A Cleaning Procedure Slide out the Tray 1 2 Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol wipe the Paper Take Up Roller 1 clean of dirt B Replacing Procedure Slide out the Tray 1 2 Lock the Paper Lifting Plate 1 into position 3 Snapoffthe C clip 2 from the Paper Take Up Roller Assy 3 4 Slide the Paper Take Up Roller Assy m 3 to the rear and take its shaft off the front bushing 2 5 Snap off the C clip 4 one collar 5 and remove the Paper Take Up Roller 6 6 reinstall reverse the order of removal 7 Select Tech Rep Mode Counter Life and clear the sosetszorec count of 1st or 2nd NOTE Replace the Paper Take up Roller and Separation Roller at the same time 1 5 2 Separation Roller A Cleaning Procedure Slide out the Tray 1 2 Remove two screws 1 and the Paper Separation Roller mounting bracket Assy 2 2 1 o 5 c Periodical check 3 4036162014 1 40361620170 1 5 3 Separation Roller 2 403616201800 2 8 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 3 Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol wipe the Separ
277. The counters for the accounts can be cleared or initialize the Volume Track Data E K C counters for all accounts Use To check clear or print the counter values of each account Setting Procedure The default setting is O 0 0 to 999999 To print the list load Tray1 with A3 or 11 x 17 paper 3 20 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Utility Mode 3 13 Call Service Cent Functions To transmit various types of data representing the machine conditions to the Center when the Remote Diagnosis System is mounted Use To transmit machine data to the Center Setting Procedure Press the Call Service Cent key to execute the user transmission 3 14 Settings in Printer Setting 3 14 1 Common Setting A PDL Setting Functions To set the default page description language PDL for the printer controller Only PDLs mounted in the machine can be selected Use To change the PDL Setting Procedure Options displayed represent the PDLs mounted in the machine Typical options Auto Set PCL PostScript GDI Timeout Functions e To set the I O timeout period for communications Use To extend the timeout period if timeout occurs frequently depending on the net work conditions 2 Setting Procedure Use the 10 Key Pad to enter the Auto Panel Reset time 10 to 300 sec The default setting is 15 sec o 15 10 to 300
278. Transfer Belt 6 Unit Change High Voltage Unit 2 Developing Bias Change High Voltage Unit 1 Image Transfer Neutralizing D Q E e E gt 4 88 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 3 31 Printer 4 Color low image density A Typical Faulty Images Image quality problem 4036fs4036cC B Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action Paper Paper is damp YES Change paper to one just unwrapped from its package Install Paper Dehumidifying lizer Tech Rep Mode persists make adjustments of PRT Max Density and PRT Highlight Heater 2 Image Transfer Terminal is dirty YES Clean Belt Unit 3 Image Transfer Image Transfer Roller is installed NO Reinstall Roller Unit properly 4 Image Transfer Roller is dirty or NO Image Transfer Roller scratched Unit 5 AIDC Sensor Sensor is dirty YES Clean with blower brush Gradation Adjust Value falls within the speci YES Go to step 10 Tech Rep fied range as checked through Gra 6 Mode dation Adjust 0 100 Highlight 0 60 Image Adjust The problem has been eliminated NO Go to next step PRT Max through the adjust of PRT Max 7 Density Tech Rep Mode Image Adjust The problem has been eliminated NO Go to next step PRT Highl
279. Unit to its home position CD Aligning Motor M5 FN drive The CD Aligning Home Position Sensor PC9 FN does malfunction not go LOW even after the lapse of a given period of time after M5 FN has been energized to return the Aligning Plate to its home position COB48 Exit Roller Rolls Spacing Motor The Exit Roller Home Position Sensor PC13 FN does M13 FN drive malfunction not go HIGH even after the lapse of a given period of time after M13 FN has been energized to start spac ing pressure sequence Storage Roller Rolls Spacing The Storage Roller Home Position Sensor PC12 FN Motor M12 FN drive malfunc does not go HIGH even after the lapse of a given period tion of time after M12 FN has been energized to start spacing pressure sequence COB50 Stapling Motor drive malfunction A fault is found in the Staple Motor COB80 Shift Motor M8 FN drive mal The Shift Home Position Sensor PC10 FN does not functions go HIGH even after the lapse of a given period of time after M8 FN has been energized to start returning the Elevator Tray to its home position The Shift Home Position Sensor PC10 FN does not go LOW even after the lapse of a given period of time after M8 FN has been energized to start moving the Elevator Tray for job offset O c Q gt E 2 5 gt Trouble code FS 501 Field Servi
280. Utility Mode 3 1 1 Administrator Mode function tree Administrator Mode 1 2 The function tree is shown to comply with the format displayed on the screen Displayed according to a given condition such as option installation Admin Mode Top Erase Disable Sleep Mode Administrator Code 1 4 Wide Paper Size 1 Locked Jobs Auto Delete Time Skip Volume Track E K C Error Unauthorized Access Lock Access Lock Release 2 4 User Authentication LDAP Search Box Function Admin Set Date amp Time Setting Reprint 3 4 HDD Lock Administrator Code Change PSL Administrator Code Change Panel Reset Timer 4 4 Add Prefix Suffix Prefix Suffix Registration N PSWC Setting Volume Track Mode E K C Volume Track E K C Volume Track Setting E K C Volume Track Data E K C 7 lt Call Service Cent PDL Setting I O Timeout Parallel Interface Screen Pattern Setting Common Setting PCL Setting Printer Setting Overwrite A4 Letter Device Name Scan setting Color Grayscale Compression Pri Comp Method for Monochrome Next Page 1 Inch Area Over S
281. Vb 7 ATDC falling within specified range YES Go to step 12 and high Vg and Vb 8 LPH Assy LED retracting lever is locked in NO Slide out the IU and reinstall position Imaging Unit Dirty on the outside YES Clean 10 LPH Assy The surface of the lens array is dirty YES Clean with cleaning jig 11 ATDC Sensor The color ATDC Sensor window YES Clean window the LED Assy is dirty Image Adjust The problem is eliminated after NO Go to next step 12 Background Volt Background Voltage Margin has age Margin Tech been adjusted Rep Mode Gradation Adjust Conv Value falls within the speci YES Go to step 17 Tech Rep fied range as checked through Gra 13 Mode dation Adjust 4 76 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Image quality problem Step Section Check Item Result Action Image Adjust Max Den The problem has been eliminated through the adjust of PRT Max NO Go to next step 17 through the checks of steps up to 16 14 sity Tech Rep Mode Image Adjust The problem has been eliminated NO Go to next step PRT Highlight through the adjust of PRT Highlight 15 Tech Rep Mode Image Adjust After the Reset Stabilizer NO Go to next step Stabilizer gt sequence has been completed run 16 Reset Stabi Gradation Adjust if the problem per lizer Tech Rep sists make adjustments of PRT Max Mode Density and PRT H
282. Ver2 0 Sep 2004 A Sensor monitor check Operation characteris Symbol Panel display Part Signal name tics Panel display 1 0 PC4 DF Empty Empty Sensor Paper not Paper present present PC3 DF FeedS Take up Cover Sensor OPEN CLOSE PC7 DF Exit Section Exit Cover Sensor OPEN CLOSE PC202 ConveyS Original Cover Angle Sensor OPEN CLOSE PC8 DF Middle TrayS Tray Open Close Sensor OPEN CLOSE PC1 DF Registration Registration Sensor Paper Paper not present present PC6 DF FinisherS Exit Sensor Paper Paper not present present PC5 DF Duplex Turnover Sensor Paper Paper not present present PC2 DF Timing Pick up Sensor Paper Paper not present present R1 DF X WidthS Document Size Volume 3 5 7 lt Mechanical adjustment DF 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 Mechanical adjustment 4 1 Adjustment of the tray volume Read out the value of maximum width and minimum width of the document width detec tion volume interlocked with the Document Take up Tray Edge Guide Set the mode to the Tech Rep Mode Touch ADF Check Touch Tray Width Adjust gt WNS Adjustment procedure 1 Widen the width across the edge guides 1 by sliding them to their maximum width 2 Touch Max Width 458216350400 3 Press the Start key Confirm that the Result is OK ADF Tray Vol
283. ach printed for a PC print job Setting Procedure The default setting is Printer Copier After the reception of all data Printer After the reception of data for each page bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Utility Mode 3 8 Copy program Recall Functions To call up a program registered through Job Memory Input Use To call up a job program that the user has previously programmed and regis tered Setting Procedure Select the program number If the machine is not equipped with capabilities e g stapling that were pro vided when the program was registered calling up that particular program is dis abled 3 9 Printer Setting 3 9 1 Default setting A Basic 1 Default Tray Functions To set the default Tray used by the printer Use To change the default value of Tray for the printer Setting Procedure The default setting is Auto Paper Select Displayed options are only the paper sources connected to the machine 2 Paper Size Functions To set the default paper size used by the printer Use To change the default value of paper size for the printer Setting Procedure Default setting depend on the marketing area setting Metric Area A4 Inch Area Letter 3 Output Functions To set the default values of printing method and number of copy sets for the printer Use Tochange the default va
284. ad all relevant docu mentation service manual technical notices etc and proceed with the inspection following the prescribed pro A cedure using only the prescribed tools Do not make any a adjustment not described in the documentation If the prescribed procedure or tool is not used the prod uct may break and a risk of injury or fire exists Before conducting an inspection be sure to disconnect the power plugs from the product and options When the power plug is inserted in the wall outlet some amp units are still powered even if the POWER switch is turned OFF A risk of electric shock exists The area around the fixing unit is hot You may get burnt 5 6 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS N WARNING Work Performed with the Product Powered On Take every care when making adjustments or performing an operation check with the product powered If you make adjustments or perform an operation check with the external cover detached you may touch live or AN f high voltage parts or you may be caught in moving gears lt eg or the timing belt leading to a risk of injury Take every care when servicing with the external cover detached High voltage exists around the drum unit A risk of elec tric shock exists N WARNING Safety Checkpoints Check the exterior and frame for edges burrs and other damages a The user or CE may be injured Do not a
285. al Parts Image Processing Board PWB C DC Power Supply PU1 Control Panel UN201 WIRING Step Check Item DIAGRAM Result Action Location 1 Is the I F cable between the Scanner and _ NO Reconnect or change engine connected properly the I F cable Is a power voltage being applied across NO Check the WIRING from 2 PJ1PU1 1 and 2 on PU1 26 G the wall outlet to SW1 PJ1PU1 3 15 the fuse F1 F2 on PU1 conducting NO Change PU1 Q 7 Is DC5 V being output from PJ10PU1 5 on NO 5 Put and DC24 V from PJ5PU1 3 es Change PUT 8 5 18 PJ12C on PWB C securely connected 19 Y NO Reconnect gt Is CN1UN2010n UN201 securely connected NO Reconnect 6 24 F YES Change UN201 Change PWB C 4 49 Power supply trouble bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 3 3 Fusing Heaters do not Operate Relevant Electrical Parts Upper Right Door Switch SW5 DC Power Supply PU1 Fusing Unit WIRING Step Check Item DIAGRAM Result Action Location Is the power source voltage applied across NO Check wiring from 1 PJ2PU1 1 and 3 on PU1 26 G power outlet SW5 to During this time the Right Door should be PJ2PU1 closed Is the power source voltage applied across YES Fusing Unit 2 CN44 1 and 3 or across 2 and 3 3 G NO Change PU1 3 4 Power is not Supplied to Options 3 4 1 ADF WIRING Step Ch
286. an with cleaning jig dirty Image check Monocolor uneven image uneven YES Select Tech Rep Mode gt 4 high density occurs Machine Adjust LPH Rank and run LPH Rank 5 Image Transfer Image Transfer Belt Unit makes NO and correct contacts Belt Unit positive contact with plates on rails 6 Cam gear operates properly NO Change Image Transfer Belt Unit The problem has been eliminated NO Change Imaging Unit through the checks of steps up to 5 Change Image Transfer Belt Unit 7 Change High Voltage Unit 2 Developing Bias Change High Voltage Unit 1 Image Transfer Neutralizing o I a 5 gt 4 71 E 2 3 gt Image quality problem 4 3 17 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Printer Monocolor low image density A Typical Faulty Images 40365403600 B Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action State Confirm gt Table Tech Rep Mode Check data for Vg and Vb Color Vb Around 390 V Vg Around 500 V Black Vb Around 390 V Vg Around 500 V NO Go to next step switch are defective 2 State Confirm Check data NO to next step Level History1 AIDC output value is around 4 3 V NO Clean AIDC Sensor 3 Tech Rep Mode Che
287. and try another rewriting sequence 3 If the procedure is still abnormally terminated change the board that has caused and carry out data rewriting procedure MFP Control Board PWB MFP Image Processing Board PWB C Control Board PWB MC LED Drive Board PWB LED MFP Control Board PWB MFP MFP Control Board PWB MFP g 2 35 Other bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 Other 4 1 Disassembly Adjustment prohibited items A Paint locked Screws NOTE Paint locked screws show that the assembly or unit secured can only be adjusted or set at the factory and should not be adjusted set or removed in the field B Red Painted Screws NOTES When the screws are removed the red paint is coated on the points where read justment is required Once the red painted screw is removed or loosened you should make adjustment Accordingly check the adjustment items in operation manual and make necessary adjustment Note that when two or more screws are used on the part in questions only one representative screw may be marked with red paint C Variable Resistors on Board NOTE Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions are given in Adjustment Setting o 2 D Removal of PWBs NOTES When removing a circuit board or other electrical component refer to Handling
288. ange the details of setting 5 Use to register the machine with the Center lt Setting Procedure 7 Call the Tech Rep Mode to the screen 2 Touch KRDS or RD Mode 3 Touch Detail Setting to access DT Setting DT Setting e Set Password DT ID and TEL No When e mail is selected for the ID Setting TEL No is the e mail address Initial Transmission Press the Initial Transmission key to execute the initial transmission to the Cen ter and the machine equipped with the Data Terminal is registered with the Cen ter only if Modem is selected for System Selection 3 67 TECH REP MODE bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 D Date Time Input Functions To set the date and time of day Use Use to set or change the date and time of day Setting Procedure 7 Call the Tech Rep Mode to the screen 2 Touch KRDS or RD Mode 3 Touch Detail Setting to access Date Time Input 4 Enter the date month day and year and time of day from the 10 Key Pad Touch SET to start the clock E Common DT Only RD Mode Functions To set tone or pulse and automatic reception Use Use to change the details of setting Setting Procedure Dial Mode The default setting is Tone Tone Pulse Auto Receive The default setting is Disable Enable Disable F RAM Clear Functions To clear the following data for the Cente
289. aper Paper not Unit Reverse Sensor present present 3 82 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 TECH REP MODE Symbol Panel Display Part Signal Name Operation Characteristics Panel Display 1 0 PC17 Dev Cyan Toner Toner Near Empty Sensor PQ C Toner not Toner Empty present present PC16 Magenta Toner Toner Near Empty Sensor PQ M Toner not Toner Empty present present PC15 Yellow Toner Toner Near Empty Sensor PQ Y Toner not Toner Empty present present PC18 Black Toner Toner Near Empty Sensor PQ Bk Toner not Toner Empty present present PC19 Cyan Toner Set Toner Set Sensor C Out of posi In position tion PC26 Magenta Toner Toner Set Sensor M Out of posi In position Set tion PC25 Yellow Toner Set Toner Set Sensor Y Out of posi In position tion PC20 Black Toner Set Toner Set Sensor Bk Out of posi In position tion PC29 2nd Unit 2nd Image Transfer Pressure Not Retracted Trans Separation Retraction Sensor Retracted fer PC12 Trans Transfer Unit 1st Image Transfer Retraction Not Retracted fer Belt Separation Position Sensor Retracted 1 Toner Toner Waste Toner Full Sensor Blocked Unblocked PC32 Collect Toner Box Set Waste Toner Bottle Set Sensor In position Out of position Fusing Set Fusing Unit In Position Detection In position Out of Unit Signal position PC33 Fuser Roller
290. are removed the red paint is coated on the points where read justment is required Once the red painted screw is removed or loosened you should make adjustment Accordingly check the adjustment items in operation manual and make necessary adjustment Note that when two or more screws are used on the part in questions only one representative screw may be marked with red paint C Variable Resistors on Board g Do 1 the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions are given in Adjustment Setting D Removal of PWBs NOTES When removing a circuit board or other electrical component refer to Handling of PWBs and follow the corresponding removal procedures The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board When it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on the board be sure to ground your body Other PC 101 PC 201 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 22 Disassembly Assembly list Other parts No Section Part name Ref page 1 Right Door s 2 8 2 Rear Right Cover s 2 8 3 Exterior parts Lower Right Cover 2 8 4 Front Right Cover ts 2 8 5 Rear Cover s 2 8 2 3 Disassembly Assembly procedure 2 3 1 Right Door Rear Right Cover Lower Right Cover Front Right Cover o
291. artridge and toner into fire You may be burned due to dust explosion A adc N CAUTION HANDLING OF SERVICE MATERIALS Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet Drum cleaner isopropyl alcohol and roller cleaner ace tone based are highly flammable and must be handled with care A risk of fire exists Do not replace the cover or turn the product ON before any solvent remnants on the cleaned parts have fully evaporated A risk of fire exists Use only a small amount of cleaner at a time and take care not to spill any liquid If this happens immediately wipe it off IN A risk of fire exists When using any solvent ventilate the room well Breathing large quantities of organic solvents can lead to discomfort 5 9 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS 3 MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT 1 If an accident has occurred the distributor who has been notified first must immedi ately take emergency measures to provide relief to affected persons and to prevent further damage 2 Ifa report of a serious accident has been received from a customer an on site evalua tion must be carried out quickly and KMBT must be notified 3 To determine the cause of the accident conditions and materials must be recorded through direct on site checks in accordance with instructions issued by KMBT 4 CONCLUSION 1 Safety of users and customer engineers depends highly on accu
292. at abnormal timing 4 29 2 6 9 C0040 Suction Fan Motor s failure to turn 4 30 2 6 10 C0046 Fusing Cooling Fan Motor 1 s failure to 4 30 2 6 11 C0048 Fusing Cooling Fan Motor 2 3 s failure to turn 4 31 2 6 12 C004C Ozone Ventilation Fan Motor s failure to turn 4 31 2 6 13 C004D Toner Suction Fan Motor s failure to turn 4 32 2 6 14 COO4E Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor s failure to turn 4 32 2 6 15 Cooling Fan Motor 2 s failure to 4 32 2 6 16 C0060 Fusing Drive Motor s failure to 4 33 2 6 17 C0061 Fusing Drive Motor turning at abnormal timing 4 33 2 6 18 C0094 2nd Image Transfer Roller pressure retraction failure 4 33 2 6 19 C0096 Image Transfer Belt pressure retraction failure 4 34 2 6 20 C0098 Fusing Pressure Roller pressure retraction failure 4 34 2 6 21 C0200 Cyan PC Drum Charge Corona malfunction 4 35 2 6 22 C0202 Magenta PC Drum Charge Corona malfunction 4 35 2 6 23 C0204 Yellow PC Drum Charge Corona malfunction 4 35 2 6 24 C02
293. ate Home Position Sensor Pl4 Finisher Control Board PWB A FN FN Front Aligning Motor M4 FN WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical compo nents Check the motor and sensor connectors 1 for proper connection and correct as necessary Check the connector of motor for proper 2 drive coupling and correct as neces sary 3 PI4 FN I O sensor check PWB A FN 2 E 8 4 M4 FN operation check when the Power 7 Switch is turned OFF and ON 5 PWB A FN replacement 6 FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 2 3 5 Trouble code Aligning Plate Motor malfunctions A Detection timing Malfunction code Description The Rear Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor PI5 FN is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Rear Aligning Plate has started moving from its home position to a position out of the home position The Rear Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor PI5 FN is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Rear Aligning Plate has started moving from a position out of the home position to the home position B Action Relevant electrical parts FN Rear Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor PI5 Rear Aligning Motor M5 FN Finisher Control Board PWB A FN WIRING DIAGRAM Step
294. ation Roller 3 clean of dirt B Replacing Procedure Slide out the Tray 1 2 Remove two screws 1 and the Sep aration Roller mounting bracket Assy 2 and two reinforcement plates 3 NOTES Receive by hand the reinforcement plate that will come off position when the screws are removed When reinstalling the reinforcement plate make sure that it is doweled into position 3 Take off the rubber stopper 4 shaft 5 spring 6 and guide plate 7 to remove the Paper Separation Roller fixing bracket Assy 8 4 Snap off the E ring 9 and the Paper Separation Roller Assy 10 5 To reinstall reverse the order of removal 6 Select Tech Rep Mode gt Counter Life and clear the count of 1st Cleaning Procedure Slide out the Tray 2 2 58 Remove the Multi Bypass unit Remove the Screw 1 and the Rein forcement plate 2 why bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Periodical check 4 Open the Vertical transport door 5 Remove two Claws 3 and the Verti cal transport door 4 6 Remove two Screws 5 and remove the Jam processing cover 6 2 40361520201 8 7 Remove two Screws 7 and the Sep aration Roller 2 installation plate Assy 8 4036520211 8 Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol wipe the Separation Roller 9 403610259200 2 9 o c
295. ation Sensor PC1 DF Take up Motor M1 DF Take up Cover Sensor PC3 DF Transport Motor M2 DF Control Board PWB A DF ROM IC7 DF 26 5 2 lt gt 5 9 Parts layout drawing bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 1 3 PC101 PC102 Option 403616551200 Tray4 Paper Near Empty Sensor 1 Transport Roller Motor M120 PF 14 PC122 PF 2 Door Set Sensor PC111 PF 15 yes 3 Tray3 Lift Up Upper Limit Sensor PC114 16 Tray4 CD Paper Size Sensor 1 PF PC127 PF 4 Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor PC117 7 Tray4 FD Paper Size Detection Board PF PWB I4 PF 5 Paper Take Up Sensor PC116 PF 18 Tray4 Set Sensor PC121 PF 6 Tray3 Paper Empty Sensor PC115 PF 19 Main Control Board PWB C2 PF 7 Tray4 Vertical Transport Sensor PC126 20 Tray3 FD Paper Size Detection Board PF PWB I3 PF 8 4 Paper Take Up Sensor PC125 PF 21 pe m S 9 Tray4 Paper Empty Sensor PC124 PF 22 pes PE Size Sensor a 10 Tray4 Lift Up Sensor PC123 PF 23 Tray3 Set Sensor PC112 PF 5 Tray3 Paper Near Empty Sensor 2 11 Tray4 Transport Roller Motor M121 PF 24 PC113 PF S 12 Tray4 Paper Feed Motor M123 PF 25 Lift Up Motor 1 M124 PF 13 Tray4 Lift Up Motor M125 PF 26 Tray3 Paper Feed Motor M122 PF 5 10 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Parts layout drawing 14 PC 401 Option
296. ation of any new print cycle is inhibited when the maximum number of printed pages is reached 2 Periodical check bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 A Conditions for Life Specifications Values The life specification values represent the number of copies made or figures equivalent to it when given conditions see the Table given below are met They can be more or less depending on the machine operating conditions of each individual user Item Description Monochrome Making 4 copies per job Job Type Color Making 2 copies per job Paper Size A4 Color Ratio Black to Color 5 1 CV M Black 8 000 Color 1 600 Original Density B W 5 for each color 6 for Monochrome No of Operating Days per Month 20 days Power Switch turned ON and OFF 20 times per month B Control causing inhibited printing for one part when an inhibited printing event occurs in another part In order to reduce the maintenance call times when printing prohibiting is reached for Purpose any of the following parts make printing prohibited also for other parts whose life value is reached and replace those parts at the same time Target parts 2 6 Fusing unit Image Transfer Belt Unit Imaging Unit C Imaging Unit M Imaging Unit Y Imaging Unit Bk bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Periodical check 1 5 Maintenance procedure Periodical check parts NO
297. aulty even after Stabilizer has been executed Adjustment 1 Touch Expert User Mode Stabilizer Procedure 2 Touch Reset and Stabilize Press the Start key to start Stabilizer The Start key turns orange and stays lit up orange during the Stabilizer sequence A Stabilizer is completed when the Start key turns green 3 31 D o S z E o E 7 5 Utility Mode bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 3 17 6 PRT Area Top Margin Functions To vary the print start position in the FD direction for each of different paper types in Tray1 Use The LPH Unit has been replaced The paper type has been changed The image on the copy deviates in the FD direction A faint image occurs on the leading edge of the image A misfeed occurs at the 2nd image transfer section Adjustment Specification Width A Width A on the test pattern produced should 4 fall within the following range Specifications 5 0 0 5 mm Setting Range 3 0 mm to 3 0 mm in 0 2 mm increments 403613009 0 Adjustment Instructions If width A is longer than the specifications make the setting value smaller than the cur rent one If width A is shorter than the specifications make the setting value greater than the cur rent one Adjustment Procedure 1 Select according to the paper used on the Paper Type Setting Dial
298. ay 2 Rear Right Cover 6 Remove the Screw 7 and remove the Wiring Cover 8 RODS 2 41 Other bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 12 11 11 403621571 5 Remove five Screws 9 and remove the Rear Cover 10 6 Remove four Screws 11 7 Open the Right Door 12 and remove the Rear Right Cover 13 o c 2 4 3 5 IR Upper Front Cover IR Upper Right Cover IR Upper Rear Cover 40362158 1 1 Remove two Shoulder Screws 1 a Screw 2 and remove the IR Upper Front Cover 3 2 Remove three Screws 4 and remove the IR Upper Right Cover 5 3 Remove four Shoulder Screws 6 and three Screws 7 and remove the IR Upper Rear Cover 8 2 42 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Other 4 3 6 Original Glass IR Front Cover 5 4 2 1 4036fs2159c2 Remove the IR Upper Right Cover 2 42 Remove each Screw 1 and remove the Original Glass fixing bracket near side inmost side 2 Remove the Original Glass 3 Remove the IR Right Cover and IR Upper Front Cover 2 39 2 42 Remove the IR Left Cover 2 40 Remove five Screws 4 and remove the IR Front Cover 5 G 2 SED 4 3 7 Control Panel 1 Remove four caps 1 at both ends of Control Panel 40361521600 2 43 Other bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004
299. b C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 2 6 71 12 0 Hard disk recognition error 2 6 72 C12C1 Hard Disk Error 1 2 6 73 C12C2 Hard Disk Error 2 2 6 74 C12C3 Hard Disk Error 3 2 6 75 C12C4 Hard Disk Error 4 2 6 76 C12C5 Hard Disk Error 5 2 6 77 C12C6 Hard Disk Error 6 2 6 78 C12C7 Hard Disk Error 7 2 6 79 C12C8 Hard Disk Error 8 2 6 80 C12C9 Hard Disk Error 9 2 6 81 C12CA Hard Disk Error A 2 6 82 C12CB Hard disk data transfer error Relevant Electrical Parts MFP Control Board PWB MFP Hard Disk WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control Signal Electrical Component 1 Reinstall the hard disk Change Hard Disk Change PWB MFP 2 6 83 C12CC Hard disk unformat Relevant Electrical Parts MFP Control Board PWB MFP Hard Disk WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control Signal Electrical Component 8 Select Tech Rep Mode Machine Adjust gt z 1 Memory Hard Disk Adjust Hard Disk For mat Change Hard Disk Change PWB MFP 4 44 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Malfunction code 2 6 84 C12CF Hard disk specifications error Relevant Electrical Parts Hard Disk WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control
300. bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 5 Option counter 4 5 1 Installation of The Mechanical Counter o 1 Open the Front Door C 2 Remove the Panel Cover BT J P 2 41 3 Remove the Screw 1 and remove the Front Right Cover 2 4 Cutout the knockout 4 in the Front Right Cover 3 403616257200 Il Maintenance 5 Remove two screws 5 and the Right Front Cover 6 6 Install the Mounting plate 7 on the Mechanical Counter 9 with the Screw 8 2 94 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 40361257600 4 5 2 Installation method for the Key Counter 403616258600 Other 7 Secure the mechanical counter 11 with the screw 10 8 Mount the Connector 12 of Mechanical Counter on the Relay Connector 13 at main body side 2 1 Remove two Screws 1 and remove the Cover 2 2 Remove the Lower Rear Cover me 2 44 3 Pass the Key Counter Harness 3 through the hole 4 Mount the Connector 4 5 Secure the counter cable 5 and cable holder 6 with one screw 7 6 Reinstall the Rear Cover 2 95 o c Other 403616258701 403616258800 403616258900 403616262600 2 96 bizhub C350 Field Se
301. ble the crisscross sorting function that stacks Sorted copy sets in a crisscross manner i e one set stacked lengthwise on top of another set stacked crosswise Crisscross sorting is disabled when a Finisher is mounted on the machine Use To disable crisscross sorting for paper of the same size Setting Procedure default setting is Yes Yes No 3 7 2 2 8 A Paper Type Select Functions To set the paper type for Tray2 through Tray4 Special paper Type of paper that the user does not want to be automatically selected paper with company logo Use To prevent a special type of paper including that for use for single sided only from being inadvertently used when such a type of paper is loaded in the trays Setting Procedure The default setting is Standard plain paper Standard High Quality Paper Single Sided Only Specialty B Auto select paper for small originals Functions To select whether or not to enable copying when an original whose size falls outside the detectable range is loaded in the Auto Paper mode and to select the paper source to be used Use To use a document that is not good for original size detection e g business cards If ON is selected a copy cycle can be initiated even with no originals loaded Setting Procedure The default setting is OFF disable copying OFF ON The default setting for the paper source is Tray1
302. c 1 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 xipueddy oeeesssicor HEIS pug _ epis 15 i SWOEEL oui eBueuox3 epis gt SWEIS HEIS apis 15 TES Ho 90 115 piouajog Janoun yo d0 271S 4x3 uo uo ug C10 yo 924 208095 yx uo 40 924 S 3 yo 40 90 109095 Jenowny uo yo 90 228 Josuag 30 199 uo Josuag 40 524 209095 idug moo UBIH Mod 30 6 UBIH 0 100W HO 40 2 0 M01 100W yo M01 30 HA 0 138 uo yo uo 5 5 29 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 hart ooresssiecor 5 296 SWOEL eur euuis pu uo yo 40 115 piouejog yo 40 27 plouajos uo ug 1 uonensibeu yo 40 994 208095 1x3 uo yo 340 524 208095 Jo 40 224 josueg dni uo yo 30 19d uo 205095
303. ce B a El IV Troublshooting V Appendix Standard Controller Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 General 1 Controller specifications Controller specifications Type Built in type controller j B amp W 35 ppm Print Speed Color 22 ppm Printer Language PCL5c CPU MPC8245 350MHz using the main unit s CPU Program ROM 16 MB 8 MB x 2 Including 46 internal fonts RAM 256 MB Host Interface Ethernet 10 1 00BASE TX RJ 45 IEEE1284 Compatible Nibble ECP 2 Network Protocol IPX SPX Auto Ethernet Il 802 2 802 3 802 3 SNAP NetBEUI TCP IP SMTP FTP SNMP HTTP 1 1 DHCP ARP ICMP BOOTP SLP Network Print Service Pserver NDS NetWare 4 x 5 x 6 x Pserver Bindery NetWare 4 x NDPS NetWare 5 x 6 x SMB RAW Port Printing Port 9100 To be changed from Page Scope Light IPP 1 1 LPD IFAX to print Data that can be received Resolution 200 x 100 204 x 98 200 x 200 204 x 196 204 x 391 300 x 300 400 x 400 408 x 391 Size Letter Legal Ledger A4 B4 A3 Color Mode Monochrome Compression method MH MR MMR Network Scan Func tions Scan to FTP with URL Notification Scan to PC with URL Notification Scan to E Mail Scan to HDD with URL Notification TWAIN Scan to IFAX Data to be transmitted Resolution 200 x 200 Size A4 Letter Legal Color Mode Monochrome Compression method MH
304. ce Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Code Item Description COBAO Elevator Motor M7 FN drive malfunctions The Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor PQ PWB D FN is not activated even after the lapse of a given period of time after M7 FN has been energized to start raising the Elevator Tray The Elevator Tray Upper Limit Switch S2 FN or Eleva tor Tray Lower Limit Switch S3 FN is actuated after M7 FN has been energized 2 2 1 How to reset Press the Trouble Reset Switch on the Tech Rep Setting Switches Board to reset the following malfunctions scanner related malfunctions fusing related malfunctions expo sure lamp related malfunctions and C3FFF For any other malfunctions open and close the Front Door or turn OFF and ON the Power Switch 4 8 FS 501 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Trouble code 2 3 Solution 2 3 1 C0B20 Stapling Unit Moving Motor M6 FN drive malfunction A Detection timing Malfunction code Description The Staple Home Position Sensor PC14 FN does not go HIGH even after the COB20 lapse of a given period of time after M6 FN has been energized to return the Sta pling Unit to its home position B Action Relevant electrical parts Staple Home Position Sensor PC14 FN Control Board PWB A FN Stapling Unit Moving Motor M6 FN WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical compo nents Check the motor and sensor
305. ce with a new power cord with plugs on both ends specified by KMBT fa If the power cord inlet type is not connected to the WA product securely a contact problem may lead to increased resistance overheating and risk of fire Check whether the power cord is not stepped on or pinched by a table and so on Overheating may occur there leading to a risk of fire a5 Do not bundle or tie the power cord Overheating may occur there leading to a risk of fire Check whether dust is collected around the power plug and wall outlet Using the power plug and wall outlet without removing dust may result in fire Do not insert the power plug into the wall outlet with a wet hand The risk of electric shock exists When unplugging the power cord grasp the plug not the cable ex The cable may be broken leading to a risk of fire and electric shock NWARNING Wiring Never use multi plug adapters to plug multiple power cords in the same outlet If used the risk of fire exists 8 4 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS N WARNING Wiring When an extension cord is required use a specified one Current that can flow in the extension cord is limited so using a too long extension cord may result in fire D Do not use an extension cable reel with the cable taken up Fire may result N WARNING Ground Connection Check whether the p
306. cement E 6 FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Trouble code 2 Trouble code 21 Trouble code display The main unit s CPU performs a self diagnostics function that on detecting a malfunc tion gives the corresponding malfunction code on the Touch Panel Job Control Malfunction detected Please call your Technical Representative and provide code C 0200 TEL 125 4036fs4012e0 2 2 Trouble code list Code Item Description COBOO Transport System Drive malfunc e The Folding Roller Home Position Sensor PI12 FN is tions not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Folding Roller has started moving from its home position The Folding Roller Home Position Sensor PI12 FN is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Folding Roller has started moving from a position not the home position CO0BO5 Paddle Motor malfunctions The Paddle Home Position Sensor PI2 FN is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Paddle has started moving from its home posi tion The Paddle Home Position Sensor PI2 FN is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Paddle has started moving from a position not the home position The Swing Guide Home Position Sensor PI3 FN is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Booklet Roller has started moving from its home pos
307. ch 4 8 12 Display PM parts lifetime Functions To select whether or not to give the display of PM parts lifetime PM parts lifetime display An entire screen warning is given when the service life of a specific unit has been reached prompting the user to replace the part Applicable units Transfer Belt Unit Fusing Unit Paper Powder Filter Ozone Filter Transfer Roller Unit IU C M Y Bk Use Use to select not to give the display of PM parts lifetime Setting Procedure The default setting is Yes Yes No 4 8 13 LCT Paper Size Functions To set the paper size for the LCT Use Use to change the paper size for the LCT Setting Procedure The default setting depends on the setting made for the applicable marketing area A4 Europe Others1 2 3 Japan Letter US Others4 4 8 14 Chinese Paper Size Functions To set the paper size for Chinese paper Use Use to change the paper size for the Chinese paper Setting Procedure The following sizes are the default setting 8K 390 x 270 mm 16K 270 x 195 mm US Europe Others1 2 4 Japan 8K 390 x 267 mm 16K 267 x 195 mm Others3 4 8 15 US Zoom Setting e This option becomes available only when US is selected for Marketing Area Functions To change the fixed zoom ratios Use Use to change the fixed zoom ratios Setting Procedure The default setting is 0 733 0 733 0 772 3 74
308. change for improvement of their performance Therefore the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required Revision mark To indicate clearly a section revised show to the left of the revised section A number within represents the number of times the revision has been made To indicate clearly a section revised show in the lower outside section of the correspond ing page A number within 4 represents the number of times the revision has been made NOTE Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted When a page revised in Ver 2 0 has been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 3 0 only are shown with those for Ver 2 0 deleted When page revised in Ver 2 0 has not been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 2 0 are left as they are 2004 09 20 N Adding the descriptions and correcting errors in writing 2004 03 1 0 Issue of the first edition Date Service manual Ver Revision mark Descriptions of revision PC 401 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 CONTENTS General 1 1 1 1 229 Paper 1 1 1 3 Machine specifications eese nennen nnne enne nnne 1 1 1 4 Operating environment ou cece eee
309. change the authentication system for LDAP server Setting Procedure The default setting is Anonymous Anonymous Simple Digest MD5 CRAM MD5 GSS SPNEGO To set the Domain name of the GSS SPNEGO Up to 128 characters 3 27 o E o a Utility Mode 2 Login Name bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Functions To set the logon name for the LDAP Server Use Use to set the logon name for the LDAP Server Setting Procedure Up to 255 characters alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used 3 Password Functions To set the logon password for the LDAP Server Use Use to set the logon password for the LDAP Server Setting Procedure Up to 128 characters alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used C Other 1 Max Number of Searches Functions To set the maximum number of searches for LDAP search Use To change the maximum number of searches for LDAP search Setting Procedure The default setting is 100 Num Case 100 Num Case 5 to 120 Num Case 2 Connection Timeout Functions To set the timeout period for connection to the LDAP server Use To change the timeout period for connection to the LDAP server Setting Procedure The default setting is 60 sec 60 sec 5 to 300 sec 3 17 Settings in Expert User Mode
310. ck Exit section misfeed seen 4 5 1 4 6 Stapler section misfeed 0 cee seccseseseesseeeseeceseseseeeseecssessseseesesesesneeesesees 4 6 1 4 7 Horizontal Transport section 2 4 6 FS 501 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 2 Trouble Coda eien M 4 7 2 1 Jrouble code display ansia aed See en eerie 4 7 2 2 Trouble code list rete reete ete deo te debi des 4 7 2 2 1 SHOW TO reset ne ne atomes 4 8 2 3 Solution cine toten cete i radere Dna te ni er prn ids 4 9 2 81 COB2O Stapling Unit Moving Motor M6 FN drive malfunction 4 9 2 3 2 Aligning Motor M5 FN drive malfunction 4 10 2 3 8 COBA48 Exit Roller Rolls Spacing Motor M13 FN drive malfunction 4 11 2 8 4 COB4A Storage Roller Rolls Spacing Motor M12 FN drive malfunction 4 12 2 3 5 COB50 Stapling Motor drive malfunction eese 4 12 2 3 6 COB80 Shift Motor M8 FN drive 4 13 2 3 7 COBAO Elevator Motor M7 FN drive malfunctions 4 14 lii Il Maintenance D 2 5 IV Troublshooting V Appendix FS 501 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 IlI Bunooysiqnoly Al xipu
311. ck Image Transfer Belt for damage Level History data Low ATDC and low Vg and Vb YES Go to step 8 check results Low ATDC and high Vg and Vb YES Go to step 14 6 ATDC falling within specified range YES Go to step 8 and low Vg and Vb 7 ATDC falling within specified range YES Go to step 14 and high Vg and Vb 8 LPH Assy LED retracting lever is locked in NO Slide out the IU and reinstall position Imaging Unit Dirty on the outside YES Clean 10 LPH Assy The surface of the lens array is dirty YES Clean with cleaning jig 11 Sensor win The color Sensor window YES Clean dow the LED Assy is dirty Image Transfer Image Transfer Belt Unit makes posi NO and correct contacts 12 f Belt Unit tive contact with plates on rails 13 Cam gear operates properly NO Change Image Transfer Belt Unit 14 Hopper Unit Connectors are loose YES Reconnect 15 Gear is cracked YES Change gear 16 Toner empty lever and or detecting YES Clean 4 72 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Image quality problem 23 through the checks of steps up to 22 Step Section Check Item Result Action Image Adjust gt Toner is properly supplied when NO Go to next step Toner Sup ATDC Toner Supply is run 17 ply Tech Rep Mode Image Adjust gt The problem has been eliminated NO Go to next step Level Set when T C has been increa
312. ck each unit for life Use To check each unit for conditions before it reaches the end of its service life Setting Procedure The life indicator of each unit is displayed Pressing the Print key produces a printout of a list of counter counts To print the list load Tray1 with A4 or Letter lengthwise or Letter lengthwise paper D 2 lt E o a 5 Utility Mode bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 3 11 Settings in the Admin Mode Entering the 8 digit administrator number set in the Admin Mode will allow you to enter the Admin Mode default value 00000000 3 11 1 A 1 4 1 Top Erase Admin Set Functions To set the leading edge erase amount of the paper Use To change the width of the area not printed along the leading edge of the paper Setting Procedure The default setting is 5 mm 5 7 mm 2 Disable Sleep Mode Functions To display the option of No for the Sleep setting screen available from User s Choice 1 Use To display the option of No for the Sleep setting Setting Procedure The default setting is No Yes No 3 A3 Wide Paper Size Over Size Paper selection Functions Select paper size of A3 Wide Over Size Paper Use To change the full bleed paper size Setting Procedure The default setting
313. ck that the results are OK Make the adjustment again if the results NG 45 ROM Version Functions To check the ROM version Use Use when the firmware is upgraded When the firmware is upgraded or PWB is replaced Adjustment 1 Call the Tech Rep Mode to the screen Procedure 2 Touch these keys in this order ROM Version 3 Touch 1 to check the following ROM version numbers MSC PANEL MSC Subset PIC IR Mecha LPH ADF IC7 Sorter Finisher IC3 4 Touch 2 to check the following ROM version numbers Controller DSS DPS Demo Page NM MIO MIOM Font 4 6 Image Adjust 4 6 1 PRT Max Density 7 Functions To adjust gradation color and image density to target reproduction levels by varying the maximum amount of toner sticking to paper through auxiliary manual fine adjust ment of y of each color after Gradation Adjust Use An image quality problem is not corrected even after Gradation Adjust has been run Adjustment Pange 0 10to 10 Adjustment To increase the maximum amount of toner sticking increase the setting value Instructions To decrease the maximum amount of toner sticking decrease the setting value Adjustment 1 Call the Tech Rep Mode to the screen Procedure 2 Touch these keys in this order Image Adjust PRT Max Density 3 Select the colo
314. ction Check Item Result Action The problem has been eliminated NO Change Imaging Unit through the checks of steps up to 10 Change Image Transfer Belt Unit Change LPH Assy Change LED Drive Board 11 Change MFP Control Board Change LPH Unit Change High Voltage Unit 2 Developing Bias Change High Voltage Unit 1 Image Transfer Neutralizing o I 2 5 5 Hr gt 4 75 E 2 3 gt Image quality problem 4 3 19 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Printer Monocolor foggy background A Typical Faulty Images ABCD ABCD ABCD ABCD ABCD 403814030 0 B Troubleshooting Procedure Vg Around 500 V Step Section Check Item Result Action State Confirm Check data for Vg and Vb NO Go to next step Table Color Vb Around 390 V 1 Tech Rep Vg Around 500 V Mode Black Vb Around 390 V Max 0 100 Highlight 0 60 2 State Confirm Check data NO Go to next step Level History 1 AIDC output value is around 4 3 V Clean AIDC Sensor 3 Tech Rep Check Transfer Belt for dam Mode age Level History data Low ATDC and low Vg and Vb YES Go to step 8 check results Low ATDC and high Vg and Vb YES Go to step 12 6 ATDC falling within specified range YES Go to step 8 and low Vg and
315. ction timing Type Description Misfeed due to paper not reached the Exit Sensor in the 1 Sided Mode Misfeed is detected if the Exit Sensor PC6 DF is not turned ON within a preset time after exit operation started in the 1 Sided Mode Misfeed is detected if the difference between the paper feeding size measured at the Turnover Sensor PC5 DF and that measured at the Exit Sensor PC6 DF is 20 mm or more Misfeed at the Transport Tray B Action Relevant electrical parts Turnover Sensor PC5 DF Control Board PWB A DF Exit Sensor PC6 DF WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical compo nents 1 Initial check items 2 PC5 DF I O sensor check PWB A DF CN9A DF 3 G 2 3 PC6 DF I O sensor check PWB A DF CN9A DF 6 H 2 4 PWB A DF replacement 5 Each sensor is automatically adjusted when the Power Switch is turned ON as special means for detecting a paper misfeed If a sensor adjustment error occurs through this procedure a misfeed is detected as paper remaining misfeed at the corresponding sensor o I 2 5 5 Hr gt 4 5 a 2 5 gt Set error detection 2 Seterror detection When the ADF or cover set error for some reason is detected the Panel of the main unit will have the following display DF 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004
316. cycle Mode 2 2 counts per 1 copy cycle Mode 3 3 counts per 1 copy cycle Mode 4 4 counts per 1 copy cycle Mode 5 5 counts per 1 copy cycle If Mode 2 is selected for Total Counter Sizes other than those specified is selected for Size Counter and the paper used is the specified size or one other than those specified Mode 1 2 counts per 1 copy cycle Mode 2 4 counts per 1 copy cycle Mode 3 6 counts per 1 copy cycle Mode 4 8 counts per 1 copy cycle Mode 5 10 counts per 1 copy cycle If Mode 2 is selected for Total Counter Sizes other than those specified is selected for Size Counter and the paper used is the specified size or one other than those specified Mode 1 1 count per 1 copy cycle Mode 2 2 counts per 1 copy cycle Mode 3 3 counts per 1 copy cycle Mode 4 4 counts per 1 copy cycle Mode 5 5 counts per 1 copy cycle Message Select the message type when the administrative unit is mounted Type 1 Message for Key Counter Type 2 Message for Card scanning Type 3 Message for ID management Type 4 Message for Remote SW Admin Unit Data Controller Default setting Unset 7 Vendor Default setting Unset Select Interface and Message when the vendor is mounted Interface Select the interface type when the vendor is mounted Type 1 Coin Vendor is set 2 Message Select t
317. d ing up the Finisher Tray Upper Cover 2 and remove the Finisher Tray Upper Cover 2 458316253400 2 4 FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 1 3 6 Upper Cover 458310253500 1 3 7 Side Guide 1 S TT TEST T B 2 ps 458316253700 458316253800 T D 6 FA Other Remove the Front Cover 2 3 Remove the Rear Cover 2 3 Remove two screws 1 Open the Upper Door 2 and remove the Upper Cover 3 2 Remove the Exit Tray 2 3 Remove the Front Cover 2 3 Remove the Rear Cover 2 3 Derail the Exit Tray Support Plate Front 1 and the Exit Tray Support Plate Rear 2 to the outside off the respective rail grooves Remove four screws 3 Pull down the Side Guide 4 lightly disengage the Exit Tray Home Posi tion Detecting Lever Rear 5 and then remove the Side Guide 4 NOTES In reassembling ensure of exact installation with the Exit Tray Home Position Detecting Lever Rear 5 set in the slot of the Exit Tray Home Position Detecting Lever Center 6 After reassembly press each of these levers for several times to make sure of exact installation 2 5 o c 2 Other 1 3 8 Middle Transport Unit
318. dicate clearly a section revised show in the lower outside section of the correspond ing page A number within 4 represents the number of times the revision has been made NOTE Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted When a page revised in Ver 2 0 has been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 3 0 only are shown with those for Ver 2 0 deleted When page revised in Ver 2 0 has not been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 2 0 are left as they are 2004 09 20 N Adding the descriptions and correcting errors in writing 2004 03 1 0 Issue of the first edition Date Service manual Ver Revision mark Descriptions of revision 101 201 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 CONTENTS General 1 1 1 1 229 Paper type roe in to ep 1 1 1 3 Machine specifications eese nennen nnne enne 1 1 1 4 Operating environment ou cece eee eee eeae cess ceeeseaeseaeseaeeseeseeeseaeeeaeeneees 1 1 Il Maintenance 1 Periodical check caves cutadaceeduceadvens 2 1 11 Maintenance procedure Periodical check parts 2 4 1 1 1 Separation Roller Assy nennen tnnt nennen 2 1 1 1 2 Paper Take up Roll sesssseseseseseseeeneeeennnee nennen nnne nnne nnns enne 2 2 1 4 3 Pick upiRoll amp E coepere ne erp ee e Dar eig t ER Re e EP EXE 2 4 1 1 4
319. dl ae cee Se ae Se gt p 409616300560 403690080 Adjustment for Y direction If the cross deviates in the direction of C Check point Y increase the setting If the cross deviates in the direction of D decrease the setting Direction of C Direction of D d ey Ls i E Sa 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 s un is 20 1 1 1 1 403616300700 40361300800 3 55 o z E o E 7 5 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 4 9 LPH Rank Functions To correct uneven LPH image by producing an output of the LPH Pattern of Test Print Use When an uneven image occurs and is not eliminated even after other troubleshooting procedures have been carried out When the LPH Unit has been replaced When the LPH Assy has been replaced Adjustment 1 1t05 2015 not used Range Adjustment 1 Load Tray1 with A3 plain paper Procedure 2 Call the Tech Rep Mode to the screen 3 Touch Machine Adjust gt LPH Rank 4 Return the Rank settings for all four colors back to 1 5 Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern LPH Pattern Green yellow Magenta 403615304800 6 Identify the spot at which uneven image occurs 7 Select the color Cyan Magenta Yellow Black that develops uneven image Select Yellow if green on the test pattern develops
320. e Malfunction code Description C0900 The Lift Up Sensor is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed C0950 after the paper lift up operation for the drawer began B Action Relevant electrical parts Lift Up Motor 1 M124 PF Tray4 Lift Up Motor M125 PF Tray3 Lift Up Upper Limit Sensor PC114 PF Tray4 Lift Up Sensor PC123 PF Main Control Board PWB C2 PF main unit Control Board PWB MC main unit DC Power Supply PU1 WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action 1 Location Control signal Electrical compo nents Check the motor and sensor connectors 1 for proper connection and correct as necessary Check the connector of each motor for 2 proper drive coupling and correct as necessary 3 Check the PU1 connector for proper _ connection and correct as necessary PC114 PF I O sensor check PWB C2 PF PJ6C2 PF 3 G 3 PC123 PF I O sensor check PWB C2 PF PJ10C2 PF 3 D 8 M124 PF operation check PWB C2 PF PJ4C2 PF 5 4 D 3 PWB C2 PF 7 M125 PF operation check PJ8C2 PF 12 13 G 3 PWB C2 PF replacement 5 PWB MC replacement 10 PU1 replacement 4 6 p S m m KONICA MINOLTA SERVICE MANUAL FIELD SERVICE PC 401 2004 09 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC Ver 2 0 After publication of this service manual the parts and mechanism may be subject to
321. e 5 2 22 3 Insert the Compact Flash card 3 222 into the slot A 22 3 ad YN 48 4 Plug the power cord into the power outlet and turn ON the Power Switch 5 Six different types of F W appear on Co the Touch Panel 6 Select the particular type of F W APP Font to be updated 403615260400 7 Press the Start key At this time the Start key starts blinking red 8 Check that the Touch Panel shows the message indicating that the data has been rewritten correctly Downloading Completed Check also the Check Sum value Check Sum shown on the Touch Panel The Start key blinks green 9 Unplug the power cord from the power outlet NOTE Do not turn OFF the Power Switch 10 Remove the Compact Flash card from the slot 11 Turn OFF the Power Switch 12 Plug the power cord and turn ON the Power Switch 13 Call the Tech Rep mode to the screen 14 Select ROM Version 15 Make sure that the Firmware is updated 2 5 Firmware rewriting Standard Controller Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 2 2 2 Action When Data Transfer Fails f NG appears on the Touch Panel indicating that rewriting has been unsuccessful in which case the Start key lights up red take the following steps 1 Perform the data rewriting procedure again 2 If the procedure is abnormally terminated change the memory card for a new one and
322. e 2 22 FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 How to use the adjustment section Adjustment Setting 1 How to use the adjustment section Adjustment Setting contains detailed information on the adjustment items and proce dures for this machine e Throughout this Adjustment Setting the default settings are indicated by boldface A Advance Checks Before attempting to solve the customer problem the following advance checks must be made Check to see if 1 The power supply voltage meets the specifications 2 The power supply is properly grounded The machine shares the power supply with any other machine that draws large current intermittently e g elevator and air conditioner that generate electric noise The installation site is environmentally appropriate high temperature high humidity direct sunlight ventilation etc levelness of the installation site The original has a problem that may cause a defective image The density is properly selected The Original Glass slit glass or related part is dirty Correct paper is being used for printing The units parts and supplies used for printing developer PC Drum etc are properly replenished and replaced when they reach the end of their useful service life 10 Toner is not running out B Precautions for Service Jobs 1 Be sure to unplug the power cord of the machine before starting the service job proce dures 2 If it is u
323. e 2 21 FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Other 1 3 Disassembly Assembly procedure 1 3 1 Exit Tray 458316252600 1 3 2 Front Cover 458310252700 458310252800 1 3 3 Rear Cover 458310252900 458310253000 1 Remove four screws 1 and remove the Exit Tray 2 1 Remove the Middle Transport Unit ts 2 6 2 Open the Front Door 1 3 While pinching the claws 2 remove the Folding Jam Release Dial 3 4 Remove two screws 4 5 Remove the screw 5 and remove the Front Cover 6 1 Remove the Middle Transport Unit s 2 6 2 Remove two screws 1 and remove the Rear Cover 2 2 3 G 2 Other FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 1 3 4 Upper Door 1 Open the Upper Door 1 and remove the Door Band Holder 2 by turning it clockwise 2 Remove the Door Band 3 3 Remove the screw 4 and remove the grounding wire 458316253100 4 Remove the screw 5 remove the Finisher Tray Rear Cover 6 and remove the Upper Door 7 6 E 1 3 5 Finisher Tray Upper Cover o c 2 1 Remove the Front Cover 2 3 2 Remove the Rear Cover 2 3 3 Remove the Upper Door tre 2 4 4 Unplug the connector 1 458316253300 5 Unplug the connector 3 while hol
324. e Density Monochrome Image Density Bias Voltage Choice KRDS or Change the settings according to the Remote Diagnosis RD Mode System selected for use Admin Password Initialize Next Page 3 42 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 TECH REP MODE Tech Rep Mode Marketing Area Org Detect Option Sensor Serial Input Tel Input FLS Paper Without Controller System Input Book Erase Center Controller 1 Peripheral Setting Controller 2 Unit Change Controller 3 Reprint Others Hard Disk Display PM parts lifetime LCT Paper Size Chinese Paper Size US Zoom Setting Admin Password Initialize Life Jam Counter Trouble Warning Maintenance __ List Output Check Table Level History1 Level History2 Temp amp Humidity State Confirm CCD Check Paper Passage Option Check Color Shift IU Lot No LPH Status 7 lt Gradation Pattern Halftone Pattern Lattice Pattern Test Print Solid pattern Color sample 8 Color Solid Pattern LPH Pattern Original Stop Position Registration Loop Auto Adjust Stop Position ADF Check Paper Passage Check Tray Width Adjust Sensor Auto Adjust Gradation Adjust Transfer Belt Refresh Trans
325. e Finisher Use Use when the center staple and folding positions deviate from the correct ones in the copies made using the Booklet function Adjustment Center staple position Specification The adjustment range is 7 0 mm to 7 0 mm in 1 mm increments Fold position The adjustment range is 7 0 mm to 7 0 mm in 1 mm increments Adjustment If deviated to the left increase the setting value Instructions If deviated to the right decrease the setting value Adjustment 1 Use the Booklet function to make one sample booklet Procedure 2 Call the Tech Rep Mode to the screen 3 Machine Adjust gt Center Binding Position 4 Check the sample copy and make the necessary adjustment as detailed in the fol lowing Adjusting the center staple position 5 f the staple positions deviate use these steps to make the adjustment If the staple positions deviate to the left side increase the setting value If the staple positions deviate to the right side decrease the setting value Deviated to left Deviated to right 2604 LEIP 40361301100 403816301200 Adjusting the folding position 6 If the folding position deviates use these steps to make the adjustment If the folding position deviates to the left side increase the setting value If the folding position deviates to the right side decrease the setting value Deviated to left Deviated to right x x E gt 403618901400 7 Quit
326. e Fusing Pres sure Roller is detected for 1 sec or more after the start of the heater temperature control C0650 Scanner Home Sensor malfunction e The Scanner Home Sensor is unable to detect the Scanner located at its home position The Scanner Home Sensor is unable to detect a Scan ner even when the Scanner Motor has been driven to move the Scanner over the maximum traveling dis tance The Scanner Home Sensor detects the Scanner when the Scanner has moved 5 mm from the position at which it blocks the Scanner Home Sensor C0660 Scanner overrun failure The Scanner Home Sensor detects the Scanner at its home position during a period of time that begins with the time when a prescan command and a scan prepa ration command are executed and ends when a home return command is executed C0900 Tray3 Elevator failure te See PC 101 PC 201 Service Manual C0910 Tray2 Elevator failure The Lift up Sensor is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the lifting motion has been started C0950 Tray4 Elevator failure t See PC 201 Service Manual C0960 Bypass lifting motion failure The Bypass Lift up Sensor is not blocked even when the Tray2 Vertical Transport Motor has turned for a given number of pulses after the sequence to move the Paper Lifting Plate from the standby position to the take up position was started The Bypass Lift up Sensor is not unblocked even when the Tray2 Vertical Transport Motor
327. e Holding Jig 3 onto the pulley to secure the cable in posi 3 lox tion 403610255700 Rear 4 5 Position the round bead 4 of the Eo we Scanner Drive Cable in the pulley 5 5 as shown CN NOTE O Make sure that the bead snugly P d rests in the slit in the pulley 40361255800 2 6 Wind the fixed bead end of the cable around the pulley five turns clock wise from the front toward the rear side NOTE Make sure that no part of the cable rides on the other 403616255900 7 Wind the hook end of the cable around the pulley five turns counter clockwise from the rear toward the front side NOTE Make sure that no part of the cable rides on the other 403616258000 2 69 Other bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 8 Slip the Cable Holding Jig 6 onto the pulley to secure the cable in posi 6 La tion 403616256100 9 Install the front and rear pulleys 7 and bushings 8 onto the shaft 9 and fit the C clip 10 10 Mount the Scanner drive gear 11 on the shaft 12 and secure it using the screw 13 NOTE Allow a clearance of about 0 1 mm between the Scanner drive gear and bushing Il Maintenance 403616256300 11 Secure the front and rear pulleys 14 using the screw 15 each NOTE Apply the Screw lock on the Screw 2 70 bizhub C35
328. e Paper Exit Sensor of the main unit port section mis feed detection The Paper Sensor PC1 HO of the Horizontal Transport Unit is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the leading edge of the paper has blocked the Paper Sensor PC1 HO B Action 8 5 Relevant electrical parts E Paper Sensor PC1 HO Control Board PWB A FN Turnover Empty Sensor PC6 HO gt WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical compo nents 1 Initial check items 2 Horizontal Transport section gear check 3 PC1 HO I O sensor check PWB A FN PJ15A FN 4 D 9 4 PC6 HO I O sensor check PWB A FN PJ15A FN 12 C 9 5 PWB A FN replacement 5 FS 501 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 2 Trouble code 2 1 Trouble code display Trouble code The main unit s CPU performs a self diagnostics function that on detecting a malfunc tion gives the corresponding malfunction code on the Touch Panel Job Control Malfunction detected Please call your Technical Representative and provide code C 0200 TEL 125 4036fs4012e0 2 2 Trouble code list Code Item Description COB20 Stapling Unit Moving Motor M6 The Staple Home Position Sensor PC14 FN does not FN drive malfunction go HIGH even after the lapse of a given period of time after M6 FN has been energized to return the Stapling
329. e Paper Take up Section Cover 1 2 Wetacloth with alcohol and use it to wipe up the Pick up Roller 2 Paper Take up Roller 3 and Separation Roller 4 458216252300 1 1 5 Registration Roller A Cleaning procedure 1 Open the Paper Take up Section Cover 1 2 Remove four screws 2 from the Registration Roller Cover o c 3 Remove the Wire Harness Saddle 4 and the screw 5 from the Regis tration Timing Sensor mounting plate 3 4 Weta cloth with alcohol and use it to wipe up the Registration Roller 6 458216251400 2 4 DF 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 1 1 6 Exit Roller Roll 1 1 7 458216251600 458216251700 1 1 8 Sensor Section 458216252200 Periodical check Cleaning procedure Open the Paper Exit Section Cover 1 Wet a cloth with alcohol and use it to wipe up the Exit Roller 2 Roll 3 Cleaning procedure Open the Paper Exit Section Cover 1 and open the Turnover Guide Plate 2 2 Wet a cloth with alcohol and use it to wipe up the Turnover Roller 3 Cleaning procedure Remove the Registration Timing Sensor mounting plate 2 4 Clean the Registration 1 Timing Sensor 2 with a blower brush or the like 2 5 Periodical check DF 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 3
330. e lat eral registration motion flip OFF key 7 of SW1 17 Turn ON the Power Switch of the main unit 18 Reinstall the rear cover tw 2 3 458318353000 NOTE The procedure must be carried out as specified In particular switching or OFF must be performed properly If a step or steps are wrongly performed in mid procedure stop the procedure immediately Then turn OFF and ON the Power Switch and start the procedure over This adjustment is applicable only to the punch position center adjustment The adjustment range is 5 mm It does not adjust for variations in the punch hole positions 7 EA lt Board switch FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Blank page o E E a 5 3 18 FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 IV Troubleshooting 1 Jam Display 1 1 Initial check items Jam Display When a paper misfeed occurs first perform the following initial check items Check item Action Does paper meet product specifications Replace paper Is the paper curled wavy or damp Replace paper Instruct the user on the correct paper storage procedures Is a foreign object present along the paper path or is the paper path deformed or worn Clean the paper path and replace if neces sary Are the Paper Separator Fingers dirty deformed or worn Clean or replace
331. e specifications are not met loosen the CCD Unit mounting screws and move the CCD Unit in the FD direction as necessary 3 46 Hold the CCD Unit by hand when moving it NEVER use a screwdriver or similar tool to tap to move it as a varied distance between the CCD sensor and lens results RON 2 46 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 3 12 Image Processing Board 2 403616217800 403616218100 403616205500 Other 1 Remove the Rear Cover and IR Right Cover 2 41 2 Remove four Screws 1 and remove the IR Frame Protective Cover 2 3 Remove seven Screws 3 and remove the Board Cover 4 2 4 Remove the Connector 5 5 Remove all the Connectors and Flat Cables on the Image Processing Board 2 47 o 5 c 2 Other 4 3 13 Control Board 1 Remove the Lower Rear Cover wo 2 41 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 6 Remove six Screws 6 and two Bolts 7 and remove the Image Process ing Board 8 NOTE When the Image Processing Board is to be replaced rewriting the Firmware to the latest one 2 Remove all the Connectors on the Control Board 40361205801 1 403616206001 2 48 3 Remove eight Screws 1 and remove the Control Board 2 NOTE When the Control Board is to be
332. e the screen surface with the tip of the pen Touch Panel Adj 40361530150 4 The cross touched changes into grid marker that consists of a square with a cross superimposed Touch Panel Adj ceni B a 403615301690 5 Touch END 3 41 7 E lt TECH REP MODE bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 3 Tech Rep Mode function tree The function tree is shown to comply with the format displayed on the screen Tech Rep Mode Top Margin Left Margin Dup Left Margin Zoom for FD Fuser Nip Top Image Fuser Temp Left Image Fuser Speed CD Mag Org Detect Sensor FD Mag PRT Area IR Area Cyan Magenta Machine Adjust Loop Adjust Yellow Black Color Shift Correction LPH Rank LPH Rank LPH Chip Adjust Center Binding Position Memory HardDisk Adjust Bypass Guide Adjust Center staple position Fold Position a Memory Check Compress Extension Check ROM verion Memory Bus Check o Work Memory In Out Check S Hard Disk R W Check E Hard Disk Format 5 5 Max Density Highlight Background Voltage Margin ATDC Level Setting AE Adjust Image Adjust 2nd Transfer Adjust Stabilizer ATDC Toner Supply Feeding double sided THIN PAPER Thick Paper Imag
333. eck Item DIAGRAM Result Action Location Is DC24 V being output from CN51 1 on DF YES Malfunction in DF 601 1 23 E 601 2 15 DC24 V being output from PJ5PU1 4 on 23 E NO Check wiring from PU1 PU1 to CN53 to ADF Is the fuse F201 on PU1 conducting YES Change PU1 3 NO Change F201 Malfunction in DF 601 3 4 2 Optional Paper Feed Cabinet WIRING 2 Step Check Item DIAGRAM Result Action Location 2 1 Is DC24 V being applied to hookup connector 26 J NO Malfunction in Paper CN28 1 Feed Cabinet 5 Is DC24 V being output from PJ6PU1 2 on Check wiring from PU1 gt 2 PU1 22 NO to CN49 to Paper Feed Cabinet Is the fuse F204 on PU1 conducting YES Change PU1 3 Change F204 NO Malfunction in Paper Feed Cabinet 4 50 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Power supply trouble 3 4 3 Finisher WIRING Step Check Item DIAGRAM Result Action Location Are DC24 V and 5 V being applied to NO Malfunction in Finisher 1 CN20 11 and CN20 1 respectively of the Fin 26 J isher Are DC24 V and DC5 V being applied to NO Check wiring from PU1 2 PJ5PU1 6 and PJ10PU1 2 on respec 22 F to Finisher tively Are there continuity in the 24 V fuse F202 YES Change PU1 5 V fuse F205 on PU1 NO Change F202 F205 Malfunction in Finisher 3 4 4 Duplex WIRING Step Check Item DIAGRAM Result Action Location Is DC24 V being output from CN42 1 on NO
334. ect whether to enable or disable mail separation when the size of the email to be transmitted exceeds the upper limit value Upper limit value Default value 500 kB variable range 100 to 3 000 kB The maximum email size can be set or changed from the setting tool PSL on the PC Use To send data of a large size Setting Procedure The default setting is No Yes No C Print 1 Text Print D D Functions e To select whether or not to print the email message in addition to the attached file during reception of Email Internet Fax Use To print also the email message during printing of Email Internet Fax received Setting Procedure e The default setting is No Yes No 2 Internet Fax Print Size Functions To set the zoom ratio for printing of received Internet Fax Use To change the zoom ratio for printing of received Internet Fax Setting Procedure e The default setting is Minimal Minimal Full Size A4 Letter 3 25 Utility Mode bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 3 16 3 FTP Server A Server 1 1 IP Address Functions e To set the address of the FTP Server used in Scan to Server Use e To set the address of the FTP Server Setting Procedure IP Address Version 4 format 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 2 Login Name Functions To set the logon name used to log on to the FTP Server to Scan t
335. ed even after the lapse of a given period of time after a folding operation has been started during an ordi nary operation The Folding Home Position Sensor PI11 FN is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after a folding operation has been started and the sensor has been unblocked during an ordinary operation An encoder clock input is not detected within a given period of time during a folding operation B Action 1 Wiring Relevant electrical parts Staple Drive Home Position Sensor PI19 FN Finisher Control Board PWB A FN Staple Folding Motor M7 FN WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical compo nents 1 Check the motor connectors for proper E connection and correct as necessary Check the connector of motor for proper 2 drive coupling and correct as neces sary 3 PI19 FN I O sensor check M7 FN operation check when the Power Switch is turned OFF and ON PWEA FN GNG FNS ciii 5 PWB A FN replacement 6 o I e 5 5 Hr gt Trouble code FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 2 Stapler Crease Clock Sensor Stapler Section Relevant electrical parts Staple Folding Motor Clock Sensor 14 Finisher Control Board PWB A FN Staple Folding Motor M7 FN WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical compo nents
336. eddy A iv FS 501 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Product specifications General 1 Product specifications 1 1 Type Type Single Staple Finisher Installation Freestanding Document Alignment Center Supplies Staple Cartridge Option Job separator JS 601 1 2 Functions Modes Non Sort Sort Group Sort Staple Group Staple 1 3 Paper type 1 3 1 Non Sort Paper Type Paper Size Tray Capacity Exit Tray No of Sheets to be Stapled Plain paper Thick paper OHP Film Translucent paper Envelope Label paper Letterhead 1 3 2 Paper Type A6R to A3 Wide 5 1 2 x 8 1 2R 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 to 12 1 4 x 18 Sort Group Paper Size 60 to 256 g m 16 to 68 Ib Weight 250 sheets 20 sheets Tray Capacity Exit Tray No of Sheets to be Stapled Plain paper Thick paper B5R B5 to A3 Wide 7 1 4 x 10 1 2R 7 1 4 x 10 1 2 to 12 1 4 x18 60 to 209 g m 16 to 55 1 2 Ib 1 000 sheets A4R 8 1 2 x 11R or smaller 500 sheets B4 8 1 2 x 14 or larger Elevator Tray 1 1 Product specifications FS 501 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 1 3 3 Sort staple Group staple No of Sheets to Paper Type Paper Size Weight Tray Capacity Exit Tray be Stapled 2 Goto 90 g m 1 000 sheets 16 to 24 Ib A4R 8 1 2 x B5R B5 to A3 11 30 sheets 7 1 4 x 10 1 2R Cover Mode 74 4 x 10 1 2 91 to 209 smalle
337. eee eeae cess ceeeseaeseaeseaeeseeseeeseaeeeaeeneees 1 1 Il Maintenance 1 Periodical check caves cutadaceeduceadvens 2 1 1 1 Maintenance procedure Periodical check parts 2 4 1 1 1 Separation Roller Assy nennen nnne nnne 2 1 1 1 2 Paper Take up Roller eene nennen 2 2 1 4 3 Pick upiRoll amp E ceo peres nene e Dan eig te ER Rae EP EXER 2 4 1 1 4 Vertical Transport Roller 2 5 2 2 6 2 1 Disassembly Adjustment prohibited items see 2 6 2 2 Disassembly Assembly list Other parts 2 7 2 3 Disassembly Assembly 2 7 2 3 1 Right Door Rear Right Cover Lower Right Cover Front Right Cover 2 7 2 3 2 Rear COVO s nh iHi need iie eir nee e PEE Les 2 7 2 3 3 gt M M 2 8 2 324 WIE ao rein heo E nde d e tne in Een 2 8 I Adjustment Setting 1 How to use the adjustment section ssssssssssseeeeeeeeneenenne 3 1 2 MEES 1 epu ERAI DES 3 1 2 1 CHECK procedure tero e dedo t er he i AR e s en andes 3 1 2 2 VO checklist orient enr mee i reet tee ti ie hes 3 2 2 2 1 VO check screen nce nne etn mee eene tr ded 3 2 2 2 2 l O check list io oor er emere i reni te i eer penna 3 2 3 Mechanical adjustment cecccssccesssssessseseseeeseecsceseseeeseecsnessseseseseseessaeseaeeeeees 3 4
338. een reinstalled to a new board 1 Setthe bits 1 through 4 of DIPSW1001 on the Punch Control Board as shown on the Left figure ON n o E E E 7 5 458318351600 2 Press SW1002 on the Punch Control Board to select the number of punch holes Each time SW1002 is pressed the following display changes in the descending order shown below LED LED LED Number of punch holes 1001 1002 1003 2 Punch Unit J1 ON OFF OFF 2 3 Punch Unit K1 ON ON OFF 4 Punch Unit G1 OFF ON OFF 4 Punch Unit H1 OFF OFF ON 3 Press SW1008 on the Punch Control Board twice The number of punch holes will be registered in the Punch Control Board The pressing of SW1003 changes the steady lighting of the LED to flickering and the pressing of SW1003 again changes the flickering of the LED to steady lighting This com pletes the registration 4 Setall bits of DIPSW1001 to OFF 3 14 FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Board switch 4 2 3 Procedure after replacing the EEP ROM IC1002 1 Turn OFF the Power switch of the main unit ON 2 Setthe bits 1 through 4 of DIPSW1001 on the Punch Control Board as shown on the Left fig ure Press SW1002 and SW1003 on the Punch Control Board simulta neously This will initialize the EEP ROM After the initialization all LED1001 LED1002 and LED1003 light up 3 Adjust the sensor output and regis ter
339. em Belt fusing 2 2 Functions Types of Original Sheets books and three dimensional objects Max Original Size or 11 x 17 Multiple Copies 1 to 999 Warming up Time 99 sec or less at ambient temperature of 23 C and rated source voltage Image Loss Leading edge 5 mm Trailing edge 3 mm Rear edge 3 mm Front edge 3 mm First Copy Time Tray1 4 full size Monochrome print 6 8 sec or less Color print 12 8 sec or less Copying Speed for Multi copy Cycle Monochrome print 1 sided 35 copies min 2 sided 31 copies min A4 8 1 2 x 11 Color print 1 sided 22 copies min 2 sided 22 copies min Fixed Zoom Ratios Full size x1 000 0 500 0 707 0 816 0 866 Reduction Inch Area x0 500 x0 647 x0 733 x0 785 Metric Area x1 154 x1 224 x1 414 x2 000 Enlargement Inch Area x1 214 x1 294 x1 547 x2 000 Variable Zoom Ratios x0 250 to x4 000 in 0 001 increments Exposure Lamp White rare gas fluorescent lamp 30 W Product specifications bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 2 3 Types of Paper Paper Source Tray1 Tray2 Multiple Bypass Plain paper 60 to 90 g m O O O Translucent paper OHP transparencies _ crosswise feeding only Thick paper 1 _ 91 to 150 g m Thick paper 2 20 sheets or 151 to 209 g m less Copy paper type Thic
340. emoval of connectors and screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board When it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on the board be sure to ground your body Other DF 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 22 Disassembly Assembly list Other parts No Section Part name Ref page 1 Front Cover s 2 8 Exterior Parts 2 Rear Cover s 2 8 2 3 Disassembly Assembly procedure 2 3 1 Front Cover Rear Cover o c 2 458225210 1 Open the Paper Take up Section Cover 1 and the Paper Exit Section Cover 2 2 Remove the Front Cover 4 by removing two screws 3 3 Remove the Rear Cover 6 by removing two screws 5 DF 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 How to use the adjustment section Adjustment Setting 1 How to use the adjustment section Adjustment Setting contains detailed information on the adjustment items and proce dures for this machine e Throughout this Adjustment Setting the default settings are indicated by boldface A Advance Checks Before attempting to solve the customer problem the following advance checks must be made Check to see if 1 The power supply voltage meets the specifications 2 The power supply is properly grounded The machine shares the power supply with any other machine that draws large current intermittently e g elevator and air conditioner that genera
341. emove the Screw 6 and slide the Wire Pulley 7 Rear side in the direction of front side bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 403616255000 403616255100 403616255200 Other 12 Remove the screw 8 and the Scan ner drive gear 9 13 Snap off the C clip 10 and remove the bushing 11 front 14 Slide the shaft 12 toward the rear and lift it Then remove the front and rear pulleys 13 15 Remove the Scanner Drive Cables 2 67 2 Other bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 3 31 Winding of the Scanner Drive Cables Overall figure o c 2 40361255300 m Front T d 1 Position the round bead 1 of the b Scanner Drive Cable in the pulley 2 as shown 2 Make sure that the bead snugly d rests in the slit in the pulley 403616255400 2 Wind the fixed bead end of the cable around the pulley five turns clock wise from the rear toward the front side NOTE Make sure that no part of the cable rides on the other 403616255500 2 68 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Other 3 Wind the hook end of the cable around the pulley five turns counter clockwise from the front toward the rear side NOTE Make sure that no part of the cable rides on the other 403610255600 4 Slip the Cabl
342. emperature data Temp Press Shows the latest Fusing Pressure Roller temperature data Reading taken last means Density of toner of the latest image When a test print is produced by pressing the Start key while Level History 1 is being displayed 2 4 12 4 Level History2 g 5 Functions AIDC Sensor Transfer Belt bare surface level as adjusted through the image stabili zation sequence ATVC value E 3 Use Used for troubleshooting of image problems E Setting AIDC Sensor Shows the intensity adjustment value 0 to 255 of the AIDC Sensor Procedure ATVC C M Y Bk Shows the first image transfer ATVC adjustment value 300 V to 3000 V ATVC 2ng Shows the second image transfer ATVC adjustment value 300 V to 5000 V 3 88 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 TECH REP MODE 4125 Temp amp Humidity Functions To display the temperature and humidity of a specific location AIDC Sensor portion inside the machine and fusing temperature Use Used as reference information when a malfunction occurs Setting Machine interior temperature 0 to 100 C in 1 C increments Procedure Temperature on Fusing Belt side 0to 255 C in 1 C increments Temperature on fusing pressure side 0 to 255 C in 1 C increments Machine interior humidity 0 to 100 in 1 6 increments Absolute humidity 0 to 100 in 1 increments 4 12 6 CCD C
343. ensor Paper Paper not present present PI9 FN Paper Surface Exit Tray Home Position Sensor DETECTE D PI15 FN Raised Position Shift Upper Limit Sensor UPPER LIMIT FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 check Operation characteris Symbol Panel display Part Signal name tics Panel display 1 0 Lowered Position Shift Lower Limit Sensor LOWER LIMIT PH7 FN Clock Shift Motor Clock Sensor Middle FULL PI18 FN Slide Home Slide Home Position Sensor HP PI19 FN Stapler Home Staple Drive Home Position Sensor HP PI20 FN Needle Staple Detecting Sensor SUPPLIED EMPTY Stapler Connect DETECTE D MS3 FN tapler Safety SW taple Safety Switch Rear Modi MES pe Such rid OFEN CLOSE PI21 FN Self Prime Self Priming Sensor READY PI22 FN Front Door Front Door Open Sensor CLOSE OPEN PI23 FN Upper Door Upper Cover Open Sensor CLOSE OPEN MS1 FN Front Door SW Front Door Open Switch CLOSE OPEN Rev Remain HORIZON TAL MS2 FN SW Joint Open Switch CLOSE OPEN Punch Regist S1 Punch Regist S2 Punch Regist 53 Punch Regist S4 Punch Waste FULL Punch Timing PI3P PK Punch Motor Clock Punch Motor Clock Sensor Blocked Unblocked 1 Punch Home Punch Home Position Sensor HP PI2P PK Punch Regist Home Side Registration Home Sensor HP PC4 HO Transport Horizontal Unit Door Sensor Blocked Unblocked 3 3
344. er Belt Unit ATVC 2nd High Voltage Unit Image Transfer Neutralizing 4 53 E 5 3 E gt Image quality problem bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 2 Howto identify problematic part This chapter is divided into two parts Initial Check Items and Troubleshooting Proce dure by a Particular Image Quality Problem When an image quality problem occurs first go through the Initial Check Items and if the cause is yet to be identified go to Troubleshooting Procedure by a Particular Image Quality Problem 4 2 1 Initial Check Items A Initial Check Items 1 Check first to see if image data is properly transmitted between Scanner and memory and between memory and printer Action Result Next Step Enter the Tech Rep Mode select Machine Adjust gt Memory OK Initial Check Items 2 Hard Disk Adjust Memory Bus Check and select and NG r 4 42 out IR Memory and MemoryPRT checks action as instructed B Initial Check Items 2 Let the copier produce a test print and determine whether the image problem is attribut able to the Scanner or printer system Document Scan CCD Sensor Board PWB A Scanner system image Processing Board PWB C Cable MFP Control Board PWB MFP Printer system rinter system LED Drive Board
345. er2 0 Sep 2004 V Appendix 1 Parts layout drawing 1 4 Main unit 1 1 1 IR section Parts layout drawing 40361655010 1 Scanner Motor M201 2 Image Processing Board PWB C 3 Sensor Board PWB A 4 Size Reset Switch SW201 5 Inverter Board PU201 6 Exposure Lamp FL201 8 9 10 11 Scanner Home Sensor PC201 Original Size Sensor CD PC206 Original Cover Angle Sensor PC202 Original Size Sensor FD2 PC204 Scanner Motor Drive Board PWB IC 26 5 o 2 gt 5 o 2 gt Parts layout drawing 1 1 2 Engine section bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 403618550200 5 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Cooling Fan Motor 2 M10 Fusing Cooling Fan Motor 1 M9 Fusing Pressure Retraction Sensor PC33 AIDC Registration Sensor 2 PC9 AIDC Registration Sensor 1 PC8 Temperature humidity Sensor PC7 DC Power Supply PU1 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor M21 Left Door Switch SW3 Ozone Ventilation Fan Motor M18 Control Board PWB MC Standard Memory DIMMSO Toner Suction Fan Motor M20 MFP Control Board PWB MFP bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Parts layout drawing 4036fs5503c0 1 LPH Assy Bk LPH Bk 8 Main Erase Lamp Y LA1 2 LED Drive Board PWB LED 9 Sensor Y PWB N1
346. ervice Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Other 2 Other 2 1 Disassembly Adjustment prohibited items A Paint locked Screws NOTE Paint locked screws show that the assembly or unit secured can only be adjusted or set at the factory and should not be adjusted set or removed in the field B Red Painted Screws NOTES When the screws are removed the red paint is coated on the points where read justment is required Once the red painted screw is removed or loosened you should make adjustment Accordingly check the adjustment items in operation manual and make necessary adjustment Note that when two or more screws are used on the part in questions only one representative screw may be marked with red paint C Variable Resistors on Board g Do 1 the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions are given in Adjustment Setting D Removal of PWBs NOTES When removing a circuit board or other electrical component refer to Handling of PWBs and follow the corresponding removal procedures The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board When it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on the board be sure to ground your body 2 3 Other AD 501 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 22 Disassembly Assembly list Other parts N
347. es 2 2 Server Set RD settings sss rennen 3 1 2 2 1 E mail reception settings esesssssesseeseeeeeeneeenenee 3 1 2 2 2 E mail transmission 3 2 2 2 3 Checking the E mail Transmission Reception Settings 3 2 2 3 Supplementary information Log 3 3 2 3 1 Example of successful test transmission reception 3 3 2 4 Connection with PageScope Remote Care Device Management Server 3 3 IV Troubleshooting 1 Checking the system configuration 2 Status CodeS rere e or ese ae ege eT e FERES SHE FER VENERE sis Ce aa E 3 Troubleshooting procedures essesssesseeeneennenneen eene 3 1 Unable to print over the network nennen 4 1 3 2 Unable to transmit data through Scan to 4 3 3 3 Unable to transmit data through Scan to E Mail Internet FAX 3 4 E mail does not reach the destination when transmission through Scan to E Mail Scan to Internet FAX is 4 5 Il Maintenance D E IV Troublshooting V Appendix Standard Controller Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 3 5 Data cannot be received in Internet 4 5 Il Maintenan
348. escription The Shift Gate Home Position Sensor PC14 LCT cannot be set to L even after C0997 the set period of time has elapsed after the operation of the Shift Gate Motor M3 LCT began with the Shift Gate Home Position Sensor PC14 LCT set to L B Action Relevant electrical parts Shift Gate Home Position Sensor PC14 LCT Main Control Board PWB C1 LCT D Shift Gate Motor M3 LCT E WIRING DIAGRAM Locati 2 Step Action 3 Control signal Electrical compo nents z Check the motor and sensor connectors 1 for proper connection and correct as necessary Check the connector of motor for proper 2 drive coupling and correct as neces sary 3 PC14 LCT I O sensor check PWB C1 LCT PJ4C1 LCT 1 2 PWB C1 4 M3 LCT operation check PJ4C1 LCT 3 2 1 2 5 1 LCT replacement E 8 4 8 401 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Trouble code 2 3 5 C0998 LCT Shift Failure A Detection timing Malfunction code Description C0998 The Shifter Return Position Sensor PC11 LCT is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the shift operation began shift to the right The Shifter Return Position Sensor 11 is not blocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Shift Motor Pulse Sensor PC8 LCT after the shift opera tion began shift to the right The Shifter Home Posit
349. etection been blocked by a paper The Tray 3 Vertical Transport Sensor PC117 PF is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after PC117 PF has been blocked by a paper The Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor PC117 PF is blocked when the Power Switch is set to ON a door or cover is opened and closed or a misfeed or mal Trays function is reset detection of paper remaining The Tray3 Paper Take Up Sensor PC116 PF is blocked when the Power Switch is set to ON a door or cover is opened and closed or a misfeed or malfunction is reset B Action Relevant electrical parts Tray3 Paper Take Up Sensor PC116 PF Main Control Board PWB C2 PF Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor 117 Tray2 Vertical Transport Sensor PC108 Tray3 Paper Feed Motor M122 PF WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical compo nents 1 Initial check items 2 PC116 PF I O sensor check PWB C2 PF PJ6C2 PF 8 F 3 3 PC117 PF I O sensor check PWB C2 PF PJ6C2 PF 11 F 3 Li 4 PC108l O sensor check PWB Z PJ6Z 11 W 2 E 5 M122 PF operation check E 3 5 6 PWB C2 PF replacement 5 5 2 Jam Display PC 101 PC 201 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 1 4 2 Tray4 Paper Take Up section misfeed PC 201 A Detection timing Type Description The leading edge of the paper does not block the Tray4 Vertical Transport Sens
350. etting from the 10 Key Pad 4 Touch END to validate the adjustment value 5 Check the copy image for any image problem 3 63 D D o z E 0 5 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 6 6 2nd Transfer Adjust Functions To fine adjust the second transfer output ATVC for the first side and the second side respectively Use When an image transfer failure occurs at the trailing edge of plain paper Adjustment 0 5 to 5 Range Adjustment To increase the ATVC value in the direction of a foggier image decrease the setting Instructions value To decrease the ATVC value in the direction of a less foggy image increase the set ting value Adjustment Procedure 1 Call the Tech Rep Mode to the screen 2 Touch these keys in this order Image Adjust 2nd Transfer Adjust 3 Select the side of the image First side or Second side on which the transfer failure at the trailing edge occurs 4 Enter the new setting from the 10 Key Pad 5 Touch END to validate the adjustment value 6 Check the copy image for any image problem 4 6 7 Stabilizer A Stabilizer Mode Functions The image stabilization sequence is carried out without clearing the historical data of image stabilization control Use Use if an image problem persists
351. ews securing the circuit board support or circuit board When it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on the board be sure to ground your body Other FS 501 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 1 2 Disassembly Assembly list Other parts No Section Part name Ref page 1 Upper Cover v 2 2 2 Upper Front Cover ts 2 2 Exterior Parts 3 Lower Front Cover 2 2 4 Rear Cover 2 2 5 Unit Stapling Unit 2 3 1 3 Disassembly Assembly procedure 1 3 1 Upper Cover Upper Front Cover Lower Front Cover Rear Cover o c 2 2 Open the Upper Door 5 Remove four screws 1 and remove the Upper Cover Remove four screws 2 and remove the Upper Front Cover Remove two screws 3 and remove the Lower Front Cover Remove four screws 4 and remove the Rear Cover ALN 2 2 FS 501 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Other 1 3 2 Stapling Unit 1 Holding both sides of the cover 1 lift the cover up and take it off 2 Remove two screws 2 unplug the lt connector 3 and remove the Sta pling Unit 4 from the moving cradle 2 2 3 Other FS 501 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 o 2 Blank page 2 4 FS 501 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 How to use the adjustment section Ad
352. ey 5 Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern 6 Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern 7 If width A is outside the specified range change the setting again and make a check again 8 If width A falls within the specified range touch END 9 Following the same procedure adjust for all other paper sources Use A4 8 1 2 x 11 plain paper for the Bypass 7 E lt 3 47 TECH REP MODE bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 C Dup Left Margin Functions To vary the print start position in the CD direction for each paper source in the 2 Sided mode Use The Automatic Duplex Unit has been set up The image on the backside of the 2 sided copy deviates in the CD direction Adjustment Specification Width A 4 Width A on the test pattern produced should fall within the following range For measurement use the image produced on the backside of the test pattern Backside T Specifications 3 0 0 5 mm Setting Range 3 0 mm to 3 0 mm in 0 2 mm increments 40361530100 Adjustment e If width A is longer than the specifications make the setting value smaller than the Instructions current one e If width A is shorter than the specifications make the setting value greater than the current one Adjustment Procedure Call the Tech Rep Mode to the screen Touch Machine Adjust
353. ey 4 on the printed test pattern magenta and yellow Check Procedure Check point X Y Adjustment for X direction Check point X Direction of C Ili gt t t H I 403615300500 Adjustment for Y direction Check point Y Direction of C 403616300700 4 r Check deviation of the cyan line relative to the black lines at positions X and Y 5 Change the setting value using the Up Down key as necessary Changing the setting value moves only the selected color cyan 6 Produce another test pattern and check for deviation 7 When the color shift of cyan has been adjusted make the adjustment for X 4036f53004c0 If the cross deviates in the direction of C increase the setting If the cross deviates in the direction of D decrease the setting Direction of D edic Bice 4036fs3006c0 If the cross deviates in the direction of C increase the setting If the cross deviates in the direction of D decrease the setting Direction of D 4 1 4 4 2 L E 4036fs3008c0 3 30 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Utility Mode 3 17 4 Black Image Density Correction Functions To fine adjust the density of the printed image for a black copy Use To va
354. f Transport section Assy 1 3 Remove six Connectors 3 and Earth 4 and remove the Transport section Assy 5 2 81 2 Other bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 Remove three Screws 6 and remove the Holder 7 5 Remove the C ring 8 and remove the Gear 1 9 6 Remove the C ring 10 and remove the Gear 2 11 Il Maintenance 7 Remove the C ring 12 and remove the Gear 3 13 8 Remove two Screws 14 and remove the Mounting plate 15 2 82 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 17 16 4036521191 403610212000 Other 9 Remove the Screw 16 and remove the Sensor Assy 17 10 Remove two Screws 18 and remove the Intermediate Transport Motor 19 NOTES Remove the Intermediate Transport Motor while its Harness is well fit with the groove Usecare on the harness not to be bitten 4 3 43 Fusing Pressure Roller Pressure Retraction Motor 1 Remove the PWB Box ts 2 73 Remove the Screw 1 and remove the Fan Assy Protective Cover 2 3 Remove two Shoulder screws 3 and two Connectors 4 and remove the Fan Assy 5 Open the Right Door Remove the Fusing Unit 2 28 Remove the Wiring Cover See the procedure 2 of 2 10 Replacing of Paper Take up Roller Remove eight Screws 6 and remove t
355. fault setting is Disable Disable Enable B DNS 1 DNS Server Functions To set the DNS server Use To enter the DNS server Setting Procedure Three addresses of IP address 1 IP address 2 and IP address 3 can be regis tered P Address Version 4 format 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 3 23 D D Utility Mode bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 C NetWare 1 Frame Type Functions To set the frame type of Ethernet when the NetWare is used Use To change the frame type Setting Procedure The default setting is Auto Detect Auto Detect Il 802 3 802 2 SNAP 3 16 2 E mail Internet A Receive 1 POP3 Server Functions To set the address of the POP3 Server used in reception of email Use To set the address of the POP3 Server Setting Procedure IP Address Version 4 format 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 2 POP3 Login Name Setting Procedure The default setting is No Up to 15 characters alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used Functions e To set the logon name used to log on to the POPS server to receive email Use e To set the logon name for the POPS server Setting Procedure The default setting is No D e Up to 63 characters alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used 3 Password Functi
356. fer Image Transfer Roller is dirty or YES Change Image Transfer Roller 5 Roller Unit scratched Unit 6 Paper path There is foreign matter on paper YES Remove foreign matter path 7 Image Transfer Paper Separator Fin YES Clean or change o gers are damaged or dirty 8 Paper Dust Paper dust accumulates on Paper YES Clean E Remover Dust Remover a re Fusing Unit Fusing Entrance Guide Plate is dirty YES Clean 3 9 2 or damaged Change Fusing Unit 10 Fusing Paper Separator Fingers are YES Clean dirty The problem has been eliminated NO Change Image Transfer Roller through the checks of steps up to 10 Unit 11 Change Image Transfer Belt Unit Change MFP Control Board 4 85 E 2 3 gt Image quality problem 4 3 28 and colore bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 d bands in CD A Typical Faulty Images Printer 4 Color white lines in CD white bands in CD colored lines in CD White lines in CD White bands in CD Colored lines in CD Colored bands in CD Belt Unit matter is evident on the Image Transfer Belt el nom 4036840260 1403616402700 409640260 B Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action Image Transfer Fingerprints oil or other foreign YES Clean with specified solvent See Maintenance
357. fer Belt Cleaning Bias Transfer Belt Auto Cleaning AIDC Table Correction Misc Adjust 3 43 E o E a 5 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 4 Machine Adjust 4 4 1 Fuser Nip Functions To check the Fusing Roller nip width AN Use When a fusing failure occurs When a blurred image or brush effect occurs Check Range A 9 0 5 mm M _ 403615303200 Adjustment Procedure 1 Call the Tech Rep Mode to the screen 2 Touch these keys in this order Machine Adjust Fuser Nip 3 Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern 4 Check the fusing roller nip width 4 4 2 Fuser Temp Instructions Functions To adjust individually the temperature of the Heating Roller and the Fusing Pressure Roller for each type of paper thereby coping with varying fusing performance under changing environmental conditions Though all temperatures shown on the screen are 0 they represent the following specific temperatures Heating Roller Pressure Roller Plain paper 190 130 C OHP 190 C 170 Thick 1 185 C 130 C Thick 2 185 C 130 C Thick 3 185 C 130 C Envelope 185 130 Use When fusing performance is poor or wax streak or offset occurs when the type of paper is changed or environmenta
358. ference Actual value Determined by number of Sets or number of Sheets based on number of bindings A Number of stacked paper Product specifications No of Sheets to be Stapled No of Sets No of Sheets 2 pages 100 sets 200 Sheets 3 to 5 pages 80 sets 400 Sheets 6to 10 pages 60 sets 600 Sheets 11 to 20 pages 40 sets 800 Sheets 21 to 30 pages 33 sets 1000 Sheets 1 6 Machine specifications Power Requirements DC 24 V supplied from the main unit DC 5 V generated by Finisher Maz Power 63 W or less Consumption Dimensions 538 mm W x 978 mm H x 637 mm D 21 1 4 inch W x 38 1 2 inch H x 25 inch D Weight 38 1 kg 84 Ib 1 7 Operating environment Conforms to the operating environment of the main unit 1 3 JS 601 product specifications FS 501 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 2 JS 601 product specifications 21 Name Job separator Installation Fixed to Finisher Document Alignment Center 2 2 Functions Modes Non Sort in the fax or printer output mode 2 3 Paper type Paper Type Paper Size Tray Capacity 100 sheets A4 8 1 2 x 11 80 g m 21 1 4 Ib 50 sheets except A4 8 1 2 x 11 80 g m 21 1 4 Ib Height up to 28 mm 1 Ib ASR to Plain paper 5 1 2 x 8 1 2R to 11x17 60 to 90 g m 16 to 24 Ib 2 4 Machine specifications Power Requirements DC 5 V DC 24 V
359. ferent types of sensors are located in the area near 3 4 3 a 2 n 5 e gt E 2 5 gt 1 3 Solution 1 3 1 Initial Check Items Jam Display bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 When a paper misfeed occurs first make checks of the following initial check items Check Item Action Does paper meet product specifications Change paper Is paper curled wavy or damp Change paper Instruct user in correct paper storage Is a foreign object present along the paper path or is the paper path deformed or worn Clean or change the paper path Are the Paper Separator Fingers dirty deformed or worn Clean or change the defective Paper Separa tor Finger Are rolls rollers dirty deformed or worn Clean or change the defective roll roller Are the Edge Guide and Trailing Edge Stop at correct position to accommodate paper Set as necessary Are actuators found operational as checked for correct operation Correct or change the defective actuator bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Jam Display 1 3 2 1st Drawer take up Fusing Misfeed A Detection Timing Type Description 2nd Image Transfer Fusing misfeed detection The leading edge of the paper does not block the Exit Sensor PC30 even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Synchronizing Roller Clutch ha
360. fter the lapse of a given period of time after it has been blocked by the paper B Action Relevant Electrical Parts Paper Feed Sensor PC1 LCT Main Control Board PWB C1 LCT LCT Vertical Transport Sensor PC2 LCT Tray2 Vertical Transport Sensor PC 108 Paper Feed Motor M1 LCT WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control Signal Electrical Component 1 Initial check items 2 PC1 LCT I O check Sensor check PWB C1 LCT PJ5C1 LCT 2 PC 401 6 3 PC2 LCT I O check Sensor check PWB C1 LCT PJ5C1 LCT 5 PC 401 6 4 108 I O check Sensor check PWB MC PJ12MC 6A ON 2 R 5 Mt1 LCT operation check PWB C1 LCT PJ6C1 LCT 1 4 PC 401 6 D 6 Change PWB C1 LCT E 4 8 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Jam Display 1 3 5 Tray3 Take up and Vertical Transport Misfeed PC 101 PC201 A Detection Timing Type Description Misfeed detected at Tray3 take up or Vertical Transport Section The leading edge of the paper does not block the Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor PC117 PF even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Tray3 Paper Feed Motor has been energized The Tray2 Vertical Transport Sensor PC108 is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the paper has blocked the Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor PC117 PF Paper left at Tray3 The Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor PC117 PF is blocked when t
361. g Functions To set the counting method for the Total Counter and Size Counter Use Use to change the counting method for the counters Setting Total Counter Procedure Mode 1 1 Count per 1 copy cycle Default US Others 4 Japan Mode 2 Double count up according to paper size and copying mode Default Europe Others 1 Others 2 Others 3 Size Counter Not counted Default US Others 4 Japan e A3and 11 x 17 B4 11 x 17 and Legal Default Europe Others 1 Others 2 Others 3 B4 FLS 11 x 17 11 x 14 and Legal Count up Table Copying 1 Sided 2 Sided size than those SPecifea specified 71298 specified us Mode Mode Mode Mode Mode 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 Total 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 4 Size 0 0 1 1 0 0 2 2 2 sided Total 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 No count 1 1 count 2 2 counts 3 3 counts 4 4 counts o E o 0 5 3 100 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Security 5 3 2 Admin Choice Functions To set whether or not the Key Counter Data Controller and Vendor are installed Use Use to change the counting method for the administrative units Setting Key Counter Procedure Default setting Unset Select Color Mode and Message when the Key Counter is mounted Color Mode f Mode 1 is selected for Total Counter Mode 1 1 count per 1 copy
362. g Motor malfunction COB75 Finishing option Punch Cam Motor drive failure COB76 Finishing option Punch Unit Board malfunction COB77 Finishing option Punch Side Regis tration Motor malfunction 78 Finishing option Punch Motor mal function COB79 Finishing option Punch Sensor malfunction COB80 Finishing option Shift Motor mecha nism malfunction COBAO Finishing option Elevator drive mal function COBF1 Finishing option Backup RAM fail ure ts See FS 501 or FS 601 Service Manual Abnormally low toner density detected Cyan ATDC Sensor T C 0 21 6 or less is detected ten consecutive times in the Developing Unit as validated through the toner replenishing amount determination control 1 Abnormally high toner density detected Cyan ATDC Sensor T C 15 5 or more is detected ten consecutive times in the Developing Unit as validated through the toner replenishing amount determination control COF32 Abnormally low toner density detected Magenta ATDC Sensor T C 0 21 or less is detected ten consecutive times in the Developing Unit as validated through the toner replenishing amount determination control 4 22 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Malfunction code Code Item Description COF33 Abnormally high toner densi
363. ge blotchy image gt 4 3 6 System incorrect color image registration sync shift lines in CD 3 4 3 7 System MOS oaith ier Eea eaea aa Aiaia 5 4 3 8 IR System skewed image 4 63 E 4 3 9 System distorted image 4 64 gt 4 3 10 IR System low image density rough 4 65 4 3 11 IR System defective ACS ssssssssssseeeeeeeenreneen nennen 4 66 4 3 12 IR System blank copy black 4 67 4 3 13 IR System abnormal image sssseseeeeeneneenenns 4 68 4 3 14 Printer Monocolor white lines in FD white bands in FD colored lines colored bands in FD white lines in CD white bands in CD colored lines in CD colored bands in CD V Appendix 4 3 15 Printer Monocolor uneven density in FD esee Il Maintenance te B a El IV Troublshooting V Appendix 4 3 16 4 3 17 4 3 18 4 3 19 4 3 20 4 3 21 4 3 22 4 3 23 4 3 24 4 3 25 4 3 26 4 3 27 4 3 28 4 3 29 4 3 30 4 3 31 4 3 32 4 3 33 4 3 34 4 3 35 4 3 36 4 3 37 4 3 38 4 3 39 4 3 40 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Printer Monocolor uneven density in 4 71 Printer Monocolor low image density
364. ge PWB MC Faulty sensor check procedure Open the Front Door and turn ON the Power Switch of the machine Call the I O Check screen to the screen by way of Tech Rep Mode Close the Front Door and start Stabilizer During the Stabilizer sequence check to see if the values of the phase detection sen sors Color PC Drum Main Sub and Bk PC Drum Main Sub Sensors change A sensor is faulty if its value does not change ABMs Tf a 5 gt Malfunction code 2 4 Trouble code The copier s CPU performs a self diagnostics function that on detecting a malfunction gives the corresponding malfunction code and maintenance call mark on the Touch Panel 2 4 1 Control Malfunction detected bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Please call your Technical Representative and provide code Delete Trouble code list 0200 TEL 125 4036fs4012e0 For the details of the malfunction codes of the options see the Service Manual for the cor responding option Code Item Description C0000 Main Motor s failure to turn The Motor Lock signal remains HIGH for a predeter mined continuous period of time while the Motor is turning C0001 Main Motor turning at abnormal The Motor Lock signal remains LOW for a predeter timing mined continuous period of time while the Motor remains stationary
365. gh the procedure 3 and execute the mkcf bat Input the C TSS2 card_work gt mkfc f Drive number in the below figure and push the Enter ommand Prompt icrosoft Windows 2000 Version 5 00 2195 lt C Copyright 1985 1999 Microsoft Corp gt 18552 C TS 2 gt ced card_work C TSS2 card_work gt mkcf 403616262460 o 5 c 2 7 Once the mkcf bat is executed data writing into the Compact flash is started 8 Upon completion of writing CHECKSUM is executed If CHECKSUM value is precisely matched VERYFY OK appears SUM 8823 Verify Check CHECK SUM VERIFY 4036 52625 0 9 Remove the Compact flash from PC NOTE When removing the Compact flash be sure to check if data is written as normal and then remove it according to the precise removing method 2 4 Standard Controller Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Firmware rewriting 2 2 Updating procedures of firmware When removing the Compact flash be sure to check if data is written as normal and then remove it according to the precise removing method 2 2 1 Updating method NOTE NEVER remove or insert the Compact Flash card with the machine power turned ON 1 With the Power Switch in the OFF n EB position unplug the power cord from 2 a the power outlet 2 Remove the screw 1 and the metal N 48 Blanking Plate 2 D gt
366. gistration Sensor PC1 DF Pick up Sensor PC2 DF Take up Motor M1 DF Control Board PWB A DF WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical compo nents 1 Initial check items 2 PC1 DF I O sensor check PWB A DF CN7A DF 9 E 2 3 PC2 DF I O sensor check PWB A DF CN7A DF 12 F 2 4 M1 DF operation check A 4 5 PWB A DF replacement 5 4 2 DF 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Jam Display 1 4 2 Transport section misfeed A Detection timing Type Description Misfeed due to paper remaining at the Pick Up Sensor Misfeed is detected if the Pick up Sensor PC2 DF is not turned OFF within a preset time after the Take up Motor M1 DF started reverse rotation Misfeed due to paper not reached _ Misfeed is detected if the Turnover Sensor PC5 DF is not turned ON within the Turnover Sen preset time after the Transport Motor M2 DF started Sor B Action Relevant electrical parts Pick up Sensor PC2 DF Control Board PWB A DF Turnover Sensor PC5 DF Take up Motor M1 DF Transport Motor M2 DF WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical compo nents 1 Initial check items 2 PC2 DF I O sensor check PWB A DF CN7A DF 12 F 2 3 PC5 DF I O sensor check PWB A DF CN9A DF 3 G 2 4 M1 DF operation check A 4 5 M2 DF operation check B 4 6
367. gs and Port number is wrong administrator and enter the Operations for The message correct port number Scan Functions 1 Server Connect Set a longer value for SMTP Operator s Man error appears Connection Timeout The ual A timeout condition occurs _ timeout value depends on the network s traffic conditions and load on the FTP server Send Ping from PC to the con The network is disconnected jfeller ang server Md during file transfer check to see if both parties are 9 connected to the network or not Decrease resolution to make See Settings and small the data size or change Operations for The message The size of the scan data the setting for Scanned File P MM en un Scan Functions 2 E mail Size exceeds the upper limit value Separation and Binary Divi n DUST Scan to E mail in Over appears set for Maximum E Mail Size sion as necessary so that the Operators Scan data does not exceed the ual Maximum E Mail Size Depending on the model of the Internet Fax machine the receiving a file transmitted through binary division may not be properly received by the receiving machine Check with the receiving end before actually sending the Internet Fax Standard Controller Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 3 4 Troubleshooting procedures E mail does not reach the destination when transmission through Scan to E Mail Scan to Internet FAX is com
368. h Expert User Mode PRT Area Left Margin Procedure 2 Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern 3 Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern 4 f width A falls outside the specified range change the setting using the Up Down key Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern If width A is outside the specified range change the setting again and make a check again 8 If width A falls within the specified range touch Enter 9 Following the same procedure adjust for all other paper sources Use A4 8 1 2 x 11 plain paper for the Bypass NOM 7 lt 3 33 o z E o E a 5 Utility Mode bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 3 17 8 PRT Area Dup Left Margin Specification Functions To vary the print start position in the CD direction for each paper source in the 2 Sided mode Use The Automatic Duplex Unit has been set up The image on the backside of the 2 sided copy deviates in the CD direction Adjustment Width A Width A on the test pattern produced should 4 fall within the following range For measurement use the image produced on the backside of the test pattern Backside Specifications 3 0 0 5 mm Setting Range 3 0 mm to 3 0 mm in 0 2 mm increments 4036163010
369. h Performs search with the LDAP server based on the keyword entered Use To prohibit the LDAP Search in the Scanner mode or Box mode Setting Procedure The default setting is Prohibit Permit Prohibit 7 Utility Mode bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 5 Box Function Functions To select whether or not to use the Box function Box function Stores image data in the hard disk box for later use Use To prohibit the use of the Box function Setting Procedure The default setting is Prohibit Permit Prohibit C 3 4 1 Date amp Time Setting Functions To set the time of day date and time zone and start the clock Use To change the settings for time of day and date Use as part of setup procedures Setting Procedure The default setting is 00 00 January 1 2000 For the time zone set the time difference from the Greenwich Mean Time The time zone can be set between 1200 and 1200 in 30 minute intervals 2 Reprint Functions To select whether to permit recalling and copying of image data which has previ ously been subjected to a copy cycle Use To prohibit Reprint Setting Procedure The default setting is Yes 5 Yes No 2 3 HDD Lock v 3 Functions To select whether or not to use the HDD Lock function and if selected to use set E the password The contents of t
370. h paper of any other size the Start key LED will remain lit red and it is not possible to carry out the test The test cannot be started either immediately after the Power Switch has been turned ON during which period the controller is in the process of starting Start the test after booting of the controller is completed which takes about 1 min or more after the Power Switch has been turned ON 3 Wait for 1 min or more after the Start key has been pressed Then touch Communica tion Log Print and press the Start key Then transmission reception log will then be printed 4 Check the printed log 5 Touch Receive Mail check and set the mail check time interval back to the original value 3 2 Standard Controller Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Setting for PageScope Remote Care 2 3 Supplementary information Log check TX RX Test is the function that sends an e mail to the mail address of the controller Email Address set in Receive The e mail sent to the controller is received by the controller during mail check The log shows the record of transmission and reception of this e mail and if the transmission reception is normally terminated the test can be regarded as being okay The log is a record of ten different transmissions and or receptions no 1 being the latest 2 3 1 Example of successful test transmission reception Status Rx Succeede Prom von Log showing
371. hand Clean the LED if touched by hand using the LED cleaning jig Becareful about the spring that can spring off when the LPH Assy is unlocked If the LPH Assy comes off position when the Lock is unlocked the LPH Assy must be installed using the LPH Assy mounting jig 403616262700 2 88 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 403616262800 403616262900 E Vj TI 04 Unc BCEAO Other 3 Remove the three LPH mounting screws 3 4 Peeloff the seal 4 unlock 5 the LPH Assy and remove the flat cable 6 5 Remove the LPH 7 6 Perform the same procedure for each of different colors of LPH 2 B Reinstallation Procedure NOTE The LPH comes in two types one for black and the other for color common to Y M and C At replacement make sure of the type of the LPH whether it is for black or color lt Check method gt Determine the type of LPH using the marking on the side face of the LPH The markings are LPH for black BLACK LPH for color COLOR 2 89 Other bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 1 Insert the flat cable 2 into the LPH 1 and lock the LPH 1 2 Affix the seal 3 that comes with the LPH Assy to the location shown on the left NOTE Failure to affix the seal could cause the flat cable to come off the LPH Assy
372. hange for improvement of their performance Therefore the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required Revision mark To indicate clearly a section revised show to the left of the revised section A number within represents the number of times the revision has been made To indicate clearly a section revised show in the lower outside section of the correspond ing page A number within 4 represents the number of times the revision has been made NOTE Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted When a page revised in Ver 2 0 has been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 3 0 only are shown with those for Ver 2 0 deleted When page revised in Ver 2 0 has not been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 2 0 are left as they are 2004 09 20 N Adding the descriptions and correcting errors in writing 2004 03 1 0 Issue of the first edition Date Service manual Ver Revision mark Descriptions of revision bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 CONTENTS General 1 System configuration nennen enne 1 1 2 Product specifications 1 3 MENU 1 3 2 20
373. has turned for a given number of pulses after the sequence to move the Paper Lifting Plate from the take up position to the standby position was started C0990 Elevator Motor malfunction 1 PC 401 Service Manual Elevator malfunction C0991 ascent motion failure soft limit error C0996 1 Shift Motor malfunction C0997 1 shifting failure C0998 ejection failure C099C LCT Shift Gate malfunction 099 LCT communications error 4 21 o I 2 5 5 Hr gt E 2 5 gt Malfunction code bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Code Item Description Finishing option transport system malfunction COBO5 Finishing option Paddle Motor mal function COB20 Finishing option Stapler Unit CD drive failure COB25 Finishing option Stapler Unit Slide Motor malfunction COB30 Finishing option Aligning Bar mov ing mechanism malfunction COB39 Finishing option Front Aligning Motor malfunction COB3A Finishing option Rear Aligning Motor malfunction COB48 Finishing option Exit Roller pres sure retraction failure COB4A Finishing option Storage Roller pressure retraction failure COB4C Finishing option Exit Motor mal function COB50 Finishing option stapling mecha nism malfunction 1 COB55 Finishing option Staple Foldin
374. he PC Drum is YES Change Imaging Unit scratched 2 7 3 LPH Assy The surface of the lens array is YES Clean with cleaning jig dirty 4 Imaging Unit Dirty on the outside YES Clean gt Connectors and contact terminals NO Clean contact terminals 5 make good connection between Reconnect each IU and LPH Assy 6 Developing bias contact terminal NO Clean contact terminal and check ter makes good connection minal position Image check The problem has been eliminated NO Select Tech Rep Mode gt 7 through the checks of steps up to 6 Machine Adjust LPH Rank and run LPH Rank The problem has been eliminated NO Change Imaging Unit 8 through the checks of steps up to 7 Change Image Transfer Belt Unit Change LPH Assy 4 69 E 2 3 E gt Image quality problem 4 3 15 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 A Typical Faulty Images Printer Monocolor uneven density in FD 40361540430 4036164044 0 403616404500 B Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action Image check Uneven density of void area occurs YES Check LPH Unit connector for 1 proper connection Check the LED Drive Board con nectors for proper connection High image Uneven density in FD occurs at a YES Feed 10 to 20 blank sheets of density original pitch of 40 mm to 50
375. he Panel Cover 2 41 Remove the Screw 3 and remove the Front Right Cover 4 Remove two Screws 5 and remove the Bypass Right Cover 6 Remove the Screw 7 and remove the Bypass Left Cover 8 AAW ENDS 2 39 Other bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 3 2 Exit Tray IR Left Cover Rear Left Cover Left Front Cover 5 G 2 8 403615216701 Open the Front Door 1 Remove two Screws 2 and remove the Exit Tray 3 Remove four Screws 4 and remove the IR Left Cover 5 Remove two Screws 6 Open the Left Door 7 and remove the Rear Left Cover 8 Remove the Screw 9 and remove the Left Front Cover 10 2 40 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 3 3 Front Door Panel Cover Paper Setting Dial Cover Other 6 403618216801 Open the Front Door 1 Remove the Screw 2 and remove the Panel Cover 3 Pick up the Front Door 1 and remove it Pull out the 1st Paper take up Tray 4 Remove two Screws 5 and remove the Paper Setting Dial Cover 6 AROS G 2 4 3 4 Lower Rear Cover Tray 2 Rear Cover Rear Cover Rear Right Cover Tray 2 Rear Right Cover Wiring Cover 403618216901 Remove seven Screws 1 and remove the Lower Rear Cover 2 Remove four Screws 3 and remove the Tray 2 Rear Cover 4 Remove two Screws 5 and remove the Tr
376. he Power Switch is turned ON a door or cover is opened and closed or a misfeed or mal function is reset The Tray3 Paper Take Up Sensor PC116 PF is blocked when the Power Switch is turned ON a door or cover is opened and closed or a misfeed or malfunction is reset Misfeed detected as a result of delayed deactiva tion of sensor The Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor PC117 PF is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after it has been blocked by the paper B Action Relevant Electrical Parts Tray3 Paper Take Up Sensor PC116 PF Main Control Board PWB C2 PF Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor PC117 PF Tray2 Vertical Transport Sensor PC108 Tray3 Paper Feed Motor M122 PF WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control Signal Electrical Component 1 Initial check items 2 PC116 PF I O check Sensor check PWB C2 PF PJ6C2 PF 8 PC 201 3 F 3 PC117 PF I O check Sensor check PWB C2 PF PJ6C2 PF 11 PC 201 3 F 4 PC108 I O check Sensor check PWB MC PJ12MC 6A ON 2 E 5 M122 PF operation check PWB C2 PF PJ5C2 1 4 PC 201 3 6 Change PWB C2 PF o I 2 5 5 gt E 2 5 gt Jam Display bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 1 3 6 Tray4 Take up and Vertical Transport Misfeed PC201 A Detection Timing Type Description isfeed de
377. he Punch Motor The setting value calculated during the initial operation falls outside the threshold value range B Action Relevant electrical parts Punch Home Position Sensor Punch Control Board PWB B PK Punch Motor Clock Sensor PI3P PK Punch Motor M1P PK WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical compo nents Check the motor and sensor connectors 1 for proper connection and correct as necessary Check the connector of motor for proper 2 drive coupling and correct as neces sary sensor check PWB B PK J1006 PK 6 C 2 PI3P PK sensor check PWB B PK J1006 PK 9 C 2 M1P PK operation check when the Power Switch is turned OFF and ON PWB B PR 1002 1 2 pe 6 PWB B PK replacement 1 E 5 5 gt 4 20 FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Trouble code 2 3 11 C0B79 Punch Sensor malfunctions A Detection timing Malfunction code Description The light receiving voltage is 2 5 V or less when the illuminating voltage is set to 4 4 V The light receiving voltage is 2 5 V or more when the illuminating voltage is set to 0 COB79 V The illuminating voltage setting is 4 4 V or more after the adjustment has been made B Action 1 Side Registration Sensor Re
378. he Rear Handle Assy 7 N 2 83 2 Other bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 8 Remove two Screws 8 and remove the Harness Guide 9 9 Remove four Screws 10 o c 403616212401 10 Remove six Connectors 11 403616212301 2 84 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Other 11 Remove the Gear 12 12 403616212501 12 Remove the E ring 13 and remove the Gear 14 NOTE Use care not to miss the Shaft 13 Remove the Screw 15 and remove the Wire Rail 16 NOTE Close the Right Door when remov ing to prevent the wire from damag ing 2 14 Remove the Fusing Drive Gear Assy 17 NOTE Use care not to hurt the Right Door wire and Harness around 15 Remove four Screws 18 gt 18 2 85 Other 20 403616213001 Il Maintenance 4 3 44 Cleaning Brush Motor 2 86 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 16 Remove the E ring 19 and Shaft 20 and remove the Gear 21 17 Remove two E rings 22 and remove the Cover 23 18 Remove the E ring 24 and remove the Gear 25 19 Remove the two Screws 26 and remove the Fusing Pressure Roller Pressure Retraction Motor 27 1 Remove the
379. he Tray3 3 Remove the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy we 2 1 4 Remove four screws 2 and remove the Paper Take up Unit 3 5 Remove two screws 4 and remove the Mounting Frame 5 for the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy 434816250300 2 2 PC 401 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 434816250500 Periodical check Remove two screws 6 and remove the Paper Take up Cover 7 Remove two C rings 8 and remove the bushing 9 2 Shift the Shaft Assy 10 in the orien tation as shown on the left and remove the C ring 11 and the gear 12 Remove the shaft Assy 10 2 3 o c Periodical check 44816250800 NOTE PC 401 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 10 Remove two E rings 13 and the bushing 14 and remove the Pick up Roller Fixing Bracket Assy 15 11 Remove the C ring 16 and remove the Paper Take up Roller 17 Replace the Paper Take up Roller and the Separation Roller Assy at the same time 1 1 3 Pick up Roller 434816251300 434816251400 4 434816251600 2 4 A Cleaning procedure 1 Remove the Tray3 2 Remove the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy te 2 1 3 Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol wipe the Pick up Roller 1 clean
380. he hard disk mounted in the machine are locked using the password If HDD Lock has previously been set this function is used to change the pass word or unlock HDD Lock Use To use the HDD Lock function Setting Procedure The default setting is No Yes No By selecting the HDD Lock function when the hard disk is already locked the password can be changed or the lock setting for the hard disk can be removed 4 Administrator Code Change Functions To change the Administrator Code Use To change the Administrator Code required for entering the Admin Mode Setting Procedure Use the 10 Key Pad to enter the new Administrator Code 8 digits 0 to 9 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Utility Mode 5 PSL Administrator Code Change Functions To change the PSL Administrator Code This function becomes available depending on the option installation Use To change the PSL Administrator Code required for entering the Admin Mode Setting Procedure Use the 10 Key Pad to enter the new Administrator Code 4 digits 0 to 9 D 4 4 1 Panel Reset Timer Functions Tosetthe time it takes the Auto Panel Reset function to be activated after a copy cycle has been completed or the last key operated The default settings are established when Auto Panel Reset is activated Use To select not to enable Auto Panel Reset or change the time it take
381. he input data is 0 change the sensor E o 0 5 B I O Check Screens These are only typical screens which may be different from what are shown on each indi vidual machine 3 78 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 TECH REP MODE I 0 Check EN Sensors 1 1st Drawer upper Linit o paper near 0j Paper Passage Set 0 3rd Drawer Vertical s D Timing Roller 0 Paper Empty D Set D Take Up D Exit 0 Paper Near Upper Limit OHP Detect Empty 0 Paper Empty SeRSor 0 Sensor o Double Feed Empey ear 0 Manual user Loop 2nd Drawer Te Rasare s 0 Multi FD Size 10 PC Drive Detect Set 0 Take Up Multi FD Size 20 Hain sen OF ive 0 Enpty upper ini 0 Multi FD Size 30 596 Seng ipid Near 0 4th Drawer Multi FD Size 40 Hi senser Vertical 0 Set ol Lift UP Posit p Black PC Drive p Transport S el ion sensor Sub Sensor Take Up Di Paper Empty Di Paper Empty D an Sensors 2 LCT Bouno Button Rebers Sensor 0 2nd Transfer Lift UP Upper Division Boar Transfer Unit ER sengon gi 0 d BoSition sO Dev E Separat 20 b nsor 0 Cassette Open 0 Empty 6 0 Transfer Belt pe Shift Tray ol Shift Motor Toner 0 Transfer Unit g 3 Hone sensor Pulse S Mot E y Separat Stob i2 0 butse Sensor 0 E Ea oner 0 Toner Collect a Take Up 0 Duplex Empey
382. he message type when the vendor is mounted Type 1 Message for Coin Vendor Type 2 Message for Card Keeper Type 3 Message common to Coin Vendor and Card Keeper 3 101 o S E o a 5 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 5 3 3 Coverage Rate Reset Functions Toclear the coverage rate Use Use to clear the coverage rate Setting The default setting is No Procedure Yes No Pressing the END key will clear the coverage rate 5 3 4 Remote Diagnosis System Choice Functions To select the Remote Diagnosis System Use Use to switch to the RD mode Setting The default setting is KRDS Procedure KRDS RD Mode 5 3 5 Lock Job Authentication Mode Functions To select the authentication mode for lock jobs Mode 1 Unlock only the document selected Mode 2 Unlock all documents for which there is coincidence in the password Use Use to change the mode to Mode 2 Setting The default setting is Mode 1 Procedure Mode 1 Mode 2 A 5 3 6 IU Life Stop Setting Functions To select whether or not to stop a print cycle when the IU reaches its service life Use Use to select not to stop the print cycle when the IU reaches its service life Setting The default setting is Stop Procedure Stop Not Stop 5 3 7 Service Code Change Functions To change the service code used to enter the Tech
383. heck Functions To display the D A value of CCD clamp gain for G and B Use Used for troubleshooting for the CCD Sensor Setting Use the following guidelines on the correct range of values Procedure CLAMP The difference between the max and min output values should be within 100 GAIN The difference from the CLAMP values B should be within 90 for R and B The difference from the CLAMP value G should be within 50 for G The difference between each pair of RO and RE GO and GE and BO and BE should be within 30 4 12 7 Paper Passage D Functions To check for paper passage performance of the engine only without involving a print 8 D e The counters do not count up 5 Use e When a paper misfeed or other fault occurs in the paper transport system E Setting Select the paper source and press the Start key Procedure The sequence is halted when the Stop key is pressed or paper runs out 4 12 8 Option Check Functions To check the capacity of the add on memory and mounting of a hard disk and a par allel I F Use Use for check after an option has been installed Setting When an add on memory is mounted the machine automatically recognizes it and Procedure displays its capacity 3 89 o E o a 5 bizhub C350 Field Service
384. hes Board to reset the following malfunctions scanner related malfunctions fusing related malfunctions expo sure lamp related malfunctions and C3FFF For any other malfunctions open and close the Front Door or turn OFF and ON the Power Switch o I 2 5 5 gt Trouble code PC 401 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 2 3 Solution 2 3 1 C0990 LCT Elevator Motor Failure A Detection timing Malfunction code Description The Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor PC10 LCT cannot detect both edges of H L C0990 even after the set period of time has elapsed while the Elevator Motor M5 LCT is turning backward forward raise lower B Action Relevant electrical parts Elevator Motor M5 LCT Interface Board PWB H LCT Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor PC10 LCT Main Control Board PWB C1 LCT WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical compo nents Check the motor and sensor connectors 1 for proper connection and correct as necessary Check the connector of motor for proper 2 drive coupling and correct as neces sary 3 PC10 LCT I O sensor check PWB C1 LCT PJ3C1 LCT 5 F 2 PWB C1 LCT 4 M5 LCT operation check PJ4C1 LCT 7 6 H 2 PWB H LCT replacement 6 PWB C1 LCT replacement 8 E 5 5 gt 4 6 PC 401 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Trouble code 2 3 2 C0991 LCT Lift Failure
385. hibits the initiation of any new print cycle Paper Dust Remover The number of copies made is counted The counter counts up 2 for paper whose FD exceeds 216 mm 150 000 152 000 Ozone Filter The number of copies made is counted The counter counts up 2 for paper whose FD exceeds 216 mm 150 000 152 000 2nd Transfer Roller Unit The number of copies made is counted The counter counts up 2 for paper whose FD exceeds 216 mm g Transfer Belt Unit The number of copies made is counted The counter counts up 2 for paper whose FD exceeds 216 mm The number of copies made is compared with the value of the number of hours through which the belt has turned translated to a corresponding value of the number of copies made and the value which ever reaches the life specifications value is detected When printing prohibited is encountered the machine prohibits the initiation of any new print cycle 300 000 382 000 Imaging Unit C M Y Imaging Unit Bk The number of hours through which the PC Drum has turned is compared with the number of hours through which the Developing Roller has turned translated to a corresponding value of the number of hours through which the PC Drum has turned and the value whichever reaches the life specifica tions value is detected 5 725 min 5 955 min 5 916 min 6 064 min The initi
386. hile disengaging the claw NOTE Becareful not to lose the gear pin 9 Remove the C clip 9 and remove the bushing 10 10 Remove the screw 11 and remove the Paper Guide Lower 12 11 Remove the Transport Roller 13 1 Remove the Middle Front Cover and the Middle Rear Cover 2 6 2 Remove Two screws 1 and remove the Middle Upper Cover 2 FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 45831525830 1 3 21 Punch Unit 458315258600 458310258700 458316258800 Other Remove the C clip 3 and remove the bushing 4 Shift the Shaft Assy in the orientation as shown on the left Remove the C clip 5 the Gear 6 the bushing 7 and remove the Mid dle Transport Roller 8 2 Remove the Punch Trash Box Unplug the connector J1005 1 Remove the Harness from the Har ness Guide 2 Unplug the connector 3 Remove the screw 4 and remove the Sensor Support Plate 5 Remove the screw 6 and the washer 7 Unplug the connector 8 Remove two screws 9 and remove the base cover 10 2 19 Other FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 9 Remove four screws 11 and remove the Sensor Unit Upper 12 and the Sensor Unit Lower 13 10 Remove the spring 14 11 Remove the Punch Unit 16 from the Side Registration Motor section 15 Il Maintenance
387. his order Machine Adjust Memory HardDisk Adjust gt Work Memory In Out Check 3 Select either Input Check Output Check or both 4 Pressing the Start key will start the work memory input output operation check sequence and be terminated automatically 5 The check result will be displayed OK or NG Press the Stop key to interrupt the check sequence E Hard Disk R W Check Functions To check to see if the hard disk is connected properly and if read write operation of the hard disk is correctly performed Use When the hard disk is mounted Adjustment 1 Call the Tech Rep Mode to the screen Procedure 2 Touch these keys in this order Machine Adjust Memory HardDisk Adjust gt Hard Disk R W Check 3 Pressing the Start key will start the hard disk R W check sequence and be termi nated automatically 4 The check result will be displayed OK or NG 2E Press the Stop key to interrupt the check sequence F Hard Disk Format Functions To format the hard disk 5 The function proceeds in the order of Physical Format to Logical Format e f the hard disk is yet to be formatted the malfunction code 12 will appear Ignore this code and continue with the formatting procedure Use When the hard disk is mounted When the hard disk is to be initialized Physical Format to Logical Format Adj
388. ictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential information ED
389. ighlight The problem has been eliminated NO Change Imaging Unit Change Image Transfer Belt Unit Change LPH Assy Change LED Drive Board Change MFP Control Board Change LPH Unit Change High Voltage Unit 2 Developing Bias Change High Voltage Unit 1 Image Transfer Neutralizing 4 77 o I 2 5 5 Hr gt E 5 3 HE z Image quality problem 4 3 20 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Printer Monocolor void areas white spots A Typical Faulty Images Void areas 4036 s4050c0 White spots 403615405100 B Troubleshooting Procedure the Toner Cartridge Step Section Check Item Result Action 1 Image Check There are void areas at the front YES w 4 72 side or high density section There is void area at the rear side YES Perform 2nd Transfer Adjust of 2 section Image Adjust under Tech Rep mode 3 Imaging Unit The surface of the PC Drum is YES Change Imaging Unit scratched 4 Dirty on the outside YES Clean 5 Hopper Unit Foreign matter or caked toner in YES Remove foreign matter Installation envi Is the atmospheric pressure at the YES Make the following adjustment through the checks of steps up to 5 6 ronment installation site low Tech Rep Mode Image Adjust Bias Voltage Ch
390. ight through the adjust of PRT Highlight Tech Rep Mode Image Adjust After the Reset Stabilizer NO Go to next step Stabilizer sequence has been completed run 9 Reset Stabi Gradation Adjust if the problem 4 89 2 5 5 gt Image quality problem bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Step Section Check Item Result Action The problem has been eliminated NO Image Transfer Roller through the checks of steps up to 9 Unit Change Image Transfer Belt Unit 10 Change Control Board Change High Voltage Unit 2 Developing Bias Change High Voltage Unit 1 Image Transfer Neutralizing E 2 5 gt 4 90 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 3 32 Printer 4 Color poor color reproduction A Typical Faulty Images Image quality problem 4036fs4058c0 B Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action Paper Paper is damp YES Change paper to one just unwrapped from its package Install Paper Dehumidifying Heater lizer Tech Rep Mode persists make adjustments of PRT Max Density and PRT Highlight 2 Transfer Terminal is dirty YES Clean Belt Unit 3 Image Transfer Image Transfer Roller is NO Reinstall Roller Unit installed properl
391. ing Roller abnormally low tem perature No zero cross signal is detected even with the lapse of 1 sec or more during a standby state print cycle or Power Save A temperature of 120 C or less of the Heating Roller is detected for 1 sec or more during a standby state A temperature of 120 C or less of the Heating Roller is detected for 1 sec or more during a print cycle A temperature of 70 C or less of the Heating Roller is detected for 1 sec or more during Power Save C0511 Fusing Pressure Roller abnormally low temperature A temperature of 80 C or less of the Fusing Pres sure Roller is detected for 1 sec or more during a standby state A temperature of 80 C or less of the Fusing Pressure Roller is detected for 1 sec or more during a print cycle A temperature of 80 C or less of the Fusing Pressure Roller is detected for 1 sec or more during Power Save 4 20 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Malfunction code Code Item Description C0520 Heating Roller abnormally high e A temperature of 225 or more of the Heating Roller temperature is detected for 1 sec or more C0521 Fusing Pressure Roller abnormally A temperature of 190 C or more of the Fusing Pres high temperature sure Roller is detected for 1 sec or more before the start of the heater temperature control e A temperature of 215 or more of th
392. ing is Standard High Quality Standard Economy 3 15 3 Pri Comp Method for Monochrome o E o 0 5 Functions To set the compression method used for scanning in the monochrome mode of the image of the color mode for each file type Use To change the compression method Setting Procedure PDF The default setting is MH MH MMR TIFF The default setting is MH MH MMR 3 22 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Utility Mode 3 16 Settings in Network Setting 3 16 1 Common Setting A TCP IP 1 IP Address Functions To set the IP address of the device used in the network Use To enter the IP address of the device Setting Procedure IP Address Version 4 format 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 2 Subnet Mask Functions To set the subnet mask of the device used in the network Use To enter the subnet mask of the device Setting Procedure IP Address Version 4 format 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 3 Gateway Address Functions To set the gateway address of the device used in the network Use To enter the gateway address of the device Setting Procedure e IP Address Version 4 format 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 4 DHCP Functions To set DHCP for the network Use To use DHCP Setting Procedure The de
393. installation plate Assy 7 together with Frame 2 13 o c Periodical check 8 403616259800 1 5 6 Transport Roller 2 14 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 5 Remove two Screws 8 and Paper Take up Roller cover 9 6 Remove two C rings 10 and two Bushings 11 and remove the Pick up Roller Assy 12 7 Snap offthe C ring 13 and remove the Pick up Roller 14 A Cleaning Procedure Open the Vertical transport door 2 Using soft cloth dampened with alcohol wipe the Transport Roller 1 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 1 5 7 Cleaning of Synchronizing Roller 1 5 8 Paper Dust Remover 403616250100 403616250100 Cleaning Procedure Periodical check Open the Right Door Remove the Paper Dust Remover See 2 15 for Replacing the Paper Dust Remover Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol wipe the Synchronizing Roll ers 1 clean of dirt Open the Right Door Pushing the hook 1 with a blue label inward remove the Paper Dust Remover 2 2 Using a brush whisk dust off the Paper Dust Remover 3 Replacing Procedure Open the Right Door Pushing the hook 1 with a blue label inward remove the Paper Dust Remover 2 Remove the Ozone Filter 2 20 Select Tech Rep Mode
394. inted test pattern in half lengthwise to check for deviation the image on the inside 5 Check deviation between black lines A and B 6 Change the setting value using the Up Down key as necessary 7 Produce another test pattern and check for deviation Check Procedure Check point A B If the black reference line deviates in the direction of C decrease the setting value If the black reference line deviates in the direction of D increase the setting value 403616300100 Direction of C Direction of D 4036f83003c0 4036fs3002c0 3 29 7 o D o E a 5 Utility Mode bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 3 17 3 Color Shift Correction C M Y Functions To adjust color shift if there is any color shift as found through comparison of the copy with the original Before making this adjustment be sure to perform Color Shift Correction Bk Use To correct any color shift Adjustment Range 0 6 to 6 dot Adjustment If the cross deviates in the direction of C increase the setting Instructions If the cross deviates in the direction of D decrease the setting Adjustment 1 Touch Expert User Mode Color Shift Correction cyan Procedure Load Tray1 with A3 or A4R plain paper 2 3 Press the Start k
395. iod of time after the tray has started moving up An encoder clock input is not detected within a given period of time during operation of the tray Data written in the Backup Memory differs from what is recorded in it and writing operation is not correctly per formed even with two retry sequences a total of three writing sequences C9BF1 RAM malfunction NOTE The Punch Unit detects punch related malfunctions and notifies the Finisher of any malfunction detected 2 2 1 How to reset Press the Trouble Reset Switch on the Tech Rep Setting Switches Board to reset the following malfunctions scanner related malfunctions fusing related malfunctions expo sure lamp related malfunctions and C3FFF For any other malfunctions open and close the Front Door or turn OFF and ON the Power Switch NOTE Before starting the troubleshooting in relation to the Punch Mechanism COB7X be sure to turn OFF the Power Switch of the main unit E 5 5 gt 4 8 FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Trouble code 2 3 Solution 2 3 1 COBOO Transport System Drive malfunctions A Detection timing Malfunction code Description The Folding Roller Home Position Sensor PI12 FN is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Folding Roller has started moving from its home position The Folding Roller Home Position Sensor
396. iod of time has elapsed after the Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 PI1 DU is blocked by the paper The Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 PC1 DU is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 PC1 DU is blocked by the paper Detection of paper remaining in the Duplex Unit trans port section The Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 PI1 DU or Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 PC1 DU are blocked when the Power Switch is set to ON a door or cover is opened and closed or a misfeed or malfunction is reset B Action Relevant electrical parts Duplex Control Board PWB A DU Control Board PWB MC Synchronizing Roller Sensor PC28 Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 PI1 DU Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 PC1 DU Switchback Motor M1 DU Duplex Unit Transport Motor M2 DU WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical compo nents 1 Initial check items E 2 PC28 I O sensor check PWB MC PJ12MC 6 R 2 5 3 PI1 DU I O sensor check PWB A DU PJ1A DU 12 H 4 2 4 PC1 DU I O sensor check PWB A DU PJ4A DU 3 2 5 M1 DU operation check D 8 6 M2 DU operation check H 2 7 PWB A DU replacement 5 8 PWB MC replacement Jam Display AD 501 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Blank page o gt 5 5 2 HE gt 4 4 p S
397. ion Ffold Position MEER Ce Ta 458315352460 9 Renew the center folding of the finished copies Take the top surface of the finished copies as A and the under surface as B 10 Check the deviation of the stapling position from the newly folded position NOTE In checking the deviation refer not to the folded position by the Finisher but to the newly folded position 3 4 FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Mechanical adjustment Standard 0 2 mm To side e ee Standard To side gt A 45838350100 Center Binding Position Fold Position METER Ts Max 7 Min 7 458315352460 11 Adjust with the and W Keys When the stapling position is shifted to the direction A Adjust the value to the side When the stapling position is shifted to the direction B Adjust the value to the side 12 Touch END 13 Make the copy and check again NOTE Setfive or more sheets of original under the ADF and then take copies and bind them into a booklet 3 1 2 DF 601 unequipped machine ROND gt Set A3 or 11 x 17 to the Feed Tray Select the functions as follows Orig gt Copy4int Booklet2BookletoBind Set A3 or 11 x 17 original blank paper acceptable on the Original Glass Press the Start Key five times to cause reading operation five times Adjust the varia tion to the minimum by u
398. ion Sensor PC12 LCT is not unblocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Shift Motor Pulse Sensor PC8 LCT after the shift opera tion began shift to the right The Shifter Home Position Sensor PC12 LCT is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the return operation began shift to the left The Shifter Home Position Sensor PC12 LCT is not blocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Shift Motor Pulse Sensor PC8 LCT after the return oper ation began shift to the left The Shifter Return Position Sensor 11 is not unblocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Shift Motor Pulse Sensor PC8 LCT after the return oper ation began shift to the left B Action Relevant electrical parts Shift Motor Pulse Sensor PC8 LCT Main Control Board PWB C1 LCT Shifter Return Position Sensor PC11 LCT Shifter Home Position Sensor PC12 LCT WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical compo nents 1 Check the sensor connectors for proper J connection and correct as necessary 2 PC8 LCT sensor check PWB C1 LCT PJ3C1 LCT 3 G 2 3 PC11 LCT I O sensor check PWB C1 LCT PJ3C1 LCT 7 E 2 4 PC12 LCT I O sensor check PWB C1 LCT PJ3C1 LCT 8 D 2 5 PWB C1 LCT replacement 8 o I 2 5 5 gt Trouble code PC 401 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 2 3 6 0
399. ions Standard Mode 1 Sided Mode 2 Sided Mode Modes Thick Paper Mode l 1 Sided Mode Mixed Original Detection 1 sided Mode 2 Sided Mode Mode 1 3 Paper type 1 Sided Mode Standard Mode 35 to 128 g m 9 1 4 to 34 Ib Plain Paper 2 Sided Mode 50 to 110 g m 13 1 4 to 29 1 4 Ib Type of Document Thick Paper Mode 1 Sided Mode Plain Paper 129 to 210 g m 34 1 4 to 55 3 4 Ib Mixed Original Detection Mode 1 Sided 2 Sided Mode 50 to 110 g m 13 1 4 to 29 1 4 1 Plain Paper Metric area Detectable Document B6R to A3 Size 1 Inch area 5 1 2 x 8 1 2R 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 to 11 x 17 Standard Mode Mixed Original Detection Mode Document Feed Table 100 sheets 80 g m 21 1 4 Ib Original Exit Tray 100 sheets 80 g m 21 1 4 Ib Capacity Thick Paper Mode Document Feed Table 38 sheets 210 g m 55 3 4 Ib Original Exit Tray 38 sheets 210 g m 55 3 4 Ib 1 For the Combined Original Detection Mode Refer to the Mixed Original Detection Enabled Size Com bination Table 1 1 Mixed original feed DF 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 1 4 Machine specifications Power Requirements DC24V supplied from the main unit DC5V generated within the DF 601 Max power 60 W or less Consumption Dimensions 586 mm W x 519 mm D x 135 mm H 23 inch W x 20 1 2 inch D x 5 1 4 inch H Weight 14 2 kg 31 1 4 Ib 1 5 Operating environment Confor
400. ious page is mixed NO Reinstall expanded memory 3 Board PWB with data on current page MFP Test Print The problem is eliminated as NO Change interface connection 4 Tech Rep Mode checked with the image on a test cable pattern produced Image Processing The problem is eliminated after the NO Change Image Processing 5 PWB C interface connection cable has Board been changed MFP Control The problem has been eliminated NO Change MFP Control Board 6 Board PWB through the checks of steps up to 7 MFP 4 68 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Image quality problem 4 3 14 Printer Monocolor white lines in FD white bands in FD colored lines col ored bands in FD white lines in CD white bands in CD colored lines in CD colored bands in CD A Typical Faulty Images White lines in FD White bands in FD Colored lines in FD Colored bands in FD 403615402100 40365402260 4036154023 0 4036f54024c0 White lines in CD White bands in CD Colored lines in CD Colored bands in CD B B Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action Image check A white line or black line in FD is YES Select Tech Rep Mode sharp Machine Adjust LPH Chip 1 Adjust and run LPH Chip Adjust NO Clean the Comb Electrode by moving the Comb Electrode Cleaning Lever D 2 Imaging Unit The surface of t
401. is con nected 12 0 Controller hardware error Acontroller hardware error is detected in the network VF C13C8 New Transfer Cleaner Unit reset A new installation is not detected when a new Transfer ting failure Cleaner Unit Image Transfer Belt Unit is installed C13CA New Fusing Unit resetting failure e A new installation is not detected when a new Fusing Unit is installed C13D1 Cyan Imaging Unit EEPROM e A condition of EEPROM is not connected or There access error is an access error is detected in EEPROM of the C13D2 Magenta Imaging Unit EEPROM Imaging Unit access error C13D3 Yellow Imaging Unit EEPROM access error C13D4 Black Imaging Unit EEPROM access error 4 24 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Malfunction code Code Item Description C13D5 Cyan LPH correction data down load failure e An error is detected while the LPH correction data is being downloaded from EEPROM of LPH to PWB C13D6 Magenta LPH correction data download failure MFP when the Power Switch is turned ON C13D7 Yellow LPH correction data down load failure C13D8 Black LPH correction data down load failure C1800 Controller start failure Acontroller start failure is detected in the controller interface C3310 CCD clamp gain adjustment failure The adjustment value is 0 or 255 during a CCD clamp adjustment The peak value of the
402. ised Not raised Position PC121 PF Set Tray4 Set Sensor Set Out of position PC124 PF Paper Empty Tray4 Paper Empty Sensor Paper not Paper present present PC122 PF Paper Near Empty Tray4 Paper Near Empty Sensor Blocked Unblocked PC126 PF Vertical Transport S Tray4 Vertical Transport Sensor Paper Paper not present present PC125 PF Take Up Tray4 Paper Take Up Sensor Paper Paper not present present PC123 PF Upper Limit Sensor Tray4 Lift Up Sensor Raised Not raised Position 101 201 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 3 Mechanical adjustment 3 1 NOTE Mechanical adjustment Adjusting the paper reference position Make this adjustment after any of the following procedures has been performed When the PH Unit has been replaced When the image on the print is offset in the FD direction When a faint image occurs on the leading edge of the image Machine Adjust Mode System Input State Confirm Test Print Gradation Adjust List Output 434818360301 Hachine Addust Fuser Nip Fuser Temp Fuser Speed Shag qpetect PRT area 18 Area Loop Adjust Emir J LPH Hank LPH Chip Adjust pener Ginaina 434818360400 Hachine Addust PRT Area un Left kargin mpu cere La organ Zoom for FD 434818360500
403. isfeed PC 401 4 8 1 3 5 Tray3 Take up and Vertical Transport Misfeed PC 101 PC201 4 9 1 3 6 4 Take up and Vertical Transport Misfeed PC201 4 10 1 3 7 Duplex Transport Misfeed 501 4 11 1 3 8 Fusing Exit Misfeed esee enne 4 12 2 Malfunction code 2 retento epe Racer eden ipee ER dana 4 13 2 1 Restarigi ED dha een mi i Nea 2 2 Alert code 2 24 Alertrlist Dee irme aeneae ro Hf itn 2 3 Solution n co ete enn e tene detnr t ib ey a eie d Pin ets 2 81 S 1 CCD clamp gain adjustment failure eese 4 15 2 3 2 5 AIDC Sensor Front failure 4 15 2 3 3 28 AIDC Sensor Back failure essen 4 15 2 3 4 6 Cyan Imaging Unit failure eeeeeeenen 4 16 2 3 5 7 Magenta Imaging Unit failure 4 16 2 3 6 8 Yellow Imaging Unit failure eene 4 16 2 3 7 9 Black Imaging Unit failure 4 16 2 3 8 21 Color Shift Test Pattern failure sse 4 16 2 3 9 22 Color Shift Adjust failure ix Il Maintenance D 2 IV Troublshooting V Appendix
404. ition The Swing Guide Home Position Sensor PI3 FN is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Booklet Roller has started moving from a position not the home position c Q 5 gt A 5 5 gt Trouble code FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Code Item Description COB25 Stapler Unit Slide Motor malfunc tions The Slide Home Position Sensor PI18 FN is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Stapler Unit has started moving from its home position The Slide Home Position Sensor PI18 FN is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Stapler Unit has started moving from a posi tion not the home position COB39 Front Aligning Plate Motor mal functions The Front Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor P14 FN is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Front Aligning Plate has started moving from its home position to a position out of the home position The Front Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor P14 FN is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Front Aligning Plate has started mov ing from a position out of the home position to the home position Rear Aligning Plate Motor mal functions The Rear Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor PI5
405. ize paper selection 3 5 Utility Mode bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Administrator Mode 2 2 Displayed according to a given condition such as Admin option installation TCP IP Administrator Code DNS NetWare Receive Send Print Common Setting Server 1 E mail Internet Server 2 Network Setting FTP Server Server 3 Twain Server 4 LDAP Server 5 __ Operation Lock Time for TWAIN Network setting Authentication Other Thick Paper and OHP Film Image Density Color Shift Correction C Color Shift Correction M Color Shift Correction Y Color Shift Correction Bk Expert User Mode Black Image Density Correction Stabilizer PRT Area Top Margin PRT Area Left Margin PRT Area Dup Left Margin Center Staple Position o 5 E o E D a 5 A Delete All Data in Index Gradation Adjustment POP3 Server POP3 Login Name POP3 Password POP3 Server POP3 Port Number Server Setting KRDS Deco Change the functions to Status Mail Check those of Server Setting Connection Timeout RD according to the Remote Diagnosis System SMTP server selected for use SMTP Port Number Timeout of SMTP Server 3 6
406. jusername o c 2 4036fs2621e0 3 1 4 Writing into the Compact flash 1 Putthe data of Firmware in the optional directory CATSS2 in the below figure inii Ele gdt View Favorites Tools gt GQsearch Gyrolders 05 02 Address Sy 552 z e 7 200401 17_4036 FOFO 22 00 00 CHECKSUM 0623 EXE x t object s 0 bytes My Computer 4 poumon NOTE The file name of Firmware data consists of the Release Date Version CHECKSUM exe 2 Double click the Firmware data and specify the directory to be uncompressed and then uncompress it NOTE When old Firmware is still left in the specified directory to be uncompressed delete it before uncompressing 2 32 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Firmware upgrade 3 Mount the Compact flash on the PC and check the Drive name which was recognized in the Windows F Drive in the following figure Computer ici xl File Edit View Favorites Tools Help e seach Folders 05 Ur gt Address My Computer zi 9 Go Disk C Control Panel Local Disk D GJ Removable Disk F 8 Compact Disc E 5 object s B My Computer 403616262360 4 Click Start gt Program Accessories Command prompt to open the Com
407. justment Setting 1 How to use the adjustment section Adjustment Setting contains detailed information on the adjustment items and proce dures for this machine e Throughout this Adjustment Setting the default settings are indicated by boldface A Advance Checks Before attempting to solve the customer problem the following advance checks must be made Check to see if 1 The power supply voltage meets the specifications 2 The power supply is properly grounded The machine shares the power supply with any other machine that draws large current intermittently e g elevator and air conditioner that generate electric noise The installation site is environmentally appropriate high temperature high humidity direct sunlight ventilation etc levelness of the installation site The original has a problem that may cause a defective image The density is properly selected The Original Glass slit glass or related part is dirty Correct paper is being used for printing The units parts and supplies used for printing developer PC Drum etc are properly replenished and replaced when they reach the end of their useful service life 10 Toner is not running out B Precautions for Service Jobs 1 Be sure to unplug the power cord of the machine before starting the service job proce dures 2 If it is unavoidably necessary to service the machine with its power turned ON use utmost care not to
408. k paper 3 _ 210 to 256 g m 1 20 sheets or Postcards less Envelopes 10 sheets or less Labels 20 sheets or less Copy paper Max width x length 311 x 457 mm 297 x 432 mm 311 x 457 mm dimensions Min width x length 90 x 140 mm 140 x 182 mm 90 x 140 mm 1 Image is not guaranteed when thick paper 3 is used Optional Paper Feed Cabinet Only the plain paper weighing 60 to 90 g m is reliably fed Automatic Duplex Unit Only the plain paper weighing 64 to 90 g m is reliably fed 2 4 Maintenance Machine Durability 800 000 prints or 5 years whichever is earlier 2 5 Machine Specifications Power Requirements Voltage AC110 V 120 V 127 V 220 240 V Frequency 50 60 Hz 3 0 Hz Max Power Consumption Less than 1 45 kW 120 V 12 A 1 55 kW 220 240 V 6 7 A Dimensions 903 W x 730 D x 770 H mm Space Requirements 1014 W x 1151 D mm Mass Approx 104 kg without IU 2 6 Operating Environment Temperature 10 to 30 C with a fluctuation of 10 C h Humidity 15 to 85 with a fluctuation of 20 h 1 4 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Product specifications 2 7 Built in Controllers Printer Driver PCL5c printer driver Scan Driver TWAIN driver OS Compatibility Windows 98 Me Windows NT 2000 XP Windows Server 2003 Interface Ethernet 10 100BaseTX NOTE These specifications are subject to change wi
409. k the image If the image is faulty perform the troubleshooting procedures for image problems 3 96 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 TECH REP MODE 4 16 Miscellaneous Adjustments 4 16 1 Transfer Belt Refresh Functions To turn the Transfer Belt idly Use To refresh the surface of the Transfer Belt when filming occurs on the Transfer Belt N Filming 40368310000 Setting 1 From the Tech Rep mode enter the Transfer Belt Refresh mode Procedure 2 Open the Left Cover and using the Safety Switch Holding Jig turn ON the Left Cover Switch Safety Switch Holding Jig D z 2 7 E lt 3 Wait until predrive is completed 4 Loosen one screw completely and press the Belt Refresh Pad up against the Trans fer Belt Screw 5 Press the Start key 6 After about 5 min the Transfer Belt refresh sequence will be completed 7 Remove the Safety Switch Holding Jig 8 Tighten one screw and retract the Belt Refresh Pad from the Transfer Belt 3 97 o E o E 7 5 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 16 2 Transfer Belt Cleaning Bias Functions To set the strength of the Transfer Belt cleaning bias Use To change the Transfer Belt cleaning bias to the standard value when a Transfer Belt cleaning failure occurs due t
410. l Board PWB MC WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control Signal Electrical Component 1 7 operation check PWB MC PJ11MC 6B LOCK 13 PWB MC PJ11MC 3B REM 2 Change PWB MC 2 6 5 C0018 Color PC Motor failure to turn 2 Relevant Electrical Parts E Color PC Drum Motor M5 Control Board PWB MC 7 3 3 WIRING DIAGRAM gt Step Action Location Control Signal Electrical Component 1 Check the connector of motor for proper connec 2n u tion and correct as necessary 2 Check the connector of motor for proper drive i coupling and correct as necessary 3 Check the PWB MC connector for proper con PWB MC 6 5 DC24 V 15 8 nection and correct as necessary 4 5 operation check C0018 PWB MC PJ11MC 13B LOCK 13 B PWB MC PJ11MC 10B REM 5 Change PWB MC 4 28 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Malfunction code 2 6 6 C0019 Color PC Motor turning at abnormal timing Relevant Electrical Parts Color PC Drum Motor M5 Control Board PWB MC WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control Signal Electrical Component PWB MC PJ11MC 13B LOCK 1 5 operation check C0019 PWB MC PJ11MC 10B REM 13 B 2 Change PWB MC 2 6 7 C001A Color Developing Motor failure to turn Relevant Electrical Parts Color Developing Motor M6 DC Power Suppl
411. l Cover does not lie flat YES Change Original Cover if it is deformed or hinges are broken 3 Original Glass Original Glass tilts YES Position Original Glass correctly Check original loading position IR Scanner is not aligned with the YES Perform Focus Positioning of the 4 2nd 3rd Mirrors Carriage Scanner and 2nd 3rd Mirrors Car riage and Scanner Position Adjustment 5 The problem has been eliminated NO Change Scanner Assy through the checks of steps up to 4 Change CCD Unit E 5 3 HE z 4 60 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 3 6 Image quality problem IR System incorrect color image registration sync shift lines in CD A Typical Faulty Images 403615403200 B Troubleshooting Procedure through the checks of steps up to 5 Step Section Check Item Result Action 1 Original Original does not lie flat YES Change original 2 Original Cover Original Cover does not lie flat YES Change Original Cover if it is deformed or hinges are broken Slide rails Foreign matter on rails YES Clean and apply lubricant Drive Cables Cable kinks or is damaged YES Correct or change Scanner Assy Scanner moves smoothly NO Adjust the Scanner Motor timing 5 belt Change bushing Change Scanner Motor 6 The problem has been eliminated NO Change CCD Unit 4 61 I v 5
412. l Glass Place ten blank sheets of A3 paper on the test pattern and lower the Original Cover Press the Start key The machine will then start scanning the test pattern Touch OK and repeat steps from 2 through 6 twice a total of three times Touch Gradation Adjustment to display the Adj Values and Conv Values of each color C M Y and Bk for Max and Highlight 8 Use the following procedures to check the Conv Value NOAA WY Max 0 100 and Highlight 0 60 It completes the adjustment procedure If neither Max nor Highlight falls outside the ranges specified above Perform steps from 2 to 6 e Ifa fault is detected 0 is displayed for all values In this case turn OFF and ON the Power Switch and perform Gradation Adjustment once again If either Max or Highlight still remains outside the specified ranges perform PRT Max Density or PRT Highlight If a total of four sequences of Gradation Adjustment do not bring the values into the specified range check the image If the image is faulty perform the troubleshooting procedures for image problems 3 36 bizhub C350 Field S ervice Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Utility Mode 319 Server Setting KRDS Server Setting RD Either Server Setting KRDS or Server Setting RD is selected according to the set Remote Diagno 3 19 1 Server sis System Detailed settings are the same between the two POP3 Server Functions To set the P
413. l and make necessary adjustment Note that when two or more screws are used on the part in questions only one representative screw may be marked with red paint C Variable Resistors on Board NOTE Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions are given in Adjustment Setting o 2 D Removal of PWBs NOTES When removing a circuit board or other electrical component refer to Handling of PWBs and follow the corresponding removal procedures The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board When it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on the board be sure to ground your body 2 6 PC 401 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Other 22 Disassembly Assembly list Other parts No Section Part name Ref page 1 Right Door ws 2 7 2 Rear Right Cover wu 2 7 3 Exterior Parts Lower Right Cover ws 2 7 4 Front Right Cover ws 2 7 5 Rear Cover ws 2 7 6 Drawer ts 2 7 Unit 7 Wire ws 2 7 2 3 Disassembly Assembly procedure 2 3 1 Right Door Rear Right Cover Lower Right Cover Front Right Cover 9 c 2 1 Open the Right Door 1 2 Remove the Right Door 1 3 Remove two screws 2 and remove the Rear Right Cover 3 4 Remove two screws 4 and rem
414. l conditions change Adjustment Heating Roller 20 C to 5 C step 5 Range Pressure Roller 20 C to 5 C step 5 1 5 C to 5 C step 5 C others Adjustment If fusing performance is poor increase the setting If wax streaks occur decrease the setting If offset is poor decrease the setting Adjustment Procedure 3 1 Call the Tech Rep Mode to the screen 2 Touch these keys in this order Machine Adjust Fuser Temp 3 Select the paper type and Fusing Roller type 4 Enter the new setting from the Up Down key Pad 5 The temperature does not change immediately when the setting is change Wait a while before performing the subsequent steps As a general rule do not adjust the fusing temperature on the pressure application side 6 Touch END to validate the adjustment value 7 Check the copy image for any image problem 8 Make the adjustment for each type of paper 44 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 TECH REP MODE 4 4 3 Fuser Speed Functions To adjust the speed of the Fusing Drive Motor so as to match the fusing speed with transport speed Use Brush effect or blurred image is evident as a result of changes in environmental conditions or degraded durability Variable Range 2 to 2 in 0 1 increments Adjustment Instructions If brush effect is evident vary the setting value and check fo
415. lacement Part Service Job g z 2 amp gt 2 5 2 lt o o 2 589 x Ta er 2 9 R E t 9 c gg 2 t SS FIs 21515181515 JEJE 5 15 515 5 8 5155 ES 12 5 9 lt SIS p ajajajaja Adjustment Setting Items NO E E 5 5 g 2 E E gg Top Margin 1 Left Margin 2 PRT Area Dup Margin 3 O Zoom for FD 4 1 3 LPH Chip Adjust 5 LPH Rank Changes to 1 6 Machine Top Margin 7 Adjust Left Margin 8 3 IR Area 3 e M CD Mag 9 2 2 E FD Mag 10 4 Org Detect Sensor Adjust 11 Touch Panel Adjust 12 i o 5 Memory Hard Disk R W 13 e Hard Disk t ard DISK Hard Disk Format 14 ROM Version 15 x Reentry of Setting Values 16 System Org Detect Option Sensor 17 Input Serial Input 18 Hard Dis 19 Administrator Input 20 Counter Life Counter Clear 21 O Gradation Adjust 22 Re entry of Utility settings 23 Re entry of Security settings 24 Parallel adjustment of Scanner Mirrors Carriage 25 1 Positioning Exposure Unit 26 2 Scanner Motor timing belt adjustment 27 F W upgrading 28 Installation of Original Size Sensor 29 Remounting of ROM Control Board 30 Remounting of RAM MFP Control Board 31 A Replace Image Transfer Belt Unit 32 Adjustment item list bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep
416. lean Replace Descriptions personnel cation 1 Overall image conditions 2 Appearance e e 3 Pick up Roller 1 e 4 2 Paper Take up Roller 1 e 5 Separation Roller Assy 1 e Image Trans Image Transfer Belt 6 1 fer section Unit f Fusing Fusing Unit 1 section 8 pc 101 Pick up Roller 1 9 201 Paper Take up Roller 1 e 401 Separation Roller Assy 1 e 11 Feed Roller e FS 501 12 601 Transport route Guide e 13 Sensor e 2 3 Periodical check bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 1 3 Maintenance parts To ensure that the machine produces good copies and to extend its service life it is rec ommended that the maintenance jobs described in this schedule be carried out as instructed Replace with reference to the numeric values displayed on the Life counter Maintenance conditions are based on the case of A4 or 8 5 x 11 Standard mode and Preheat OFF A Main body Actual Classification Parts name Quantity durable Descriptions cycle Ref Page in this manual Tray 1 Paper Take up Roller 200K 2 7 Bypass Separation Roller Assy 200K 2 7 Pick up Roller 300 K 2 13 Tray 2 Paper Take up Roller 300 K 2 10 Separation Roller Assy 300 K 2 7 Paper Dust Remover 150 2 15 2nd Image Transfer Roller Unit Transport section 150K 2 22 o 5 c 2 Fusing sec
417. lect whether to enable or disable the click sound that sounds each time a key on the control panel is pressed Use To disable the key click sound Setting Procedure The default setting is ON ON OFF 3 6 2 2 2 A Power Save Functions To set the time it takes the machine to enter the Power Save mode after a copy cycle has been completed or the last key operated Power Save Turns OFF the LED LCD etc to reduce power consumption Use To change the time it takes the machine to enter the Power Save mode Setting Procedure Use the 10 Key Pad to enter the time 10 to 240 min The default setting is 15 min 15 min 10 to 240 Transferring to Power Save when job is in Held Locked Jobs queue Functions To select whether to transfer to Power Save when a job is set in Held Locked Job queue Held Job Job to be printed only when Held is canceled Locked Job Job to be printed only when a valid password is entered Use Use to cancel Power Save for a held or locked job Setting Procedure The default setting is Permit Permit Prohibit B Sleep Functions To set the time it takes the machine to enter the Sleep mode after a copy cycle has been completed or the last key operated All power lines but the control 5 V one are shut down The option of becomes available only when Yes is selected for Disable Sleep Mode of Admin Set under Admin Mode Use To change the
418. lectrical Component 1 Clean the ATDC Sensor window on the _ _ underside of the Imaging Unit if dirty 2 Clean the Sensor LED if dirty 3 Correct the contact and or WIRING of the ATDC Sensor if faulty 4 Reinstall Imaging Unit C M Y M3 operation check M3 PWB MC PJ16MC 4A 7A M3 19 I 5 Pulse Output M4 PWB MC PJ16MC 10A 13A 4 19 Pulse Output Change Imaging Unit Change PWB MC Change PWB MFP 4 40 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Malfunction code 2 6 49 COF3D Black ATDC Sensor adjustment failure Relevant Electrical Parts Imaging Unit Bk Control Board PWB MC MFP Control Board PWB MFP WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control Signal Electrical Component 1 Correct the ATDC connection on the underside of u m the Imaging Unit if faulty 2 Clean or correct each contact of the Imaging Unit B if faulty 3 Change Imaging Unit 4 Change PWB MC 5 Change PWB MFP 2 6 50 C1200 Standard Controller configuration failure Relevant Electrical Parts MFP Control Board PWB MFP WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control Signal Electrical Component Check to see if the following setting has been correctly made Tech Rep Mode gt System 1 Input Peripheral Setting as If the setting is changed be sure to turn OFF and ON the Power S
419. levant electrical parts Side Registration Home Sensor 2 Punch Control Board PWB B PK WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical compo nents 1 Check the sensor connectors for proper _ connection and correct as necessary 2 PI2P PK I O sensor check PWB B PK J1006 PK 3 2 3 PWB B PK replacement 1 2 Wastes Full Sensor Relevant electrical parts Punch Control Board PWB B PK Punch Trash Full Photo Sensor Board PWB E PK Punch Trash Full LED Board PWB F PK WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location 2E Control signal Electrical compo 5 nents E 1 Check the connection condition between _ _ PWB B and PWB E PK 3 2 Check the connection condition between 7 PWB B PK and PWB F PK 3 PWB E PK replacement A 3 4 PWB F PK replacement A 3 5 PWB B PK replacement 1 4 21 Trouble code FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 2 3 12 COBAO Elevate Mechanism malfunctions A Detection timing Malfunction code Description The Exit Tray Home Position Sensor PI9 FN is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the tray has started moving up COBAO An encoder clock input is not detected within a given period of time during opera tion of the tray B Action 1 Upper Limit Sensor Relevant electrical parts Shift Upper Limit Sensor PI15 FN Fi
420. llation plate Assy 5 Remove two Screws 8 and Paper Take up Roller cover 9 6 Remove the C ring 10 and Bushing 11 2 11 2 o c Periodical check 40361620282 40361620292 403616259600 2 12 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 7 Remove the C ring 13 and Gear 14 while sliding out the Shaft Assy 12 in the direction indicated in left figure 8 Remove the C ring 15 and Bushing 16 and remove the Shaft Assy 17 9 Remove two E rings 18 and Bush ing 19 and remove the Pick up Roller fixing plate Assy 20 10 Remove the C ring 21 and Paper Take up Roller 22 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 1 5 5 Pick up Roller 403616202300 3 7 40365203261 4 OW Periodical check Cleaning Procedure Remove the Separation Roller 2 installation plate Assy See the procedures 1 to 7 in 2 8 Cleaning of Separation Roller 2 Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol wipe the Pick up Roller 1 Replacing Procedure Remove the Jam processing cover 2 8 Remove the Screw 1 and Wiring cover 2 Remove two Screws 3 and Connec tor 4 and remove the Paper Take up Roller Assy 5 g Remove two Screws 6 and remove the Separation Roller 2
421. llow any metal parts such as clips staples and screws to fall into the product They can short internal circuits and cause electric shock a or fire Check wiring for squeezing and any other damage Current can leak leading to a risk of electric shock or D fire Carefully remove all toner remnants and dust from electri cal parts and electrode units such as a charging corona unit Q Current can leak leading to a risk of product trouble or fire Check high voltage cables and sheaths for any damage Current can leak leading to a risk of electric shock or fire aD Check electrode units such as a charging corona unit for deterioration and sign of leakage D Current can leak leading to a risk of trouble or fire S 7 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS N WARNING Safety Checkpoints Before disassembling or adjusting the write unit P H unit incorporating a laser make sure that the power cord has been disconnected a The laser light can enter your eye leading to a risk of loss of eyesight Do not remove the cover of the write unit Do not supply power with the write unit shifted from the specified mount ing position Q The laser light can enter your eye leading to a risk of loss of eyesight When replacing a lithium battery replace it with a new lith ium battery specified in the Parts Guide Manual Dispose of the used lithium battery using the method specified by
422. locked PC14 FN Home Stap Unit Staple Home Position Sensor Blocked Unblocked PC12 FN Home Store Storage Roller Home Position Sen Blocked Unblocked roller sor PC13 FN Home Exit roller Exit Roller Home Position Sensor Blocked Unblocked Home Stapler 1 Stapler Home 1 Unblocked Blocked Empty 51 1 Needle Staple Empty 1 Unblocked Blocked Self Priming S1 Staple Self priming 1 Unblocked Blocked S2 FN Elevate Tray Elevator Tray Upper Limit Switch ON OFF S3 FN Raised Lowered Elevator Tray Lower Limit Switch PC10 FN Home Shift Shift Home Position Sensor Blocked Unblocked PC11 FN Shift Speed Shift Motor Pulse Sensor Unblocked Blocked 3 84 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 F Sensors 4 FS 601 PK 501 TECH REP MODE Operation Characteris Symbol Panel Display Part Signal Name tics Panel Display 1 0 Center Entrance Entrance Sensor Paper Paper not Staple present present PI2 FN Paddle Home Paddle Home Position Sensor HP isher PI3 FN Bundle Roller Swing Guide Home Position Sensor HP Home PI4 FN Align Home Front Front Aligning Plate Home Position HP Sensor PI5 FN Align Home Back Rear Aligning Plate Home Position HP Sensor PI6 FN Alignment Tray Finisher Tray Sensor Paper Paper not present present PI7 FN Exit Belt Home Exit Belt Home Position Sensor HP PI10 FN Crease Po
423. lues of printing method and number of copy sets for the printer Setting Procedure Printing Method The default setting is Simplex Simplex Duplex Binding Method Displayed when Duplex is selected The default setting is left edge binding left edge binding top edge binding No of Sets The default setting is 1 1 1 to 999 D 7 2 lt o E o 0 5 Utility Mode 4 Orientation bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Functions To set the default orientation of the image used for the printer Use To change the default value of the orientation of the image used for the printer Setting Procedure The default setting is Portrait Portrait Landscape A A 5 Lines per page Functions To set the number of lines per page for printing of text using the printer Use To change the number of lines printed per page by the printer Setting Procedure Default setting depend on the marketing area setting Metric Area 64 lines Inch Area 60 lines 5 to 128 lines B Font 1 Typeface Functions To set the default font type used in the printer Use To change the default value of the font used in the printer Setting Procedure Default setting depend on the marketing area setting Displayed are only
424. m the Finisher set the adjustment value of Center Stapling Position and Folding Position in the service mode to 0mm on the main unit 1 Set SW1 on the Finisher Control Board as shown on the Left figure 458318351200 2 Press PSW1 or PSW2 on the Fin direction gt direction isher Control Board for the required times to adjust the stapling position H h One pressing of the switch moves the stapling position by approx 0 14 mm Press PSW1 to move the stapling position in the direction Press PSW2 to move the stapling position in the direction Press PSW1 and PSW2 simulta neously to clear the present set adjust 415062000 ment value o E E E 7 5 3 After setting the adjustment value of the stapling position set all bits of SW1 on the Fin isher Control Board to OFF 4 Perform the Booklet Creation on the main unit and confirm that the stapling position has been correctly adjusted If not redo the adjustment 3 12 FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Board switch 4 2 PWB B PK Punch Control Board 13 1 J1007 wo d 51001 5 1 2 Hjswi002 3 7U 8W1003 gt OLED1001 a OLED1002 8 OLED1003 Sa J1003 J1004 1 5 9 1 45831s3
425. me Track E K C 3 12 1 Volume Track Mode E K C Functions To select whether to enable or disable the Volume Track function Use e To use the Volume Track function Setting Procedure The default setting is No Yes No If the option is changed from Yes to No the Volume Track data is initialized Scanning from PC Functions To select whether to enable or disable Scanning from PC for Volume Track Scanning from PC To scan from the TWAIN driver of a PC on the network Use To disable Scanning from PC during Volume Track Setting Procedure The default setting is Permit Permit Prohibit 3 12 2 Volume Track Setting E K C Functions To set the Volume Track operations for each account Use To change the settings of each account Setting Procedure Volume Number Select the account 001 to 998 for which the settings are to be changed Accessit Set the access 00000001 to 99999998 for authentication for entering each account Allowances Set the output of each of color black and scan Upper Limit Copy Print Set the upper limit of printed pages to be produced in total or individually color and black 3 12 3 Volume Track Data E K C Functions To browse clear or otherwise operate the counter data of each account Counters are the total copy and printer counter The counter counts are classified into the paper size print type etc
426. me after M7 FN has been energized to start raising COBAO the Elevator Tray The Elevator Tray Upper Limit Switch S2 FN or Elevator Tray Lower Limit Switch S3 FN is actuated after M7 FN has been energized B Action Relevant electrical parts Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor PWB D FN Control Board PWB A FN Elevator Tray Upper Limit Switch S2 FN Elevator Tray Lower Limit Switch S3 FN Elevator Motor M7 FN WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical compo nents Check the motor and sensor connectors 1 for proper connection and correct as necessary Check the connector of motor for proper 2 drive coupling and correct as neces sary 3 PWB D FN I O sensor check PWB A FN PJ21A FN 2 4 1 7 4 S2 FN operation check PWB A FN PJ18A FN 4 F 9 5 S3 FN operation check PWB A FN PJ16A FN 4 E 9 6 M7 FN operation check PWB A FN PJ5A FN 1 2 D 2 7 PWB A FN replacement 5 E 5 5 gt p S m m KONICA MINOLTA SERVICE MANUAL FIELD SERVICE FS 601 2004 09 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC Ver 2 0 After publication of this service manual the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance Therefore the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine
427. minated NO Change Image Transfer Roller through the checks of steps up to 7 Unit 8 Change Image Transfer Belt Unit Change Fusing Unit 4 95 I C 5 5 gt Image quality problem bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 3 36 Printer 4 Color poor fusing performance offset A Typical Faulty Images Poor fusing performance Offset CF 403615405900 4036fs4060c0 B Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action 1 Paper type does not match the set YES the setting of the paper ting on the paper type setting dial type setting dial Machine Adjust Changing fusing temperature elimi YES Readjust Fuser Temp Fuser Temp the problem of poor fusing Tech Rep performance and offset Mode The problem has been eliminated NO Change Fusing Unit through the checks of steps up to 2 E 5 3 HE z 4 96 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Image quality problem 4 3 37 Printer 4 Color brush effect blurred image A Typical Faulty Images Brush effect Blurred image ABCDE ABCDE C F ABCDE ABCDE 403615406100 4036154031 0 B Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action Paper Paper is damp YES Change paper to one just unwrapped from its package Install Pape
428. move the Lever 5 2 9 g Il Maintenance Other 458316251800 458316251900 458316252000 1 3 12 Saddle Gear Phase Adjustment 2 _ E 458316254500 1 458316251500 2 10 FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 o 5 Turn the Folding Jam Release Dial 6 to move the Paper Pressure 7 inside Remove the C clip 8 and remove the Timing Belt 9 Unplug two connectors 10 Remove the 1 1 2 6 Remove three screws 12 and pull out and remove the Saddle 13 Whenever the Gear in front of the Sad dle or the Folding Roller has been replaced or removed for some reason make gear phase adjustment following the procedures given below Remove the Saddle 2 9 Remove five screws 1 and remove the Saddle Gear Cover 2 Set the Folding Roller 3 and Saddle Cam 4 within the Saddle as shown in the figure With the Folding Roller and the Sad dle Cam positioned as shown in the Left figure set the gears as shown in the figure in the following way FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 458318251600 1 3 13 Finisher Tray 45831025230 Other NOTE The mark on the Saddle Cam Drive Gear 5 either of the two marks comes face to face with the mark on the Middle Gear 6 the mark o
429. ms to the operating environment of the main unit 2 Mixed original feed 2 1 Mixed original feed chart For Metric E Original 297 mm 257 mm 210mm 182 mm 148 mm Mixed Original Size A3 A4 B4 B5 A4R A5 B5R A5R A3 OK OK 297 mm A4 OK OK B4 OK OK OK OK 257 mm B5 OK OK OK OK A4R OK OK OK OK OK OK 210 mm A5 NG NG OK OK OK OK 182 mm B5R NG NG OK OK OK OK OK 148 mm A5R NG NG NG NG NG NG OK OK For Inch Max Original 11 8 1 2 5 1 2 Size Mixed Original Size 11x17 8 1 2 x 1118 1 2 14 8 1 2 x 11R 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 5 1 2 x 8 1 2R 14 11x17 OK OK 8 1 2 x 11 OK OK 8 1 2 x 14 OK OK OK OK OK 8 1 2 8 1 2x 11R OK OK OK OK OK 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 NG NG OK OK OK 5 1 2 5 1 2 x 8 1 2R NG NG NG NG NG OK OK Mixed Original Feed available Tilted with in 1 5 or less NG NO Mixed Original Feed Can not Set Original DF 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Mixed original feed 2 2 Paper feed prohibited originals e f fed trouble occurrence will be highly possible Type of Original Possible Trouble Take up failure damaged sheet defective drive Sheets slapled or clipped together mechanism due to jammed staples or clips Sheets glued together Take up failure damaged sheet Sheets of 211g m 56 1 4 Ib or more Take up failure 2
430. n Relevant Electrical Parts Fusing Cooling Fan Motor 1 M9 DC Power Supply PU1 WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control Signal Electrical Component 1 Check the connector of motor for proper connec u u tion and correct as necessary 2 Check the fan for possible overload and correct as necessary M9 operation check PU1 PJ17PU1 5 LOCK 2 K Change PU 1 E 5 5 gt 4 30 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Malfunction code 2 6 11 C0048 Fusing Cooling Fan Motor 2 3 s failure to turn Relevant Electrical Parts Fusing Cooling Fan Motor 2 M15 Control Board PWB MC Fusing Cooling Fan Motor 3 M16 WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control Signal Electrical Component Step Action 1 Check the connector of motor for proper connec tion and correct as necessary Check the fan for possible overload and correct 2 as necessary n M15 M16 operation check M15 PWB MC PJ3MC 6A LOCK PWB MC PJ3MC 4A REM 2 1 M15 M16 2 J M16 PWB MC PJ3MC 9A LOCK PWB MC PJ3MC 7A REM 4 Change PWB MC 2 6 12 C004C Ozone Ventilation Fan Motor s failure to turn Relevant Electrical Parts Ozone Ventilation Fan Motor M18 Control Board PWB MC WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control Signal Electrical Component 1
431. n FD colored lines in FD and colored bands in FD A Typical Faulty Images White lines in FD White bands in FD Color lines in FD Color bands in FD E 5 3 HE z 4036154021 0 4036402260 4036164023 0 4036154024 0 B Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action 1 Original Original is damaged or dirty YES Change original 2 Original Cover Original Pad is dirty YES Clean 3 Original Glass Original Glass is dirty YES Wipe the surface clean with a soft cloth 4 Shading sheet Shading sheet is dirty YES Wipe the surface clean with a soft cloth Mirror lens Exposure Mirror is dirty YES Clean 5 Lamp and reflectors Lens is dirty YES Clean Exposure Lamp is dirty YES Clean Reflectors are dirty YES Clean Machine Adjust The adjustment value for Left NO Readjust Scanner Area Image falls within the specified 6 Left Image Tech range Rep Mode 7 Scanner The white lines bands or colored YES Change Scanner Assy lines bands are blurry Change CCD Unit 4 56 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 3 2 Image quality problem IR System white lines in CD white bands in CD colored lines in CD and colored bands in CD A Typical Faulty Images White lines in CD White bands in CD Color lines in CD Color bands in CD
432. n revised show to the left of the revised section A number within represents the number of times the revision has been made To indicate clearly a section revised show in the lower outside section of the correspond ing page A number within 4 represents the number of times the revision has been made NOTE Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted When a page revised in Ver 2 0 has been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 3 0 only are shown with those for Ver 2 0 deleted When page revised in Ver 2 0 has not been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 2 0 are left as they are 2004 09 20 N Adding the descriptions and correcting errors in writing 2004 03 1 0 Issue of the first edition Date Service manual Ver Revision mark Descriptions of revision DF 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 CONTENTS General 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 Paper type errare ene te HE nna eR RR re E RP 1 1 1 4 Machine 1 2 1 5 Operating environment sess rennen 1 2 2 Mixed original feed rennen retten rre re res 1 2 2 1 Mixed original feed Chart cece eee eee nennen 1 2 2 2 Paper feed prohibited originals seeseeeenenenenne 1 3 2 3 Paper feed not guaranteed originals
433. n the semispherical part with narrow gear face width 5 With the Saddle Cam Drive Gear 5 and the Middle Gear 6 positioned as above the mark on the Middle Gear 6 the mark on the other semi spherical part meets face to face with the rib of the Folding Roller Drive Gear 7 1 Remove the Finisher Tray Upper Cover me 2 4 Remove the Side Guide meo 2 5 Remove two screws 1 and unplug six connectors 2 4 Pull out the Finisher Stopper Base 3 and disengage the front claw 5 and the rear claw 6 of the Finisher Stopper 4 5 Remove the Motor Harness 8 from two Harness Saddles 7 6 Unplug three connectors 9 2 11 2 o c 2 Other 458316254700 458316252500 1 3 14 Paddle Section 458316254800 458316255000 2 12 FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 7 Remove the C clip 10 and remove the spacer 11 and remove the Tim ing Belt 13 from the Gear 12 8 Unplug the connector 14 and remove the Harness 16 from the Wire Saddle 15 9 Remove two screws 17 and remove the Finisher Tray 18 by slid ing it to the far side and lifting it 1 Remove the Finisher Tray we 2 11 2 Place the Finisher Tray 1 as shown in the figure NOTE Becareful not to damage the Align ing Plate 2 3 Remove the Timing Belt 3 and remove
434. n the IU Motor YES Reinstall or change the IU Motor 4 Image Transfer Image Transfer Belt Unit drive gear YES Correct Belt Unit has chipped off Change Image Transfer Belt Unit 5 Image Transfer Image Transfer Roller is damaged YES Change Image Transfer Roller Roller Unit Unit 6 The problem has been eliminated NO Change Imaging Unit through the checks of steps up to 5 4 84 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Image quality problem 4 3 27 Printer 4 Color white lines in FD white bands in FD colored lines in FD and colored bands in FD A Typical Faulty Images White lines in FD White bands in FD Colored lines in FD Colored bands in FD 40365402100 40361402200 403615402300 40361402400 B Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action Image Check A white line or colored line in FD YES Clean the Comb Electrode by 1 moving the Comb Electrode Cleaning Lever Image Transfer Fingerprints oil or other foreign YES Clean with specified solvent 2 Belt Unit matter is evident on the Image See Maintenance Transfer Belt Image Transfer Belt is dirty or YES Clean dirty belt with a soft cloth 3 scratched Change Image Transfer Belt Unit if belt is damaged Cleaning Blade is not effective in YES Clean Cleaning Blade 4 removing toner completely change Image Transfer Belt Unit Image Trans
435. navoidably necessary to service the machine with its power turned ON use utmost care not to be caught in the Scanner Cables or gears of the Exposure Unit 3 Special care should be used when handling the Fusing Unit which can be extremely hot 4 The Developing Unit has a strong magnetic field Keep watches and measuring instru ments away from it 5 Take care not to damage the PC Drum with a tool or similar device 6 Do not touch IC pins with bare hands D 7 lt 2 check 21 Check procedure To allow sensors to be checked for operation easily and safely data applied to the IC on the board can be checked on the panel with the main unit in the standby state including a misfeed malfunction and closure failure condition Procedure 1 Setthe mode to the Tech Rep Mode 2 Touch the State Confirm Check key 3 Touch the I O Check key 3 1 o E E E o a 5 check 2 2 2 21 check list check screen FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 This is only typical screen which may be different from what are shown on each individ ual main unit 2 2 2 1 0 Check Sensors 4 Entrance 0 Paddle Home 0 Bundle ol Roller Home Align Home ol 0 Front Align Home Alignment Tray 0 Exit Belt Home 0 Crease Position Crease Tray Crease Home 0 Crease ol Roller Home HEHHE Cente
436. nd Highlight shown on the Gradation Adjust screen repre sent how much corrections are made to produce an ideal image output Conv Value shows the difference from the ideal image density The closer the Conv Value to 0 the more ideal the image Adjustment 0 100 Specification Highlight 0 60 Adjustment 1 Touch Gradation Adjust Procedure 2 Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern 3 Place the test pattern produced on the Original Glass 4 Place ten blank sheets of A3 paper on the test pattern and lower the Original Cover 5 Press the Start key The machine will then start scanning the test pattern 6 Touch OK and repeat steps from 2 through 6 twice a total of three times 7 Touch Gradation Adjust to display the Adj Values and Conv Values of each color C M Y and Bk for Max and Highlight 8 Use the following procedures to check the Conv Value Max 0 100 and Highlight 0 60 It completes the adjustment procedure If neither Max nor Highlight falls outside the ranges specified above Perform steps from 2 to 6 e f a fault is detected 0 is displayed for all values In this case turn OFF and ON the Power Switch and perform Gradation Adjust once again If either Max or Highlight still remains outside the specified ranges perform PRT Max Density or PRT Highlight If a total of four sequences of Gradation Adjust do not bring the values into the spec ified range chec
437. nd plug in the power cord 2 lnitialize the machine 3 Memory Clear the machine Do not perform Memory Clear casually as it clears the types of data mentioned above If Memory Clear has been performed be sure to make settings for the func tions that have been cleared once again S 7 2 4 Data Conditions Cleared by Reset Switches Pins 3 Clearing Method Front Door Trouble Initialize Memory E Data Cleared Open Close Reset Switch Clear Misfeed display O Fusing Malfunction but zm io o display C3FFX Others Erratic operation display O O O Utility Mode _ _ _ o Store User s Choice 1 2 Admin Code Tech Rep Mode System Input Security Mode di 7 _ Counter Setting Touch Panel Correction Mode Cleared Not cleared 3 108 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Date Time input mode 8 Date Time input mode This mode is used to set time of day and date 8 1 Date Time input mode screen Factory Setting Mode END _______________________ Date Time Input Year Month Date Hour Min Present Date Time 1 1 o o Year Month Date Hour Min 0 Sec 403615380261 8 2 Date Time input mode setting procedure Procedure 1 Press the following keys in this order Stop gt 1 1 4 4 Clear 2 Enter the 8 digit servicecode and to
438. nd the hook end of the cable 34 UN Ar around pulley D 35 and pulley E 36 403616256900 5 19 Fit the hook end of the cable 37 to the spring 38 and then hook the 1 spring to the catch A the frame B gt 20 Measure the Spring length and check if its length is within the range of 63 0 mm 1 mm When out of the given range n case of 64 1 mm or more es 37 38 Retry to put the spring on the catch B n case of 61 9 mm or less S Retry to put the spring on the catch C 403616257000 21 Remove the Cable Holding Jigs from the front and rear pulleys 22 Adjust the focus positioning of the Scanner and Mirrors Unit 3 104 23 Adjust the position of the Scanner and 2 Mirrors Carriage 3 104 NOTE Whenever the Scanner Drive Cables have been removed be sure to carry out the FD Mag adjustment procedure te 3 46 2 72 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 3 32 PWB Box 4036 s2061c1 Other Remove the Rear Right Cover Rear Left Cover Rear Cover and Upper Rear Cover 2 40 Remove 12 Screws 1 and remove the Protective Shield 2 Remove four Screws 3 and remove the Harness Protective Cover 4 2 Remove the Screw 5 and remove the Wire Saddle 6 Remove the Connector 7 on the MFP Control B
439. ne sseseeeeeeenen 3 5 3 2 Adjustment of the folding position ssesssseeeeeeenenen 3 6 3 2 1 DF 601 equipped 3 6 3 2 2 DF 601 unequipped 3 3 Adjustment of height and 4 Bo td SWitch econtra 4 1 PWB AFN Finisher Control Board eeeeeeenennnen 4 1 1 Adjustment of the folding 4 1 2 Adjustment of the center stapling position 4 2 PWB B PK Punch Control Board 4 2 1 Adjustment of the sensor output 4 2 2 Registration of the number of punch 4 2 3 Procedure after replacing the EEP ROM IC1002 4 2 4 Punch center position adjustment essseeenenn FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 IV Troubleshooting 1 Jam Display sess 4 1 1 1 Initial check items 4 1 1 2 display retener te n eI erts 4 1 1 2 1 Misfeed display resetting 4 1 1 3 ironia 4 2 1 4 SOOM oerte hne t nee aee eerte re i dan 4 3 1 4 1 Transpo
440. nee nennen 4 6 Automatic adjustment of the sensor IV Troubleshooting 1 Jam Display rcr ere n er nen nr rere nerd 4 1 1 1 Jlnitial check items frente meme res 4 1 1 2 Misfeed display reete reiten ee e re nre rr nn aaa 4 1 1 2 1 Misfeed display resetting 4 1 1 3 Sensor layout ride eo pec ee rt c e rre a rg 4 2 TA SOOM seii nri e trop Eee ERO ee n adress 4 2 141 Paper Take Up section misfeed esseeeeenenen 4 2 1 4 2 Transport section 4 3 1 4 8 Paper Exit Turnover section misfeed seen 4 4 1 4 4 Transport Tray section 4 5 2 Set errot detection tet een en d ec 4 6 DF 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Product specifications General 1 Product specifications 1 4 Type Name Duplexing Document Feeder Paper Take Up Paper Take Up from top of stack Transport Endless Belt Transport Mode Type Turnover Loop Turnover Mode Paper Exit U turn Turnover Switchback U Turn Turnover P Mode only in 1 Sided Mode Installation Screw cramp to the main unit Document Alignment Center Document Loading Face up 1 2 Funct
441. nete nter terra d erae 3 108 7 2 2 Memory Clear Procedure ssesssssseseeenneennenenneeen nennen 3 108 7 2 3 If the machine exhibits an erratic display or 3 108 7 2 4 Data Conditions Cleared by Reset Switches Pins 3 108 8 Date Time input Mode s is hinoi iiien aintean ridiani iannis agrena 3 109 8 1 Date Time input mode screen ssssseeeeeenneneeeneeneeennenne 3 109 8 2 Date Time input mode setting 3 109 IV Troubleshooting 1 Jam Display nine einem pe 4 1 1 1 Display carretera tnr en nre rene 4 1 1 1 1 Misfeed Display Resetting 4 1 1 2 Sensor ecrit eret reete a aieo one Ete rap aro rao 4 2 1 2 1 System Mounted with AD 501 and 401 4 2 1 2 2 System Mounted with AD 501 and 201 4 3 153 men eem 4 4 1 3 1 Initial Check Items eere rtt nnne inn nnn rice 4 4 1 3 2 1st Drawer take up Fusing Misfeed 4 5 1 3 8 2nd Drawer take up Vertical Transport Manual Bypass take up 4 6 1 3 4 LCT Take up and Vertical Transport M
442. nisher Control Board PWB A FN WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical compo nents 1 Check the sensor connectors for proper _ _ connection and correct as necessary PI15 FN I O sensor check PWB A FN CN15 FN 12 G 8 3 PWB A FN replacement 6 2 Finisher Control Board Relevant electrical parts Exit Tray Home Position Sensor PI9 FN Finisher Control Board PWB A FN Shift Motor Clock Sensor PI17 FN Shift Motor M6 FN WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical compo nents 5 Check the motor and sensor connectors E 1 for proper connection and correct as 2 necessary 3 Check the connector of motor for proper 2 drive coupling and correct as neces sary 3 PI9 FN I O sensor check PWB A FN CN5 FN 12 E 8 PI17 FN I O sensor check PWB A FN CN15 FN 6 G 8 M6 FN operation check when the Power 5 Switch is turned OFF and ON FIXES ENGNG net 6 PWB A FN replacement 6 4 22 FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 2 3 13 COBF1 Backup RAM malfunction A Detection timing Trouble code Malfunction code Description writing sequences Data written in the Backup Memory differs from what is recorded in it and writing COBF1 operation is not correctly performed even with two retry sequences a total of three B Action Relevant electrical parts Finisher Control Board PWB A FN WIRING DIAGRAM
443. not detect paper even after the lapse of approx 1 5 sec after the Entrance Sensor has received the paper exit Transport section Signal from the main unit misfeed detection Paper is not removed from the Entrance Sensor PI1 FN even after the lapse of approx 2 sec after the Entrance Sensor PI1 FN has detected paper edge B Action Relevant electrical parts Entrance Sensor PI1 FN Finisher Control Board PWB A FN WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical compo nents 1 Initial check items 2 PI1 FN I O sensor check PWB A FN CN16 FN 11 G 3 PWB A FN replacement 6 1 4 2 Horizontal Transport section misfeed A Detection timing Type Description horizontal trans The Turnover Empty Sensor PC6 HO is not unblocked even after the lapse of a port section mis given period of time after the leading edge of the paper has blocked the Turnover feed detection Empty Sensor PC6 HO B Action Relevant electrical parts 8 Turnover Empty Sensor PC6 HO Finisher Control Board PWB A FN 5 2 5 WIRING DIAGRAM E 7 2 Step Action Location z Control signal Electrical compo nents 1 Initial check items 2 PC6 HO sensor check PWB A FN CN21 FN 5 H 2 3 PWB A FN replacement 6 Jam Display FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 1 4 3 Folding position section misfeed
444. ns To set the type of the controller Peripheral Mode appears when Controller 2 or Others is selected e Server Set RD or Server Set KRDS appears when Controller 3 is selected Use When setting up the controller Setting Procedure Peripheral Setting Select the controller to be used Without Controller No external controllers are used Controller 1 An external controller is used Controller 2 An external controller is used Controller 3 The standard controller is used Others A controller other than above is used t the Setup Instructions for the Controller Peripheral Mode Select the operating mode of the Scanner Mode 1 Fiery Mode 2 Not use Mode 3 Not use KRDS RD Mode Use for the Remote Diagnosis System setting when the standard controller is used Settings are changed for KRDS or RD according to the Remote Diagnosis Sys tem selected in the Security mode 3 70 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 TECH REP MODE 4 8 8 Server set KRDS Server set RD A Server for RX These are the settings for the RX server used in the Remote Diagnosis System for the standard controller 1 server Functions To set the POPS server address used for the Remote Diagnosis System for the standard controller Use To set the address of the Server Setting Procedure IP Address Version 4 format 0 to 255 0 to
445. nsor PC19 FN is not unblocked even after the lapse of a alus iven period of time after it has been blocked tion JS 601 Sven p B Action Relevant electrical parts Job Tray Exit Sensor PC19 FN Control Board PWB A FN WIRING DIAGRAM fo Y Step Action Location Control signal Electrical compo nents 2 2 1 Initial check items PC19 FN I O sensor check PWB A FN PJ14A FN 6 B 9 PWB A replacement 5 4 4 FS 501 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Jam Display 1 4 4 Elevator Tray Exit section misfeed A Detection timing Type Description Elevator Tray Exit section misfeed detection The Storage Sensor PC3 FN is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after it has been blocked B Action Relevant electrical parts Storage Sensor PC3 FN Control Board PWB A FN Exit Motor M3 FN WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical compo nents 1 Initial check items 2 I O sensor check PWB A FN PJ20A FN 3 H 7 3 operation check A 3 4 PWB A FN replacement E E 5 1 4 5 Paper Stack Exit section misfeed A Detection timing Type Description Paper Stack Exit The Finisher Tray Paper Sensor PC5 FN remains activated when a copy stack section misfeed which has been stapled together is fed out
446. nsor PC20 FN 2 Job Tray Exit Sensor PC19 FN 4 3rd Entrance Switching Solenoid SL 4 5 o 2 gt 5 14 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 1 7 171 FS 601 Option Main unit Parts layout drawing 4036155516 0 A O N a ON 10 11 12 13 Transport Motor M1 FN Entrance Sensor Entrance Motor M9 FN Saddle Clutch CL1 FN Folding Roller Home Position Sensor PI12 FN Folding Home Position Sensor Folding Position Sensor PI10 FN Joint Open Switch MS2 FN Upper Cover Open Sensor PI23 FN Front Door Open Sensor PI22 FN Front Door Open Switch MS1 FN Front Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor PI4 FN Finisher Control Board PWB A FN 30 31 32 Saddle Tray Sensor PI13 FN Shift Motor M6 FN Shift Motor Clock Sensor PI17 FN Stack Full Sensor PI24 FN Slide Motor M8 FN Shift Lower Limit Sensor PI16 FN Exit Motor M3 FN Rear Aligning Motor M5 FN Exit Belt Home Position Sensor PI7 FN ROM IC6 FN Rear Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor PI5 FN Staple Safety Switch Rear MS3 FN Paddle Home Position Sensor PI2 FN 5 15 26 5 o 2 gt 5 o 2 gt 14 Front Aligning Motor 33 15 Finisher Tray Sensor PI6 FN 34 16 Staple Safety Switch Front MS4 FN 35 17 Exit Tray Sensor
447. nt Setting D Removal of PWBs NOTES When removing a circuit board or other electrical component refer to Handling of PWBs and follow the corresponding removal procedures Theremoval procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and Screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board When it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on the board be sure to ground your body Other FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 1 2 Disassembly Assembly list Other parts No Section Part name Ref page 1 Exit Tray u 2 3 2 Front Cover 2 3 3 Rear Cover s 2 3 Exterior Parts Upper Door on 5 Finisher Tray Upper Cover we 2 4 6 Upper Cover ws 2 5 7 Side Guide mS 2 5 8 Middle Transport Unit ts 2 6 9 Stapler ts 2 6 10 Saddle Section cS 2 9 9 11 Finisher Tray 2 11 S 12 Paddle Section we 2 12 8 13 Unit Exit Roller Upper 2 13 T 14 Paddle ts 2 13 15 Exit Roller Lower and Paper Exit Belt we 2 14 16 Stapler Folding Drive Unit ts 2 16 17 Transport Roller we 2 17 18 Middle Transport Roller ts 2 18 19 Punch Unit ts 2 19 20 Finisher Control Board ts 2 20 21 Punch Control Board ts 2 20 22 Transport Motor Unit e 2 21 23 Paris Middle Transport Motor we 2 21 24 Punch Motor cS 2 21 25 Side Registration Motor w
448. nt on the Transfer See Maintenance Belt The problem has been eliminated NO Change Image Transfer Roller through the checks of steps up to 5 Unit Change Image Transfer Belt 6 Unit Change Fusing Unit Change High Voltage Unit 1 Image Transfer Neutralizing 4 98 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Image quality problem 4 3 39 Printer 4 Color 204 mm pitch uneven image A Typical Faulty Images 204 mm pitch uneven image 204 mm B Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action 1 Fusing Unit The Fusing Belt is scratchy YES Change Fusing Unit I v 5 5 gt 4 99 Image quality problem bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 3 40 Printer 4 Color 94 mm pitch uneven image A Typical Faulty Images mm E mm 4036154057 0 40361405500 403615405600 B Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action 1 Imaging Unit The surface of the PC Drum is YES Change Imaging Unit scratched 2 Image Transfer The Image Transfer Belt Unit NO Correct Belt Unit drive gear is intact Change Image Transfer Belt Unit 3 Image Transfer Image Transfer Roller is dam YES Change Image Transfer Roller Roller Unit aged Unit E 5 3 HE z 4 100 bizhub C350 Field Service V
449. ntrol level when an abnormal image density occurs as a result of a change in the amount of charge of toner and carrier due to an environmental change Use Use when T C changes due to changes in environmental conditions of the user site Adjustment 0 3 to 3 Range The central value of 0 corresponds to 7 of T C in 1 0 increments Adjustment To increase T C increase the setting value Instructions To decrease T C decrease the setting value Adjustment 1 Call the Tech Rep Mode to the screen Procedure 2 Touch these keys in this order Image Adjust ATDC Level Setting 3 Select the color to be adjusted 4 Enter the new setting from the 10 Key Pad 5 Touch END to validate the adjustment value 6 Check the copy image for any image problem 4 6 5 AE Adjust Functions To adjust subtle shades of the highlight portion according to the user s need by vary ing the background level in a direction of less foggy or foggier setting in the Auto Exposure mode Use When a fog occurs or no image is produced in the background in the Auto Exposure mode Adjustment Range 2 0 to 4 Adjustment To make the background level foggier change the setting value to 3 or 4 Instructions make the background level less foggy change the setting value to O or 1 Adjustment 1 Call the Tech Rep Mode to the screen Procedure 2 Touch these keys in this order Image Adjust AE Adjust 3 Enter the new s
450. nuous 0 5 sec period at this time C0208 PC Drum Charge Corona malfunc tion The SCD signal is detected for a continuous 0 5 sec period while the PC Drum Charge Corona is being energized C0400 Exposure Lamp s failure to turn ON The output from the CCD Sensor is a predetermined value or less during CCD Sensor gain adjustment C0410 Exposure Lamp turning ON at abnormal timing The average output value of the CCD Sensor with the Scanner at its standby position is a predetermined value or more at the end of a scan job C0500 Heating Roller warm up failure The temperature of the Heating Roller does not reach 100 C within 50 sec after the Heating Roller Heater Lamp has been turned ON The temperature of the Heating Roller does not reach 100 C and that of the Fusing Pressure Roller does not reach 195 C within 200 sec after the Heating Roller Heater Lamp has been turned ON The voltage of the Heating Roller Thermistor does not increase by five steps within 20 sec after the Heating Roller Heater Lamp has been turned ON No zero cross signal is detected even with the lapse of 1 sec or more after the Heating Roller Heater Lamp has been turned ON C0501 Fusing Pressure Roller warm up failure The voltage of the Fusing Pressure Roller Thermistor does not increase by five steps within 20 sec after the predrive of the Fusing Roller has been started during a warm up cycle C0510 Heat
451. nvelop reached earlier Film 0311 15 86 Label Paper mm Thick Paper FD457 2 139 7 DIEM mm mm 1 1 Product specifications FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 1 3 2 Sort A f of Sheets Paper Type Paper Size Weight Tray Capacity Exit Tray to be Stapled A4R 8 B4 B5R B5 to 1 2x11R 8 1 2x14 8 1 2 x 11R 60 to 90 A or smaller or larger Plain Paper 8 1 2 x 11 g m Sheets 1000 500 Elevator Tray to 16 to 24 Ib Height 150 mm 75 mm 11x17 Controlled by whichever reached earlier 1 3 3 Sort staple 3 of Sheets Paper Type Paper Size Weight Tray Capacity Exit Tray to be Stapled Normal 8 4 Normal 1 Mode 1 2x11R 8 1 2x14 60 to 90 T or smaller or larger B5R B5 to g m Sheets 1000 500 i Height 150 mm 75 mm A4R 8 4 8 Plain Paper pre s 16 to 24 Ib No of 1x 1 2x14 Sets 30 30 11 orlarger to Cover Mode Elevator Tray smaller 11x17 60 to 209 g m Controlled by whichever 21050 21025 16 to 55 1 2 reached earlier Ib The number of Sheets to be Stapled is limited for high density images Color Wise 3 to 20 sheets 1 3 4 Saddle staple A No of Sheets Paper Type Paper Size Weight Tray Capacity Exit Tray to be Stapled 10 sets A4R B4 8 12 x 11R 601090 rap dicet 210 10 sheets Plain Paper
452. o Section Part name Ref page 1 Unit Duplex Unit iS 2 4 2 3 Disassembly Assembly procedure 2 3 1 Duplex Unit 1 Remove the wiring cover C ts For details of how to remove the wir ing cover see the Maintenance of mS the main unit service manual 3 204 2 Unplug two connectors 1 453516350300 3 Open the Duplex Unit Door 2 4 Remove two screws 3 and remove the Duplex Unit 4 o 5 c 2 453516350200 2 4 AD 501 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 How to use the adjustment section Adjustment Setting 1 How to use the adjustment section Adjustment Setting contains detailed information on the adjustment items and proce dures for this machine e Throughout this Adjustment Setting the default settings are indicated by boldface A Advance Checks Before attempting to solve the customer problem the following advance checks must be made Check to see if 1 The power supply voltage meets the specifications 2 The power supply is properly grounded The machine shares the power supply with any other machine that draws large current intermittently e g elevator and air conditioner that generate electric noise The installation site is environmentally appropriate high temperature high humidity direct sunlight ventilation etc levelness of the installation site The original has a problem that may cause a defective image
453. o Server Use To set the logon name for the FTP Server Setting Procedure Up to 32 characters alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used 3 PIN Functions To set the password used to log on to the FTP Server to Scan to Server Use To set the logon password for the FTP Server e Up to 64 characters alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used 4 Directory fe Functions e To the directory of the file server for transfer of files through Scan to Server Use To set the directory of the file server 5 Setting Procedure Up to 128 characters alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used v B Server 2 E Same settings as those of Server 1 C Server 3 Same settings as those of Server 1 D Server 4 Same settings as those of Server 1 E Server 5 Same settings as those of Server 1 3 16 4 Twain A Operation Lock Time for TWAIN Functions Toset the period of time before the machine lock which has been invoked to cap ture image to PC through TWAIN scan is forcedly unlocked when no instructions are given by PC Use To change the period of time during which the machine has been connected from the image capturing application from the PC and scan locked and is then unlocked from this state Setting Procedure e The default setting is 60 sec 60 sec 30 to 300 3 26 bizhub C
454. o overcurrent under high humidity conditions Setting The default setting is High Procedure High Std 4 16 3 Transfer Belt Auto Cleaning Functions To carry out a 1 min cleaning sequence for every 1 000 printed pages FD 216 mm or less after the power has been turned ON Use To select Disable for Transfer Belt Auto Cleaning if the wait time of 1 min cleaning sequence is to be eliminated Setting The default setting is Enable Procedure Enable Disable 4 16 4 AIDC Table Correction Functions To set the upper limit value of Vb during the execution of the image stabilization sequence thereby preventing part of the Photo Conductor surface from being left uncleaned due to filming Use To select Disable for AIDC Table Correction if a higher density image is desired Setting The default setting is Enable Procedure Enable Disable Enable Sets the upper limit value for Vb Disable Does not set the upper limit value for Vb A 3 98 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Security 5 5 1 Security Mode Function Setting Procedure 5 1 1 Procedure 1 Show the Tech Rep mode menu screen 2 Press the following keys in this order Stop gt 9 3 Security Mode menu will appear Tech Rep Mode n Security Mode 7 Remote Diagnosis
455. o turn CO004D Toner Suction Fan Motor s failure to turn COO4E Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor s failure to turn COO4F Cooling Fan Motor 2 s failure to turn C0060 Fusing Drive Motor failure to turn C0061 Fusing Drive Motor turning at The Motor Lock signal remains LOW for a predeter abnormal timing mined continuous period of time while the Motor remains stationary C0094 2nd Image Transfer Roller pres The 2nd Image Transfer Pressure Position Sensor is sure retraction failure not activated retracted position within 2 sec after the 2nd Image Transfer Pressure Retraction Motor has started turning during a sequence of the 2nd Image Transfer Roller s retracting motion The 2nd Image Transfer Pressure Position Sensor is not deactivated pressed position within 2 sec after the 2nd Image Transfer Pressure Retraction Motor has started turning during a sequence of the 2nd Image Transfer Roller s pressing motion C0096 Image Transfer Belt pressure The 1st Image Transfer Retraction Position Sensor is retraction failure not activated retracted position within 5 sec after the 1st Image Transfer Pressure Retraction Motor has started turning during a sequence of the Transfer Belt s retracting motion The 1st Image Transfer Retraction Position Sensor is not deactivated pressed position within 1 sec after the 1st Image Transfer Pressure Retraction Motor has started turning during a seq
456. oard Remove the Screw 8 and remove the Earth cable 9 Remove all the Connectors on the Control Board See the procedure 2 of 2 48 Removing of Control Board 2 73 Other bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 8 Remove 11 Screws 10 and two Connectors 11 and remove the PWB Box 12 o c 12 4 3 33 Main Motor UW Remove the PWB Box 2 4 3 u 2 73 Remove the Connector 1 and three Screws 2 and remove the Main Motor 3 403616210000 4 3 34 Fusing Drive Motor Remove the PWB Box te 2 73 Remove the Screw 1 and remove the Fan Assy Protective Cover 2 403616210101 2 74 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Other 3 Remove two Shoulder screws 3 and two Connectors 4 and remove the Fan Assy 5 4 Remove four Screws 6 and Con nector 7 and remove the Fusing Drive Motor 8 6 151 o 4 3 35 Toner Supply Motor C Bk z 1 Remove the Panel Cover ws 2 41 2 Remove two Screws 1 and remove the Front Right Cover 2 3 Remove two Screws 3 and Connec tor 4 and remove the Toner Supply Motor C Bk 5 4 3 36 Toner Supply Motor Y M 1 Remove the Toner Hopper te 2 59 2 Remove the screw 1 and
457. of 2 26 alter natively 2 mm hexagonal wrench or the like can be preferably used into the hole and fix the Cam FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 28 29 27 45831025120 45831025130 458316251400 1 3 11 Saddle Section 458316254400 Other 16 Set the Timing Belt 27 to the Gear 28 and Gear 29 with the Gear and the Cam in the fixed condition 17 Install the Staple Position Confirm Gear 32 in such a way that the blue mark 30 of the Gear comes face to face with the hole 31 in the frame NOTE The position in which the blue mark meets face to face with the hole is the home position for stapling If the Staple Jam Release Gear is turned for some reason this home position will shift and the Staple Cartridge will not come off In this case the Staple Position Confirm Gear plays a role of resuming the stapling home position by referring to the blue mark Therefore the Gear should be set in place cor rectly 18 Remove the pin fixing the Gear and the Cam to release them 19 Set the spring 33 the spacer 34 the Staple Jam Release Gear 35 the Timing Belt 36 and the Middle Gear 1 37 and fix them with two E Rings 38 Remove the Front Cover 2 3 Remove the Rear Cover ws 2 3 Open the Jam Access Cover 1 remove two screws 2 and remove the Right Stay 3 4 Remove two screws 4 and re
458. of PWBs and follow the corresponding removal procedures The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board Where it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on the board be sure to ground your body 2 36 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Other 4 2 Disassembly Assembly list Other parts No Section Part name Ref Page 1 Original Glass 2 43 2 IR Upper Right Cover 2 42 3 Control Panel 2 43 4 IR Front Cover 2 43 5 IR Upper Front Cover 2 42 6 IR Left Cover 2 40 7 IR Upper Left Cover 2 42 8 IR Upper Rear Cover 2 42 9 IR Right Cover 2 39 10 Rear Left Cover 2 40 11 Panel Cover 2 41 12 Front Door 2 41 13 Exterior parts Front Left Cover 2 40 14 Front Right Cover 2 39 15 Rear Cover 2 41 16 Rear Right Cover 2 41 17 Exit Tray 2 40 18 Tray 1 2 44 19 Tray 2 2 45 20 Paper Setting Dial cover 2 41 21 Lower Rear Cover 2 41 22 Tray 2 Rear Cover 2 41 23 Tray 2 Rear Right Cover 2 40 24 Multi Bypass Right Cover 2 39 25 Multi Bypass Left Cover 2 39 26 Scanner Motor Drive Board 2 45 27 CCD Unit 2 46 28 Image Processing Board 2 47 29 Control Board 2 48 30 MFP Control Board 2 49 31 High Voltage Unit 1 2 51 32 High Voltage Unit 2 2 52 33 1 Paper Size Board 2 53
459. of dirt Replacing procedure Remove the Rear Right Cover 2 7 Remove the Tray3 Remove the Right Door 2 7 Remove four screws 2 and the Paper Take up Unit 3 5 Remove two screws 4 and remove the Paper Separation Roller Mount ing Bracket Assy 5 together with frame PC 401 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 434816251500 434815251800 1 1 4 Vertical Transport Roller 434816251900 Periodical check Remove two screws 6 and remove the Paper Take up Cover 7 Remove two C rings 8 two bush ings 9 and the Pick up Roller Assy 10 Remove the C ring 11 and remove the Pick up Roller 12 Cleaning procedure Open the Right Door Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol wipe the Vertical Transport Roller 1 clean of dirt 2 5 2 Other PC 401 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 2 Other 2 1 Disassembly Adjustment prohibited items A Paint locked Screws NOTE Paint locked screws show that the assembly or unit secured can only be adjusted or set at the factory and should not be adjusted set or removed in the field B Red Painted Screws NOTES When the screws are removed the red paint is coated on the points where read justment is required Once the red painted screw is removed or loosened you should make adjustment Accordingly check the adjustment items in operation manua
460. oice 7 The problem has been eliminated NO Imaging Unit 4 78 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 3 21 Printer Monocolor colored spots A Typical Faulty Images Image quality problem Colored spots 40361540520 B Troubleshooting Procedure through the checks of steps up to 3 Step Section Check Item Result Action 1 Imaging Unit Developing bias contact terminal NO Clean contact terminal and makes good connection check terminal position 2 The surface of the PC Drum is YES Change Imaging Unit scratched 3 Dirty on the outside YES Clean 4 The problem has been eliminated NO Change Imaging Unit 4 79 I v 5 5 gt E 5 3 HE z Image quality problem 4 3 22 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Printer Monocolor blurred image A Typical Faulty Images blurred image ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE B Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action Image Check Image is distorted stretched or YES Select Tech Rep Mode gt 1 shrunk Machine Adjust gt PRT Area Zoom for FD and run Zoom for FD 2 LED Assy LED retracting lever is locked in NO Slide out the IU and reinstall position 3 The surface of the lens array is YES Clean with cleaning jig dirty
461. oller has started moving from its home position The Swing Guide Home Position Sensor PI3 FN is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Booklet Roller has started moving from a position not the home position B Action Relevant electrical parts Paddle Home Position Sensor PI2 FN Finisher Control Board PWB A FN Swing Guide Home Position Sensor PI3 FN Paddle Motor M2 FN WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action 1 Location Control signal Electrical compo nents Check the motor and sensor connectors 1 for proper connection and correct as necessary Check the connector of motor for proper 2 drive coupling and correct as neces sary 3 PI2 FN I O sensor check PWB A FN CN9 FN 2 H 5 D PI3 FN I O sensor check PWB A FN CN9 FN 8 1 5 E 5 M2 FN operation check when the Power _ 9 1 Switch is turned OFF and ON 3 6 PWB A FN replacement 6 gt FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Trouble code 2 3 3 C0B25 Stapler Unit Slide Motor malfunctions A Detection timing Malfunction code Description The Slide Home Position Sensor PI18 FN is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Stapler Unit has started moving from its home posi tion COB25 The Slide Home Position Sensor PI18 FN is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Stapler Unit has
462. olor shift amount is greater than the specified range during CD registration correction The color shift amount is greater than the specified range during FD registration correction The skew correction amount is greater than the speci fied value P 26 ATVC Bk failure An abnormal average value is detected during an adjustment of the first image transfer ATVC value of Black P 27 ATVC 2nd failure An abnormal average value is detected during an adjustment of the second image transfer ATVC value P 29 ATVC color failure An abnormal average value is detected during an adjustment of the first image transfer ATVC value of color Color PC Drum Main Sensor mal function The output from the Color PC Drum Main and Sub Sen Sors remains unchanged for a continuous period of 1 000 ms while the Color PC Drum Motor is turning sta bly and the Lock signal is active LOW O Bk PC Drum Main Sensor malfunc tion The output from the Color PC Drum Main and Sub Sen Sors remains unchanged for a continuous period of 1 000 ms while the Bk PC Motor is turning stably and the Lock signal is active LOW 0 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Malfunction code 2 3 Solution 2 3 1 5 1 CCD clamp gain adjustment failure Relevant Electrical Parts Scanner Assy CCD Sensor Board PWB A Image Processing Board PWB C
463. on with the aim of arriving at proper tolerances and safety factors For this reason unauthorized modifications involve a high risk of degradation in performance and safety Such modifications are therefore strictly prohibited the points listed below are not exhaustive but they illustrate the reason ing behind this policy DANGER PROHIBITED ACTIONS Using any cables or power cord not specified by KMBT Using any fuse or thermostat not specified by KMBT Safety will not be assured leading to a risk of fire and injury Disabling fuse functions or bridging fuse terminals with wire metal clips solder or similar object Disabling relay functions such as wedging paper between relay contacts Q D lt 2 gt gt Disabling safety functions interlocks safety circuits etc Safety will not be assured leading to a risk of fire and Q injury Making any modification to the product unless instructed by KMBT Q Using parts not specified by KMBT 5 2 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS 2 CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON SITE SERVICE Konica Minolta brand products are extensively tested before shipping to ensure that all applicable safety standards are met in order to protect the customer and customer engi neer hereafter called the CE from the risk of injury However in daily use any electrical equipment may be subject to parts wear and eventual failure In o
464. oner bottle 1 NOTES Raise the waste toner bottle gently before removing it f scattered toner has accumulated in the vicinity of the toner collecting port do not tilt the waste toner bot tle when removing it Do notleave the waste toner bottle in a tilted condition after removing it 40362045 1 2 4 Remove the Cover 2 of Waste Toner Bottle and set it on the Col lecting port 40361261501 5 Clean the surface around the waste toner collecting port 6 Remove the waste toner bottle from its box and remove the packing material 7 Grasp the handle and set the waste toner bottle in place 8 Close the Left Door 403616250900 2 19 o c 2 Periodical check 1 5 17 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Cleaning of the Area around the Waste Toner Collecting Port 4036162045 1 403616250900 1 5 18 Replacing Ozone Filter 1 N J 3 Si 1 5 19 Cleaning of the Comb Electrode 403618251160 2 20 1 Open the Rear Left Cover 2 Remove the Waste Toner Bottle 1 3 Wipe the areas around the Waste Toner Collecting Port clean of spilled toner and dirt using a soft cloth dampened with water or alcohol 1 Holding onto the hook remove the Ozone Filter 1 2 Remove the Paper Dust Remover we 2 15 3 Selec
465. ons A Detection timing Malfunction code Description The Shift Home Position Sensor PC10 FN does not go HIGH even after the lapse of a given period of time after M8 FN has been energized to start returning the Elevator Tray to its home position COB80 The Shift Home Position Sensor PC10 FN does not go LOW even after the lapse of a given period of time after M8 FN has been energized to start moving the Ele vator Tray for job offset B Action Relevant electrical parts Shift Home Position Sensor PC10 FN Control Board PWB A FN Shift Motor Pulse Sensor PC11 FN Shift Motor M8 FN WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical compo nents Check the motor and sensor connectors 1 for proper connection and correct as necessary Check the connector of motor for proper 2 drive coupling and correct as neces sary 3 PC10 FN sensor check PWB A FN PJ25A FN 12 H 2 4 PC11 FN I O sensor check PWB A FN PJ25A FN 14 H 2 5 M8 FN operation check PWB A FN PJ5A FN 3 4 D 2 6 PWB A FN replacement 5 o I e 5 5 Hr gt Trouble code FS 501 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 2 3 7 COBAO Elevator Motor M7 FN drive malfunctions A Detection timing Malfunction code Description The Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor PQ PWB D FN is not activated even after the lapse of a given period of ti
466. ons To set the password used to log on to the POP3 server to receive email 5 Use To set the logon password for the server 4 4 Functions To select whether to enable or disable automatic incoming mail check with the POP server Use To select to disable automatic incoming mail check Setting Procedure The default setting is Yes Yes No 5 Initialize Functions To select whether or not to initialize the setting data for reception and transmis sion Use To initialize the setting data for reception and transmission Setting Procedure The default setting is No Yes No Pressing the Start key with Yes selected will let machine start the initialization procedure 3 24 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 B Send Utility Mode 1 SMTP Server Functions To set the address of the SMTP Server used in reception of email Use To set the address of the SMTP Server Setting Procedure e IP Address Version 4 format 0 to 255 0 10 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 2 Timeout of SMTP Server Functions To set the timeout period for connection to the SMTP server used for email trans mission Use To change the timeout period for connection to the SMTP server Setting Procedure The default setting is 30 sec 30 sec 30 to 300 3 Mail Separation Functions To sel
467. ontrol Board PWB MC Fusing Pressure Roller Pressure Retraction Motor M19 Fusing Unit WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control Signal Electrical Component 1 Check the M9 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary 2 I O check PWB MC PJ7MC 12A ON 2 M PC34 operation check PWB MC PJ16MC 3A 3 16 P Pulse Output M19 operation check PWB MC PJ19MC 5B 6B 4 2 J Pulse Output Change Fusing Unit Change PWB MC 4 34 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Malfunction code 2 6 21 C0200 Cyan PC Drum Charge Corona malfunction 2 6 22 C0202 Magenta PC Drum Charge Corona malfunction 2 6 23 C0204 Yellow PC Drum Charge Corona malfunction 2 6 24 C0206 Black PC Drum Charge Corona malfunction 2 6 25 C0208 PC Drum Charge Corona malfunction Relevant Electrical Parts Imaging Unit C High Voltage Unit 1 HV1 Imaging Unit M Control Board PWB MC Imaging Unit Y Imaging Unit Bk WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control Signal Electrical Component 1 Check the Imaging Unit contact and correct or a clean as necessary 2 Check the HV1 contact and correct or clean as an necessary 3 Change Imaging Unit 4 Change HV1 5 Change PWB MC 2 6 26 C0400 Exposure Lamp s failure to turn ON 2 6 27 C0410 Exposure Lamp turning ON at abnormal timing Relevant Electrical Parts
468. or PC126 PF even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Tray4 Paper Feed Motor M123 PF is energized Traya Paper Tak The Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor PC117 PF is not blocked even after the Up section misfeed lapse of a given period of after the Tray4 Vertical Transport Sensor PC126 detection PF has been blocked by a paper The Tray4 Vertical Transport Sensor PC126 PF is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after PC126 PF has been blocked by a paper The Tray4 Vertical Transport Sensor PC126 PF is blocked when the Power Switch is set to ON a door or cover is opened and closed or a misfeed or mal Tray4 function is reset detection of paper remaining The Tray4 Paper Take Up Sensor PC125 PF is blocked when the Power Switch is set to ON a door or cover is opened and closed or a misfeed or malfunction is reset B Action Relevant electrical parts Tray4 Paper Take Up Sensor PC125 PF Main Control Board PWB C2 PF Tray4 Vertical Transport Sensor PC126 PF Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor PC117 PF Tray4 Paper Feed Motor M123 PF WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical compo nents 1 Initial check items 2 PC125 PF I O sensor check PWB C2 PF PJ10C2 PF 8 E 8 3 PC126 PF I O sensor check PWB C2 PF PJ11C2 PF 2 E 8 4 PC117 PF I O sensor check PWB C2 PF PJ6C2 PF 11 F 3 5
469. ory CATSS2 in the below figure Firmware rewriting File Edit view Favorites Tools 5 GQsearch History S Address Sy 552 z Name 720040117 4036 F F0 22 00 00 CHECKSUM 0823 EXE 1 object s 0 bytes E My Computer 403616262260 NOTE The file name of Firmware data consists of the Release Date Version CHECKSUM exe 2 Double click the Firmware data and specify the directory to be uncompressed and then uncompress it NOTE When old Firmware is still left in the specified directory to be uncompressed delete it before uncompressing 3 Mount the Compact flash on the PC and check the Drive name which was recognized in the Windows F Drive in the following figure Edit Favorites Tools la Address my Computer 58 Control Panel GJ Removable Disk F B My Computer 5 object s o gt j Qsearch Gyrolders lt Bristory GZ 403616262360 4 Click Start Program gt Accessories gt Command prompt to open the Command prompt 5 Use the Command prompt to move into the uncompressed directory 2 3 2 Firmware rewriting Standard Controller Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 6 Specify the Drive of Compact flash which was recognized throu
470. ounting Bracket ASSy Remove two screws 6 and remove the Paper Take up Cover 7 Remove the C ring 8 and remove the bushing 9 2 Shift the Shaft Assy 10 in the orien tation as shown on the left and remove the C ring 11 and the gear 12 2 3 o G c Periodical check 15 ea umm 13 4 481 260800 434816261000 NOTE Replace the Paper Take up Roller and the Separation Roller Assy at the same time 1 1 3 Pick up Roller 434816260200 2 4 PC 101 PC 201 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 9 Remove the C ring 13 the bushing 14 and remove the shaft Assy 15 10 Remove two E rings 16 and the bushing 17 and remove the Pick up Roller Fixing Bracket Assy 18 11 Remove the C ring 19 and remove the Paper Take up Roller 20 12 Repeat steps 1 to 11 similarly for the 4th Drawer A Cleaning procedure 1 Remove the Tray3 Remove the Tray4 from 4th row 2 Remove the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy 2 1 Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol wipe the Pick up Roller 1 clean of dirt 4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 similarly for the 4th Drawer PC 101 PC 201 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 434816261700 434816260500 4 5 8 ECCO Y E ec 10 NGG g f 12
471. output data is 64 or less during a CCD gain adjustment C3331 MSC undefined malfunction occur e An undefined malfunction occurs in the MSC of the ring MFP Control Board PWB MFP C3332 Scanner Section undefined mal An undefined malfunction occurs in the Scanner Sec function tion C3333 Engine Section undefined malfunc e An undefined malfunction occurs in the Engine Sec tion tion PWB MC etc N Call responsible person of Konicaminolta C3E00 initialization failure Call responsible person of Konicaminolta A C3E01 C3E02 Vendor connection failure e Itis detected that communications with the vendor are interrupted for a given period of time or more with Installed selected for the setting of vendor installa tion C3FFC ROM contents error upon startup A fault is detected in a sequence of ROM contents LPH check of the LPH Board during starting C3FFD ROM contents error upon startup A fault is detected in a sequence of ROM contents Scanner check of the PWB C during starting ROM contents error upon startup A fault is detected in a sequence of ROM contents PRT check of the Control Board during starting C3FFF ROM contents error upon startup A fault is detected in a sequence of ROM contents MSC check of the MSC PWB MFP during starting 4 25 o I a 5 gt
472. ove the Lower Right Cover 5 5 Remove two screws 6 and remove the Front Right Cover 7 2 3 2 Rear Cover 4 482521 0 1 Remove four screws 1 and remove the Rear Cover 2 Other PC 401 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 2 3 3 Drawer 1 Press the Drawer Eject Button 1 and slide out the drawer 2 2 Remove the paper 3 Remove four screws 3 and slide out the drawer 2 434816252200 4 Remove two screws 4 the tor 5 and remove the Connector Board 6 5 Remove the Drawer NOTE When removing the Connector Board use care not to drop the drawer from the guide rail 434816252300 NOTE To prevent injuries press the guide rail 7 inside the machine Il Maintenance 434816252400 1 Remove the Drawer 2 8 2 Remove four screws 1 and remove the Front Cover Assy 2 3 Unplug the connector 3 44816252500 4 Remove two screws 4 and the Inner Cover Assy 5 NOTE Do not peel off pulley protective 4 4 mylar sheet 434818252600 2 8 PC 401 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Other 5 Remove two screws 6 and remove the Driver Cover 7 434816252700 6 Remove three screws 8 remove the Driver Mounting Plate Assy 9 5 43481625280 o 2 When assembling be sure to engage rib of gear 1 10 with con ve
473. ove the Rear Cover and IR Upper Rear Cover 1 tw 2 41 2 Remove 16 screws 1 and the reinforcement frame 2 Other NOTES After replacing the LPH Unit be sure to turn four Drive Hubs 12 to release locking Proceeding with job while still being locked may unintentionally release the locking condition thus damaging the Drive hub For installation of the LPH Unit lock four Drive hubs again before installation When the LPH Unit has been rein stalled be sure to run Stabilizer available from Image Adjust of the Tech Rep mode 2 4036fs2090c1 40361209100 3 Remove the tension spring 3 for the Scanner Motor timing belt 2 63 Other bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 Remove three screws 4 and the Scanner Motor Assy 5 5 Remove two screws 6 and the Scanner Motor 7 Il Maintenance 403616252400 B Reinstallation Procedure 1 Temporarily secure the Scanner Motor Assy 2 using three screws 1 2 Hookthe spring 3 3 With the Scanner drive gear set Screw located on the right hand side as shown on the left slide the Scan ner Motor Assy to the left and check that it is returned to the original posi tion by the tension of the spring Per form this step three times Ling 4 Securely tighten the three screws to fix the Scanner Motor Assy 2 into position
474. ower Entrance Sensor 2 E 5 Turnover Empty Sensor PC6 HO E z 4 2 FS 501 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Jam Display 1 4 Solution 1 4 1 Transport section misfeed A Detection timing Type Description Transport section misfeed detection The 1st Tray Exit Sensor PC1 FN is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the leading edge of the paper has blocked the Paper Sensor PC1 HO of the Horizontal Transport Unit The Job tray Exit Sensor PC19 FN is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the leading edge of the paper has blocked the Paper Sensor PC1 HO of the Horizontal Transport Unit The Upper Entrance Sensor is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the leading edge of the paper has blocked the Paper Sensor PC1 HO of the Horizontal Transport Unit The Lower Entrance Sensor PC2 FN is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the leading edge of the paper has blocked the Paper Sensor PC1 HO of the Horizontal Transport Unit B Action Relevant electrical parts Job Tray Exit Sensor PC19 FN Control Board PWB A FN 1st Tray Exit Sensor PC1 FN Paper Sensor PC1 HO Upper Entrance Sensor PC4 FN Lower Entrance Sensor PC2 FN Storage Sensor PC3 FN Entrance Motor M1 FN Upper Entrance Motor M4 FN Lower Entrance Motor M2 FN
475. ower Switch of the machine is turned OFF and ON 3 Troubleshooting procedures 3 1 Unable to print over the network Check Possible Cause Action Remark Is the print job dis played on the machine control panel Yes An error on machine side paper running out toner running out etc Correct the error See Operators Man ual Administrators of the machine Waiting its turn Check the machine control panel for jobs in print queue Priority may be changed as neces sary See Operators Man ual Basic of the machine The job is locked Enter the password to unlock the job The correct division ID has not been entered Enter the correct divi sion ID in the printer driver and try re trans mitting the job again access code See Job Manage ment in Operator s Manual No Data is yet to be received Go to item 2 4 1 o I 2 5 5 gt E 2 5 gt Troubleshooting procedures Standard Controller Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Check Possible Cause Action Remark Is the response of Ping sent from the PC to the machine The print destination port setting is wrong Set the correct port See For Network Connection in Instal lation Guide PC operates errati Restart the PC Yes call
476. person not involved with ser vice jobs A Procedure 1 Press the Utility key 2 Touch Counter List 3 Press the following keys in this order Stop 30202 Stop 0 1 4 Enter the 8 digit service code and touch Enter The default value is 00000000 NOTES The service code entered is displayed as If a wrong service code is entered touch Enter to go back to the Basic screen When access is attempted a fourth time after a wrong service code has been entered three times the Enter will not be displayed In this case the Power Switch must be turned OFF and ON When the access to the Tech Rep mode is successfully made with the correct service code entered the machine clears the count of illegal access to the Tech Rep mode 5 The Tech Rep Mode menu will appear Tech Rep Mode ADF Check Registration 90 Machine Adjust CO miTUsp Stop Position RD Mode Paper Passage Image Adjust o o E a a 5 in initiali assword ze NOUO Tray width ji ee ee XEM AUG TT AdJUST
477. pleted Check Possible Cause Action Remark An error message is returned from the mail server The destination mail Yes address is wrong Enter the correct mail address See Settings and Operations for Scan Functions Scan to E mail Error Message and Internet Fax Error Message The Internet FAX No 3 to receive or is not the POPS server machine on the receiv ing end is being unable receiving mail stored in 3 5 Data cannot be received in Internet FAX Check Possible Cause Action Remark The error report lt Out of Support File gt is printed The mail portion is in a format not good for recep tion Support format MIME The format of the file attached to the mail is not supported for reception The reason why the sender attaches a file of a format not supported is probably because the sender uses PC mail soft ware to send the mail and does not pay attention to the format of the file when attaching it Ask the sender to attach the file of the cor rect format is displayed on the control panel of the machine IP address of the server is wrong Check with the network administrator and enter the correct IP address Port number is wrong Check with the network administrator and enter the correct port number Failed to log on to the POPS ser
478. position AUN NOO 7 lt 3 7 Mechanical adjustment FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 3 3 Adjustment of height and inclination 1 Gently move the finisher toward the machine and check for following e 15 the positioning pin aligned with the hole in the finisher 458316350300 Does the horizontal transport unit run Su excessively slantwise Does the clearance at A equal that at Wades 2 If the finisher is not at same height 7 as the machine adjust the machine as follows 4583f83504c0 2 Remove the Finisher 1 from the main unit and remove two caster covers 2 8 2 gt PH 5 ec v 3 3 Remove four adjusting screw cov lt ow ers 3 4583153506 0 3 8 FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4583fs3507c0 458318350800 Mechanical adjustment 4 Loosen four caster fixing screws 4 5 Turn the adjustment screw 5 to make adjustment To heighten Turn the screw counter clockwise To bring down Turn the screw clock wise 6 Fasten the caster fixing screws 7 Install the caster covers and the adjustment screw covers 3 9 7
479. ppearance 3 Synchronizing Roller e 4 Paper Dust Remover e Transport 5 section Transport Roller 6 2nd Image Transfer e Entrance Upper Guide 7 mage Trans ound waste toner port e fer section 8 LPH section LPH Assy e 8 9 e 5 10 Paper Take up Roller e 2 11 DF 601 Separation Roller e Transport Belt Roller ie and Roll 13 AD 501 DUP Roller e 1 2 3 Periodical parts replacement 1 per 150 000 print Parts to be replaced Clean Replace Dubnesc Descrip personnel tion tions Paper take up and Overall image conditions Appearance Paper Dust Remover Transport section 2nd Image Transfer Roller Unit Processing Ozone Filter section 1 2 4 Periodical parts replacement 2 per 200 000 print Number of Lubrica Descrip Parts to be replaced A i Clean Replace npa p personnel tion tions Paper take up and Overall image conditions Appearance Tray 1 Paper Take up Roller Bypass Separation Roller Pick up Roller DF 601 Paper Take up Roller Separation Roller 1 Replace with reference to the ADF Feed on the Counter Life bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Periodical check g S 1 2 5 Periodical parts replacement 3 per 300 000 print No Class Parts to be replaced Check C
480. q local authority Improper replacement can cause explosion After replacing a part to which AC voltage is applied e g optical lamp and fixing lamp be sure to check the installa tion state qb A risk of fire exists Check the interlock switch and actuator for loosening and check whether the interlock functions properly If the interlock does not function you may receive an electric shock or be injured when you insert your hand in the product e g for clearing paper jam Make sure the wiring cannot come into contact with sharp edges burrs or other pointed parts Current can leak leading to a risk of electric shock or b fire Make sure that all screws components wiring connec tors etc that were removed for safety check and mainte nance have been reinstalled in the original location Pay Xpcs special attention to forgotten connectors pinched cables ab EAM EA forgotten screws etc 7 risk of product trouble electric shock and fire exists 5 8 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS NWARNING HANDLING OF CONSUMABLES Toner and developer are not harmful substances but care must be taken not to breathe excessive amounts or let the substances come into contact with eyes etc It may be stimulative If the substances get in the eye rinse with plenty of water immediately When symptoms are noticeable consult a physician Never throw the used c
481. r Elevator Tray 60 to 80 g m to 11x 17 5 500 sheets 16 to 21 1 4 Ib g m B4 8 1 2 x 14 24 1 4 to or larger 55 1 2 Ib 20 sheets if originals of high ID Color Wise 3 is used 15 sheets when using Color Copy 90 paper 20 sheets when using Hammermill Laser Print 90 paper Plain paper 1 4 Stapling Staple Filling Mode Dedicated Staple Cartridge Mode 3000 staples Staple Detection Available Nearly Empty 40 remaining staples Diagonal back side 45 1 point Stapling Position Rear Parallel 1 point B5R B5 to Stapled Paper Size i5 41 g4 2 11 to 11x 17 Manual Staple None 15 Sort and staple capacity 1 5 1 Stacking with no stapling with the same size paper 80g m e Determined by the item whose value is reached first among number of stacked paper stacked height or mass of stack Determined by the stacked height when stacking with stapling and no stapling mixed A Number of stacked paper FD No of Sheets 8 1 2 x 118 or smaller 1000 sheets B4 8 1 2 x 14 or larger 500 sheets B Stacked height FD Height 8 1 2 x 118 or smaller 150 mm B4 8 1 2 x 14 or larger 75mm C Mass of stack FD Mass 8 1 2 x 118 or smaller correspond to 1000 sheets B4 8 1 2 x 14 or larger correspond to 500 sheets FS 501 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 1 5 2 Stacking with stapling Re
482. r ID Code DT Setting Date Time Input and Common DT Use Use to clear various types of data of the Center Setting Procedure The default setting is Disable Enable Disable o E o D 5 3 68 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 TECH REP MODE 4 8 System Input 4 8 1 Marketing Area Functions To make the various settings language paper size fixed zoom ratios etc according to the applicable marketing area Use Upon setup Setting Procedure Select the applicable marketing area and touch END to set the marketing area JAPAN US Europe Others1 Others2 Others3 Others4 These are the languages that can be selected on the Utility screen according to different marketing area settings Japan English Japanese US English French Spanish Japanese Europe German English French Dutch Norwegian Danish Others1 Others2 Swedish Italian Portuguese Spanish Finnish Others3 Others4 Czech Hungarian Japanese 4 8 2 Org Detect Option Sensor Functions To let the machine recognize an optional Original Size Sensor when one is mounted Use When an optional sensor is mounted Setting Procedure After the optional Original Size Sensor has been mounted select Set The default setting is Unset Set Unset After the sensor has been mounted perform Org Detect Sensor of Machine
483. r Dehumidifying Heater Paper type does not match the set YES Change the setting of the paper 2 ting on the paper type setting dial type setting dial 3 Fusing Unit Fusing Entrance Guide Plate is YES Clean dirty 4 Fusing Belt is dirty or scratched YES Change Fusing Unit Machine Adjust Changing fusing speed eliminates YES Readjust Fuser Speed 5 Fuser Speed the problem of brush effect and Tech Rep blurred image Mode The problem has been eliminated NO Change Fusing Unit through the checks of steps up to 5 L a 5 gt 4 97 Image quality problem bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 3 38 A Typical Faulty Images Printer 4 Color back marking E 5 3 gt ABCDE 403615406200 403614063 0 B Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action 1 Image Transfer Image Transfer Roller is scratched YES Change Image Transfer Roller Roller Unit or dirty Unit 2 Paper path There is foreign matter on paper YES Remove foreign matter path 3 Fusing Unit Fusing Entrance Guide Plate is YES Clean or change scratched or dirty 4 Lower Fusing Roller is scratched or YES Change Fusing Unit dirty Transfer Belt Unit Fingerprints oil or other foreign YES Clean with specified solvent 5 matter is evide
484. r Staple Finisher Crease Clock 0 55289 su 0 Punch Wastes 0 Paper D Self Prime 0 Punch Timing Paper Surface 0 Front Door 0 REE clock 0 0 Upper Door 0 Punch Home 0 Front Door SV 0 Home Clock 0 Rev Remain 0 Transporte poors Middle 0 Joint SV oj Slide Home o Bunche si 0 Stapler Home 0 s2 0 Needle 0 Regist 0 O Reise sa 0 403615302990 check list A Sensor monitor 4 FS 601 PK 501 Operation characteris Symbol Panel display Part Signal name tics Panel display 1 0 PI1 FN Entrance Entrance Sensor Paper Paper not present present PI2 FN Paddle Home Paddle Home Position Sensor HP PI3 FN Bundle Roller Home Swing Guide Home Position Sensor HP PI4 FN Align Home Front Front Aligning Plate Home Position HP Sensor PI5 FN Align Home Back Rear Aligning Plate Home Position HP Sensor PI6 FN Alignment Tray Finisher Tray Sensor Paper Paper not present present PI7 FN Exit Belt Home Exit Belt Home Position Sensor HP PI10 FN _ Position Folding Position Sensor Paper Paper not present present Crease Tray Saddle Tray Sensor Paper Paper not present present Crease Home Folding Home Position Sensor HP PI12 FN Crease Roller Home Folding Roller Home Position Sensor HP 14 Crease Clock Staple Folding Motor Clock Sensor PI8 FN Paper Exit Tray S
485. r image If a blurred image occurs decrease the setting Adjustment Procedure 1 Call the Tech Rep Mode to the screen 2 Touch these keys in this order Machine Adjust gt Fuser Speed 3 Select the transport speed at which the brush effect or blurred image has occurred Transport speed Paper Setting 165 mm s 100 mm s Plain paper monochrome Plain paper color Thick paper OHP Envelope Postcard 60 mm s Labels monochrome color 4 Enter the new setting from the 10 Key Pad 5 Touch END to validate the adjustment value 6 Check the copy image for any image problem Make the adjustment for each paper type 4 4 4 Org Detect Sensor Functions To automatically adjust the original detection distance for the Original Size Sensor Use When the sensor is replaced with a new one When an optional sensor has been added When an erroneous original size detection is made When the marketing area setting is changed Adjustment If the adjustment has been successfully made it completes the adjustment proce Instructions dure If the adjustment has turned out to be unsuccessful check the optional Original Size Sensors for correct installation and change the defective sensor or harness Adjustment 1 Place a blank sheet of A3 or 11 x 17 paper on the Original Glass and lower the Procedure Original Cover 2 Call the Tech Rep Mode to the screen
486. r to be adjusted 4 Enter the new setting from the 10 Key Pad 5 Touch END to return to the Image Adjust menu screen 6 Touch Stabilizer 7 Touch Stabilizer Mode 8 Press the Start key to validate the adjustment value 9 Check the copy image for any image problem If the setting value has been changed be sure to run an image stabilization sequence to make valid the new value 3 61 E E a 5 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 6 2 PRT Highlight Functions To adjust the highlight portion fog level to the target reproduction level by making an auxiliary manual fine adjustment of y of each color after Gradation Adjust Use An image quality problem is not corrected even after Gradation Adjust has been run Adjustment 0 10 to 10 Range Adjustment To make the Highlight portion darker increase the setting value Instructions To make the Highlight portion lighter decrease the setting value Adjustment 1 Call the Tech Rep Mode to the screen Procedure Touch these keys in this order Image Adjust PRT Highlight Select the color to be adjusted Enter the new setting from the 10 Key Pad Touch END to return to the Image Adjust menu screen Touch Stabilizer Touch Stabilizer Mode Press the Start key to validate the adjustment value
487. rate maintenance and administration Therefore safety can be maintained by the appropriate daily service work conducted by the customer engineer 2 When performing service each product on the site must be tested for safety The cus tomer engineer must verify the safety of parts and ensure appropriate management of the equipment 5 FUSE CAUTION Double pole neutral fusing ATTENTION Double p le fusible sur le neutre 6 LED Radiation Safety This product is a copier which operates by means of a LED light emitting diodes expo sure system There is no possibility of danger from the LED optical radiation because the LED optical radiation level dose not exceed the accessible radiation limit of class 1 under all conditions of operation maintenance service and failure SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS WARNING INDICATIONS ON THE MACHINE Caution labels shown are attached in some areas on in the machine When accessing these areas for maintenance repair or adjustment special care should be taken to avoid burns and electric shock High voltage N High temperature 40361500100 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS A WARNUNG ATENCI N AVVERTENZA A AVISO 40361500200 KONICA MINOLTA SERVICE MANUAL bizhub c350 Main Unit 2004 09 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC Ver 2 0 After publication of this service manual the parts and mechanism may be subject to c
488. rd PWB C o WIRING DIAGRAM 3 Step Action Location E Control Signal Electrical Component 3 1 Correct or change the Scanner drive cable pul z ley gear belt if it is faulty E Correct the Scanner Motor set screw if loose Adjust Top Image and FD Mag Check the PC201 M201 PWB IC and PWB C 4 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary 5 PC201 I O check PWB C PJ11C 8 ON 21 Z PWB IC PJ3IC 3 LOCK 4 6 201 operation check PWB IC 1 REM 25 Z Change PWB IC Change PWB C 4 36 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Malfunction code 2 6 36 C0900 2nd Drawer Lift Up Motor Failure Relevant Electrical Parts Tray2 Lift Up Sensor PC105 Tray2 Board PWB Z Tray2 Lift Up Motor M101 WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control Signal Electrical Component 1 Check the M101 connector for proper connection u m and correct as necessary 2 Check the connector of M101 for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary 3 PC105 I O check PWB Z PJ6Z 3 ON 2 Y 4 M101 operation check PWB Z PJ4Z 4 2 U PWB Z PJ4Z 5 5 Change PWB Z 2 6 37 C0960 Manual Bypass Paper Lifting Failure Relevant Electrical Parts Bypass Lift Up Sensor PC115 R Tray2 Vertical Transport Motor M103 dive Board PWB 2 WIRING DIAGRAM
489. rder to maintain safety and reliability the CE must perform regular safety checks 1 Power Supply NWARNING Wall Outlet Check that mains voltage is as specified Plug the power cord into the dedicated wall outlet with a capacity greater than the maximum power consumption If excessive current flows in the wall outlet fire may result f two or more power cords can be plugged into the wall outlet the total load must not exceed the rating of the wall outlet ab If excessive current flows in the wall outlet fire may result N WARNING Power Plug and Cord Make sure the power cord is plugged in the wall outlet securely Contact problems may lead to increased resistance S overheating and the risk of fire Check whether the power cord is damaged Check whether the sheath is damaged If the power plug cord or sheath is damaged replace with new power cord with plug and connector on each end specified by KMBT Using the damaged power cord may result in fire or electric shock 5 3 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS N WARNING Power Plug and Cord When using the power cord inlet type that came with this product be sure to observe the following precautions a Make sure the connector is securely inserted in the inlet on the rear panel of the product Secure the cord with a fixture properly b If the power cord or sheath is damaged repla
490. re is any color shift as found through comparison of the copy with the original Before making this adjustment be sure to perform Color Shift Correction Bk Use To correct any color shift Adjustment Range 0 6 to 6 dot Adjustment If the cross deviates in the direction of C increase the setting Instructions If the cross deviates in the direction of D decrease the setting Adjustment 1 Call the Tech Rep Mode to the screen Procedure 2 Machine Adjust Color Shift Correction 3 Load Tray1 with A3 or A4R plain paper 4 Press the Start key 5 On the test pattern produced check for deviation between the black line and the line of each color at positions X and Y 6 Select the color to be adjusted 7 Using the Up Down key change the setting value as necessary At this time only the line of the selected color moves 8 Produce another test pattern and make sure that there is no deviation Check Procedure Check point X Y 22 lt Y i adhi ihi ii Ahdi hiii didi n EE ER gt c 5 X 40361880040 5 Adjustment for X direction If the cross deviates in the direction of C lt Check point X increase the setting If the cross deviates in the direction of D decrease the setting Direction of C Direction of D alec ale S elis ls es abe sel ees 1 I 1 1 1 f Me
491. rect color image registration 4036fs4032c0 B Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action Warning display The maintenance call mark is dis played on the panel YES Take action according to the warning code shown on the State Confirm screen 2 Machine condi Vibration is given to copier after YES Turn OFF and ON Power Switch tion Power Switch has been turned ON 3 LPH Assy LED retracting lever is locked in NO Slide out the IU and reinstall position Image Transfer Fingerprints oil or other foreign YES Clean with specified solvent 4 Belt Unit matter is evident on the Image See Maintenance Transfer Belt Image Transfer Belt is dirty or YES Clean dirty belt with a soft cloth 5 scratched Change Image Transfer Belt Unit if belt is damaged 6 Drive coupling to the copier is dirty YES Clean 7 Imaging Unit The surface of the PC Drum is YES Change Imaging Unit scratched 8 Image Transfer Image Transfer Roller is installed NO Roller Unit properly 9 Image Transfer Roller is dirty or YES Change Image Transfer Roller scratched Unit Machine Adjust Brush effect or blurred image YES Readjust Fuser Speed 10 12 Fuser Speed occurs Tech Rep Mode Machine Adjust Check the specific color in which YES Perform Color Shift Correction Color Shift color shift occurs
492. red toner has accumulated in the vicinity of the toner collecting port do not tilt the waste toner bot tle when removing it Do notleave the waste toner bottle in a tilted condition after removing it 7 Pull out the Image Transfer Belt Unit 4 1 Insert the Transfer Belt Unit 1 NOTE Insert the Transfer Belt Unit with care not to allow its docking gear to be damaged by hitting it against the rail or associated part 2 Install the Image Transfer Belt Unit with two Screws 2 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4036fs2616c0 Periodical check 3 Hold the handle and install the Waste Toner Bottle 3 in position 4 Close the Left Door 5 Close the Right Door NOTE Make sure that the door is locked in position both at front and rear 6 Turn ON the Power Switch 7 Select Tech Rep Mode dation Adjust and carry out Grada tion Adjust 1 5 24 Replacing the Imaging Unit C M Y Bk 40361257800 A Removal Procedure Turn OFF the Power Switch Unplug the power cord Open the Front Door Release the lock lever 1 of the Imaging Unit AUN 2 5 Pullout the IU 2 and remove it from main body 6 Clean the LPH Assy ws 2 21 2 25 o c 2 Periodical check 403616258000 NOTE bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004
493. roduct is grounded properly If current leakage occurs in an ungrounded product you may suffer electric shock while operating the product q5 Connect power plug to grounded wall outlet Installation Requirements NWARNING Prohibited Installation Places Do not place the product near flammable materials or vola tile materials that may catch fire Q A risk of fire exists AR Do not place the product in a place exposed to water such 4 as rain Q X A risk of fire and electric shock exists N WARNING When not Using the Product for a long time When the product is not used over an extended period of time holidays etc switch it off and unplug the power cord Dust collected around the power plug and outlet may cause fire 5 5 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS N CAUTION Ventilation The product generates ozone gas during operation but it will not be harmful to the human body If a bad smell of ozone is present in the following cases gt 2 ventilate the room qa a When the product is used in a poorly ventilated room lt b When taking a lot of copies c When using multiple products at the same time N CAUTION Stability Be sure to lock the caster stoppers In the case of an earthquake and so on the product may slide leading to a injury N CAUTION Inspection before Servicing Before conducting an inspection re
494. roper con PWB MC PJ6MC 1 DC24 V 15 R nection and correct as necessary PWB MC PJ11MC 6A LOCK 4 M 1 operation check PWB MC PJ11MC 3A REM 6 Q 5 Change PWB MC 6 Change PU1 2 6 2 C0001 Main Motor Turning at abnormal timing Relevant Electrical Parts Main Motor M1 Control Board PWB MC DC Power Supply PU1 WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control Signal Electrical Component PWB MC PJ11MC 6A LOCK 1 Mt operation check PWB MC PJ11MC 3A REM 6 Q 2 Change PWB MC 3 Change PU1 4 27 o I 2 5 5 Hr gt Malfunction code bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 2 6 3 C0016 Bk PC Motor failure to turn Relevant Electrical Parts Bk PC Motor M7 Control Board PWB MC WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control Signal Electrical Component 1 Check the connector of motor for proper connec tion and correct as necessary 2 Check the connector of motor for proper drive _ coupling and correct as necessary 3 Check the PWB MC connector for proper con PWB MC PJeMC 3 DC24 V 15 R nection and correct as necessary 4 7 operation check PWB MC PJ11MC 6B LOCK 13 PWB MC PJ11MC 3B REM 5 Change PWB MC 2 6 4 C0017 Bk PC Motor turning at abnormal timing Relevant Electrical Parts Bk PC Motor M7 Contro
495. rt is dirty Correct paper is being used for printing The units parts and supplies used for printing developer PC Drum etc are properly replenished and replaced when they reach the end of their useful service life 10 Toner is not running out B Precautions for Service Jobs 1 Be sure to unplug the power cord of the machine before starting the service job proce dures 2 If it is unavoidably necessary to service the machine with its power turned ON use utmost care not to be caught in the Scanner Cables or gears of the Exposure Unit 3 Special care should be used when handling the Fusing Unit which can be extremely hot 4 The Developing Unit has a strong magnetic field Keep watches and measuring instru ments away from it 5 Take care not to damage the PC Drum with a tool or similar device 6 Do not touch IC pins with bare hands D 7 lt 2 check 21 Check procedure To allow sensors to be checked for operation easily and safely data applied to the IC on the board can be checked on the panel with the main unit in the standby state including a misfeed malfunction and closure failure condition Procedure 1 Setthe mode to the Tech Rep Mode 2 Touch the State Confirm Check key 3 Touch the I O Check key 3 1 check 101 201 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 2 2 check list 2 2 1 check screen This
496. rt section misfeed 4 3 1 4 2 Horizontal Transport section misfeed 4 3 1 4 8 Folding position section misfeed sssseeeee 4 4 1 4 4 Stapler section misfeed eeeeeeeeeeeeeenee nennen nennen 4 4 2 Wouble c de erro a neret nior DOT ree ERE 4 5 2 1 Trouble code display trm er trente ne ede 4 5 2 2 Trouble thee pe rere 4 5 2 2 1 Howto reset recae heart era entrer edere pe eoe 4 8 2 3 Sol tion sou a nenne POPE OUR REPE 4 9 2 3 1 COBOO Transport System Drive 4 9 2 3 2 COBO5 Paddle Motor malfunctions esseeeenene 4 10 2 3 8 COB25 Stapler Unit Slide Motor malfunctions 4 11 2 34 COBSS Front Aligning Plate Motor 4 12 2 3 5 COB3A Rear Aligning Plate Motor malfunctions esses 4 13 2 3 6 COB4C Booklet Exit Motor 4 14 2 3 7 COB55 Stapler Folding Motor malfunctions eese 4 15 2 3 8 CO0B75 Punch Control Board malfunctions esses 4 18 2 3 9 76 Side Registration Motor malfunctions 4 19 2 3 10 COB77 Punch Motor malfunctions
497. rvice Ver2 0 Sep 2004 7 Using four screws 9 secure the Counter Mounting Bracket 8 NOTE Secure the Counter Mounting Bracket passing the connector into the bracket Use the four long screws 9646 0418 14 M4x18 in the Key Counter Kit to secure the Counter Mounting Bracket When installing the Key Counter to the other products use the short screws 9646 0408 14 M4x8 8 Connect the Key Counter Socket connector 10 9 Using two screws 12 secure the counter socket 11 10 Using two screws 14 secure the Key Counter Cover 13 11 Fix the harness 16 with the cable clamp 15 as shown in the left figure 12 Select Security Mode Admin Choice Key Counter and set Set bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 How to use the adjustment section Ill Adjustment Setting 1 How to use the adjustment section Adjustment Setting contains detailed information on the adjustment items and proce dures for this machine e Throughout this Adjustment Setting the default settings are indicated by boldface A Advance Checks Before attempting to solve the customer problem the following advance checks must be made Check to see if 1 The power supply voltage meets the specifications 2 The power supply is properly grounded The machine shares the power supply with any other machine that draws large current intermittently e g elevator and air conditioner that generate elec
498. ry the density of the printed image of a black copy Adjustment Range Lighter 2 steps Std Darker 2 steps Adjustment Instructions If the black is light touch the Darker key If the black is dark touch the Lighter key Adjustment 1 Touch Expert User Mode Black Image Density Correction Procedure 2 Touch the Lighter or Darker key as necessary to correct the image density 3 17 5 Stabilizer A Stabilize Functions The image stabilization sequence is carried out without clearing the historical data of image stabilization control Use Use if an image problem persists even after Gradation Adjustment has been executed When PRT Max Density PRT Highlight and Background Voltage Margin of Tech Rep mode are changed Adjustment 1 Touch Expert User Mode Stabilizer Procedure 2 Touch Stabilize 3 Press the Start key to start Stabilizer The Start key turns orange and stays lit up orange during the Stabilizer Sequence 4 Stabilizer is completed when the Start key turns green B Reset and Stabilize Functions The image stabilization control historical data is cleared and an image stabiliza tion sequence is carried out Cleared data PRT Max Density PRT Highlight Background Voltage Margin and Gradation Adjustment Use Use if an image problem persists even after Gradation Adjustment has been executed Use if tone reproduction and maximum density are f
499. s 10 Lele 7 434816261500 NOTES PC 101 PC 201 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 3 Remove the C ring 9 the Guide 10 and remove the Separation Roller Assy 11 4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 similarly for the 4th Drawer Install the Separation Roller Assy while pressing the holder down so that it aligns to the metal bracket of the copier Make sure that the Separation Roller Assy is not tilted to the right or left when installed 262300 1 1 2 Paper Take up Roller 434816260100 Cer DIOS en 2 2 A Cleaning procedure 1 Remove the Tray3 Remove the Tray4 from 4th row 2 Remove the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy 2 1 3 Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol wipe the Paper Take up Roller 1 clean of dirt 4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 similarly for the 4th Drawer B Replacing procedure 1 Remove the Rear Right Cover Remove the Right Lower Cover for 4th row 2 8 2 Remove the Tray3 Remove the Tray4 from 4th row 3 Remove the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy 2 1 4 Remove four screws 2 and remove the Paper Take up Unit 3 PC 101 PC 201 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 434815260700 Periodical check Remove two screws 4 and remove the Mounting Frame 5 for the Paper Separation Roller M
500. s Black 1PC Uses one color of black 3 91 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 13 3 Halftone Pattern Functions To produce a solid halftone pattern Use Used for checking uneven density and pitch noise Pattern SINGLE HYPER Gradation Cyan Density 255 Setting e of Print 1 to 999 Procedure Select SINGLE single copy or MULTI multi copy Select FEET or HYPER Select Gradation or Resolution if HYPER has been selected Select the color mode Cyan Magenta Yellow Black 4PC Red Green Blue CMYBk 3 Color 4 Color Black 1PC MIX Type the density level 0 to 255 4 13 4 Lattice Pattern fe Functions To produce a lattice pattern Used for checking fine line reproducibility and uneven density 5 reverse pattern is also used to check for fine line reproducibility of white letters on solid background E 5 Pattern SINGLE FEET Cyan CD Width 5 FD Width 5 Density 255 Normal Setting of Print 1 to 999 Procedure Select SINGLE single copy or MULTI multi copy Select FEET or HYPER Select Gradation or Resolution Only select HYPER Select the color mode Cyan Magenta Yellow Black 4PC Red Green Blue CMYBk 3 Color 4 Color Black 1PC Enter CD width and FD width 0 to 191 dots Type the density level 0 to 255 Select Normal or Reverse
501. s make the setting value smaller than the Instructions current one If width A or B is shorter than the specifications make the setting value greater than the current one Adjustment Load Tray1 with A3 or 11 x 17 plain paper Procedure Select plain paper on the Paper Type Setting Dial 1 2 3 Select Tray1 4 Call the Tech Rep Mode to the screen 5 Touch these keys in this order Test Print Lattice Pattern 6 Select Black SINGLE FEET CD Width 2 FD Width 2 Density 255 and Normal 7 Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern 8 Check width A equivalent to one grid and width B equivalent to 48 grids on the test pattern 9 Touch these keys in this order Machine Adjust PRT Area Zoom for FD 10 If width of A or B falls outside the specified range change the setting using the Up Down keys 11 Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern 12 Check width A and width B on the test pattern 13 If width A or B falls outside the specified range change the setting value and make a check again 14 If width A or B falls within the specified range touch 15 Following the same procedure adjust for Thick 1 Thick 2 Thick 3 and Envelope Check width A only for and Envelope 3 49 7 E lt TECH REP
502. s white spots 4 94 Printer 4 Color colored spots 4 95 Printer 4 Color poor fusing performance 4 96 Printer 4 Color brush effect blurred image Printer 4 Color back marking seen Printer 4 Color 204 mm pitch uneven image Printer 4 Color 94 mm pitch uneven image V Appendix 1 Parts layo t drawitig iride ERI e ESPERE PES 5 1 1 1 Main unitis ret ter e nee ire prr E ere e ede ee Ded 5 1 1AT C AEUSOCUOD cierto neenon ente ene eene in i em 5 1 1 14 27 Engine section oor rei EI adea itr ea ES e Ec des 5 2 5 7 5 8 1 2 o ree e 1 3 PC101 PC102 Option 1 4 PC 40T nee eren tee res Xiv bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 1 5 FS 50f Option nieder ner nee tit nante chro ee egt 5 12 1 6 J8 601 Option i 5 14 1 2 FS 604 Option ette nr eden retten 5 15 mener nore 5 15 1 7 2 Horizontal Transport Unit sess 5 16 1 8 501 Option 1 9 AD 501 Option
503. s Service Manual each of three expressions DANGER WARNING and A CAUTION is defined as follows together with a symbol mark to be used in a limited meaning When servicing the product the relevant works disassembling reassembling adjustment repair maintenance etc need to be conducted with utmost care A DANGER Action having a high possibility of suffering death or serious injur A WARNING Action having a possibility of suffering death or serious injury A CAUTION Action having a possibility of suffering a slight wound medium trouble and property damage Symbols used for safety and important warning items are defined as follows Precaution when servicing the A A N product General Electric hazard High temperature precaution Prohibition when servicing the product General Do not touch Do not prohibition with wet hand disassemble Direction when servicing the Q e e product General Unplug Ground Earth instruction S 1 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS SAFETY WARNINGS 1 MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC KONICA MINOLTA brand products are renowned for their high reliability This reliability is achieved through high quality design and a solid service network Product design is a highly complicated and delicate process where numerous mechanical physical and electrical aspects have to be taken into considerati
504. s been energized The Synchronizing Roller Sensor PC28 is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after it has been blocked by the paper 1st Drawer take up misfeed detection The leading edge of the paper does not block the Synchronizing Roller Sensor PC28 even after the lapse of a given period of time after the 1st Drawer Paper Take Up Clutch CL1 has been energized Misfeed detected as a result of delayed deactiva tion of sensor The Synchronizing Roller Sensor PC28 is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after it has been blocked by the paper Detection of paper left in 2nd Image Transfer The Synchronizing Roller Sensor PC28 is blocked when the Power Switch is turned ON a door or cover is opened and closed or a misfeed or malfunction is reset The OHP Sensor PC27 is blocked when the Power Switch is turned ON a door or cover is opened and closed or a misfeed or malfunction is reset Detection of paper left in 1st Drawer Tray 1 Double Feed Sensor PC1 is blocked when the Power Switch is turned ON a door or cover is opened and closed or a misfeed or malfunction is reset B Action Relevant Electrical Parts Tray 1 Double Feed Sensor PC1 Synchronizing Roller Sensor PC28 Exit Sensor PC30 OHP Sensor PC27 Synchronizing Roller Clutch CL3 1st Drawer Paper Take Up Clutch CL1 Control Board PWB MC
505. s the Auto Panel Reset function to be activated Setting Procedure Use the 10 Key Pad to enter the Auto Panel Reset time 1 to 9 min The default setting is 1 min 1 min 1 to 9 No 2 Add Prefix Suffix Functions This function is used to specify whether or not a prefix suffix is added when recalling or entering an address in Scan mode or Box mode Use To add Prefix Suffix to the address in the Scan or Box mode Setting Procedure The default setting is No Yes No 3 Prefix Suffix Registration Functions To register or change Prefix or Suffix Up to eight different types of Prefix or Suffix can be registered Prefix Characters added to the header portion of the document header Suffix Characters added to the footer portion of the document footer Use To register or change the text displayed as Prefix or Suffix Setting Procedure Up to 20 characters can be used for Prefix Up to 64 characters can be used for Suffix A 4 PSWC Setting Functions To select whether to enable or disable the Page Scope Web Connection Use To disable using Page Scope Web Connection Setting Procedure The default setting is Permit Permit Prohibit o 7 E o S 2 0 5 Utility Mode bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 3 12 Settings in Volu
506. se HardDisk Bypass o o 7 5 Misc Adjust Adjust 4 56910352301 8 Touch Fold Position Center Binding Position i ar 458315352560 9 Check the finished copies for deviation of the stapling position of from the newly folded position Take the top surface of the finished copies as A and the under surface as B FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Mechanical adjustment Standard 0 2 mm To side gt Standard To side A A A B B B 45831535020 10 Adjust with the and V Keys When the stapling position is shifted to the NES direction A Adjust the value to the side When the stapling position is shifted to the direction B Adjust the Cv Ta value to the side E 11 Touch END 12 Make the copy and check again 3 2 2 DF 601 unequipped machine Return to the basic screen Select the functions as follows Orig Copy4int Booklet2Booklet5Bind Set A3 or 11 x 17 original blank paper acceptable in the tray for original Press the Start Key five times to cause reading operation five times Adjust the varia tion to the minimum by using five sheets Touch the Finish of the panel Press the Start Key Take the Steps from 5 to 13 of 1 DF 601 equipped machine in 3 2 1 Adjustment of the folding
507. sed 18 ting Tech Rep Mode Gradation Adjust Conv Value falls within the speci YES Go to step 23 Tech Rep Mode fied range as checked through Gra 19 dation Adjust 0 100 Highlight 0 60 Image Adjust The problem has been eliminated NO Go to next step PRT Max Den through the adjust of PRT Max 20 sity Tech Rep Mode Image Adjust The problem has been eliminated NO Go to next step 21 PRT Highlight through the adjust of PRT Highlight Tech Rep Mode Image Adjust After the Reset Stabilizer NO Go to next step Stabilizer sequence has been completed run 22 Reset Stabilizer Gradation Adjust if the problem per Tech Rep Mode sists make adjustments of PRT Max Density and PRT Highlight The problem has been eliminated NO Change Imaging Unit Change Image Transfer Belt Unit Change LPH Assy Change LED Drive Board Change MFP Control Board Change LPH Unit Change High Voltage Unit 2 Developing Bias Change High Voltage Unit 1 Image Transfer Neutraliz ing 4 73 o I 2 5 5 Hr gt E 2 3 E gt Image quality problem 4 3 18 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 A Typical Faulty Images Printer Monocolor gradation reproduction failure 4036fs4048c0 4036fs4049c0 B Troubleshooting Procedure
508. sed in Ver 2 0 has not been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 2 0 are left as they are 2004 09 20 N Adding the descriptions and correcting errors in writing 2004 03 1 0 Issue of the first edition Date Service manual Ver Revision mark Descriptions of revision Standard Controller Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 CONTENTS 1 Controller specifications 2 1 14 Supporting client specifications ll Maintenance 1 Checking the controller firmware version seen 2 1 2 Firmware rewritihg 5 2 pereant prenne e de ne eL 2 1 21 Preparations for updating the 2 1 2T Servicevenvironmoent oui rece nen ie ae xe He Ege epe 2 1 2 1 2 Application to be used nennen nennen 2 1 2 1 3 Installing the Cygwin 2 1 21 4 Writing into the Compact flash 2 8 2 2 Updating procedures of firmware sssessssssseeeeeeeenen en 2 5 2 271 Updating meltliod ieiuno PR RU 2 5 2 2 2 Action When Data Transfer Fails 2 6 Ill Adjustment Setting 1 Checking the external interface operation mode Setting 3 1 2 Setting for PageScope Remote Care sse 3 1 2 1 Setting procedur
509. sing five sheets Touch the Finish of the panel Press the Start Key the stapling position Take the Steps from 5 to 14 of 1 DF 601 equipped machine in 3 1 1 Adjustment of 3 5 D E lt Mechanical adjustment FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 3 2 Adjustment of the folding position The folding position is adjusted by aligning the folding position to the stapling position This adjustment is made in the Tech Rep Mode of the main unit Since the adjustment is made in increments of 1 mm this adjustment is useful for eliminating a displacement of 1mm or more Forthe effective adjustment of a minimal displacement smaller than 1 mm refer to Board switch Adjustment range 7 to 7 mm Increment 1 mm 3 2 1 DF 601 equipped machine 1 Return to the basic screen 2 Select the functions as follows Orig Copy4in1 Booklet2Booklet5Bind 3 Setfive sheets of A3 or 11 x 17 original blank paper acceptable in the Original Tray These five sheets are used for adjustment to minimize variation Press the Start Key Set the mode to the Tech Rep Mode Touch Machine Adjust Touch Center Binding Position OA Tech Rep Mode Image Adjust Seite System Input Color Shift i ii E Coir chit Test Print LPH So ADF Check Gradation Adjust GgBt r Bindino dou
510. sition Folding Position Sensor Paper Paper not present present Crease Tray Saddle Tray Sensor Paper Paper not present present PI11 FN Crease Home Folding Home Position Sensor HP PI12 FN Crease Roller Folding Roller Home Position Sensor HP Home PI14 FN Crease Clock Staple Folding Motor Clock Sensor PI8 FN Paper Exit Tray Sensor Paper Paper not present present PI9 FN Paper Surface Exit Tray Home Position Sensor Paper surface detected PI15 FN Raised Position Shift Upper Limit Sensor Upper limit PI16 FN Lowered Position Shift Lower Limit Sensor Lower limit PI17 FN Clock Shift Motor Clock Sensor Middle Paper full PI18 FN Slide Home Slide Home Position Sensor HP PI19 FN Stapler Home Staple Drive Home Position Sensor HP PI20 FN Needle Staple Detecting Sensor Staples No staple loaded loaded Stapler Connect Stapler connection detected MS3 FN Stapler Safety SW Staple Safety Switch Rear Open MS4 FN Staple Safety Switch Front 121 Self Prime Self Priming Sensor READY PI22 FN Front Door Front Door Open Sensor Open PI23 FN Upper Door Upper Cover Open Sensor Open 3 85 D D TECH REP MODE bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Operation Characteris Symbol Panel Display Part Signal Name tics Panel Display 1 0 MS1 FN Center Front Door SW Front Door Open Sensor Open Staple Rey Remain Paper Fin horiz side isher
511. sition until a click is heard Close the Front Door Plug in the power cord Turn ON the Power Switch Select Tech Rep Mode Gra dation Adjust and carry out Grada tion Adjust 2 403616258301 2 27 Periodical check bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 1 5 25 Replacing the Fusing Unit NOTE Before replacing the Fusing Unit ensure that it has had time to cool down 1 Turn OFF the main switch and unplug the power cord from the power outlet then wait for about 20 minutes 2 Open the Right Door 3 Remove the Screw 1 and remove the Connector protective cover 2 4 Remove the Connector 3 o c 40361s2047c0 5 Remove the Exit Tray ws 2 40 6 Remove wire saddle and remove two Connectors 4 of Fusing unit 7 Remove two Screws 5 and remove 6 the Fusing unit 6 403616204900 2 28 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 2 Service tool 2 1 CE Tool list Tool name Shape Personnel Service tool Remarks Scanner Drive Cable Holding Jig 5 403815200100 LED Cleaning Jig N 4036f82002c0 LED Cleaning Jig Pad S gt 403815200300 LPH Assy Mounting Jigs 403815200400 Color chart 403618257700 Safety Switch Holding Jig S 4036fs2184c0 2 29
512. sor 4 loaded not oaded mounted PC205 Org Detect Original Size Detecting Sensor FD3 Original Originalno Sensor 5 loaded not oaded mounted PC206 Org Detect Original Size Detecting Sensor CD1 Original Originalno Sensor 6 loaded not oaded mounted PC206 Org Detect Original Size Detecting Sensor CD1 Original Originalno Sensor 7 loaded not oaded mounted PC207 Org Detect Original Size Detecting Sensor CD2 Original Originalno Sensor 8 loaded not oaded mounted 3 87 D zh lt TECH REP MODE bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 12 2 Table Functions To display the Vg Vb output values calculated for the image density of the test pattern amount of toner sticking produced on the Transfer Belt during an AIDC detection sequence Reference values C M Y Bk Vb around 400 V Vg around 550 V Used for troubleshooting of image problems Use Setting e f the value is high correct so that the image density becomes low Procedure e If the value is low correct so that the image density becomes high 4 12 3 Level History1 Functions To display ATDC T C ratio AIDC Regist Sensor output values and fusing tempera ture Use Used for troubleshooting of image problems Setting AIDC C M Y Bk Shows the T C output reading taken last Procedure AIDC1 AIDC2 Shows the latest AIDC data Temp Belt Shows the latest Heating Roller t
513. started moving from a position not the home position B Action Relevant electrical parts Slide Home Position Sensor PI18 FN Finisher Control Board PWB A FN Slide Motor M8 FN WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical compo nents Check the motor and sensor connectors 1 for proper connection and correct as necessary Check the connector of motor for proper 2 drive coupling and correct as neces sary 3 PI18 FN I O sensor check PWB A FN CN11 FN 3 F 2 4 M8 FN operation check when the Power 1 8 Switch is turned OFF and ON 5 PWB A FN replacement 6 o I 2 5 5 Hr gt E 5 5 gt Trouble code FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 2 3 4 C0B39 Front Aligning Plate Motor malfunctions A Detection timing Malfunction code Description The Front Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor PI4 FN is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Front Aligning Plate has started moving from its home position to a position out of the home position COB39 The Front Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor PI4 FN is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Front Aligning Plate has started moving from a position out of the home position to the home position B Action Relevant electrical parts Front Aligning Pl
514. stered 3 3 2 Mode Store Functions To register the copy mode functions being currently set as a job program or check or delete a job program that has previously been registered Use To save the copying settings the user wants To make copies using previously stored settings by calling up a job program pre viously stored Setting Procedure Up to ten different job programs can be registered 5 Copy Program Recall as a Utility function is used to call up a program E 34 Counter List Functions To check the count of each counter or print a list of counters Use To check the total number of copies made and the number of printed pages pro duced in color and B W thereby identifying machine usage Setting Procedure To print the list load Tray1 with A4 lengthwise or Letter lengthwise paper The machine rejects the print cycle if Tray1 is loaded with paper of any other size 3 5 Controller Detail Functions To set the external controller This function is not available if there is no external controller connected to the machine Use To change the setting of the external controller Setting Procedure For details see the manual for the external controller option bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 3 6 3 6 1 1 2 Utility Mode User s Choice 1 A Key Click Sound Functions To se
515. sult is NG Check and correct the skew of the document Manually correct the value of Position Correction 45823535 0 3 10 DF 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Mechanical adjustment 4 4 3 Auto adjust CD image scan start position A Adjustment procedure 1 Setthe mode to the Tech Rep Mode 2 Touch ADF Check 3 Touch Auto Adjust Stop Position 4 Touch CD ADF Check Auto Adjust Document Stop Position Position CD ESTO CT ae FD 2 Sided _ 4582153536 0 5 Place the chart furnished with the Document Feeder in the document feeding tray with the side having an arrow facing up 6 Press the Start key 45821350800 7 Check that Result is OK and then touch SET 7 lt Position CD Rest _ 8 Touch END 9 Touch Fin Time on the Tech Rep Mode screen If the Result is Check and correct the skew of the document Manually correct the value of Position Correction 45821 3537 0 Mechanical adjustment DF 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 4 4 Manual adjust FD 1 Sided 2 Sided document stop position adjustment Adjusted range 7 mm to 7 mm A Adjustment procedure 1 Setthe mode to the Tech Rep Mode 2 Touch ADF Check 3 Touch Original Stop Position
516. t Tech Rep Mode Counter Life and clear the count of Paper Powder Filter Ozone Filter 1 Open the Front Door 2 Clean the Comb Electrode by mov ing the Comb Electrode Cleaning Lever 1 In and Out several times NOTE Move the Comb Electrode Cleaning Lever slowly forward and backward until it stops bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Periodical check 1 5 20 Cleaning LPH Assy NOTE After the Imaging Unit has been removed from the main unit be sure to place it in the plastic bag black or wrap it in a light shielding cloth and store it in a dark place Do not leave the Imaging Unit exposed to light for a extended period of time as it may become damaged Open the Front Door Slide out the IU C M Y Bk 2 25 Remove the LED Cleaning Jig 1 and LED Cleaning Jig Pad 2 URNS 40365251261 4 Mffixa LED Cleaning Jig Pad 4 to the LED Cleaning Jig 3 2 40361251300 5 Clean the LED 5 of the LPH Assy by moving the LED Cleaning Jig 6 5 6 9 three reciprocating motions iac ae NOTE 5 zi Useonly the specified jig LED Cleaning Jig for cleaning 403616251400 1 5 21 Replacement of the Deodorant Filter 1 Holding onto the hook take out the Deodorant Filter 1 403616251500 2 21 Periodical check bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004
517. t Cover 2 Remove the Connector 3 two Board Supports 4 and remove the Tech Rep Setting Switches Board bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Other 4 3 22 Tray 2 Board 1 Remove the Tray 2 Rear Cover ws 2 41 2 Remove all the Connectors on the Tray 2 Board 3 Remove four Screws 1 and remove the Tray 2 Board 2 2 40361521480 4 3 23 2 Paper Size Board Slide out the Tray 2 Remove the Tray 2 Rear Cover 2 41 Remove three Screws 1 and remove the Tray 2 Board Fixing Bracket 2 4 Remove two Claws 3 and Connec tor 4 and remove the Tray 2 Paper Size Board Assy 5 2 57 o c Other 403616215100 4 3 24 Inverter Board 403616215200 4 3 25 Multi Bypass Unit 403616207801 403616207901 2 58 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 5 Remove the Lever 6 and remove the Tray 2 Paper Size Board 7 1 Remove the Scanner Assy 2 65 2 Remove four Screws 1 Flat Cable 2 and Connector 3 and remove the Inverter Board 4 1 Remove two Screws 1 and remove the Tray 2 Rear Right Cover 2 2 Remove three Connectors 3 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Other 3 Remove the Screw 4 and remove the Bypass Left Cover 5
518. t S Option ray2 Door Set Sensor PUSZ PUAZ PJSZ PUIZ Multi Width FS Moti VR PWB MFP Tray2 Vertical Transport Sensor GND MFP Control Board GND TCLK CLK SOut Sin RTS DC5V Desv GND GND FLM 1 4 02802 DIMMSO Standard Memory EE ESTIS S CF CARD1 Put 2 Tray2 Paper Take Up Sensor Memory Card CF KEKE EK EEK EEK ERE RE Tray2 Paper Empty Sensor PJO2MFP ABD PJ8Z KKKKKEKKKKKKKKKK Eero snore PJ7Z PJO1MFP r1 Tray2 Lift Up Sensor Imaging Unit Bk NC NC NC 1 DC24V FG FS 501 FS 601 N
519. taple Clincher the upper unit of the Stapler 1 Remove the Stapler 2 6 2 Remove the E Ring 1 and remove the Jam Release Dial 1 2 3 Remove the Jam Release Dial 2 3 4 Remove the three screws 4 and remove the Stapler Front Cover 5 2 5 Remove the Gear Cover 7 from the Staple Driver 6 6 Remove the E Ring 8 and remove the Side Cover 10 from the Staple Clincher 9 7 Remove two E Rings 11 and remove the Staple Jam Release Gear 12 the Timing Belt 13 and the Middle Gear 1 14 8 Remove the spacer and the spring located behind the Staple Jam Release Gear 9 Remove the screw 15 and the spring 16 and remove the Belt Ten sion Roller 17 o G c 2 Other 458316250700 458316250800 458316250900 24 458316251000 458316251100 2 8 FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 10 Remove the Timing Belt 18 11 Remove the E Ring 19 and remove the Staple Position Confirm Gear 20 12 Turn the Gear 21 to position the hole 22 in the Gear of the Staple Driver to the hole behind 13 Insert a pin of 2 23 alter natively 2 mm hexagonal wrench or the like can be preferably used into the hole and fix the Gear 14 Turn the Gear 24 to position the hole 25 in the Cam of the Staple Clincher to the hole behind 15 Insert a pin
520. tapling Unit nr nto irren denne 2 3 I Adjustment Setting 1 How to use the adjustment section sese 3 1 2 Gero 2 1 Check procedure mettre een tenor ne n rein 2 2 l O check list eremi reete nete ete een 2 2 1 VO check screen cernere eene rent e ee de e een 2 2 2 check list 3 Mechanical adjustment Il Maintenance D 2 IV Troublshooting V Appendix o 2 Adjustment Setting IV Troublshooting 5 o 2 2 lt gt FS 501 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 3 1 Adjustment of the solenoids sssssssseeeen nne 3 4 3 1 1 Adjustment of the Upper Lower Entrance Switching Solenoid SL1 FN 3 4 3 1 2 Adjustment of the 1st Tray Entrance Selecting Solenoid SL2 FN 3 4 3 2 Timing belt tension adjustment essssseseeeeennenrenen nn 3 4 3 2 1 Adjustment of the Upper Entrance Motor M4 FN Timing Belt 3 4 3 2 2 Adjustment of the Lower Entrance Motor M2 FN Timing Belt 3 4 3 2 3 Adjustment of the Exit Motor M3 FN Timing Belt 3 5 3 3 Adjustment of the Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor 4 Boartd switchi nnt teen t n rr n steer n dia 5 ite nt farre e nr HE P Pe Een 5 1 Test mode setting procedure
521. tch move the Aligning Plate out of its home position and turn ON the Power Switch Opera tion check of the CD aligning Motor M5 FN at this time PWB A FN replacement FS 501 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 2 3 3 Trouble code C0B48 Exit Roller Rolls Spacing Motor M13 FN drive malfunction A Detection timing Malfunction code Description The Exit Roller Home Position Sensor PC13 FN does not go HIGH even after the Exit Ro ler Rolls Spacing Motor M13 FN COB48 lapse of a given period of time after M13 FN has been energized to start spacing pressure sequence B Action Relevant electrical parts Exit Roller Home Position Sensor PC13 FN Control Board PWB A FN WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical compo nents Check the motor and sensor connectors 1 for proper connection and correct as necessary Check the connector of motor for proper 2 drive coupling and correct as neces sary 3 PC13 FN I O sensor check PWB A FN PJ19A FN 15 H 9 M13 FN operation check when the Power Switch is turned OFF and ON RHEE Eon NO EY 5 PWB A FN replacement 5 o I 2 5 5 Hr gt Trouble code FS 501 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 2 3 4 COB4A Storage Roller Rolls Spacing Motor M12 FN drive malfunction A Detection timing Malfunction code Description
522. te electric noise The installation site is environmentally appropriate high temperature high humidity direct sunlight ventilation etc levelness of the installation site The original has a problem that may cause a defective image The density is properly selected The Original Glass slit glass or related part is dirty Correct paper is being used for printing The units parts and supplies used for printing developer PC Drum etc are properly replenished and replaced when they reach the end of their useful service life 10 Toner is not running out B Precautions for Service Jobs 1 Be sure to unplug the power cord of the machine before starting the service job proce dures 2 If it is unavoidably necessary to service the machine with its power turned ON use utmost care not to be caught in the Scanner Cables or gears of the Exposure Unit 3 Special care should be used when handling the Fusing Unit which can be extremely hot 4 The Developing Unit has a strong magnetic field Keep watches and measuring instru ments away from it 5 Take care not to damage the PC Drum with a tool or similar device 6 Do not touch IC pins with bare hands D 7 lt 3 1 Tech Rep Test Mode DF 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 2 Tech Rep Test Mode The Tech Rep Test Modes are set from the Tech Rep Mode screen of the main unit 21 Tech Rep
523. tected at Tray4 take up or Vertical Transport Section The leading edge of the paper does not block the Tray4 Vertical Transport Sensor PC126 PF even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Tray4 Paper Feed Motor has been energized The Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor PC117 PF is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the paper has blocked the Tray4 Vertical Transport Sensor PC126 PF Paper left at Tray4 The Tray4 Vertical Transport Sensor PC126 PF is blocked when the Power Switch is turned ON a door or cover is opened and closed or a misfeed or mal function is reset The Tray4 Paper Take Up Sensor PC125 PF is blocked when the Power Switch is turned ON a door or cover is opened and closed or a misfeed or malfunction is reset Misfeed detected as a result of delayed deactiva tion of sensor The Tray4 Paper Take Up Sensor PC125 PF is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after it has been blocked by the paper B Action Relevant Electrical Parts Tray4 Paper Take Up Sensor PC125 PF Main Control Board PWB C2 PF Tray4 Vertical Transport Sensor PC126 PF Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor PC117 PF Tray4 Paper Feed Motor M123 PF WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control Signal Electrical Component 1 Initial check items 2 PC125 PF I O check Sensor check PWB C2 PF PJ10C2 PF
524. the END key on the panel 7 Ifthe result is NG check the influ encing sensor replace it if neces sary and then make readjustment 458216354100 7 lt 3 15 Mechanical adjustment DF 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Blank page o E E a 5 3 16 DF 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 IV Troubleshooting 1 Jam Display 1 1 Initial check items Jam Display When a paper misfeed occurs first perform the following initial check items Check item Action Does paper meet product specifications Replace paper Is the paper curled wavy or damp Replace paper Instruct the user on the correct paper storage procedures Is a foreign object present along the paper path or is the paper path deformed or worn Clean the paper path and replace if neces sary Are the Paper Separator Fingers dirty deformed or worn Clean or replace the defective Paper Separa tor Finger Are rolls rollers dirty deformed or worn Clean or replace the defective roll roller Are the Edge Guide and Trailing Edge Stop at the cor rect position to accommodate the paper Set as necessary Are the actuators operating correctly Correct or replace the defective actuator 1 2 Misfeed display When misfeed occurs message misfeed location Blinking and paper location
525. the Up Down key Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern 8 If width A is outside the specified range change the setting again and make a check again 9 If width A falls within the specified range touch END 10 Following the same procedure adjust for thickpaper OHP and envelopes QA WD NO 3 46 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 TECH REP MODE B Left Margin Functions To vary the print start position in the CD direction for each paper source Use The LPH Unit has been replaced A paper feed unit has been added The image on the copy deviates in the CD direction Adjustment Specification Width A Width A on the test pattern produced should 4 fall within the following range Specifications 3 0 0 5 mm Setting Range 3 0 mm to 3 0 mm in 0 2 mm increments 40361630100 Adjustment If width A is longer than the specifications make the setting value smaller than the cur Instructions rent one If width A is shorter than the specifications make the setting value greater than the cur rent one Adjustment 1 Touch Machine Adjust PRT Area Left Margin Procedure 2 Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern 3 Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern 4 f width A falls outside the specified range change the setting using the Up Down k
526. the defective Paper Separa tor Finger Are rolls rollers dirty deformed or worn Clean or replace the defective roll roller Are the Edge Guide and Trailing Edge Stop at the cor rect position to accommodate the paper Set as necessary Are the actuators operating correctly Correct or replace the defective actuator 1 2 Misfeed display When misfeed occurs message misfeed location Blinking and paper location Light ing are displayed on the Touch Panel of the main unit Misfeed location Misfeed access location Action Transport section Front Door 1 4 3 Horizontal Transport section Horizontal Transport Cover 2 3 Folding Position section Front Door ws 2 4 Stapler section Front Door ws 2 4 1 2 1 Misfeed display resetting procedure Open the corresponding door clear the sheet of paper misfeed and close the door o I 2 5 5 Hr gt E 5 3 HE z 1 3 Sensor layout Jam Display FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 458316452100 1 Turnover Empty Sensor PC6 HO 3 Folding Position Sensor 2 Entrance Sensor 4 Staple Drive Home Position Sensor 4 2 PI10 FN PI19 FN FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Jam Display 1 4 Solution 1 4 1 Transport section misfeed A Detection timing Type Description The Entrance Sensor PI1 FN does
527. the e mail transmission reception settings Server Set RD will not be displayed unless Controller 3 has been selected in Peripheral Setting 3 In TX RX Test check the e mail transmission reception settings Obtain the following information from the network administrator in advance P addresses of mail servers POP3 and SMTP Logon user name and password set for the controller Mail domain name POPS port number of the mail server ordinarily 110 SMTP port number of the mail server ordinarily 25 7 lt 2 2 Server Set RD settings To use PageScope Remote Care it is necessary to make the e mail reception settings and e mail transmission settings 2 2 1 E mail reception settings These settings may be the same as or different from the mail reception settings for Internet Fax Touch Server for RX Touch POP3 Server and type the IP address of the reception mail server Touch POPS login Name and type the logon user name Touch POPS password and type the logon password Touch POP3 port number and type the port number to be specified when connecting with the POP3 server Ordinarily type 110 3 1 Setting for PageScope Remote Care Standard Controller Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 6 Touch Receive 7 Touch E Mail Address and type the reception mail address The reception mail address is POP3 Login
528. the screw 1 3 2 Timing belt tension adjustment 3 2 1 Adjustment of the Upper Entrance Motor M4 FN Timing Belt 468418250400 1 Loosen two screws 1 2 2 Move the mounting bracket 2 and tighten the screw 1 so that the cen is M ter of the screw 1 on the upper right side is located at the marked position P 9 3 of the mounting bracket 2 3 2 2 Adjustment of the Lower Entrance Motor M2 FN Timing Belt o E o E a 5 1 Loosen two screws 1 2 A 2 Move the mounting bracket 2 and o when the belt deflects 2 mm at C o tighten two screws 1 QC 1 tC m 3 4 FS 501 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Mechanical adjustment 2 3 Adjustment of the Exit Motor M3 FN Timing Belt 1 Loosen three screws 1 2 Tighten three screws 1 so that the distance D between the upper end E D face of the head of screws 1 and the upper end face of the slot in the mounting bracket 2 measures about 0 5 mm 1 488415250700 3 3 Adjustment of the Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor odr 1 Et j O E 0 CO 2 D 2 7 E 7
529. thout notice 1 5 Product specifications bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Blank page 1 6 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Periodical check Maintenance 1 Periodical check 1 1 Service schedule Guarantee period 5 year or 800 000 prints Per cycle x print 10 000 print number 30 36 40 42 45 Upon each call 60 000 2 2 9 150 000 200 000 300 000 300 000 300 000 2 E 1 Replace with reference to the ADF Feed on the Counter Life 1 2 Maintenance items 1 2 1 Parts to be replaced by users CRU Parts to be replaced Cycle Clean Replace Descriptions Imaging Unit C M Y 50K e Imaging Unit Bk 80K e Comb electrode When TC is replaced Processing Toner cartridge TC sections TC Y TC M TC C 11 5K Toner cartridge TC TC K 11 5 Deodorant filter 11 5K Image Trans fer section LPH section LPH Assy When IU is replaced Waste Toner Bottle 30K 1 The TC K and Deodorant filter are the Kit parts Periodical check bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 1 2 2 Maintenance call per 60 000 print No Class Parts to be replaced Numberof Check Clean Replace Phe ee personnel tion tions 1 Paper take up and e Overall image conditions 2 A
530. tone Palterrn rrr 3 92 4 13 4 Lattice Pattetn erronee mp nne 3 92 4 13 5 Solid Pattern ei iaa dapas a Riaya nnne 3 93 Il Maintenance D 2 5 lt IV Troublshooting V Appendix bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 13 6 Color sample neenon etd inen a eX Ee a eoe ain 3 93 4 13 7 8 Color Solid aeia adirda 3 94 4 13 8 LPH Paternina aaa te es 3 94 414 ADR Check i ioa ense 3 95 4 14 1 Original Stop Position cnet ntes 3 95 414 2 Registration here Here rr eer 3 95 4 14 3 Auto Adjust Stop Position eesesseesseseeeeeenenneneenneene 3 95 4 14 4 Paper Passage etienne ree ran 3 95 4 14 5 MVO Check iiie eee teer aee tape tte cere xv Yd 3 95 4 14 6 Tray Width Adjust 4 14 7 Sensor Auto Adjust 3 96 o 4 15 Gradation Adjust 9 96 g 4 16 Miscellaneous Adjustments sese 3 97 5 4 16 1 Transfer Belt Refresh nnne nnne 3 97 5 4 16 2 Transfer Belt Cleaning Bias 3 98 4 16 3 Transfer Belt Auto Cleaning sse 3 98 4 16 4 AIDC Table Correction seessessssseeeeeenneeneenren rennen 3 98 5 3 99 E 5 1 Security Mode Function Setting
531. tric noise The installation site is environmentally appropriate high temperature high humidity direct sunlight ventilation etc levelness of the installation site The original has a problem that may cause a defective image The density is properly selected The Original Glass slit glass or related part is dirty Correct paper is being used for printing The units parts and supplies used for printing developer PC Drum etc are properly replenished and replaced when they reach the end of their useful service life 10 Toner is not running out Precautions for Service Jobs To unplug the power cord of the machine before starting the service job procedures If itis unavoidably necessary to service the machine with its power turned ON use utmost care not to be caught in the Scanner Cables or gears of the Exposure Unit 3 Special care should be used when handling the Fusing Unit which can be extremely hot 4 The Developing Unit has a strong magnetic field Keep watches and measuring instru ments away from it 5 Take care not to damage the PC Drum with a tool or similar device 6 Do touch IC pins with bare hands 0 7 lt 3 1 Adjustment item list bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 2 Adjustment item list Rep
532. try another rewriting sequence 3 If the procedure is still abnormally terminated change the board that has caused NG and carry out data rewriting procedure APP MFP Control Board PWB MFP Font MFP Control Board PWB MFP o 2 2 6 Standard Controller Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Checking the external interface operation Adjustment Setting 1 Checking the external interface operation mode setting Whenever the controller is mounted it is necessary to select Controller 3 in Peripheral Setting 1 Call the Tech Rep Mode to the screen 2 Touch System Input 3 Check that Controller 3 is selected in Peripheral Setting NOTE If the mode is changed be sure to turn OFF and ON the Power Switch The change of the setting becomes valid when the Power Switch is turned OFF and ON after the appropriate change has been made on the panel 2 Setting for PageScope Remote Care to make the following settings to use PageScope Remote Care After the set tings have been made establish a connection with the PageScope Remote Care Device Management Server 2 14 Setting procedures Follow these procedures to make the settings 1 Inthe Tech Rep mode accessed from the machine control panel check that e mail is selected in RD Mode 2 Select System Input Peripheral Setting Server Set RD from the Tech Rep mode and make
533. try of the authentica tion number Nullified state of the Administrator Code Turn OFF and ON the Power Switch Nullified state of the number other than the Administrator Code Turn OFF and ON the Power Switch or select Access Lock Release as set by the administrator Use To enable the unauthorized access lock function when an illegal access is attempted Setting Procedure The default setting is Disable Enable Disable 2 Access Lock Release Functions e To cancel the Unauthorized Access Lock state Use To cancel the unauthorized access lock state when Unauthorized Access Lock has been activated Setting Procedure Lock Job Cancel the access lock for locked jobs Volume Track E K C Cancel the access lock for Volume Track HDD Cancel the access lock for HDD 3 User Authentication Functions To select whether or not to use user authentication when the Scanner mode or Box mode is being used f user authentication is to be used the type of authentication is selected Active Directory or NTLM Use To use user authentication when the Scanner mode or Box mode is being used Setting Procedure The default setting is No No Active Directory NTLM If authentication was set to be performed with Active Directory or NTLM input the domain name 4 LDAP Search Functions To select whether or not to use the LDAP Search function LDAP Searc
534. two screws 4 4 Separate the section into the Tray Section 5 and the Paddle Section 6 FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 1 3 15 Exit Roller Upper 458310255100 2 458316255200 45831025530 458310255400 1 3 16 Paddle 458316255100 Other Remove the Paddle Section 2 12 Place the Paddle Section 1 as shown in the figure Turn the gear 2 in the direction indi cated by an arrow to move up the Exit Roller Upper section 3 Push up the Exit Roller Upper 4 from the bottom to release it from the shaft 5 2 Turn up the Exit Roller Upper 6 and then push it down to remove it Remove the front Exit Roller Upper 7 as well in the same way Remove the Paddle Section 2 12 Place the Paddle Section 1 as shown in the figure 2 13 Other FS 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 3 Turn the gear 2 in the direction indicted by an arrow to move up the Exit Roller Upper section 3 458316255500 4 Push up the Safety Guide 4 from the bottom to release it on one side from the shaft 5 458316255600 5 Push the Safety Guide 4 from the bottom to release it from the shaft 5 and remove it Il Maintenance 458316255700 6 Remove the Paddle 6 7 Remove the other Paddles as well in the same way 458316255800 1 3
535. ty T C 15 5 or more is detected ten consecutive times detected Magenta ATDC Sensor in the Developing Unit as validated through the toner replenishing amount determination control COF34 Abnormally low toner density T C 0 21 or less is detected ten consecutive times detected Yellow ATDC Sensor in the Developing Unit as validated through the toner replenishing amount determination control 5 Abnormally high toner density T C 15 5 6 or more is detected ten consecutive times detected Yellow ATDC Sensor in the Developing Unit as validated through the toner replenishing amount determination control COF36 Abnormally low toner density e T C 3 or less is detected ten consecutive times in detected Black ATDC Sensor the Developing Unit as validated through the toner replenishing amount determination control COF37 Abnormally high toner density T C 12 6 or more is detected ten consecutive times in detected Black ATDC Sensor the Developing Unit as validated through the toner replenishing amount determination control COF3A Cyan Sensor adjustment fail Sensor automatic adjustment does not function ure properly failing to adjust to an appropriate value COF3B Magenta Sensor adjustment failure COF3C Yellow ATDC Sensor adjustment failure COF3D Black ATDC Sensor adjustment failure C1200 Standard controller configuration e The controller of the MFP Control Board PWB MFP failure is faulty C120
536. ty deformed or Clean or replace the defective Paper Separa worn tor Finger Are rolls rollers dirty deformed or worn Clean or replace the defective roll roller Are the Edge Guide and Trailing Edge Stop at the cor rect position to accommodate the paper Selas necessary Are the actuators operating correctly Correct or replace the defective actuator 1 2 Misfeed display e When misfeed occurs message misfeed location Blinking and paper location Light ing are displayed on the Touch Panel of the main unit Misfeed location Misfeed access location Action Horizontal Transport section nds Transport section Front Door 4 3 1 Exit section Front Door gt 4 4 Elevator Tray Exit section Front Door ws 4 5 Paper Stack Exit section Front Door ws 4 5 Stapler section Front Door ws 4 6 Job Tray Exit section JS 601 Job Tray Upper Cover ws 4 4 1 2 1 Misfeed display resetting procedure o I 2 5 5 Hr gt Open the corresponding door clear the sheet of paper misfeed and close the door Jam Display FS 501 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 1 3 Sensor layout 46845450260 1 Job Tray Exit Sensor PC19 FN 6 Paper Sensor PC1 HO D 2 1st Tray Exit Sensor PC1 FN 7 Storage Sensor PC3 FN 3 3 Upper Entrance Sensor PC4 FN 8 Finisher Tray Paper Sensor PC5 FN 5 4 L
537. uas dnd 0 90 94 205095 uonensibau Jedeg MOIM 30 500 jaded yim 20095 MOO yo 4G EW jo0W1ix3 MO HO JQ 2W uodsuei MO M99 J00 HO dn ayey MO He 1 i aN30S 0113 pig xipueddy 5 34 KONICA MINOLTA SERVICE MANUAL FIELD SERVICE Standard Controller 2004 09 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC Ver 2 0 After publication of this service manual the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance Therefore the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required Revision mark To indicate clearly a section revised show to the left of the revised section A number within represents the number of times the revision has been made To indicate clearly a section revised show in the lower outside section of the correspond ing page A number within 4 represents the number of times the revision has been made NOTE Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted When a page revised in Ver 2 0 has been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 3 0 only are shown with those for Ver 2 0 deleted When page revi
538. uble sided THIN 3 65 4 6 10 Thick Paper Image 5 3 65 4 6 11 Monochrome Image Density 3 66 4 6 12 Bias Voltage Choice 3 66 47 Settings in KRDS RD Mode 3 67 4 8 System Input A B Marketing Area nano eee nd e e ERR E FERAE eR 3 69 4 8 2 Detect Option 2 3 69 4 83 Setial iore nre tenen sexe d e E DN eaa 3 69 AiG a a la e aa a a ka 3 69 4 8 5 5 re e X STRE A E E E 3 70 4 8 6 Book Erase Center nennen 3 70 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 8 7 Peripheral Setting ce creer nni brennen 3 70 4 8 8 Server set KRDS Server set RD sse 3 71 488 9 Unit Change erret rei cene e en diee ie n dese 3 73 4 8 10 R prtipit pm edente ne A erre 3 73 4 8 11 Hard Disk eter eene nennen eere E Ee eres 3 74 4 8 12 Display PM parts lifetime ssssseseeseeeeeeneneeens 3 74 4 813 ECT Paper Size ce cope e o PR dn 3 74 4 8 14 Chinese Paper Size sse nennen rennen nennen 3 74 4 815 US Zoom Setting eerte erre ee 3 74 4 9 Admin Password Initialize
539. uch Enter The default value is 00000000 3 Enter year month day hour and minute in that order from 10 key Pad 4 Make sure that correct figures have been entered and then touch NOTE When setting the month day hour or minute enter 0 first if the data one digit D 7 E lt 3 109 Date Time input mode bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Blank page o E E a 5 3 110 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Jam Display IV Troubleshooting 1 Jam Display 1 1 Misfeed Display When a paper misfeed occurs the misfeed message misfeed location and paper loca tion are displayed on the Touch Panel of the copier 11 4036fs4002c0 Display Misfeed Location misfeed processing location Action 1 1st Drawer take up 2nd Image Transfer Fusing Right Door 4 5 2 2nd Drawer take up Vertical Transport 2nd Drawer Right Door 4 6 Manual Bypass take up Manual Bypass Slide Board E 3 LCT take up Vertical Transport LCT Right Door 4 8 4 Duplex Unit transport Duplex Unit Right Door gt 4 11 8 5 Drawer take up Vertical Transport Paper Feed Unit Right Door 4 9 gt 6 4th Drawer take up Vertical Transport w 4 10 7 Exit Right Door 4 12 8 Horizontal transport Horizontal transport cover FS 501 FS 601 9 Finisher FS 601 Finisher
540. uch Panel of the main unit Misfeed location Misfeed access location Action Tray 3 Paper Take Up Section Right Door ww 4 3 Tray 4 Paper Take Up Section Right Door 4 4 1 2 1 Misfeed display resetting procedure Open the corresponding door clear the sheet of paper misfeed and close the door 4 1 o I 2 5 5 Hr gt Jam Display PC 101 PC 201 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 1 3 Sensor layout 434818460200 1 Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor PC117 PF 3 Tray4 Vertical Transport Sensor PC126 PF 2 Tray3 Paper Take Up Sensor PC116 PF 4 Tray4 Paper Take Up Sensor PC125 PF e Q 5 e gt 4 2 101 201 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Jam Display 14 Solution 1 4 1 Tray3 Paper Take Up section misfeed PC 101 PC 201 A Detection timing Type Description The leading edge of the paper does not block the Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor PC117 PF even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Tray3 Paper Feed Motor M122 PF is energized The Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor PC108 is not blocked even after the lapse p of a given period of time after the Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor PC117 PF has d
541. uence of the Transfer Belt s pressing motion C0098 Fusing Pressure Roller pressure No change is observed in the encoder sensor pulse retraction failure even after the lapse of 0 5 sec after the Fusing Pres sure Retraction Motor has started turning for a sequence of the Fusing Pressure Roller s retracting motion Nochange is observed in the encoder sensor pulse even after the lapse of 0 5 sec after the Fusing Pres sure Retraction Motor has started turning for a sequence of the Fusing Pressure Rollers pressing motion The Fusing Pressure Position Sensor is not activated pressed position even when 30 encoder sensor pulses are counted after the Fusing Pressure Retrac tion Motor has started turning for a sequence of the Fusing Pressure Roller s pressing motion o I 2 5 5 Hr gt E 5 5 gt Malfunction code bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Code Item Description C0200 Cyan PC Drum Charge Corona malfunction C0202 Magenta PC Drum Charge Corona malfunction C0204 Yellow PC Drum Charge Corona malfunction C0206 Black PC Drum Charge Corona malfunction An output is automatically produced from the PC Drum Charge Corona of each color when the malfunc tion resetting procedure is performed after C0208 PC Drum Charge Corona malfunction has been detected The SCD signal is detected for a conti
542. ume ae Min Volume Result 468215353060 4 Narrow the width across the edge guides 2 by sliding them to their minimum width o o E a 5 458216350600 5 Touch Min Width ADF Tray Volume amd 6 Press the Start key Confirm that i the Result is OK Max Volume E 7 Touch END 8 Touch Fin Time on the Tech Rep Mode screen If the Result is Possible causes includes failure of the document width detection volume wrong wiring to the volume and failure of the PWB CONT 458215353160 DF 601 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Mechanical adjustment 4 2 Adjustment of the document edge guide reference position Adjustment standard Displacement of the document edge should be within 4 1 mm to the FD scale A Adjustment procedure 1 Place the chart furnished with the Document Feeder in the document feeding tray 1 with the side having an arrow facing up 2 Set up the following functions Auto Paper 1 sided original 1 side copy 45821350800 3 Press the Start key Fold the copy in half 5 With reference to the crease check to see if the arrow is on the side of A Sb or B Specifications 2 mm from the cen ter e f the deviation falls outside the speci fied range use the following proce dure to make an adjustment 45
543. unction is turned ON it decreases the developing bias voltage thereby preventing voltage leak from occurring Use Use when patches of white occur in the image in an ambience of low atmospheric pressure such as in high altitudes Setting The default setting is OFF Procedure ON OFF 3 66 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 TECH REP MODE 4 7 Settings in KRDS RD Mode The remote diagnosis system displayed varies according to the setting made with Secu rity Mode Remote Diagnosis System Choice Make the settings necessary when a Data Terminal is mounted ts For details see Service Manual for Data Terminal A e mail Modem Functions Select the type of system used in the Remote Diagnosis System KRDS e mail RD Mode e mail Modem Use Use when the system is newly installed or the existing one is changed Setting Procedure Select e mail or Modem e mail Modem B ID Code Functions Toregister the Tech Rep ID code Use To register or change the Tech Rep ID code Setting Procedure Enter a 7 digit code from the 10 Key Pad 0000001 to 9999999 Registration Touch ID Code and enter the Tech Rep ID Press the ID key to register the ID D e The Detail Setting key will appear when the ID has been registered C DT Setting Functions To make the DT setting and perform the initial transmission 5 5 Use Use to ch
544. uneven image 8 Using the 10 Key Pad enter a value of the Rank value shown on the screen plus one k If Rank is 17 enter 2 k If 0 is set for Rank set 1 Do not use 0 9 Let the machine produce another test pattern and check for uneven image 10 Repeat steps 1 through 8 until the uneven image is gone 3 56 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 TECH REP MODE 4 4 10 LPH Chip Adjust Functions To correct chips of locations where FD white lines or black lines occur in the LPH Pat tern produced using Test Print Use White line or color line or black line occurs in the FD direction The LPH Assy has been replaced The LPH Unit has been replaced Adjustment 1 Call the Tech Rep Mode to the screen Procedure 2 Touch these keys in this order Test Print LPH Pattern 3 Select SINGLE HYPER Gradation and Border Line ON 4 Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern 5 Check the test pattern for the location at which white lines or color or black lines in FD occur 6 Touch these keys in this order Machine Adjust LPH Chip Adjust 7 Fold the test pattern in half with the pattern face on the outside 40361630230 8 The chip boundary line on the crease the center of the test pattern corresponds to 20 on the panel Starting here count out to each side of the paper to identify each location
545. upply shutter is opened if the Imaging Unit Lower Cover is not used 3 Remove the Image Transfer Belt Unit te 2 23 4 Remove the Rear Right Cover Rear Left Cover Rear Cover and Upper Rear Cover te 2 39 5 Remove 12 Screws 1 and remove the Protective Shield 2 2 4036120812 6 Remove four Screws 3 and remove the Harness Protective Cover 4 403616209600 7 Remove four Connectors 5 on the Control Board 40361208701 2 61 Il Maintenance Other 4036 s2089c2 403616252101 403616252201 2 62 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 8 Remove the Screw 6 and Connec tor 7 9 Remove the Connector 8 10 Turning the IU C M Y Bk drive hub 9 push it into the locked position at four places NOTES During the locking procedure use care not to touch the LED surface Should the LED surface be touched clean it with the LED Cleaning Jig 11 Remove four screws 10 and slide out the LPH Unit 11 NOTE When the LPH Unit is to be replaced remove the ATDC Sensor from the old LPH Unit and remount it on the new one This step is not however necessary if the IU is replaced at the same time te For replacement of Sensor see 2 92 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 3 28 Scanner Motor A Removal Procedure Rem
546. ustment 1 Call the Tech Rep Mode to the screen Procedure 2 Touch these keys in this order Machine Adjust Memory HardDisk Adjust gt Hard Disk Format Physical Format 1 Touch Physical Format 2 Press the Start key to start the formatting sequence 3 The sequence will be automatically terminated as it is completed 4 Turn OFF and ON the Power Switch Logical Format Only when initial is set up 1 Touch Logical Format 2 Press the Start key to start the formatting sequence 3 The sequence will be automatically terminated as it is completed 4 Turn OFF and ON the Power Switch k Formatting the hard disk will erase all data contained in it 3 60 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 TECH REP MODE 4 4 13 Bypass Guide Adjust Functions To set the maximum width and the minimum width for the Bypass Paper Size Unit of the Bypass Guide Use Use when the Bypass Paper Size Unit of the Bypass Guide has been changed Use when false paper size is displayed when the Bypass is used Adjustment 1 Call the Tech Rep Mode to the screen Procedure Touch these keys in this order Machine Adjust Bypass Guide Adjust Touch Max Width Load the Bypass Tray with paper having a width of 301 mm Press the Start key and check that the results are OK Touch Min Width Load the Bypass Tray with paper having a width of 89 mm Press the Start key and che
547. vailable from System Input under Tech Rep Mode B 2in1 41 Booklet Copy Zoom Functions To select when 2in1 4in1 or Booklet is selected whether or not to automati cally call up the zoom ratio optimum for the mode Use To allow the user to set the zoom ratio him herself when 2in1 4in1 or Booklet is selected Setting Procedure The default setting is Preset call up Preset No Preset C ACS Judgement Level Adjustment Functions To set the criterion level to discriminate between a colored original and a black and white original in the Auto Color ACS mode Use To change the criterion level with which an image containing partly colored areas is taken as a black and white original Setting Procedure Five levels are available to choose from and the default setting is 3 Near Black 1 2 3 4 5 Near Full Color bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Utility Mode D Intelligent Sorting Functions To select whether to enable or disable the function that automatically switches between Sort and Non Sort according to the number of originals and the number of copy sets to be made Use To select not to use the automatic sorting function when a document of two or more pages is loaded in the ADF Setting Procedure default setting is Yes Yes No E Criss Cross Functions To select whether to enable or disa
548. ver due to a wrong user account Check with the network administrator and enter the correct user name and password 2 5 5 gt Troubleshooting procedures Standard Controller Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Check Possible Cause Action Remark The reason why the file is not attached to the mail sent by the sender is probably because the sender uses PC mail soft ware to send the mail and The error report Not Attached File No files are attached fails to attached the file to the mail Ask the sender to attach the file Supported character The error report codes lt Out of Support AE UT US ASCII Character Code is on ae ISO 8859 Latin 1 ISO printed porion 8859 Latin 2 ISO 2022 JP E 2 5 gt p S m m KONICA MINOLTA SERVICE MANUAL FIELD SERVICE DF 601 2004 09 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC Ver 2 0 After publication of this service manual the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance Therefore the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required Revision mark To indicate clearly a sectio
549. witch Check the connectors of the MFP Control Board 2 for proper connection and correct as necessary 3 Change PWB MFP c I 2 5 5 Hr gt 4 41 Malfunction code bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 2 6 51 C1203 Memory mounting failure 2 6 52 C1204 Memory mounting failure Relevant Electrical Parts MFP Control Board PWB MFP Standard Memory DIMMSO WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control Signal Electrical Component Check to see if the standard memory DIMMSO 1 on the MFP Control Board PWB MFP is installed correctly 2 Change the standard memory DIMMSO on the a MFP Control Board PWB MFP 3 PWB MFP 2 6 53 C1220 Image Input Time Out Relevant Electrical Parts MFP Control Board PWB MFP Image Processing Board PWB C WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control Signal Electrical Component Select Tech Rep Mode Machine Adjust gt 1 Memory Hard Disk Adjust Memory Bus Check Check the connectors between PWB MFP and 2 PWB C for proper connection and correct as nec essary Change PWB MFP fo Change PWB C E 2 6 54 1229 Image Output Time Out 7 E 9 Relevant Electrical Parts E gt Control
550. x section of gear 2 11 434816252900 7 Remove three screws 12 and remove the Reinforcement Bracket Assy 13 434816253000 8 Remove two C clips 14 9 Remove four Pulley Covers 15 10 Unhook four pulleys 16 o c 2 Other 434816253300 434816253400 434818253600 2 10 PC 401 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 11 Remove the Ground Plate 17 12 Remove four Cable Holding Jigs 18 and remove the Main Drawer 19 NOTE Use care not to bend the wires 13 Remove four screws 20 and remove the Rear Trailing Edge Assy 21 14 Remove four screws 22 and remove the Front Trailing Edge Assy 23 15 Remove three C rings 24 the bush ing 25 and two gears 26 16 Remove the Take up Drum Assy 27 17 Remove two C rings 28 and the Take up Drum 29 NOTES Take care not to lose fixing pins When reinstalling the Take up Drum check that the direction of the wire coming from both Take up Drums are the same Install so that cut parts 30 at both ends of shaft face up PC 401 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 How to use the adjustment section Adjustment Setting 1 How to use the adjustment section Adjustment Setting contains detailed information on the adjustment items and proce dures for this machine e Throughout this Adjustment Setting the default
551. y Correct or replace the defective actuator 1 2 Misfeed display When misfeed occurs message misfeed location Blinking and paper location Light ing are displayed on the Touch Panel of the main unit Misfeed location Misfeed access location Action Duplex Unit transport section misfeed ur 4 3 Duplex Unit Door 1 2 1 Misfeed display resetting procedure Open the corresponding door clear the sheet of paper misfeed and close the door 4 1 o I 2 5 5 Hr gt Jam Display AD 501 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 1 3 Sensor layout 453518450200 1 Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 PI1 DU 3 Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 PC1 DU 2 Synchronizing Roller Sensor PC28 Q 5 e gt 4 2 AD 501 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Jam Display 1 4 Solution 1 4 1 Duplex Unit transport section misfeed A Detection timing Type Description The Synchronizing Roller Sensor PC28 is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Duplex Paper Take up sequence started The Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 PC1 DU is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 PI1 DU is Duplex Unit trans blocked by the paper ort misfeed The Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 PI1 DU is not unblocked even after the set detection per
552. y 4 Image Transfer Roller is dirty NO Change Image Transfer Roller or scratched Unit 5 AIDC Sensor Sensor is dirty YES Clean with blower brush Gradation Adjust Conv Value falls within the speci YES Go to step 10 Tech Rep fied range as checked through Gra 6 Mode dation Adjust Max 0 100 Highlight 0 60 Image Adjust The problem has been eliminated NO Go to next step PRT Max through the adjust of PRT Max 7 Density Tech Rep Mode Image Adjust The problem has been eliminated NO to next step gt Highlight through the adjust of PRT Highlight Tech Rep Mode Image Adjust After the Reset Stabilizer NO Go to next step Stabilizer sequence has been completed run 9 Reset Stabi Gradation Adjust if the problem 4 91 C 5 5 gt Image quality problem bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Step Section Check Item Result Action The problem has been eliminated NO Change Image Transfer Roller through the checks of steps up to 9 Unit Change Image Transfer Belt Unit 10 Change Control Board Change High Voltage Unit 2 Developing Bias Change High Voltage Unit 1 Image Transfer Neutralizing E 2 5 gt 4 92 bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 4 3 33 A Typical Faulty Images Image quality problem Printer 4 Color incor
553. y PU1 WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control Signal Electrical Component 1 Check the connector of motor for proper connection and correct as necessary 2 Check the connector of motor for proper drive cou EM pling and correct as necessary 3 Check the PU 1 connector for proper connection PU1 PJ5PU1 13 DC24 V 22 E and correct as necessary 4 M6 operation check 1 PWB MC PJ2MC 6 LOCK 13 0 PWB MC PJ2MC 3 REM 5 Change PU 1 er EE 2 6 8 C001B Color Developing Motor turning at abnormal timing 2 Relevant Electrical Parts 5 Color Developing Motor M6 DC Power Supply PU1 2 7 2 WIRING DIAGRAM 5 Step Action Location gt Control Signal Electrical Component 1 M6 operation check 0018 PWB MC PJ2MC 6 LOCK 13 0 PWB MC PJ2MC 3 REM 2 Change PWB MC EE 4 29 Malfunction code bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 2 6 9 C0040 Suction Fan Motor s failure to turn Relevant Electrical Parts Suction Fan Motor M12 Control Board PWB MC WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control Signal Electrical Component 1 Check the connector of motor for proper connection 2 Check the fan for possible overload and correct as u necessary 3 M12 operation check PWB MC PJ18MC 9 LOCK 6 PWB MC PJ18MC 7 REM 4 Change PWB MC 2 6 10 C0046 Fusing Cooling Fan Motor 1 s failure to tur
554. y temporarily Uninstall the printer Uninstalling the Printer driver incor driver through the 5 Driver in Operator s rectly installed proper steps and then Manual reinstall it properly Controller board Control Board oper Restart the controller Turn OFF and ON the ates erratically tempo board machine main switch rarily No Network cable is dis Reconnect the cable Check with the con connected or a relay device is faulty and restart or change the faulty relay device troller network LED IP address and or subnet mask incor rectly set Set the correct IP address and subnet mask See TCP IP Setting in Installation Guide 3 2 Standard Controller Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Unable to transmit data through Scan to FTP Troubleshooting procedures Check Possible Cause Action Remark The message Failed to connect to the destina tion appears gt The FTP server is not in Service Check with the network administrator IP address of the FTP server is wrong Check with the network administrator and enter he correct IP address Proxy setting is wrong Check with the network administrator and make he correct proxy setting Port number is wrong Check with the network administrator and enter he correct port number A directory not existing in the FTP server is specified Check with the network
555. y2 or Bypass Tray2 Vertical Transport Sensor PC2 is blocked when the Power Switch is turned ON a door or cover is opened and closed or a misfeed or malfunction is reset Paper left at Tray2 Tray2 Paper Take Up Sensor PC107 is blocked when the Power Switch is turned ON a door or cover is opened and closed or a misfeed or malfunction is reset Misfeed detected as a result of delayed deactiva tion of sensor The Tray2 Vertical Transport Sensor PC108 is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after it has been blocked by the paper B Action 2nd Drawer take up Vertical Transport Relevant Electrical Parts Tray2 Paper Take Up Sensor PC107 Tray2 Vertical Transport Sensor PC108 Synchronizing Roller Sensor PC28 Tray2 Paper Feed Motor M102 Tray2 Board PWB Z WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control Signal Electrical Component 1 Initial check items 2 PC107 I O check Sensor check PWB Z PJ6Z 8 ON 2 X 3 PC108 I O check Sensor check PWB Z PJ6Z 11 ON 2 Y 4 28 check Sensor check PWB MC PJ12MC 6 ON 2 R 5 M102 operation check PWB Z PJ5Z 1 4 2 V 6 Change PWB Z bizhub C350 Field Service Ver2 0 Sep 2004 Jam Display Manual Bypass take up Relevant Electrical Parts Tray2 Vertical Transport Sensor PC108 Tray2 Board PWB Z Bypass Paper Feed Clutch CL101

SERVICE MANUAL Includes: Standard

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents